File Synchronization, , Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Welcome to Peer Software!

Specializing in file and network management software.

Our products are designed to provide real-time and scheduled file synchronization, backup, replication and mirroring.

Save-N-Sync - For Desktop/Laptop/Workstation Data Protection

PeerSync - For Server & Workstation Data Protection

Product List View Product Comparison Matrix

Save-N-Sync v2.0 Note: Our product line has changed: ● Available in 4 different levels: ● File-N-Sync is now Save-N-Sync Standard

- Standard Edition ● File-N-Sync Plus is now Save-N-Sync Desktop - Desktop Edition - Workstation Edition ● Save-N-Sync is now Save-N-Sync Workstation - Corporate Edition ● New - now offering Save-N-Sync Corporate ● Real-time file and folder synchronization option ● Easy to use straight forward interface ● Home, small business and corporate users ● For desktops, laptops and workstations

● MS Windows 9x/Me/NT4/2000/XP

Notes: 1. Save-N-Sync evaluation software will not run on an MS Windows NT/2000 Server. 2. Terminal/Citrix Server version of Save-N-Sync Corporate is available by request. 3. For Save-N-Sync server operation, evaluation and pricing, please contact sales

PeerSync Pro II and PeerSync Pro III ● File and folder synchronization, backup and replication software ● Real-time, on demand and scheduled operations ● Comprehensive and flexible ● Small to medium businesses ● For servers and workstations ● MS Windows 9x/Me/NT4/2000/XP

PeerSync Pro IV (Server Edition) ● Enterprise backup, synchronization, replication and mirroring software ● Real-time, on demand and scheduled operations ● Comprehensive and flexible ● Medium to large businesses with many users at a site ● For servers and workstations ● MS Windows 9x/Me/NT4/2000/XP

Peer Scheduler Pro ● Application launching/scheduling software ● Individual or corporate users ● Small, medium and large businesses ● For desktops, laptops and workstations ● MS Windows 9x/Me/NT4/2000/XP

http://www.peersoftware.com/ (1 of 2) [25/04/02 11:11:21] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Product Licensing | Product Line-Up | Product Comparison Matrix | Y2K Compliance

We develop, market and sell innovative software for today's increasingly demanding file protection and sharing requirements. All product features are driven by customer suggestions and requirements for real-world network and file management solutions. Our products are currently designed to operate in MS Windows 9x/Me/NT4/2000/XP. For more information check out the following links:

● Continuous Desktop/Workstation Data Protection ● Local Area Backup Solutions (LABS) - White Paper ● Network Attached Storage (NAS) ● Laptop to Desktop - Desktop to Laptop ● Server Solutions ● Web Farm Solutions

Judges from CRN Publishing, awarded First Place honors to Peer Software at the annual LISA ceremony held on May 3, 2001. The event was sponsored by ListNet, KPMG, Computer Associates, eShare and Invision along with several other companies.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ (2 of 2) [25/04/02 11:11:21] Peer Software Inc. '); } //-->

http://www.peersoftware.com/intro.html [25/04/02 11:11:23] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

About Peer Software: Corporate Profile

Peer Software specializes in the development of data and network management and synchronization tools which allow organizations to seamlessly, securely, reliably and efficiently manage their digital and human assets. The Peer Software product line enables organizations to:

● synchronize files in real time, providing unparalleled data security and consistency ● efficiently manage and troubleshoot network (i.e., the ability to remotely re-boot desktops, etc.) ● provide centralized applications execution scheduling ● centrally manage various process, including enterprise-wide software upgrades, monitoring desktop activity, etc.

Peer Software Memberships and Affiliations:

LISTNet (Long Island Software and Technology Network)

LIA (Long Island Association)

U.S. Chamber of Commerce

Peer Software, Inc. (formerly TDM, Inc.), was founded by Paul Marsala in 1993 to offer a suite of utilities designed to centralize management of mission critical processes across the enterprise, promoting data consistency, insuring against data loss, as well as facilitating software distribution, desktop monitoring, knowledge transfer, and a host of activities designed to sustain seamless business communications and improve operating efficiencies.

Peer Software also provides consulting and software development services that help organizations use technology strategically and realize robust returns on their technology investments.

Peer Software products are available online, through value added resellers and implementation partners. The company is privately held.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/about.html [25/04/02 11:11:26] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Some of Peer Software's Customers

Just a few of their comments:

"As a provider of high-security web hosting services, we are constantly evaluating new products to offer our clients. When our clients needed file replication capabilities, PeerSync Pro came away as the clear winner on both price and features. Through the use of PeerSync our clients are able to replicate web content across multiple web servers, consolidate web logs from multiple hosts onto a single system, and create real-time hot of data at pre-determined intervals. The capabilities of PeerSync are quite extensive, and will meet even the most demanding real-time replication needs. Thanks, Peer Software!"

Regards, Douglas Toombs Principal Windows Architect ServerVault.com

"Hensel Phelps Construction Co. is a 64 year old company with offices throughout the United States. With annual revenues exceeding $1.5 Billion, it is critical that all offices have current and accurate data. PeerSync Pro II software allows us to transfer and replicate project development databases and files between the corporate office and regional offices during nonessential hours. Prior to having this software, we spent every Friday, calling each office to ensure that they were out of the database and files, before manually using windows explorer to do the transfers. The PeerSync Pro II software eliminates human error, and assures that precise transfers occur when information is modified."

Ray Cullen Director of Project Development Plains District & Corporate Hensel Phelps Construction Co.

"We use PeerSync Pro II to synchronize repositories on geographically dispersed servers. Now I can confidently say our repositories are no more than 5 minutes out of synch. Although our configuration management software contained a synchronization feature, it was inadequate for the task and quickly failed. Throughout our tests, PeerSync was the only tool that reliably performed synchronizations. The staff at PeerSync was also very helpful and pleasant to deal with."

Bob Thomas Business Systems Analyst CCC Information Services Inc.

"We have a small web farm consisting of 10 servers. We needed replication software to synchronize our web templates across the servers in real-time. It was also important for us to find software that could run as a service in the background. After testing many different systems, PeerSync was by far the most powerful and had all of the features that we needed. So far it has worked flawlessly and we will continue to use it as we add more servers to the farm."

Best Regards, Brad VintaCOM Media Group Inc.

"At MCI Telecommunications, we use PeerSync in a production environment to back up our files and load new software. The program quickly and easily does exactly what we want it to, and it works without http://www.peersoftware.com/profiles.html (1 of 3) [25/04/02 11:11:28] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

fail. PeerSync has been rock-solid for us and essential to the proper operation of our system."

"At Acxiom, we have over 30 servers that share data. PeerSync has done an excellent job at keeping us up-to-date and we haven't had to touch the program since it was installed. Also, the reporting features are really helpful. Because of its high quality and reasonable cost, we're even looking to roll PeerSync out on a workstation level."

"PeerSync is the only program that comes close to meeting my needs for unattended backups of large hard disks to a server. I searched everywhere for a solution, including retail, and PeerSync is the best."

"The latest version of PeerSync is great and performs all the tasks we have been unable to find in other applications."

"PeerSync is quite powerful and yet easy to use. Best of all is the ability to write a simple batch script to reduce my backup chore to clicking on a single icon."

"This product is wonderful for my situation. I'm synchronizing my Novell server volume to a big hard disk on one of the NT workstations, which serves as a backup server should the Novell crash (which it does). This software is perfect."

"I am currently testing your product and I only have one word: AWESOME! And so much cheaper than your competition. Could you please give me your pricing information? Thank you very much!"

Here is what they think:

Download Site Website Address Product Rating

Tucows www.tucows.com

The File Transit www.filetransit.com

Some of our customers:

● 18th Airborne ● IKON Office Solutions ● 82nd Airborne ● Institut Straumann AG ● Abalos & Assoc., PC ● ISI Corporation ● Acxiom Corporation ● Jel Producions ● Advantage Sales & Market ● Kenneth Cole ● Alabama Department of Public Safety ● LifeAccess.com Inc ● Allen-Bradley Corporation ● McGraw-Hill Companie ● Allied Plastics Corporation ● MCI Telecommunications ● American Hospital Association ● MedCare Service ● Arizon State University ● Merrill Lynch ● Asea Brown Boveri Corporation ● Micron PC for Dept. of Veterans Affairs ● Associate Press ● Microsoft ● AT&T Wireless Services ● Microsoft Corporation ● AWI State Fl ● MiddleSouth Finanacial Group ● B/E Aerospace ● MUSICMATCH, Inc. ● Baan Process Solutions ● NASA/GSFC ● Babcock-BSH GmbH ● Nature's Sunshine Products ● Bell Canada (Advantage Teleconferencing) ● net2phone http://www.peersoftware.com/profiles.html (2 of 3) [25/04/02 11:11:28] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

● Bluestreak ● networkMCI Conferencing ● Bureau of National Affairs ● Nextel Partners ● BUYSEASONS ● Olympus America Inc. ● Cape Fear Farm Credit ● Ontario Financial Aurority ● CCC Information Services Inc. ● Otasaga Hotel ● Circle.com ● Probisia ● Cleveland Medical Device ● ProfitLine ● Cloister Spring Water ● PWGSC-RPS-IMD ● Columbia University ● Qwest Communiations ● Comdisco ● Rastec System Aps ● Comstock ● Rautaruukki Information Engineering ● Cummings and Duda ● Roche Diagnostics Corp. ● Cytological Laboratory ● Rockwell International ● Daewoo Cars Ltd. ● RSA Communications ● Dart Controls ● Sandia National Laboratory ● Denver Health ● SC Steel Corporation ● Digitalowl.com ● Seagate technology ● Dominion Securities ● ServerVault.com ● eLogic Corporation ● Shareware-Australia ● Emory University ● Sogyo Information Engineering ● Ernst & Young ● STOCKSTOP.COM ● Etronics ● The Johns Hopkins University ● Euriware ● Top Echelon ● Exit.ca ● Toshiba America Medical ● Fannie Mae ● UCT International - Clinical Trial Labs ● First County Bank ● UK Fantastic Ltd ● First Generic Trust ● United Nations ● First Union National Bank ● United States Postal Service ● Flight Safety ● Universal Music ● FreeFoto.com ● University of Missouri at St. Louis ● Georgia Tech University ● US Courts ● GlaxoSmithKline ● US Department of Justice ● gm engineering ● USDA ● Griffith City Council ● VA Medical Center ● HHensel Phelps Construction Co ● Valley News Dispatch ● Hercules Tire & Rubber ● VintaCOM Media Group Inc. ● Hewlett Packard ● Wi Supreme Court ● World Investor Link ● YesAsia.com

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/profiles.html (3 of 3) [25/04/02 11:11:28] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Peer Software Solutions

Save-N-Sync Provides a full range of real-time file synchronization solutions for home and small business users. This is a very simple, straight-forward and easy way of backing up, synchronizing, replicating, mirroring and/or cleaning up important data files and folders on the local machine or to a remote site in real-time.

PeerSync Pro II and PeerSync Pro III Provides a full range of file synchronization solutions for small to medium businesses with multiple workstations and/or servers. New version provides simplified, wizard-driven setup routines, a wide range of easy-to-implement predefined synchronization, replication and backup scenarios. Extremely flexible and complete file synchronization solution.

PeerSync now works with OFH (Open File Handler) from SWAT Consulting, Inc. With OFH installed, PeerSync can be used to synchronize opened and locked database files and other read-access blocked files under Windows NT. Get your copy of OFH directly from the manufacturer, SWAT Consulting, Inc.

PeerSync Pro IV (Server Edition) Provides a full range of file synchronization solutions for medium to large businesses with many users at a site. New Version provides simplified, wizard-driven setup routines, a wide range of easy-to- implement predefined synchronization, replication and backup scenarios. Extremely flexible and complete file synchronization solution.

Peer Scheduler Pro Individual or corporate user who needs to launch one or more aplications on a scheduled or interval basis For scheduling and management of application execution. Offers ability to set up multiple schedules at various date and time intervals for any application or batch file. Peer Scheduler Pro can be used to run PeerSync Pro II.

Product Licensing | Product Line-Up | Product Comparison Matrix | Y2K Compliance

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/insync.html [25/04/02 11:11:30] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Peer Support

Peer Support - | - Frequently Asked Questions - | - Scenarios - | - Product Information - | - Contact Us

All technical support and pre-sale information for our products are presently handled via email. If neccassary, you may call our tech support or pre-sales teams between the hours of 9am and 5pm Eastern Standard Time, Monday - Friday, except for major US holidays.

● Frequently Asked Questions

● Scenarios, Hints and Tips

● Company and Product Information

● Technical Documents and Downloads

● Send Us Comments/Suggestions/Questions

Please note that in order to keep our product costs low we request the following that before sending us or calling us with support questions please utilize our online support features and documentation shipped with our products.

Send any information regarding support to:

Peer Software - Tech Support 1363-26 Veterans Highway Hauppauge, NY 11788-3046 Email: [email protected] Phone: 1-631-979-1770 Fax: 1-631-979-1870

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/support.html [25/04/02 11:11:31] Peer Software: File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring, Replication and more.

Announcements

Peer Software's latest news and product information:

● January 28, 2002 PeerSync v6.0 Updated to v6.0.6. Registered users of v6.0 can download the update for no charge. Download Now!

● January 22, 2002 Peer Software is proud to announce the release of Save-N-Sync v2.0. Download Now!

❍ Available in 4 levels: Standard, Desktop, Workstation and Corporate Edition ❍ Workstation Edition supports up to 3 source-target folders selections ❍ Corporate Edition supports up to 5 source-target folders selections ❍ Real-time file and folder synchronization option ❍ Easy to use straight forward interface ❍ Home, small business and corporate users

Save-N-Sync Standard Edition replaces File-N-Sync and Save-N-Sync Desktop Edition replaces File-N-Sync Plus

● October 18, 2001 File-N-Sync and File-N-Sync Plus v1.0.1 Updated to v1.0.2. Registered users of v1.0 can download the update for no charge. Download Now!

● September 25, 2001 Peer Software is proud to announce the release of Save-N-Sync. Download Now! Save-N-Sync v1.0 offers all of the simple and easy to use features of our File-N-Sync Plus product with the addition of real-time monitoring capabilities.

● August 13, 2001 To meet increasing global demand for the company's family of flexible file backup and synchronization solutions, Peer Software has been aggressively establishing a network of overseas channel partners. Today, Peer Software announces that it has partnered with leading software distributor G + J Computer Channel to make its backup and synchronization solutions readily available to organizations based in Germany.

● August 6, 2001 Peer Software announces that it will list its File-N-Sync title on the new SoftwareToGo, burn-to-order CD system from Protocall Technologies Inc. The SoftwareToGo system will provide Peer with a new channel for its File-N-Sync software.

● August 3, 2001 Peer Software announces the release of PeerSync v6.0. Version 6.0 offers many new features and comes in the following editions: ❍ PeerSync Pro II ❍ PeerSync Pro III ❍ PeerSync Pro IV (Server Edition)

● July 5, 2001 PeerSync v5.0 Updated to v5.1. Registered users of v5.0 can download the update for no charge.

● June 15, 2001 PeerSync v5.0 Updated to v5.0.15. Registered users of v5.0 can download the update for no charge. http://www.peersoftware.com/news.html (1 of 3) [25/04/02 11:11:36] Peer Software: File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring, Replication and more.

● May 14, 2001 PeerSync Professional Series Software is now supported by OFH (Open File Handler) from SWAT Consulting, Inc.. The OFH product extends PeerSyncs capability to include opened and locked files in its synchronization and backup process under Windows NT.

● May 3, 2001 PeerSync Pro II v5.0 awarded First Place at the annual LISA ceremony. The LISA (Long Island Software Awards) is hosted annually by LISTnet. The LISA awards recognize excellence and innovation among Long Island software companies.

● April 24, 2001 PeerSync v5.0 Updated to v5.0.12. Registered users of v5.0 can download the update for no charge.

● April 24, 2001 File-N-Sync and File-N-Sync Plus v1.0 Updated to v1.0.1. Registered users of v1.0 can download the update for no charge.

● March 5, 2001 PeerSync v5.0 Updated to v5.0.11. Registered users of v5.0 can download the update for no charge.

● February 6, 2001 PeerSync v5.0 Updated to v5.0.10. Registered users of v5.0 can download the update for no charge.

● January 25, 2001 Official release of File-N-Sync v1.0

● December 29, 2000 PeerSync v5.0 Updated to v5.0.9. Registered users of v5.0 can download the update for no charge.

● December 4, 2000 PeerSync v5.0 Updated to v5.0.8. Registered users of v5.0 can download the update for no charge.

● August 1, 2000 Peer Software Announces PeerSync "Plus" Package, Providing Added Functionality to Industry's Most Robust and Flexible File Synchronization and Backup Solution

● June 15, 2000 Peer Software Inc. announces participation in FedCenter: Business-to-Government web site. FedCenter Home Page

● May 8, 2000 PeerSync v5.0 Updated to v5.0.2. Registered users of v5.0 can download the update for no charge.

● May 8, 2000 Peer Software announces new PeerSync Plus Package to be released in June 2000. Plus Package will offer extended features to the Basic and Pro II versions of PeerSync v5.0 and will include: ❍ File synchronization using FTP ❍ Enhanced Real-Time file synchronization (Pro II Only) ❍ Network load balancing ❍ File recovery ❍ CheckSum file validation (using CRC32) http://www.peersoftware.com/news.html (2 of 3) [25/04/02 11:11:36] Peer Software: File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring, Replication and more.

● May 4, 2000 Peer Software ranked in Top-Ten Fastest Growing Software Companies on Long Island by KPMG.

● April 7, 2000 PeerSync v5.0 named a finalist in the LISA Awards. The LISA (Long Island Software Awards) is hosted annually by LISTnet. The LISA awards recognize excellence and innovation among Long Island software companies.

● March 27, 2000 Peer Software's New PeerSync II v.5.0 Introduces Innovative "QuickSync" Technology, Providing Easy, Efficient File Synchronization and Backup

● November 29, 1999 Peer Software's New PeerLink Viewer(tm) Provides Remote and Simultaneous " Anytime, Anywhere" Monitoring of Multiple Desktops

● October 27, 1999 Peer Software Provides Enterprise-Wide Collaboration Through "Intelligent Data Sharing"

● September 27, 1999 Peer Software Announces InSync Solution Series: Software Suite Promotes Efficient Management and Synchronization of Digital Assets

In the News

● June 5, 2000 PeerSync-DOJ Case Study Released: Government Computer News article, Justice likes its mirror images", discusses how the U.S. Department of Justice implemented PeerSync Pro II to mirror client data from local PCs to servers in real-time.

● May 22, 2000 PeerSync Review: Federal Computer Week's Earl Greer reviews PeerSync Pro II v5.0.

● May 4, 2000 Peer Software ranked in Top-Ten Fastest Growing Software Companies on Long Island by KPMG

● April 7, 2000 PeerSync Pro II v5.0 named a finalist in the LISA Awards.

● September 8, 1999 Long Island Business News: Peer Software gets in sync with business.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/news.html (3 of 3) [25/04/02 11:11:36] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Contact Us

Peer Support - | - Frequently Asked Questions - | - Scenarios - | - Product Information - | - Contact Us

Please note that in order to keep our product costs low we request the following that before sending us or calling us with support questions please first utilize our online support features above and our documentation shipped with out with each product.

Request for Additional Information

Company: Name: Phone #: FAX #: Email: Address: Line 2: City: State: Zip:

Comments, Suggestions and Questions:

PEER SOFTWARE, INC. 1363-26 Veterans Highway, Hauppauge, NY 11788-3046 Sales: 1-631-979-1770 | Fax: 1-631-979-1870 [email protected] | [email protected]

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/contact.html [25/04/02 11:11:38] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Software Download

To download software for a FREE Evaluation you must complete the following form.

Existing users: Click here to download the latest updates

Please indicate which products you wish to evaluate/download: PeerSync Pro III Description

Save-N-Sync (All Levels) Description

Peer Scheduler Pro Description

A separate email will be generated with an evaluation code and a download link for each product.

Name: * Company: Address: * Line 2: City: * State/Province: *

Zip/Postal Code: * Country: Email Address: * Telephone #: FAX #:

Primary requirement? Platforms used? Type of user? Heard about us via? Other information?

Note: Required fields are marked with a * and you must enter a valid email address so a software activation code and a download link can be emailed to you.

Please notify me, via email, of product updates and new releases.

http://www.peersoftware.com/download.html (1 of 2) [25/04/02 11:11:40] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Registered users can download the latest releases from the following links:

PeerSync v6.0 - PeerSync v5.x - PeerSync v4.3

File-N-Sync v1.0 - File-N-Sync Plus v1.0 - Save-N-Sync v1.0

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/download.html (2 of 2) [25/04/02 11:11:40] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Software Purchase/Registration

To purchase/register our software, you have several options:

● Fill out and submit the form below (fastest method) ● Fill out, print the form below, including billing info and FAX it to 631-979-1870 ● Give us a call at 631-979-1770 between 9AM and 5PM (EST)

After your order is confirmed we will e-mail or FAX you a registration code to unlock the evaluation software and enable it as a fully functional version. If you have not already done so, please download a copy of the evaluation software.

The following prices are for a single User License. Additional Remote Connection Licenses for PeerSync products may be purchased for an additional cost per connection.

Quantity Product Description Price Save-N-Sync v2.0

Save-N-Sync Standard $29.00

Save-N-Sync Desktop $59.00

Save-N-Sync Workstation $89.00

Save-N-Sync Corporate (5 User License) $449.00

Save-N-Sync Corporate (25 User License) $1,849.00

Save-N-Sync Corporate (100 User License) $6,399.00

PeerSync Professional Series v6.0 PeerSync Pro II (includes two remote connection licenses) $299.00 Desktop Edition

Additional Remote Connection Licenses (per copy) $75.00

PeerSync Pro III (includes two remote connection licenses) $499.00 Workstation/Server Edition

Additional Remote Connection Licenses (per copy) $75.00

PeerSync Pro IV (includes three remote connection licenses) $899.00 Server/Workstation Edition

Additional Remote Connection Licenses (per copy) $125.00

http://www.peersoftware.com/registration.html (1 of 2) [25/04/02 11:11:44] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Peer Scheduler Pro v2.0

Peer Scheduler Pro $24.95

Notes: ● Save-N-Sync evaluation software will not run on an MS Windows NT/2000 Server. ● Terminal/Citrix Server versions of Save-N-Sync Corporate are available by request. ● PeerSync Pro II and PeerSync Pro III include two remote connections. ● PeerSync Pro IV includes three remote connections. ● Quantity, Academic and Government discounts are available upon request ● Maintenance and Upgrade policies and pricing are available upon request ● For more information or quantity pricing, please contact us .

Please notify me, via email, of product updates and new releases.

On-line Credit Card purchases for all of our products are handled by Plug and Pay Technologies' Real Time Secure Payment System. All information requests are over a state-of-the-art secure connection so all transactions are completely secure.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/registration.html (2 of 2) [25/04/02 11:11:44] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Save-N-Sync v2.0

This product was designed for fast, flexible and easy backup, synchronization, replication, mirroring and restoration of important document files on all storage media across any size network.

Save-N-Sync Version 2.0 Feature Listing

● Easy to use Interface for simple creation and Save-N-Sync maintenance of tasks. Standard ● Files/Folders can be included or excluded via extensive filtering capabilities. ● File dates and times are checked and only synchronized if target files are actually older than the matching source file, reducing file transfer requirements. ● UNC file path names supported (Network folder selection dialog). ● Allows for multiple configurations and command line operation. ● Detailed file/folder synchronization activity and problem reporting with option to overwrite reports and control maximum size of reports. ● File attribute transfer from source to target during synchronization operations. ● International date format support. ● MS Windows 9x/Me/NT4/2000/XP.

Save-N-Sync

Desktop ● Includes all features from Save-N-Sync Standard. ● Action selection - Bi-directional Sync ● Action selection - Replicate Source to Target ● Action selection - Replicate with Exact Match ● Action selection - Delete Matching Target Files ● Action selection - Delete Filtered Files ● Action selection - Delete Empty Folders ● Synchronization scheduler to execute actions on a repetitive basis. ● Ability to check for Unicode files and folders.

http://www.peersoftware.com/save-n-sync.html (1 of 3) [25/04/02 11:11:48] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc Save-N-Sync Workstation ● Includes all features from Save-N-Sync Standard. ● Includes all features from Save-N-Sync Desktop. ● Includes 3 Remote Connection Licenses.

● Includes multiple source-target folder selection list. ● Includes source-target folder description selection. ● Allows up to 3 source-target folder selections. ● Real-time file change detection and synchronization. ● Allows for different configurations to be saved and loaded.

Save-N-Sync ● Includes all features from Save-N-Sync Standard. ● Includes all features from Save-N-Sync Desktop. Corporate ● Includes 5 User Licenses. ● Includes 5 Remote Connection Licenses.

● Includes multiple source-target folder selection list. ● Includes source-target folder description selection. ● Allows up to 5 source-target folder selections. ● Real-time file change detection and synchronization. ● Allows for different configurations to be saved and loaded. ● Variable source-target path name to customize target selection such as using the logged in users name as part of the target path: S:\Users\%USERNAME%\My Documents converts to: S:\Users\Steve\My Documents where "Steve" represents the currently logged in user.

Save-N-Sync User Interface

http://www.peersoftware.com/save-n-sync.html (2 of 3) [25/04/02 11:11:48] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

GUI designed for maximum ease of use!

Note: Save-N-Sync products are not designed to operate on Windows Servers. Please see our PeerSync software for server synchronization.

Note: For Save-N-Sync product support questions, first refer to the on-line help supplied with the software. Peer Software only offers email technical support for this product.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/save-n-sync.html (3 of 3) [25/04/02 11:11:48] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

PeerSync v6.0

Products designed for robust and flexible data file and folder backup and management. You can use PeerSync products to backup, synchronize, replicate, mirror, restore and manage files and folders to and from any storage media, across any size network.

New version offers customer-driven enhancements that expand options for fast, flexible and easy synchronization and backup of files on all storage media across any size network.

These synchronization tools have easy to use, simple interfaces yet with extensive options. PeerSync products were built with small, medium and large business users needs and wants in mind. These products are primarily intended for backup and management of data, between laptops, desktops, workstations and servers in all network environments.

PeerSync Version 6.0 Feature Listing

● Includes 2 Remote Connection Licenses. PeerSync Pro II ● Profiler interface application for simple Profile creation and maintenance. ● PeerSync Wizard application for quick “canned” backup and replication scenario selection. ● MS Explorer menu item added for “Quick-Sync Folder” selection directly from MS Windows Explorer. ● Profiler (GUI) runs independently of PeerSync (engine). ● Revisioning option adds ability to keep virtually unlimited backed-up copies of target files helping to ensure multi-level file recovery. ● Profiler filter listing displays “Last Run On” date for each filter and allows for Quick-Sync of specific filters without having to check/uncheck filters each time.Floating or pop-up windows are available for quick viewing of important filter information.

● Files/Folders can be updated or added, included or excluded via extensive filtering capabilities. ● File dates and times are checked and only synchronized if target files are actually older than the matching source file, reducing file transfer requirements. ● UNC file path names supported (Network folder selection dialog). ● File compression/expansion for improved backup storage space utilization. Password protection available on compressed folders. ● Over 200 source/target filter sets can be created and stored in Profile files that can be run manually or automatically from command line arguments. Each filter can have a unique set of options allowing for very precise folder matching in an automated environment. ● Optional administrative password to gain access to PeerSync operations when running on the system tray bar. ● Allows for multiple configurations and command line operation. ● Delete unmatched target files option for complete replication capability. ● Ability to create a preliminary (Pre-Sync) report prior to actual synchronization. ● Detailed file/folder synchronization activity and problem reporting with option to overwrite reports and control maximum size of reports. Reports are backed-up when they exceed max limit selection.

http://www.peersoftware.com/peersync.html (1 of 6) [25/04/02 11:11:54] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

● Progress indicators in Profiler application display activity for current PeerSync operation. ● NT file security descriptions (ACLs) are optionally transferred to target file after successful file copy. ● Completion status reporting for manual operations initiated from Profiler. ● File attribute transfer from source to target during synchronization operations. ● International date format support. ● Variable path/folder naming conventions are supported allowing for Profile and command line arguments to be used by multiple users. Some of the supported values are: %USERNAME%, %COMPUTERNAME%, various date and time variables such as %DATE%, %DATETIME%, %MMYY%, etc. ● Profiles can be automatically added to Desktop or Start-Up folder from Profiler application or from the PS Wizard application. Additionally Profiles can be set to run at boot directly from within the Windows registry. ● Real-time folder monitoring on the host PC. This option allows for full file fault tolerance, i.e.: files are backed-up when changes occur so if failure of monitored folder occurs, virtually no data loss will be experienced. ● Retry open files option for real-time operations. If source or target file is lock by another operation or application, PeerSync can be set to retry the synchronization of the file until it is no longer locked, or for a specific number of tries. Interval of retry can also be set. ● Synchronization scheduler function to execute active profile on a repetitive basis. Can also be set to monitor for local keyboard activity and suspend schedule if no one is currently working at the workstation. ● Archive option to restore all target files to original date and time. Use to restore unauthorized file changes or use to reset files in a training environment. ● Reset file archive attributes to allow for improved updates for subsequent operations. Allows PeerSync to behave like older backup utilities (Requires archive attribute option in Exceptions screen.) ● Additional administrative reporting capability for network environments with multiple users reporting to a common PC for administrative purposes. ● Ability to launch applications/scripts or batch files before and after each filter. ● Option to delete source file after successful synchronization operation. ● Option to set the read-write buffer size allowing for better optimization of network bandwidth. Busier networks work better with smaller buffers. Less traffic and or faster networks benefit from larger buffers by moving data faster reducing transfer delays. ● Global and Folder trigger support. PeerSync Pro II provides the ability to initiate a synchronization process based on a single file update. ● PeerSync can be automatically set up as an NT service directly from our Profiler application. ● Multiple event-driven options for detection of file/folder changes can now be set. Each method offers different advantages that may enhance operations in specific environments. ● MS Windows 9x/Me/NT4/2000/XP.

New Features ● Folder Selection Source and Target folder Popup menu with Network Logon Settings feature. ● Reporting option to Include Transfer time feature. ● Reporting option to clear the log file from the reporting screen. ● Reporting option to display the Log file variable path. ● Admin Reporting option to report on errors only. ● New File Options, Performance, Alterations and Additional Features Screens. ● Ability to Include/exclude Unicode/Mac/Asian files in your synchronization. ● Ability to Include/exclude empty source folders when coping to target feature. ● Delete Exceptions from target folder feature. ● Deletion Option to move unmatched target files while preserving paths. ● Compression option to synchronize by folder or by file. ● Compression option for normal compression, maximum compression or maximum speed selection. ● Operation Mode screen Pre-Sync Report Options. ● Display option to turn on/off Profile Status in the Profiler. http://www.peersoftware.com/peersync.html (2 of 6) [25/04/02 11:11:54] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

● Performance option to select Application Priority. ● Current Argument Display and Selection.

● Includes all features from PeerSync Pro II PeerSync Pro III ● Includes 2 Remote Connection Licenses.

● Bi-directional synchronization feature with Smart- Delete. Files on target that are newer than their corresponding source files will be automatically brought back to the source folders. Any file that has a creation date newer that the last time the filter was run will be added to the source folders even if Delete-Unmatched target file option is selected. ● FTP site file synchronization option. This option allows any filter to automatically logon to an FTP server and synchronize files either to or from the local folders. Supports proxy servers/firewalls and has option to adjust for GMT time on FTP server side (tested with IIS FTP server supplied with MS Windows NT4/2000). ● Email notification of synchronization activity can be sent upon completion of entire profile or during persistent synchronization operations.

● Option to validate file using CRC32 binary comparison after successful file copy operation. ● File recovery option to continue a file copy that was interrupted for some reason. If the source and target file name and date match but the target file is smaller, PeerSync will start the copy operation from the last byte that was sent the next time a sync operation is executed on the folder. ● Network load balancing option will automatically set read/write buffer size based on recommendation from NIC network cards. (Installed NIC must also support this feature.) ● Option to check all source and target files for binary match during folder scan/compare cycle (using CRC32). This check ensures that what is on the target matches the source at a binary level. ● Option to validate file using CRC32 binary comparison after successful file copy operation. ● Option to add or delete time from target file during folder comparison. This allows for synchronization of files between dissimilar time zones or to allow for some time difference between source and target in case target machine date is slightly different from source. ● Enhanced real-time file monitoring and updating option. This option allows the real-time feature in PeerSync to detect individual changes to files and synchronize only the file that changed without scanning the entire folder where the change occurred. Normally synchronization software scans and compares all files in a folder that is being synchronized. Under MS Windows NT4/2000, this feature is extended to the file/folder rename operations as well. If a file or folder is renamed, PeerSync will rename the corresponding target file or folder using rename functions as opposed to copying the newly renamed source folder to the target and then subsequently deleting the outdated target file/folder. This option greatly reduces time to synchronize and network bandwidth requirements.

New Features ● Daily Timer scheduling features to schedule specific Filters or an entire Profile at specific times of the day for selected days of the week. ● Email Reporting option to report on errors only. ● Email Reporting option to attach log files to emails. ● FTP Selection to Enable Passive Mode.

http://www.peersoftware.com/peersync.html (3 of 6) [25/04/02 11:11:54] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

PeerSync Pro IV ● Includes all features from PeerSync Pro III ● Includes 3 Remote Connection Licenses. (Server Edition) New Features ● Additional Performance Features ● Multiple Filter Threads for parallel processing of filters. ● Multiple Copy Threads for parallel processing of copying files. ● Maximum Copy Threads option to be able to give or take away priorities to certain filters. ● Bandwidth Throttling option which allows for the ability to control the amount of CPU used by PeerSync. ● Administrative SNMP Reporting features. ● File Read/Write Buffer Size Upper Limit which allows you to further increase the performance of PeerSync. ● Target File Time Change Option allows you to apply a time delta change to files upon successful synchronization. ● Additional PeerSync Status Display Features ● Additional Tray Icon and Popup Menu Features

Product Licensing | Product Line-Up | Product Comparison Matrix | Y2K Compliance

PeerSync Profiler Interface

http://www.peersoftware.com/peersync.html (4 of 6) [25/04/02 11:11:54] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

New Overall Profiler Interface Features

● Now allows you to customize the options to show in the 'Selection Tree.' One way to do this is by right clicking on the tree when 'Show all Profile Options' is not selected and selecting the 'Customize' option. ● Added a launch and terminate button to the Tool Buttons toolbar. ● Added buttons to menus that correspond to available toolbar Tool Buttons toolbar. ● Restructured the selection tree for ease of use. ● Added a status screen viewable from PeerSync which allows for you to view, print and save file adds, updates, deletions, exclusions, messages and many other status and reporting features. ● Update of Active Profile feature, located under the Run Menu and on the right side of Status Bar from the Profiler when changes are made to a Profile that is currently active and connected to the Profiler.

PS Wizard

PS Wizard contains many basic synchronization scenarios in a pre-defined format. All scenarios in the Wizard are completely end-user definable and support a comprehensive range of requirements.

Note: For PeerSync product support questions, first refer to our on-line support and the help documents supplied with the software. Peer Software offers limited phone support for these products.

PeerSync now works with OFH (Open File Handler) from SWAT Consulting, Inc. With OFH installed, PeerSync can be used to synchronize opened and locked database files and other read-access blocked files under Windows NT. We have tested OFH and PeerSync on our Windows NT4 servers with Microsoft Exchange Server running and were able to completely synchronize the database without having to close the exchange server. Get your copy of OFH directly from the manufacturer, SWAT Consulting, Inc. http://www.peersoftware.com/peersync.html (5 of 6) [25/04/02 11:11:54] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/peersync.html (6 of 6) [25/04/02 11:11:54] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Peer Software Product Comparison Matrix

Small Business Desktop Enterprise Desktop and Laptop File Synchronization and Server File Desktop File Management Management Save-N- Save-N- Save-N- Save-N- PeerSync PeerSync PeerSync Sync Sync Sync Sync Pro II Pro III Pro IV Standard Desktop Workstation Corporate

Default User Licenses 1 1 1 5 1 1 1

Default Connection Licenses 1 1 3 5 2 2 3

Source-Target Selections 1 1 3 5 255 255 255

Basic File Synchronization X X X X X X X

Log File Generation X X X X X X X File Exceptions X X X X X X X

Extended Operation Modes X X X X X X

Interval Activation X X X X X X Unicode Support (Mac Files) X X X X X X Real-Time Change Detection X X X X X Variable Path Selections X X X X NT ACL Descriptor Transfer X X X Compression X X X Run as NT Service X X X Enhanced Automation X X Email Notification X X

Detailed Scheduling X X

Network Load Balancing X X

FTP Site Synchronization X X

Multiple Filter Threads X

Multiple Copy Threads X

Bandwidth Throttling X

SNMP Reporting X

Added Performance Features X

Added Display Features X

Price Per Unit (US$) $29 $59 $89 $449* $299* $499* $899* Notes: 1. *Save-N-Sync Corporate includes 5 User Licenses. Each additional User License is $89. 2. *Pro II and Pro III versions includes 2 Remote Connection Licenses. Each additional Connection License is $75. 3. *Pro IV (Server Edition) includes 3 Remote Connection Licenses. Each additional Connection License is $125. 4. All products contain additional features either not listed here or combined into feature groups for comparison purposes.

http://www.peersoftware.com/productmatrix.html (1 of 2) [25/04/02 11:11:56] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/productmatrix.html (2 of 2) [25/04/02 11:11:56] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Peer Scheduler Pro v2.0

This products prime function is scheduling the execution of applications or programs. Multiple schedules can be created for any given interval of time down to the second. The interface is simple and easy to use and is intended for individual or corporate users from small to large businesses.

Peer Scheduler Pro offers an intuitive interface that shows the user exactly what is required to setup schedules for multiple applications at various date and time intervals. Through the use of Peer Scheduler Pro, a user can simply set up the scheduling of various application executions, on a daily, weekly, hourly, by the minute or down to the second basis, all from within this single application.

Peer Scheduler Pro Version 2.0 Feature Listing

● Allows the user to create multiple files and multiple Peer Scheduler schedules within each file. Pro ● Within each file a master list can be created with the option of active or inactive schedules, which makes it easy to manage the execution of multiple applications. ● Allows for test executions for a selected schedule in the master list./li>. ● Includes easy use of adding, copying, renaming, deleting and clearing of schedules. ● Provides a simple mechanism to traverse from editing to executing mode. ● Stores recent schedule files and selected applications, application files and file arguments for the user convenience.

● Provides a running clock to display the present date and time. ● Includes the next/last run date and time for each schedule in the list, which dynamically change as you edit each schedule. ● Options to show user hints and to set the scheduler active or inactive. ● Ability to move the schedules in the list via up and down buttons. ● Allows startup options to be added in order to customize your execution. ● Runs under MS Windows 9x/ME/NT/2000 and MS Windows with long file name support. ● Allows for multiple configurations and command line operation. ● Schedules can be manually launched from the schedule list display. ● Schedule listings can be sorted. ● International date format support.

Product Licensing | Product Line-Up | Product Comparison Matrix | Y2K Compliance

Peer Scheduler Pro, User Interface

http://www.peersoftware.com/peerscheduler.html (1 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:00] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

This product works hand in hand with PeerSync, but is designed for use with any application.

Note: For Peer Scheduler Pro product support questions, first refer to our on-line support and the help documents supplied with the software. Peer Software does not offer phone support for this product.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/peerscheduler.html (2 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:00] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Product Licensing

PeerSync Software:

PeerSync can be licensed for single or multiple users and/or single or multiple remote connections.

PeerSync User Licensing:

A single user license, by default, comes with right to install/execute the software on one PC (Server or Workstation) and connect to two remote PCs or unlimited local drives.

A license must be purchased for each PC where the product will be installed, executed or launched. This also applies to Enterprise installations that run the software off a network file server.

PeerSync Remote Connection Licensing:

A Remote Connection applies to all drives/folders on a single remote PC or Storage Device that you are going to connect to.

PeerSync Pro II and Pro III come with the ability to connect to two remote PCs or Storage Devices. The Pro IV version comes with the ability to connect to three remote PCs or Storage Devices.

If you need to synchronize files from the local PC to more remote PCs or Storage Devices, you will need to purchase a connection license for each additional remote PC you want to connect to.

To purchase additional Remote Connection licenses, please contact Peer Software for additional information.

Other Peer Software Products:

File-N-Sync, File-N-Sync Plus, Save-N-Sync, Peer Scheduler Pro and all other Peer Software Products are licensed by user. A license must be purchased for each PC where the product will be installed, executed or launched.

Please read license.txt file included with all downloads for additional information.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/license.html [25/04/02 11:12:01] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Product Line-Up

PeerSync Pro II (Single User License) $299 PeerSync PeerSync Pro III (Single User License) PeerSync $499 Pro IV (Single User License) $899

PeerSync Pro II ❍ Intelligent file/folder backup, synchronization, replication, mirroring and archiving ❍ Facilitates disaster recovery and file distribution ❍ Works in real-time, on-demand, or on a set schedule ❍ Wizard-driven for quick, easy configuration ❍ MS Explorer menu add-on for "Quick-Sync Folder" option ❍ Unobtrusive background operations ❍ File Compression/Expansion ❍ Runs in MS Windows 9x/Me/NT4/2000/XP ❍ NT file security (ACL's) description transfer ❍ and more.

PeerSync Pro III ❍ FTP File synchronization ❍ Enhanced Real-Time file synchronization ❍ Email notification ❍ Bi-directional synchronization mode w/Smart Delete for unmatched files ❍ Network load balancing ❍ File recovery ❍ CheckSum file validation (using CRC32) ❍ and more.

PeerSync Pro IV

❍ Additional Performance Features ❍ Multiple Filter Threads ❍ Multiple Copy Threads ❍ Maximum Copy Threads ❍ Bandwidth Throttling ❍ SNMP Reporting ❍ File Read/Write Buffer Upper Limit ❍ Target File Time Change Option Feature ❍ Additional PeerSync Status Display Features ❍ Additional Tray Icon Features ❍ Additional Popup Menu Features

Notes: - Pro II and Pro III User license includes 2 Remote Connection Licenses. - Pro IV User license includes 3 Remote Connection Licenses.

more info...

http://www.peersoftware.com/productlineup.html (1 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:03] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

SNS Standard (Single User License) $29 SNS Desktop (Single User License) $59 Save-N-Sync SNS Workstation (Single User License) $89 SNS Corporate (Five User License) $449

Save-N-Sync ❍ Real-time file and folder backup, synchronization, replication, mirroring, archiving and data cleanup. ❍ Simple, straight-forward setup and configuration. ❍ Works on-demand, on a set schedule or in real-time. ❍ Supports Unicode file and folder names. ❍ Runs in MS Windows 9x/Me/NT4/2000/XP

more info...

Peer Peer Scheduler Pro (Single User License) $24.95 Scheduler Pro

❍ Schedules and manages application execution ❍ Multiple schedules can be created for any given interval of time.

more info...

Notes: - Prices are subject to change without notice. - Upgrades and Enterprise Quantity Discounts available upon request. - Academic and Government Discounts available upon request.

Product Licensing

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/productlineup.html (2 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:03] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Year 2000 Compliance

Peer Software products have all been tested for compliance with year 2000 date and time settings for both display and storage of time sensitive data. These products will provide correct date-based calculations and processes past January 1, 2000 and these products respect the date and time format selections of the users PC envirnoment for purposes of date and time display. All date and time calculations use integer based values so internal operations are not dependent on date and time display formats.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps_y2k.html [25/04/02 11:12:04] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Productivity Solutions

Peer Software's family of file management software keeps information secure, in sync and always available, promoting efficient workflow and collaboration.Pick any scenario and we have a solution that meets your needs-- combining simplicity, power and affordability.

Continuous Desktop/Workstation Data Protection

Used by the US Department of Justice, MCI Teleconferencing and other organizations where the slightest disruption of data can be critical, our software provides real-time file synchronization to a server on the LAN-- lost data is instantly recovered without any interruption in business processes. Peer Software is also ideal for real-time desktop data synchronization. Changes at the desktop are continually updated on the server. Reliance on nighttime or sporadic backup is eliminated.

Recommended Products:

SNS Workstation ($89) Changes at the Desktop are continuously SNS Corporate ($449) updated at the Server or Attached Storage. PeerSync Pro II ($299) Reliance on nighttime or sporadic backups is eliminated.

Local Area Backup Solutions

(LABS) Network Attached Storage (NAS)

Today many companies are adding large inexpensive storage devices to their network. A 300 GB NAS drive costs less than $5,000. An old PC can be loaded with 100 GB of hard drive for less than $1000. With the low cost of storage, there’s no reason not to have http://www.peersoftware.com/prosolutions.html (1 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:07] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

continuous data synchronization. PeerSync can be used to continuously synchronize: Desktops to NAS, Server to NAS, and NAS to NAS. These solutions can be implemented quickly, inexpensively and with minimal technical expertise.

Recommended Products:

SNS Workstation ($89) SNS Corporate ($449) PeerSync Pro II ($299) PeerSync Pro III ($499)

Laptop to Desktop – Desktop to Laptop

Ideal for keeping files in sync for mobile users. File dates and times are checked and only synchronized if target files are actually older than the matching source file, reducing file transfer requirements. File-N-Sync Plus offers advanced features, including Interval Synchronization, Bi-Directional Sync, Replicate Source to Target, Replicate with Exact Match, Delete Matching Target File, Delete Filtered Files, Delete Empty Folders, and more!

Recommended Products:

SNS Standard ($29) File-N-Sync & File-N-Sync Plus offers fast, SNS Desktop ($59) flexible and easy file synchronization SNS Workstation ($89) between Laptops, Workstations and Servers.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/prosolutions.html (2 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:07] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Peer Software Introduces: LABS

A Peer Software White Paper

Winter 2001

LABS – Local Area Backup Software that Leverages Existing Infrastructures

By Paul Marsala, President of Peer Software

According to analysts at International Data Corporation (IDC), storage capacity demand will increase more than 10 times between 2000 and 2003. Expanding storage space at this accelerated pace is expensive. Implementation of a backup process that preserves investment in existing infrastructure while providing scalability, reliability and unobtrusive performance will represent both significant cost savings and operating efficiencies. This white paper introduces Local Area Backup Software (LABS), based on Peer Software’s file synchronization and backup software. Powered by Peer’s flagship enterprise solution, PeerSync Pro II, LABS is based on a peer-to-peer synchronization and replication methodology that leverages existing networked PCs to provide a cost- effective, high performance data backup-retrieval system.

The investment required to implement LABS is for software that manages file backup and synchronization routines. Hardware upgrades and modifications, such as the addition of NAS (Network Attached Storage) disk drives, can increase flexibility and capacity but are not required.

Introduction - Data Loss

Companies are estimated to have spent approximately $10 billion on disaster recovery in the year 2000. Yet many existing data backup systems only protect information stored on servers, with much of this http://www.peersoftware.com/labs.html (1 of 13) [25/04/02 11:12:13] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc information collected only on a daily or less frequent basis. Work done during the previous 24-hour period – or longer - is at risk of permanent loss. Important data on user PCs and workstations often are entirely without backup protection.

There are many reasons for the existence of these potential hazards, including:

• Failure to locate or implement an adequate and sufficiently comprehensive solution

• Rationales that backups impede network productivity

• Rationales that backups, and especially real-time backups, are intrusive

• Failure due to an unworkable or overly complex backup routine.

Without the reliable implementation of an effective backup procedure, mission-critical data can and will again become permanently unavailable.

LABS – Local Area Backup Software

Working hand-in-hand with existing PCs, NAS or traditional file-server storage, LABS is strictly software-enabled through products such as PeerSync, manufactured by Peer Software, that perform and manage file backup and synchronization routines.

Only two storage and hardware components are required for LABS implementation:

• A small amount of disk space on each participating PC or workstation where data synchronization and replication software will reside or operate

• An installed LAN with primary storage of data on a file server, NAS disk drive, or other storage media, including optical drive.

An optional element is a removable media backup device for backup of the primary storage device.

Synchronization and Replication Software

http://www.peersoftware.com/labs.html (2 of 13) [25/04/02 11:12:13] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc LABS automatically synchronizes and replicates files and folders among laptops, desktops, servers and any shared storage resource on the LAN. It works with varied network media, including NAS disk drives and optical devices.

Synchronization is the updating of any existing files or addition of new files in a target folder using a source folder as the guide. Upon completion, the target folder will contain all of the files in the source folder with matching content and time stamps.

Replication is nearly identical to synchronization, except that files that are in the target folder that do not have a matching source file will be deleted.

Synchronization and replication procedures generally include:

• Establishing source folders on each participating PC

• Establishing target folders on a file server, NAS disk drive, or other attached storage

• Automated software launched at time of log on or system start

• Scanning of target and source files and folders to identify differences. Synchronization or replication of target by acting on differences.

The synchronization and replication software should prevent loss of data by checking file dates and times to ensure that newer information is not overwritten. Advanced synchronization and replication software will offer some of the following features and customizations enabled by PeerSync, which offers over 100 customizable options:

• Setup, modification and administration are simple, including silent enterprise-wide installations

• Pre and Post-process scripting integration

• Synchronization and replication can occur between mapped or UNC connected drives located on local computers or computer networks

• Fault tolerance providing real-time bi-directional synchronization between storage resources

• Files can be included or excluded within synchronization according http://www.peersoftware.com/labs.html (3 of 13) [25/04/02 11:12:13] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc to standard DOS-type wild cards, sub-string comparisons, file attribute settings or date and size

• Wide, rather than ANSI, character strings are supported, thereby enabling specific Asian language and Macintosh file support

• Revisioning enables management of additional backup copies of files, thereby giving the user the ability to step back to previous saves of a document

• Accidentally deleted files can be immediately restored

• True bandwidth throttling in conjunction with buffering

• Methods of deployment including scheduled, manual, end-to-end, and real-time, can be used in varying combinations

• Real-time method of deployment scans source folders for changes and synchronizes specified target folders as changes occur. Synchronization occurs on an event-driven basis in an independent thread.

• Enhanced real-time file monitoring and updating offers real-time stable state detection and synchronization of individual changes to files. Only changes in source files are acted upon. There generally is no scanning of the entire folder in which the change took place, thereby reducing traffic.

• Hundreds of source-target folder combinations (filters) can be created and stored in profiles and run through run a GUI front-end (in the case of PeerSync, the Profiler which generates ASCII text file that contains a description of requested filter scenarios) or command line arguments. While the synchronization of large numbers of folder combinations occurs at once, each combination can have a unique set of rules (e.g., triggers; exceptions) and method of deployment (e.g., real- time).

• Multi-threaded filters, allowing filters to run simultaneously through separate threads

• A Quick Sync feature that provides easy and persistent synchronization of a work folder through Windows Explorer context menus with the option to modify synchronization criteria at a later time.

http://www.peersoftware.com/labs.html (4 of 13) [25/04/02 11:12:13] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Peer-to-Peer Software

While providing the functionality described above, peer-to-peer synchronization/replication software always conducts live comparisons between the target and source lists that reside on different machines. Unlike other systems that rely either on client-server or database-driven (“store or forward”) architectures, peer-to-peer synchronization/replication software operates in isolation from and has no impact on other applications or on database and client-server logic and processes. Data is not stored in a local database and no install of server software is required.

Peer-to-peer synchronization/replication software operates the same on servers as on workstations, and can but does not need to be installed on application or file servers. Synchronization/replication can take place from server to server to server (“server farms”) or among servers, desktops, laptops, and shared storage resources (such as NAS), (e.g., server to desktop; desktop to laptop).

Software Features

Advanced synchronization and replication software will offer some or all of the following features and customizable options:

• Setup, modification and administration are simple, including silent enterprise-wide installations

• Pre and post-process scripting integration

• Synchronization and replication can occur between mapped or UNC connected drives located on local computers or computer network

• Fault tolerance providing real-time bi-directional synchronization between storage resources

• FTP site file synchronization that supports proxy servers or firewalls

• Instant administrative and user reports, including email notification of synchronization or replication activity sent during or upon completion of operations

• Files can be included or excluded within synchronization according http://www.peersoftware.com/labs.html (5 of 13) [25/04/02 11:12:13] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

to standard DOS-type wild cards, sub-string comparisons, file attribute settings or date and size

• Wide (Unicode), rather than ANSI, character strings are supported, thereby enabling specific Asian language and Macintosh file support

• Revisioning enables management of additional backup copies of files, thereby enabling users to step back to previous saves of a document

• Accidentally deleted files can be immediately restored

• True bandwidth throttling in conjunction with buffering

• Methods of deployment including scheduled, manual, end-to-end, and real-time, can be used in varying combinations

• Real-time method of deployment scans source folders for changes and synchronizes specified target folders as changes occur. Synchronization occurs on an event-driven basis in an independent thread.

• Enhanced real-time file monitoring and updating offers real-time detection and synchronization of individual file changes. Only changes in source files are acted upon. There generally is no scanning of the entire folder in which the change took place, thereby reducing traffic.

• Hundreds of source-target folder combinations can be created, stored, and then run through a GUI front-end or launched via command line arguments. While the synchronization of large numbers of folder combinations occurs at once, each combination can have a unique set of rules (e.g., triggers; exceptions) and method of deployment (e.g., real- time, scheduled).

• Multi-threaded filters, allowing filters to run simultaneously through separate threads

• Quick synchronization features that provides easy and persistent “on the fly” synchronization of a work folder through Windows Explorer context menus with the option to modify synchronization criteria at a later time.

http://www.peersoftware.com/labs.html (6 of 13) [25/04/02 11:12:13] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc Setup

Peer- to-peer synchronization and replication software, such as PeerSync, must be installed on each participating PC or workstation. Once installed, a common profile can be configured for all users that utilize users’ logon names or assigned computer names as part of the master path (e.g., \\Server\D\Users\%UserName%). This common profile can reside on the primary storage resource from which a login script can be run and be accessed by all users when they logon, thereby reducing the need to administer each installation.

PeerSync’s Command Line Mode enables the configuration of a truly "hands-off" installation, where operation and distribution occurs from within an easily manageable, administrative environment. Profiles can be executed from logon scripts, system batch or command (CMD) files, detailed shortcuts, and shell commands - while also providing full access to PeerSync Profiler customizable features through command line arguments.

PeerSync can be setup to run as an NT service, enabling the program to run outside of logon/logoff, to process for accounts that are not logged on and to run even when there are no logged-on users.

Creating Backup Sets

Files in source data directories may be monitored according to schedule and/or in real-time. When a file is modified, added or deleted, the change is propagated to the storage resource either within seconds of the change, if monitored in real-time, or within seconds after the requested schedule.

Backup routines will vary to match individual requirements. Administrators and users with rights access can modify the scope of the backup. In many installations, users will have no access to the file synchronization and replication software or the backup processes.

Upon initial user logon, for example, a complete scan of selected source folders could be compared to target folders to ensure that all changes have been backed up. This will initiate synchronization that may be necessitated if, for example, the local PC was used while the network was unavailable or a laptop was used off-line. Subsequent backups could be only of file changes (incremental).

LABS Advantages http://www.peersoftware.com/labs.html (7 of 13) [25/04/02 11:12:13] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Utilizing existing network infrastructures, or relatively low cost alternatives such as the addition of NAS disk drives, LABS offers the following systemic benefits to organization of various sizes:

• Automated or unattended backup in real-time from any client PC on the network

• Provides an easy-to-use, network-based file backup solution for user data

• Minimal network overhead. Use of existing hardware or even older unused or underused machines with simple file storage capacity.

• Data kept “inside the firewall”

• Data moved either real-time or incrementally throughout the day

• Continuous on-site access to all stored data from original structures

• Continuous access to data if additional storage resource is unavailable or damaged

• Central availability of data from numerous machines based on logon name

• Continuous availability of network and bandwidth without restriction due to traditional backup requirements

• Leveraging of existing network security infrastructure.

LABS does not eliminate traditional backup solutions. Instead, it supplements more traditional systems with an intermediate solution.

For example, LABS works in conjunction with traditional methods for periodic backup to removable media (e.g., tape) for off-site storage. While tape backup and restoration are burdensome, time-consuming, vulnerable to human errors and equipment failure, and constrained by proprietary formats, such limitations are mitigated when tapes are used in conjunctions with LABS solely for the extra protection afforded by off-site storage.

LABS also works with “Electronic Vaulting”, in which both current and http://www.peersoftware.com/labs.html (8 of 13) [25/04/02 11:12:13] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc archived data can be maintained in a safe and remote environment, such as an data center. Electronic vaulting replaces the multi-day practice of trucking backup tapes to safe centers and bringing them back to restore data in case of disaster.

Data can be replicated first through LABS to a target on the LAN/WAN, and then subsequently replicated to either a remote site of the organization or to servers placed at a rented location, such as an Internet data center or a disaster recovery hot site. This strategy ensures that data is always available and current in at least two physical locations. Data updates and recoveries can transmit across private networks or across the Internet utilizing Virtual Private Network (VPN) technology, which adds encryption and security, thereby creating a private connection over public networks.

LABS Flexibility within Increased Storage Demand Environment

Compounding their responsibility to ensure data integrity, reliability, and availability, businesses and IT managers face a growing demand for file space. Long the repository for file storage, network file servers require time-consuming upgrades, place an I/O burden on the network and may not be available in case of system failure. Nevertheless, many businesses seek or require either no change in their infrastructure or only minimal change that relieves the immediate file storage demand.

The provision of more comprehensive data backup solutions with greater data availability will be achieved by many organizations only if these solutions rely solely or largely on existing storage infrastructures. LABS implementation and deployment requires no additional infrastructure.

LABS and NAS (Network Attached Storage)

LABS also can leverage the gradual implementation of new storage technology as it is deployed. To meet heterogeneous storage demand or consolidate storage pools without dramatically altering their network infrastructures, some enterprises and small and medium-businesses are adding NAS devices, dedicated, high-speed communicating, single- purpose machines or components that attach to existing LANs. Data from a managed on the NAS device is transferred to clients over standard protocols using standard , thereby providing http://www.peersoftware.com/labs.html (9 of 13) [25/04/02 11:12:13] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc additional network file storage. NAS is an increasingly popular choice for expanding storage as it:

• Lessens the dependence of data accessibility on file server reliability. It is estimated that over 60% of server failures are caused by problems related to storage. Creating separate storage resources for data increases the availability of such data.

• Increases file server efficiency, as increased access demands no longer impede data flow. File servers spend significant proportions of time serving file I/O requests, and even higher proportions serving simultaneous requests.

• Operates independent of network servers and communicates directly to the existing LAN and with the client. Files remain available in the event of network server downtime.

• Connects directly to the existing LAN, and not to a specific server. Users can access data directly over the network, even if the primary server goes down.

• Is relatively easy to install, giving organizations the capacity to quickly add storage.

Utilizing both LABS and NAS enables optimized backups through software, such as PeerSync, featuring peer-to-peer file synchronization and replication. In the case of server failure, LABS can provide alternate access to data maintained on NAS storage as well as prompt recovery. In addition, LABS is not client-server and requires only file sharing capacity on the shared storage resource on which it is installed. LABS eases potential network administration burdens as it operates wholly within network security infrastructures without opening additional TCP/IP ports.

Illustration

A company has a main office and two district offices. First, the company seeks to install LABS in each office. It wants to synchronize all user data every time a user creates or changes a file or directory on PCs within that office. It also wants this data to be available from different locations on the LAN, as many Company employees work from both a laptop and a desktop within each office. The company also requires that newer files on the target be brought back to the source folders on PCs. In addition, the company also wants to centralize distribution of application patches and upgrades to users at initial login at each office. http://www.peersoftware.com/labs.html (10 of 13) [25/04/02 11:12:13] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

The company also seeks to automate, standardize, and centralize backup among the offices.

While the company is considering adding NAS disk drives, it will implement solutions utilizing existing hardware. One server in each office, each with significant remaining storage space, is connected to the WAN and provides file sharing. The main office also has a backup server with removable media.

Synchronization and replication software is installed on all machines on each LAN. A login script copies source-target synchronization/replication instructions from each network server to each PC on the LAN and the synchronization/replication profile is launched from each PC. (If the server goes down, the synchronization/replication software can continue to be run locally.)

Selected source folders on local machines are scanned on desktops and laptops upon login to create accurate synchronization on the target, in this case the local network server. A bi-directional synchronization feature is enabled which ensures that files on the target that are newer than their corresponding source files will be automatically brought back to the source folders. Any file that has a creation date newer than the last time http://www.peersoftware.com/labs.html (11 of 13) [25/04/02 11:12:13] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc synchronization was run will be added to the source folders. Subsequently, real-time bi-directional synchronization is persistently deployed throughout the day so that changes in user data are continually moved from the source to the target as changed files are saved and closed. Users are assigned security permissions to the user data directory on the target, thereby making such data available on all machines throughout the LAN, even if an employee’s PC fails. In addition, application patches and upgrades will be distributed from the network servers to the PCs in each office through replication to target directories throughout the LAN of the source directory on the server on which these files are initially collected.

The LABS installation described above enables the persistent local backup of changed files in which PC data is recoverable on demand without the traditional time lag that threatens the loss of the most recent and vital work products. LABS also can be a key component in enabling efficient centralized backups over a WAN.

Utilizing the same peer-to-peer synchronization and replication software, the synchronized directories on each network server - which were the targets from local PC source directories - can be replicated as source directories to target directories on the WAN backup server. Following an initial scan to synchronize the user data directories on the local network servers with directories on the central backup server, changes in the user data directories will be replicated to the backup server in real time. Once again, data is immediately recoverable in case of a machine failure; in this case, if a local network server is unavailable. Periodically, backup data is copied to removable media on the central server and moved off-site. System-wide backup is more automated, reliable, and persistent.

PeerSync – File Synchronization and Replication from Peer Software

PeerSync provides a peer-to-peer LABS solution that automatically synchronizes and replicates files and folders among laptops, desktops, servers, and attached storage, including NAS disk drives. The peer-to peer approach always conducts live comparisons between the target and source in all operations. Unlike other systems that rely either on client- server or database-driven (“store or forward”) architectures, PeerSync operates in isolation from other applications and from database and client- server logic and processes without impact on existing applications, environments and application databases. http://www.peersoftware.com/labs.html (12 of 13) [25/04/02 11:12:13] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

PeerSync features seamless operation, with the same program executable, on Windows 9x/ME, NT4, 95, 98, NT4 and Windows 2000 on either workstation or server. It has an easy to use graphical interface compatible with Windows 9x/ME, Windows NT4 and Window 2000 that is simple and intuitive.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/labs.html (13 of 13) [25/04/02 11:12:13] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Server Solutions

Peer Software's family of file management software keeps information secure, in sync and always available, promoting efficient workflow and collaboration.Pick any scenario and we have a solution that meets your needs-- combining simplicity, power and affordability.

Server Solutions

Installed on the server, PeerSync offers an enterprise wide data management solution. Data can be pulled from the workstations (locally or from remote locations). Applications can be distributed system wide. Servers can be mirrored or replicated. PeerSync features include; Real-Time Monitoring, Email Notification, Detailed Scheduling, Network Load Balancing, Multi-Threading, FTP Site Synchronization, Compression, Unicode Support, Revisioning, Multiple Synchronization Profiles, and more!

Recommended Products:

PeerSync Pro III ($499) PeerSync Pro IV ($899)

Web Farms PeerSync Facilitates: One-to-One, One- It’s not uncommon for a company to have multiple web-to-Many, Many-to-Many File servers running 24x7. Throughout the day files need Synchronization, Mirroring, and to be updated. PeerSync can be used to push Replication scenarios. With PeerSync, changes from a master server to the server farm Real-Time File Backup, File Distribution without interrupting service. Also, PeerSync can be and Disaster Recovery is possible across used to synchronize data between web-servers in real-LANs, WANs and VPNs time. PeerSync’s speed, reliability, and feature set make it an indispensable tool for web farming.

Recommended Products:

PeerSync Pro III ($499) PeerSync Pro IV ($899)

http://www.peersoftware.com/servsolutions.html (1 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:15] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/servsolutions.html (2 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:15] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Product Resellers Page

Value Added Resellers

Corporate Office: West Coast Office: 11710 Plaza America Drive 637 29th Street Suite 2000 Manhattan Beach, CA 90266 Product Sales: [email protected] Reston, VA 20190 Tel: 310-796-1174 Tel: 703-435-3063 Fax: 703-871-5111 Customer Support: [email protected] Fax: 310-796-2264 General Information: [email protected]

Distributors

Global Headquarters: Western Regional Office: 2 Riverview Drive 2880 Zanker Road Somerset, NJ 08873 San Jose, CA 95134 Tel: 1-888-764-8888 Tel: 1-800-667-3107 Fax: 732-764-8889 Fax: 408-526-1222 For All Locations: www.shi.com

Make a Request We are currently enlisting resellers for our products. If you are interested in becoming a reseller for Peer Software please fill out the information provided and we will respond to your inquiry as soon as possible.

Company: Name:

Phone #: FAX #: Email: Address: Line 2: City: State: Zip:

Comments and Questions:

PEER SOFTWARE, INC. http://www.peersoftware.com/resellers.html (1 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:18] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

1363-26 Veterans Highway, Hauppauge, NY 11788-3046 Sales: 1-631-979-1770 | Fax: 1-631-979-1870 [email protected] | [email protected]

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/resellers.html (2 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:18] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Frequently Asked Questions

Peer Support - | - Frequently Asked Questions - | - Scenarios - | - Product Information - | - Contact Us

Technical Details: PeerSync Capabilities PeerSync Products About Peer Software

Product Overview: PeerSync PeerSync Pro II PeerSync Pro III PeerSync Pro IV

What is the advantage of using PeerSync over a DOS or Windows Explorer file copy? PeerSync lets the user customize over 250 multiple source to target backup, synchronization, replication and or restoration scenarios, each with over 85 optional criteria, via a single request. PeerSync can be run in real-time, on demand, based on trigger files, on set schedules or as a service.

How do I create PeerSync Profiles? PeerSync has three components. PeerSync the engine and two user interfaces (PSProfiler and PSWizard). Requests or Profiles can be created quickly using the wizard then customized using the profiler.

What are the different ways I can start up PeerSync Profiles?

PeerSync requests can be added to the desktop as a , placed in the Windows startup folder, added to the Windows registry to run at boot, or installed as a service. All of this can be easily done from the interfaces.

What is the advantage of using Revisioning and/or backup files? Revisioning allows you to retrieve old versions of a file. This is a feature that allows a user to easily restore the most current backup of any combination of files or restore files to their state at any given date and time.

Does PeerSync support Revisioning and/or backup files? Yes. PeerSync allows you to keep as many backups as you deem necessary. PeerSync will create unique backup files (i.e. Myfile.doc.PSBak1, Myfile.doc.PSBak2, Myfile.docPSBak3...) every time you modify and save a file then run PeerSync. This not only gives you a running archive list of your work, but it also allows you to visually track, restore, and/or go back to your work at any date and time. This is a very powerful feature when used in conjunction with PeerSync Pro II real-time capabilities, allowing users to undo mistakes on another level.

Does PeerSync support compression? Yes. PeerSync allows the user to automatically compress and/or expand files, use compression programs' password protection features, as well as, select the compressed http://www.peersoftware.com/faq.html (1 of 5) [25/04/02 11:12:21] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

file(s) extension.

Does PeerSync support tape drives? If your tape backup has a drive letter, PeerSync will backup, synchronize and/or replicate to the tape, as well as, retrieve, restore and selectively restore back from the tape.

Does PeerSync support removable media? Yes. PeerSync not only can use removable media as a backup destination but can be used to restore files from removable media. Using PeerSync's extensive filtering options you can backup, synchronize and/or replicate and/or restore only the specific files or data to/from removable media.

What kind of options for security does PeerSync offer? PeerSync has several options to enforce data security. PeerSync's configuration files are encrypted to prevent tampering and PeerSync has the option to be password protected preventing unwanted users from changing its settings.

Can PeerSync exclude a directory or include only specific directories? Yes. PeerSync is equipped with extensive filtering capabilities. You can include/exclude specific files and/or folder names, paths, sub-strings and much more.

Can PeerSync synchronize open database files? Yes. As long as the database files are not locked by another application then PeerSync can copy the files. If any files are open and locked by another application then PeerSync cannot copy those files at that moment, but there are options to retry open files until all desired file synchronizations are successful.

What reporting does PeerSync offer? PeerSync offers a complete and unique customizable log file with many options for each synchronization filter (source to target selection). The Pro II package offers more specific features based on the logged on user and local computer name. The Pro III and Pro IV packages also offer email notification.

In what automated modes can PeerSync run in? PeerSync Pro II offers the options of real-time, scheduled operations down to fractions of a second, synchronization based on trigger files and enhanced real-time. The Pro III and Pro IV packages also allow for scheduled synchronizations based on specific times of the day for selected days of the week.

Can I use PeerSync to backup files to a remote machine? Yes. PeerSync works across networks of all types from WANs to VPNs. You can select drives or folders on remote machines, devices, NAS devices and other remote storage devices using UNC connections, IP address, mapped drives and/or virtual mapped drives.

If a network connection is lost to a remote directory what does PeerSync do? It will log a message and continue synchronizing any other directories in your Profile. Once a connection is re-established it will re-connect to the remote directory.

Can PeerSync control network load balancing? Yes. There is an option in PeerSync Pro II to set the file read write buffer size enabling a user to balance performance and strain on the network.

Back to Top

http://www.peersoftware.com/faq.html (2 of 5) [25/04/02 11:12:21] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

What operating system does PeerSync run under? Windows 9x/ME/NT4/2000.

What operating systems will PeerSync synchronize to? Any operating system that can be accessed from Windows 9x/ME/NT4/2000.

What are the System Requirements for PeerSync? Computer capable of running Windows 9x/ME/NT4/2000. Under Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or Higher is recommended.

Who is a typical user of PeerSync? Network administrators who must maintain file backup/security for clients in an environment where no data can afford to be lost.

Who else uses PeerSync? Individuals who use laptops with network connections, users who use laptops that need to consolidate files into compressed files, and expand them when needed, saving hard drive space. Also, anyone with a client server connection that requires active data to be stored at the client end, and backed up to the server on a regular basis, as well as anyone who has a secondary drive dedicated to backing up a primary drive (mirroring).

How do administrators typically configure PeerSync? PeerSync can be configured on every client PC automatically detecting changes made on the local PC and then replicating the changes to a file server or vise versa. This enables users to recover lost data immediately or to operate from an alternate PC when a client PC fails or is unavailable.

Back to Top

What language are your products written in? Our products are written in Delphi. Earlier versions were written in Microsoft Visual Basic.

Do you have resellers around the world? We presently do not have any resellers outside the US. Almost all of our sales to date have been via the Internet. If you are interested in reselling our products, please contact our sales department for additional information.

Do you offer quantity discounts? Yes. Some of our prices are listed on our purchase page. For more information please contact our sales department.

Is maintenance available for your software? Yes. We offer annual maintenance contracts for all of our software. Maintenance pricing depends on the time of purchase and is calculated by a percent of the retail price of the software. For more information please contact our sales department.

Do you offer site licenses? Our products are sold by user or on a per seat basis. We sell site licenses based on the number of users and then apply our standard discounts to this number. Please contact our sales department for further details.

Back to Top

http://www.peersoftware.com/faq.html (3 of 5) [25/04/02 11:12:21] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

What is PeerSync? PeerSync is one of Peer Software's file synchronization and backup products. It is a file and folder synchronization tool used to backup working directories, entire drives, database files or in other words all and any data that the user deems important.

What can PeerSync do? This product gives the user the capability of setting up synchronizations on demand. It facilitates centralized and efficient data consistency, disaster recovery, distribution and network management across all environments: WANs, LANs, SANs, via a remote connection where files and folders can be synchronized with those on the network, as well as between laptop and desktop.

Who uses PeerSync? Large companies, small companies, network administrators and basically anyone who owns a PC that does not want to lose their data, files and work.

Back to Top

What is PeerSync Pro II? PeerSync Pro II is Peer Software's flagship file synchronization and backup product. It is a file and folder synchronization tool used to backup working directories, entire drives, database files or in other words all and any data that the user deems important. It will run in various automated modes and has many additional features.

What can PeerSync Pro II do? This product gives the user the capability of setting up synchronizations on demand, in real- time, on a scheduled basis and via trigger files. It facilitates centralized and efficient data consistency, disaster recovery, distribution and network management across all environments: WANs, LANs, SANs, via a remote connection where files and folders can be synchronized with those on the network, as well as between laptop and desktop. It will allow the user to tweak network load balancing and performance, keep administrative reports, launch pre/post applications, as well as many other added synchronization options and settings.

Who uses PeerSync Pro II? Large companies, small companies, network administrators and basically anyone who owns a PC that does not want to lose their data, files and work. Specifically users who have work that is constantly being updated and modified through out the day and have data and files that are shared over a network and between groups of users.

Back to Top

What is PeerSync Pro III? PeerSync Pro III contains all of the features in the Pro II package with some additional features.

What does PeerSync Pro III offer? Everything in the Pro II package plus FTP Selections, Email Reporting, Enhanced Real- Time, Daily Timer Scheduling, Intelligent Network Load Balancing, Bi-directional Synchronization, File Recovery, Replace In-use Files Upon Reboot Options and Validation http://www.peersoftware.com/faq.html (4 of 5) [25/04/02 11:12:21] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Options using CRC32.

Who uses PeerSync Pro III? Large companies, small companies, network administrators and basically anyone who owns a PC that does not want to lose their work. Users who need to synchronize data to and from there web sites, between different time zones, in congested network environments and in environments where data, files and work are critical.

Back to Top

What is PeerSync Pro IV? PeerSync Pro IV contains all of the features in the Pro III package with some additional features.

What does PeerSync Pro IV offer? Everything in the Pro III package plus 3 Additional Remote Connections, Multiple Filter Threads, Multiple Copy Threads, Bandwidth Throttling, Maximum Copy Thread Selection, File Read/Write Buffer Size Upper Limit, Target File Time Change Option, Display status/progress in PeerSync options.

Who uses PeerSync Pro IV? Large companies, small companies, network administrators and basically anyone who owns a PC that does not want to lose their work. Specifically users who have work that is constantly being updated and modified through out the day and have to move that data to multiple locations over a network, as well as companies who depend on collaboration and sharing of work and data over a network.

Back to Top

For more information on product features see our PeerSync Help Manual.

Send any information regarding support to:

Peer Software - Tech Support 1363-26 Veterans Highway Hauppauge, NY 11788-3046 Email: [email protected] Fax: 1-631-979-1870

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/faq.html (5 of 5) [25/04/02 11:12:21] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Scenarios

Peer Support - | - Frequently Asked Questions - | - Scenarios - | - Product Information - | - Contact Us

Scenario 1 How to synchronize files and folders from your laptop to your desktop computer?

Objectives: 1. Adding, updating and/or replicating files from your laptop to your desktop. 2. Creating a shortcut on your desktop to run the synchronization on demand.

Requirement: It is assumed that your laptop will be connected to your network via a docking station, through a PC card or by direct connect cable (refer to Microsoft Windows online help).

1. Open the PeerSync Profiler Application.

2. Select Source and Target Folders.

● Go to the Folder Selection screen. ● Select a Source folder on your laptop that you wish to synchronize from. ● Select a Target folder on your desktop that you wish to synchronize to.

3. Set File and Folder Exceptions

● Go to the Exceptions screen. ● Specify files/folders to include/exclude by setting the appropriate items.

4. Configure any other items you may require by selecting the appropriate screen.

5. Save the Profile.

6. Add icon to Windows Desktop to execute this Profile.

● Go to the Startup Options screen. ● Click on the "Add to Desktop" button. A Desktop icon will be added to your desktop with the name given to the active Profile that you have just created

7. Run profile from Desktop Icon. Back to Top

Scenario 2 How to synchronize files and folder over a RAS or VPN connection?

Objectives: 1. Automatically connect to a remote network using RAS or VPN. 2. Synchronize selected files/folders. http://www.peersoftware.com/scenarios.html (1 of 3) [25/04/02 11:12:23] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

3. Disconnect remote network connection.

Requirement: It is assumed that your VPN and or RAS connections have been created and are accessible through your environment.

1. Open the PeerSync Profiler Application.

2. Select Source and Target Folders.

● Go to the Folder Selection screen. ● Select a Source folder on your laptop that you wish to synchronize from. ● Select a Target folder on your desktop that you wish to synchronize to.

3. Set File and Folder Exceptions.

● Go to the Exceptions screen. ● Specify files/folders to include/exclude by setting the appropriate items.

4. Build .CMD or .BAT external batch files to execute.

● Open a such as Notepad and create a new document. ● Add the following line to the document:

start rasdial.exe "Connection Name" /DOMAIN:DomainName

(Where Connection Name and Domain Name are replaced with your network connection information as specified in the specific RAS or VPN connection screen.) Note: the use of double quotes around the Connection Name.

● Save the file as ConnectRAS1.CMD in the PeerSync installed folder "C:\Program Files\PeerSync" (default). ● Create a new document, and add the following line:

start rasdial.exe "Connection Name" /DISCONNECT

● Save this file as DisConnectRAS1.CMD in the PeerSync installed folder "C:\Program Files\PeerSync" (default).

5. Link these CMD files to PeerSync.

● In the PeerSync Profiler, go to the Pre/Post Process screen. ● Be sure the appropriate filter is highlighted in the Filter list. ● Enter the "ConnectRAS1.CMD" file name (with full path) into the Before text field. ● Enter the "DisConnectRAS1.CMD" file name (with full path) into the After text field. ● Check the Wait for application to terminate check box and set the time to wait to zero (0) (indefinite wait).

6. Configure any other items you may require by selecting the appropriate screen.

7. Save the Profile.

8. Go to The Run Active Profile Screen and Launch the Profile to connect and synchronize with your remote network.

http://www.peersoftware.com/scenarios.html (2 of 3) [25/04/02 11:12:23] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Back to Top

Send any information regarding support to:

Peer Software - Tech Support 1363-26 Veterans Highway Hauppauge, NY 11788-3046 Email: [email protected] Fax: 1-631-979-1870

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/scenarios.html (3 of 3) [25/04/02 11:12:23] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Product Information

Peer Support - | - Frequently Asked Questions - | - Scenarios - | - Product Information - | - Contact Us

1. Who is Peer Software, Inc 2. How to Evaluate a Synchronization solution 3. Peer Software InSync Solution Series A. PeerSync 1) What is PeerSync 2) What sets PeerSync apart 3) Who Uses PeerSync 4) Prerequisites 5) How Does PeerSync Work 6) PeerSync Features 7) Licensing 8) Support B. Peer Scheduler Pro 1) What is Peer Scheduler Pro 2) Why use Peer Scheduler Pro instead other scheduling utilities 3) What additional features does Peer Scheduler Pro have 4) Who is a typical user of Peer Scheduler Pro 5) How does Peer Scheduler Pro work 6) What language is Peer Scheduler Pro written in 7) What operating system does Peer Scheduler Pro run under

Peer Software, Inc.

1. Who is Peer Software, Inc.

In today's digital economy, data is the coin of the realm. An organization successfully competes to the degree it can efficiently and reliably store, access and organize its information. Peer Software's InSync Solution Series of network and data management tools keep your organization in sync, prepared and primed for the future.

Peer Software's InSync Solution Series enables organizations to:

● Synchronize files in real time, providing unparalleled data security and consistency. ● Efficiently manage and troubleshoot networked PCs. ● Provide centralized applications execution scheduling. ● Centrally manage various processes, including enterprise-wide software upgrades, monitoring desktop activity and much more.

Back to Top

http://www.peersoftware.com/supportinfo.html (1 of 8) [25/04/02 11:12:26] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

2. How to Evaluate a Synchronization solution

When evaluating a synchronization product, be sure to watch for these key issues.

● Open System - Heterogeneous, Standards-Based. ● Flexibility and Scalability. ● Performance and Efficiency. ● Integrity and Reliability. ● Security. ● Ease of Use - For Developers. ● Ease of Use - For Runtime Administration. ● Ease of Use - For End Users.

3. Peer Software InSync Solution Series

Peer Software's InSync Solution Series of network and data management tools keep organizations in sync, prepared and primed for the future. The InSync Solution Series includes the following: PeerSync Basic, PeerSync Pro II, PeerSync III, PeerSync Pro IV and Peer Scheduler Pro.

Back to Top

A. PeerSync

1) What is PeerSync

PeerSync is a software utility program designed to give the user complete file management and control among drives on a local area or wide area computer/network. By file management we mean ensuring that the latest files are available on each drive where they are required. For example, your laptop computer may contain updated Microsoft Word files (*.doc) that you need to keep consistent with your file server when you are "docked" in your office. PeerSync can not only keep the latest files up-to-date on your server, but also keep them up-to-date from your server to your laptop. PeerSync can of course be used for very specific files or file types, or it can be used to replicate all files from one drive to another drive (and virtually any combination in between).

Back to Top

2) What Sets PeerSync Apart

● PeerSync Pro II and higher offers real-time mirroring. A feature not found in this price range. ● Extensive file filtering is available. ● Processes can be initiated on-demand or automatically on a scheduled basis. ● All files are checked against each drive every time the process is run, instead of creating database files of directory structures to compare dates and time against. ● The user interface is intuitive and straightforward, guiding users every step of the way. ● The addition of a wizard application, which contains many basic http://www.peersoftware.com/supportinfo.html (2 of 8) [25/04/02 11:12:26] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

synchronization scenarios in a pre-defined format. The end users need only select a source and target folder to synchronize, and the wizard fills in all of the detailed information to perform the operation. ● PeerSync makes no changes to your operating environment. Your system setup and initialization files are not altered in any way so the addition or deletion of PeerSync will not require you to make any adjustments.

Back to Top

3) Who Uses PeerSync

PeerSync is used in client-server and peer-to-peer environments as well as on local hard drives where files need to be backed up or actively shared between users. In other words, companies from all major industries and organizations of all types and sizes use PeerSync to regularly and transparently synchronize and backup critical data to a server or secondary drive. Network administrators who must maintain file backup in an environment where no data can afford to be lost use PeerSync. PeerSync can be configured on every client PC automatically detecting changes made on the local PC and replicating the changes to a file server and/or vise versa. This enables users to recover lost data immediately or to operate from an alternate PC when client PC fails or is unavailable. Individuals who use laptops with network connections use PeerSync to synchronize to/from each machine at the beginning and end of each day.

Back to Top

4) Prerequisites

PeerSync will operate under Microsoft Windows 9x/ME/NT4/2000. Under Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or Higher is recommended PeerSync is a 32-bit application, and is Y2K compliant.

Back to Top

5) How Does PeerSync Work

First the user creates profiles containing filters using the profile editor (PSProfiler) and/or the wizard (PSWizard) applications. Once the PeerSync engine is launched with a profile, the following sequence of events occurs when the synchronization process begins:

● A list of all folders for each filter are generated and stored in PeerSync. ● PeerSync will then create a list of all source files that are candidates for synchronization after checking each filters' exceptions settings. ● All files in the source list are then compared against all files in the target list for live file date and time. ● If the "Update" files option is selected then all older target files are overwritten with newer source files of the same name. ● If the "Add" files option is selected, then all files in the source folder without corresponding target files are added to the target folder. ● If the "Delete unmatched target files" option is selected, all files in the target folder that do not have a corresponding source file, are deleted or moved to the pre-defined location for that filter. http://www.peersoftware.com/supportinfo.html (3 of 8) [25/04/02 11:12:26] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

● If "Include sub-folders" option is selected then this sequence of events will occur for all sub folders. ● If the "Compression" option is selected, all files will be compressed or expanded, depending on selection from the source to the target folders.

Note: These are only a few of the main options that can be set for each filter. Please view the PeerSync help file for more information on the extensive options that can be selected for each filter and for global profile settings.

Back to Top

6) PeerSync Features

Reporting: PeerSync is capable of generating reports prior-to and during a synchronization session. Reports prior-to a session will identify all files in the given folder criteria which need to be added or updated without actually performing the operation. Reports that occur during operation indicate which files are being added, updated, deleted and excluded (based on filtering) and errors (such as "file not accessible" or "drive not connected". Log files (ASCII text file output) can be generated for each session or appended from previous sessions. Additional administrative reporting is also available in the Pro II and higher versions.

Copying open database files: Copying open files is one of PeerSync's strengths; however, open database files and the Windows swap file have read only access. They are in a continuous state of change, making the results from copying them unreliable. For example, if you were simultaneously deleting and copying a record in the database, the target file would be corrupted. The same is true if you were writing a record to the database that caused the byte count of the database file to grow. If in the process of reading this changing file, the byte sequence being written would be distorted rendering the target file useless. For these reasons, database files get locked and deny all access from outside applications. You can test PeerSync against database folder on your system to see if your database is locked. If it is not, PeerSync will copy it. However, it is unlikely that it will not be locked.

Multiple source to target folder combinations: Multiple source to target folder combinations (filters) can be identified in a profile. Each profile can contain any combination of connected drive/folders and any number of profiles can be generated. For example, one profile might contain the source/target combination filters for matching files on my laptop to my server. Another profile might contain server to laptop criteria filters. Each of these profiles can be run when required to ensure the latest data is always available. PeerSync supplies the user with a profile editor, as well as, a wizard, which contains many basic synchronization scenarios in a pre-defined format to create filters for each profile. Command line (automatic) operation. PeerSync supports a wide range of command line options. Please consult the Help file for more details. PkZip compatible folder compression with options to consolidate entire folder or folder/sub-folders.

Replication of source and target files: For example, if you delete a file on the source drive PeerSync can automatically delete the corresponding file from the target drive freeing up space on the target drive. In addition to this you can designate what to do with the deleted files. For example, you can move them to http://www.peersoftware.com/supportinfo.html (4 of 8) [25/04/02 11:12:26] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

the recycling bin, a designated trash directory or just out right delete the files.

Matching file formats: If a file is compressed or encrypted at one end, the target will match.

Drag and drop operations: Are available for opening a profile and for selecting folder paths from within the profile editor or wizard applications. PeerSync operates at the file level: PeerSync sets a read/write buffer and directly matches source to target byte by byte. At the end of the copy, the file attributes and date are set to match the source files.

Replication of NT ACL's: PeerSync can replicate any file that is not security read locked, such as the Windows Swap file or open database files that are not read- enabled for other applications. Additionally, PeerSync v5 will transfer the ACL security to the target file after a successful synchronization of the file.

Scalability: Say you have a million files to be replicated from one site to another, does the software have to compare the million files on each end? If you have a million files to check, then all million files will be compared. The extensive filtering capability will reduce some of the checking, but generally, all files are compared every time. This is the most reliable way to ensure complete file matching. If I have say a 100-MB file and it changes, do you send the whole file or just the changes? When a files data/time stamp is older on the target, the entire file is copied from source to target. PeerSync does not support incremental/partial changes.

PeerSync is written in Delphi: Earlier versions were written in Microsoft Visual Basic.

Back to Top

7) Licensing

Peer Software products are sold by user or on a per seat basis. We sell site licenses based on project number of users and then apply our standard discounts to this number. Please refer to our license file for further details. Server licenses can be also be purchased. These licenses allow multiple users to access a single copy of PeerSync on a (file) server.

Back to Top

8) Support

We offer annual maintenance contracts for all products in the Peer Software InSync Solution Series product line. Maintenance pricing is determined on when you buy it and is based on a percentage of the price of the software at time of purchase.

Back to Top

B. Peer Scheduler Pro

1) What is Peer Scheduler Pro http://www.peersoftware.com/supportinfo.html (5 of 8) [25/04/02 11:12:26] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Peer Scheduler Pro is a utility used to set up and maintain executions of applications or batch files. This product can be used to run any application or batch file execution, but especially goes hand in hand with Peersync in order to set up scheduled file synchronization's. This is a multitask scheduler allowing the user to set up multiple schedules within a single file to run under one application. This product can be used to create a multitude of files for all of your scheduling and timed execution needs.

Back to Top

2) Why Use Peer Scheduler Pro Instead Other Scheduling Utilities

Peer Scheduler makes no changes to your operating environment. Your system setup and initialization files are not altered in any way so the addition or deletion of Peer Scheduler will not require you to make any adjustments. The user interface is straight forward and easy to create, load and run schedules quickly and efficiently.

You can create an unlimited amount of files and schedules within each file to take care of all of your time based executions. With Peer Scheduler Pro you can time an execution for an unlimited amount of intervals for an unlimited amount of applications even down to the second.

Back to Top

3) What Additional Features Does Peer Scheduler Pro Have

● Automatic testing of a schedule to verify your schedule is set up properly.the ability to name files and schedules within files for easy understanding of what the purpose of each file and schedule within each file has. ● The capability of copying, renaming, deleting and ordering schedules within a schedule list file. ● The ability to traverse from editing to running mode with the click of a button. ● The option to set schedules active or inactive within a file for the users convenience.

The ability to set preferred options before run-time and the use of command line (automatic) operation.

Back to Top

4) Who is a Typical User of Peer Scheduler Pro

The typical user is one that needs to execute applications or batch files on a timed or set basis for purposes such as accomplishing tasks, running applications at startup, create timed messages or simply to remind the user of the time. But our main goal is to help in the coordination of file synchronizations. The following are typical users of PeerSync (file synchronization utility) that we at Peer Software are sure would be interested in seeing what Peer Scheduler Pro can do: http://www.peersoftware.com/supportinfo.html (6 of 8) [25/04/02 11:12:26] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Network administrators who must maintain file backup in an environment where no data can afford to be lost. Peer Scheduler Pro incorporated with PeerSync can be configured on every client PC automatically detecting changes made on the local PC and replicating the changes to a file server. This enables users to recover lost data immediately or to operate from an alternate PC when client PC fails or is unavailable.

Individuals who use laptops with network connections, individuals who use laptops and need to consolidate files into compressed files and expand them when needed (saving hard drive space). Anyone with a client server connection that requires active data to be stored at the client and backed up to the server on a regular basis, or anyone who has a secondary drive dedicated to backing up a primary drive (mirroring).

Back to Top

5) How does Peer Scheduler Pro Work

First, the user sets up files for his/her scheduling needs in editing mode. Then, once schedule file(s) are setup the user can simply run Peer Scheduler Pro in the background (minimized on the task bar) to run any amount of applications at any time frame.

Back to Top

6) What Language is Peer Scheduler Pro Written In

Peer Scheduler Pro is written in Delphi. Earlier versions were written in Microsoft Visual Basic.

Back to Top

7) What operating system does Peer Scheduler Pro run under

Peer Scheduler Pro will operate under Microsoft Windows 9x/ME/NT4/2000. Under Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or Higher is recommended. Peer Scheduler Pro is a 32-bit application, and is Y2K compliant.

Back to Top

Send any information regarding support to: Peer Software - Tech Support 1363-26 Veterans Highway Hauppauge, NY 11788-3046 Email: [email protected] Fax: 1-631-979-1870

http://www.peersoftware.com/supportinfo.html (7 of 8) [25/04/02 11:12:26] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/supportinfo.html (8 of 8) [25/04/02 11:12:26] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Technical Documents and Downloads

Peer Support - | - Frequently Asked Questions - | - Scenarios - | - Product Information - | - Contact Us

PeerSync Documents

● PeerSync Help Manual html doc pdf

● PeerSync Reviewers Guide html doc pdf

● PeerSync Product Level Guide html doc pdf

Save-N-Sync Documents

● Save-N-Sync Help Manual html doc pdf

● Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide html doc pdf

Send any information regarding support to:

Peer Software - Tech Support 1363-26 Veterans Highway Hauppauge, NY 11788-3046 Email: [email protected] Phone: 1-631-979-1770 Fax: 1-631-979-1870

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/techdocs.html [25/04/02 11:12:28] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Software Download

To download PeerSync v6.0 please enter the following:

Name: * Company: Email: *

Please send me a new evaluation code.

Please notify me of product updates and new releases.

Note: Required fields are marked with a *

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/psexpress60.html [25/04/02 11:12:30] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Software Download

To upgrade/download File-N-Sync Software you must complete the following form.

Please indicate which products you wish to upgrade/download: File-N-Sync Description

File-N-Sync Plus Description

A separate email will be automatically generated for each product.

Name: * Company: Email: *

Note: 1. You must enter a valid email address so an activation code can be sent to you. Note: 2. Required fields are marked with a *

Please do not send me an evaluation code at this time.

Please notify me, via email, of product updates and new releases.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/fnsexpress10.html [25/04/02 11:12:31] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Company News

PRESS RELEASE

Peer Software Announces PeerSync "Plus" Package, Providing Added Functionality to Industry's Most Robust and Flexible File Synchronization and Backup Solution

Additions include FTP file synchronization, reduced sync time and network bandwidth requirements, enhanced e-mail reporting, bi-directional synchronization mode w/Smart Delete for unmatched files, and more.

Hauppauge, NY-- August 1, 2000-- Peer Software, leading developers of software solutions that keep information and people in sync, today announces the PeerSync "Plus" package, providing a slate of new features to make desktop and server file backup and synchronization operations easier, faster, more flexible and transparent. PeerSync's Plus Package expands a network administrator's control over how, where and when data is stored, archived and distributed, simplifying the increasingly difficult task of keeping an organization's universe of desktops and servers in sync and secure. PeerSync's wizard-driven setup routines and easy-to-implement user-defined synchronization/backup scenarios--including enhanced real-time operations--provide the easiest to use and most efficient solution designed to promote data consistency, disaster recovery, software distribution and network management across all environments: WANs, LANs, SANS, via a remote connection where files can be synchronized with those on the network, as well as between laptop and desktop.

"The features included in the Plus Package build upon the "QuickSync" technology we introduced several months ago, designed to make the PeerSync family of data and network management solutions the easiest and most flexible means of keeping an organization's digital assets safe and up-to-the minute," said Paul Marsala, President of Peer Software. "The new features were driven by customers clamoring for a reliable and robust tool to manage and secure their increasingly distributed and ever-expanding volume of desktop and server files. The Plus packages comprehensively and efficiently addresses a wide range of user-defined scenarios, while maintaining the ease-of use and transparency that have always distinguished PeerSync from its competitors."

"Plus" Package Highlights

* Bi-directional synchronization feature with Smart-Delete. Files on target that are newer than their corresponding source files will be automatically brought back to the source folders. Any file that has a creation date newer that the last time the filter was run will be added to the source folders even if Delete-Unmatched target file option is selected.

* FTP site file synchronization: allows any filter to automatically logon to an FTP server and synchronize files either to or from the local folders. Supports proxy servers/firewalls and has option to adjust for GMT time on FTP server side.

* Email notification of synchronization activity can be sent upon completion of entire profile or during persistent synchronization operations.

http://www.peersoftware.com/plus.html (1 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:33] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

* File recovery option to continue an interrupted file copy. If the source and target file name and date match but the target file is smaller, PeerSync will start the copy operation from the last byte that was sent the next time a sync operation is executed on the folder.

* Network load balancing: automatically sets read/write buffer size based on recommendation from NIC network cards.

* Option to check all source and target files for binary match during folder scan/compare cycle (using CRC32). This ensures that what is on the target matches the source at a binary level.

* Option to validate file using CRC32 binary comparison after successful file copy operation.

* Option to add or delete time from target file during folder comparison. This allows for synchronization of files between dissimilar time zones or to allow for some time difference between source and target in case target machine date differs from source.

The PeerSync Pro II w/Plus Package also provides:

* Enhanced real-time file monitoring and updating option. This allows the real-time feature in PeerSync to detect individual changes to files and synchronize only the file that changed without scanning the entire folder where the change occurred. Under MS Windows NT4/2000, this feature is extended to the file/folder rename operations as well. If a file or folder is renamed, PeerSync will rename the corresponding target file or folder using rename functions as opposed to copying the newly renamed source folder to the target and then subsequently deleting the outdated target file/folder. This option greatly reduces time to synchronize and network bandwidth requirements.

Peer Software can be reached at 631-979-1770, or www.peersoftware.com. ______

Copyright © 1993-1999 Peer Software, Inc. PeerSync, PeerSync Pro, PeerSync Pro II, Peer Scheduler and PeerLink are the trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. 1993 -1999 Peer Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/plus.html (2 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:33] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Company News

PRESS RELEASE

Peer Software's New PeerSync Pro II v.5.0 Introduces Innovative "QuickSync" Technology, Providing Easy, Efficient File Synchronization and Backup

Customer-driven enhancements expands options for fast, flexible and easy synchronization and backup of files on all storage media across any size network

Hauppauge, NY-- March 27, 2000--Peer Software, leading developers of software solutions that keep information and people in synch, today announces the new release of its flagship data synchronization product, PeerSync(tm) Pro II v.5.0, featuring a range of usability and performance enhancements. Leveraging Peer's innovative "QuickSync" technology, PeerSync v. 5.0 provides simplified, wizard-driven setup routines, a wide range of easy-to-implement user-defined synchronization/backup scenarios, speedier performance and push-button, on-the-fly operations (in addition to those done in real- time or on a scheduled basis). The new release provides systems administrators with the easiest to use and most efficient solution designed to promote data consistency, disaster recovery, software distribution and network management across all environments: WANs, LANs, SANS, via a remote connection where files can be synchronized with those on the network, as well as between laptop and desktop.

"Peer Software is committed to giving users a seamless synchronization and backup solution that is both robust and easy to use," said Paul Marsala, President of Peer Software. "The "QuickSync" technology built into the newest version of PeerSync was driven by customer-demand for a full-featured, high-performance solution that simplified set-up and administration, while addressing a comprehensive range of synchronization/backup scenarios."

PeerSync Pro II v5 gives users comprehensive command of how, where and when their data is to be synchronized. PeerSync is used by companies from all major industries and organizations of all types and sizes to regularly and transparently synchronize and backup critical data to a server or secondary drive (including tape, optical storage, etc.). Network administrators use PeerSync to maintain file backup in an environment where no data can afford to be lost (across a LAN or SAN). PeerSync can be configured on every client PC automatically detecting changes made on the local PC and replicating the changes to a file server. This enables users to recover lost data immediately or to operate from an alternate PC when clients PC fails or is unavailable. Individuals who use laptops with network connections use PeerSync which enables data to be consolidated and compressed for later expansion when needed.

PeerSync Pro II v. 5.0 - Highlights of New Version

* PS Wizard: contains many basic synchronization scenarios in a pre-defined format. All scenarios in the Wizard are completely end-user definable and support a comprehensive range of scenarios. * Improved filter and profile management --A Profile is a description of a complete synchronization scenario. Profiles can contain many source-target combinations http://www.peersoftware.com/ps5.html (1 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:34] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

allowing the end-user to define very detailed file synchronizations and run them all within a single request. A filter is a single entry in a profile. A Profile can contain from one to 100 filters and each filter contains more than 65 individual option settings. * Sync operations are faster * Improved compression operations

Peer Software can be reached at 631-979-1770, or www.peersoftware.com ______

Copyright © 1993-1999 Peer Software, Inc. PeerSync, PeerSync Pro, PeerSync Pro II, Peer Scheduler and PeerLink are the trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. 1993 -1999 Peer Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps5.html (2 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:34] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Company News

PRESS RELEASE

Peer Software's New PeerLink Viewer(tm) Provides Remote and Simultaneous "Anytime, Anywhere" Monitoring of Multiple Desktops

First module of PeerLink(tm) Suite enables instructors to synchronize training of multiple trainees while enhancing one-to-one interactivity; module also allows network administrators to simultaneously monitor processes across multiple desktops.

Hauppauge, NY-- November 29, 1999--Peer Software, leading developers of software solutions that keep information and people in synch, today announces the release of the first module in its PeerLink(tm) Suite, called PeerLink Viewer(tm). PeerLink Viewer provides remote, simultaneous desktop viewing of up to 30 PCs via a TCP/IP connection. Peerlink Viewer was designed to allow a trainer in any type of instructional environment-- from a corporate computer lab to a virtual session involving trainees logged in from disparate locations--to provide efficient, synchronized, highly interactive instruction that can be easily monitored from an administrator desktop. This allows trainers and teachers to provide both group instruction AND give individual attention to each trainee. PeerLink also provides network administrators with a valuable desktop-monitoring tool.

"One of today's central business challenges is developing a quality workforce, which is why training consumes an ever greater share of a company's resources. PeerLink Viewer is a valuable instructional tool that can be used in all teaching environments, making learning efficient and effective," said Paul Marsala, President of Peer Software. "PeerLink Viewer is also a powerful, yet simple tool enabling network administrators to keep tabs of multiple desktops, helping them identify and trouble-shoot problems."

The PeerLink Viewer administrator enters the IP addresses of the desktops that send back screen shots at intervals and resolutions the administrator pre-selects. Each desktop view is displayed in a separate window; each window contains the user's name, the name of the machine and the time/date stamp of the last refresh. The administrator has the further option of displaying a list of windows running on each desktop, instead of screen shots.

The PeerLink Suite will include modules to perform a host of remote administrative functions--all designed to help keep information and people in sync.

Peer Software can be reached at 631-979-1770, or www.peersoftware.com ______

Peer Software, Inc. 1363 Veterans Highway, Suite 26 Hauppauge, NY 11788-3046 Phone Number: (631) 979-1770 Fax Number: (631) 979-1870 Email: [email protected] Copyright © 1993-1999 Peer Software, Inc. PeerSync, PeerSync Pro, PeerSync Pro II, Peer Scheduler and http://www.peersoftware.com/peerlink.html (1 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:36] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

PeerLink are the trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. 1993 -1999 Peer Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/peerlink.html (2 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:36] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Company News

PRESS RELEASE

Peer Software's New PSServer™ Software Solution Facilitates Enterprise-Wide Collaboration Through "Intelligent Data Sharing"

Working with Peer Software's pioneering PeerSync Pro II™ file synchronization solution, PSServer helps to automate expanded file sharing and backup through innovative notification and synchronization methodology

New Enterprise Licensing of flagship PeerSync Pro II 4.3 product designed to facilitate complete and cost-effective management of critical documents across a company's existing network

Hauppauge, NY-- October 27, 1999--Peer Software, leading developers of software solutions that keep information and people in synch, today announces the release of PSServer™, providing unparalleled flexibility in the way files are synchronized and backed up across the enterprise, promoting efficient collaboration among distributed user populations. PSServer works in concert with PeerSync Pro II™, the leading data synchronization solution, to allow folders and files to be synchronized in an efficient and "resource-sensitive" manner by employing an innovative "global" trigger scenario.

PSServer automates the synchronization of file changes made by third party connections to monitored server folders. As files are modified anywhere on the network, connected clients are notified of updates, allowing changes to be synchronized back to client PCs. Users collaborating from different locations are now able to work on latest versions of documents--proposals, spreadsheets, presentations--via PSServer's "intelligent data sharing" methodology.

"In today's distributed business environment, it is a challenge to enable collaboration and efficient management of critical documents. PSServer is a simple, yet robust solution that bridges people and offices, promoting seamless communications," said Peer Software President, Paul Marsala. "An organization is successful to the degree it can efficiently and reliably share information. PSServer and Peer Software's InSync Solution Series keep organizations in sync and competitive."

New Enterprise Licensing for PeerSync Pro II 4.3: For Complete and Cost Effective Enterprise-Wide Data Synchronization Solutions

In order to deliver maximum value and reduce administrative overhead, Peer Software introduces Enterprise Licensing for PeerSync Pro II 4.3. The new licensing is based on server deployment of PeerSync; the base Enterprise package allows for 10 client licenses. Additionally, the Enterprise version offers easier administration, since the application and synchronization requirements for multiple clients are managed centrally.

PSServer, working in concert with PeerSync Pro II, facilitates collaboration across all networked environments: WANs, LANs, SANs, as well as between laptop and desktop http://www.peersoftware.com/psserver.html (1 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:37] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

PCs.

______

Peer Software, Inc. 1363 Veterans Highway, Suite 26 Hauppauge, NY 11788-3046 Phone Number: (631) 979-1770 Fax Number: (631) 979-1870 Email: [email protected] Copyright © 1993-1999 Peer Software, Inc. PeerSync, PeerSync Pro, PeerSync Pro II, Peer Scheduler and PeerLink are the trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. 1993 -1999 Peer Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/psserver.html (2 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:37] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Company News

PRESS RELEASE

Peer Software Announces InSync Solution Series: Software Suite Promotes Efficient Management and Synchronization of Digital Assets

Company releases new version of flagship InSync product, PeerSync Pro II v.4.3, expanding options for synchronization of data on all storage media across any size network

First 1,000 to Download Product from Peer Web Site to Receive Free Copy of PeerScheduler

Hauppauge, NY-- September 27, 1999--Peer Software, leading developers of software solutions that keep information and people in synch, today introduces its InSync Solutions Series with the release of the newest version of its flagship data synchronization product, PeerSync Pro II v.4.3. The company's InSync Solution Series facilitates centralized and efficient data consistency, disaster recovery, software distribution and network management across all environments: WANs, LANs, SANS, via a remote connection where files can be synchronized with those on the network, as well as between laptop and desktop. The newest version of PeerSync Pro II works with all storage media, including DAT, Zip drives, optical drives, etc. and offers an expanded range of flexible, scalable and user-friendly data synchronization solutions that that ensure data integrity and reliability, while promoting collaboration among workers in today's increasingly distributed workforce.

"As bits and bytes fly across the enterprise, mission critical information-proposals, contact databases, spreadsheets, etc.--can get out of synch, resulting in lost time, miscommunication and confusion. The InSync Solution Series provides an easily managed and transparent solution assuring that an organization's data--is up-to-date and secure, " said Paul Marsala, President of Peer Software. "The new release of Peer Synch Pro II is scalable and configurable for all environments where data needs to be kept synchronized and secure. PeerSync Pro is an integral productivity tool for a diverse workforce population, from promoting communications efficiencies among a growing mobile workforce to providing efficient data sharing across a SAN."

PeerSync Pro II gives users comprehensive command of how, where and when their data is to be synchronized. PeerSync Pro II is used by companies from all major industries and organizations of all types and sizes to regularly and transparently synchronize and backup critical data to a server or secondary drive (including tape, optical storage, etc.). Network administrators use PeerSync to maintain file backup in an environment where no data can afford to be lost (across a LAN or SAN). PeerSync can be configured on every client PC automatically detecting changes made on the local PC and replicating the changes to a file server. This enables users to recover lost data immediately or to operate from an alternate PC when clients PC fails or is unavailable. Individuals who use laptops with network connections use PeerSync which enables data to be consolidated and compressed for later expansion when needed.

http://www.peersoftware.com/peersyncrel.html (1 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:39] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

PeerSync Pro II v.4.3 - Highlights of New Version

● PeerSync Pro II v.4.3 features real-time mirroring (a feature not found in this price range), extensive file filtering, the initiation of processes on-demand or automatically on a scheduled basis, an intuitive user interface and does not alter the operating environment. New features include:

Option to use temp files during sync copy operations

Option to create up to 99 backup files for files being overwritten in target folders

Option to initiate specific source target sync operation from one file update

Option to monitor server folders using specific file updates

New archiving option which allows for sync of files older than a given number of days.

Reduced resource requirements and initialization time for real-time sync operations

Improved level of coverage for real-time sync operations (Tree Depth > 500)

Improved report logging information

PeerSync Pro runs under Windows 9X/ME/NT/2000.

PeerSync Pro II v.4.3 is available for evaluation and purchase at Peer Software's online store. The fist 1,000 to download PeerSync Pro II will receive a free copy of PeerScheduler, a utility that enables users to schedule and manage application execution and can be used to operate PeerSync Pro II 4.3.

______

Peer Software, Inc. 1363 Veterans Highway, Suite 26 Hauppauge, NY 11788-3046 Phone Number: (631) 979-1770 Fax Number: (631) 979-1870 Email: [email protected] Copyright © 1993-1999 Peer Software, Inc. PeerSync, PeerSync Pro, PeerSync Pro II, Peer Scheduler and PeerLink are the trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. 1993 -1999 Peer Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/peersyncrel.html (2 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:39] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Software Download

To download software you must complete the following.

Please indicate which products you wish to download:

PeerSync (All Levels) Description

Save-N-Sync (All Levels) Description

Peer Scheduler Pro Description

Name: * Company: Email: *

Please notify me, via email, of product updates and new releases.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/dlexpress.html [25/04/02 11:12:40] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Software Download To download PeerSync Pro II v5.1, please enter the following information.

Name: * Company: Email: *

Note: 1. You must enter a valid email address so an activation code can be sent to you. Note: 2. Required fields are marked with a *

Please do not send me an evaluation code at this time.

Please notify me, via email, of product updates and new releases.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/psexpress51.html [25/04/02 11:12:41] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Software Download To download PeerSync Pro II v4.3, please enter the following information.

Download is available for existing registered Users of PeerSync version 4.3 only.

Name: * Company: Email: *

Note: Required fields are marked with a *

Please notify me, via email, of product updates and new releases.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/psexpress43.html [25/04/02 11:12:42] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Software Download

To upgrade/download Save-N-Sync Software you must complete the following form.

Please indicate which products you wish to upgrade/download: Save-N-Sync v1.0 Description

Name: * Company: Email: *

Note: 1. You must enter a valid email address so an activation code can be sent to you. Note: 2. Required fields are marked with a *

Please do not send me an evaluation code at this time.

Please notify me, via email, of product updates and new releases.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/snsexpress10.html [25/04/02 11:12:44] Continuous Desktop/Workstation Data Protection

Productivity Solutions

Peer Software's family of file management software keeps information secure, in sync and always available, promoting efficient workflow and collaboration. Pick any scenario and we have a solution that meets your needs-- combining simplicity, power and affordability.

Continuous Desktop/Workstation Data Protection Used by the US Department of Justice, MCI Teleconferencing and other organizations where the slightest disruption of data can be critical, our software provides real- time file synchronization to a server on the LAN--lost data is instantly recovered without any interruption in business processes. Peer Software is also ideal for real-time desktop data synchronization. Changes at the desktop are continually updated on the server. Reliance on nighttime or sporadic backup is eliminated. Changes at the Desktop are continuously updated at the Server or Attached Storage. Reliance on nighttime

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/prosolutions.html (1 of 4) [25/04/02 11:12:46] Continuous Desktop/Workstation Data Protection

or sporadic backups is eliminated. Recommended Products: SNS Workstation ($89)

PeerSync Pro II ($299)

Local Area Backup Solutions (LABS) Network Attached Storage (NAS) Today many companies are adding large inexpensive storage devices to their network. A 300 GB NAS drive costs less than $5,000. An old PC can be loaded with 100 GB File-N-Sync & File-N-Sync Plus offers fast, flexible of hard drive for less than $1000. and easy file synchronization between Laptops, Workstations and Servers. With the low cost of storage, there’s no reason not to have continuous data synchronization. PeerSync can be used to continuously synchronize: Desktops to NAS, Server to NAS, and NAS to NAS. These solutions can be implemented quickly, inexpensively and with minimal technical expertise.

Recommended Products: SNS Workstation ($89) SNS Corporate ($449)

PeerSync Pro II ($299)

PeerSync Pro III ($499)

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/prosolutions.html (2 of 4) [25/04/02 11:12:46] Continuous Desktop/Workstation Data Protection

Laptop to Desktop – Desktop to Laptop Ideal for keeping files in sync for mobile users. File dates and times are checked and only synchronized if target files are actually older than the matching source file, reducing file transfer requirements. File-N- Sync Plus offers advanced features, including Interval Synchronization, Bi-Directional Sync, Replicate Source to Target, Replicate with Exact Match, Delete Matching Target File, Delete Filtered Files, Delete Empty Folders, and more!

Recommended Products: Save- N-Sync Standard ($29) Save-N- Sync Desktop ($59) Save-N- Sync Workstation ($89)

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/prosolutions.html (3 of 4) [25/04/02 11:12:46] Continuous Desktop/Workstation Data Protection

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/prosolutions.html (4 of 4) [25/04/02 11:12:46] LABS – Local Area Backup Solutions that

LABS: Local Area Backup Solutions That Leverage Existing Infrastructures

A Peer Software White Paper Winter 2001

LABS – Local Area Backup Software that Leverages Existing Infrastructures

By Paul Marsala, President of Peer Software

According to analysts at International Data Corporation (IDC), storage capacity demand will increase more than 10 times between 2000 and 2003. Expanding storage space at this accelerated pace is expensive. Implementation of a backup process that preserves investment in existing infrastructure while providing scalability, reliability and unobtrusive performance will represent both significant cost savings and operating efficiencies. This white paper introduces Local Area Backup Software http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/labs.html (1 of 17) [25/04/02 11:12:51] LABS – Local Area Backup Solutions that (LABS), based on Peer Software’s file synchronization and backup software. Powered by Peer’s flagship enterprise solution, PeerSync Pro II, LABS is based on a peer-to-peer synchronization and replication methodology that leverages existing networked PCs to provide a cost- effective, high performance data backup-retrieval system.

The investment required to implement LABS is for software that manages file backup and synchronization routines. Hardware upgrades and modifications, such as the addition of NAS (Network Attached Storage) disk drives, can increase flexibility and capacity but are not required.

Introduction - Data Loss

Companies are estimated to have spent approximately $10 billion on disaster recovery in the year 2000. Yet many existing data backup systems only protect information stored on servers, with much of this information collected only on a daily or less frequent basis. Work done during the previous 24-hour period – or longer - is at risk of permanent loss. Important data on user PCs and workstations often are entirely without backup protection.

There are many reasons for the existence of these potential hazards, including:

Failure to locate or implement an adequate and sufficiently comprehensive solution

Rationales that backups impede network productivity

Rationales that backups, and especially real-time backups, are intrusive

Failure due to an unworkable or overly complex backup routine. http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/labs.html (2 of 17) [25/04/02 11:12:51] LABS – Local Area Backup Solutions that

Without the reliable implementation of an effective backup procedure, mission-critical data can and will again become permanently unavailable.

LABS – Local Area Backup Software

Working hand-in-hand with existing PCs, NAS or traditional file-server storage, LABS is strictly software-enabled through products such as PeerSync, manufactured by Peer Software, that perform and manage file backup and synchronization routines.

Only two storage and hardware components are required for LABS implementation:

A small amount of disk space on each participating PC or workstation where data synchronization and replication software will reside or operate

An installed LAN with primary storage of data on a file server, NAS disk drive, or other storage media, including optical drive.

An optional element is a removable media backup device for backup of the primary storage device.

Synchronization and Replication Software

LABS automatically synchronizes and replicates files and folders among laptops, desktops, servers and any shared storage resource on the LAN. It works with varied network media, including NAS disk drives and optical devices.

Synchronization is the updating of any existing files or addition of new files http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/labs.html (3 of 17) [25/04/02 11:12:51] LABS – Local Area Backup Solutions that in a target folder using a source folder as the guide. Upon completion, the target folder will contain all of the files in the source folder with matching content and time stamps.

Replication is nearly identical to synchronization, except that files that are in the target folder that do not have a matching source file will be deleted.

Synchronization and replication procedures generally include:

Establishing source folders on each participating PC

Establishing target folders on a file server, NAS disk drive, or other attached storage

Automated software launched at time of log on or system start

Scanning of target and source files and folders to identify differences. Synchronization or replication of target by acting on differences.

The synchronization and replication software should prevent loss of data by checking file dates and times to ensure that newer information is not overwritten. Advanced synchronization and replication software will offer some of the following features and customizations enabled by PeerSync, which offers over 100 customizable options:

Setup, modification and administration are simple, including silent enterprise-wide installations

Pre and Post-process scripting integration

Synchronization and replication can occur between mapped or UNC connected drives located on local computers or computer networks

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/labs.html (4 of 17) [25/04/02 11:12:51] LABS – Local Area Backup Solutions that

Fault tolerance providing real-time bi-directional synchronization between storage resources

Files can be included or excluded within synchronization according to standard DOS-type wild cards, sub-string comparisons, file attribute settings or date and size

Wide, rather than ANSI, character strings are supported, thereby enabling specific Asian language and Macintosh file support

Revisioning enables management of additional backup copies of files, thereby giving the user the ability to step back to previous saves of a document

Accidentally deleted files can be immediately restored

True bandwidth throttling in conjunction with buffering

Methods of deployment including scheduled, manual, end-to-end, and real-time, can be used in varying combinations

Real-time method of deployment scans source folders for changes and synchronizes specified target folders as changes occur. Synchronization occurs on an event-driven basis in an independent thread.

Enhanced real-time file monitoring and updating offers real-time stable state detection and synchronization of individual changes to files. Only changes in source files are acted upon. There generally is no scanning of the entire folder in which the change took place, thereby reducing traffic.

Hundreds of source-target folder combinations (filters) can be created and stored in profiles and run through run a GUI front-end (in http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/labs.html (5 of 17) [25/04/02 11:12:51] LABS – Local Area Backup Solutions that the case of PeerSync, the Profiler which generates ASCII text file that contains a description of requested filter scenarios) or command line arguments. While the synchronization of large numbers of folder combinations occurs at once, each combination can have a unique set of rules (e.g., triggers; exceptions) and method of deployment (e.g., real- time).

Multi-threaded filters, allowing filters to run simultaneously through separate threads

A Quick Sync feature that provides easy and persistent synchronization of a work folder through Windows Explorer context menus with the option to modify synchronization criteria at a later time.

Peer-to-Peer Software

While providing the functionality described above, peer-to-peer synchronization/replication software always conducts live comparisons between the target and source lists that reside on different machines. Unlike other systems that rely either on client-server or database-driven (“store or forward”) architectures, peer-to-peer synchronization/replication software operates in isolation from and has no impact on other applications or on database and client-server logic and processes. Data is not stored in a local database and no install of server software is required.

Peer-to-peer synchronization/replication software operates the same on servers as on workstations, and can but does not need to be installed on application or file servers. Synchronization/replication can take place from server to server to server (“server farms”) or among servers, http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/labs.html (6 of 17) [25/04/02 11:12:51] LABS – Local Area Backup Solutions that desktops, laptops, and shared storage resources (such as NAS), (e.g., server to desktop; desktop to laptop).

Software Features

Advanced synchronization and replication software will offer some or all of the following features and customizable options:

Setup, modification and administration are simple, including silent enterprise-wide installations

Pre and post-process scripting integration

Synchronization and replication can occur between mapped or UNC connected drives located on local computers or computer network

Fault tolerance providing real-time bi-directional synchronization between storage resources

FTP site file synchronization that supports proxy servers or firewalls

Instant administrative and user reports, including email notification of synchronization or replication activity sent during or upon completion of operations

Files can be included or excluded within synchronization according to standard DOS-type wild cards, sub-string comparisons, file attribute settings or date and size

Wide (Unicode), rather than ANSI, character strings are supported, thereby enabling specific Asian language and Macintosh file support

Revisioning enables management of additional backup copies of

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/labs.html (7 of 17) [25/04/02 11:12:51] LABS – Local Area Backup Solutions that files, thereby enabling users to step back to previous saves of a document

Accidentally deleted files can be immediately restored

True bandwidth throttling in conjunction with buffering

Methods of deployment including scheduled, manual, end-to-end, and real-time, can be used in varying combinations

Real-time method of deployment scans source folders for changes and synchronizes specified target folders as changes occur. Synchronization occurs on an event-driven basis in an independent thread.

Enhanced real-time file monitoring and updating offers real-time detection and synchronization of individual file changes. Only changes in source files are acted upon. There generally is no scanning of the entire folder in which the change took place, thereby reducing traffic.

Hundreds of source-target folder combinations can be created, stored, and then run through a GUI front-end or launched via command line arguments. While the synchronization of large numbers of folder combinations occurs at once, each combination can have a unique set of rules (e.g., triggers; exceptions) and method of deployment (e.g., real- time, scheduled).

Multi-threaded filters, allowing filters to run simultaneously through separate threads

Quick synchronization features that provides easy and persistent “on the fly” synchronization of a work folder through Windows Explorer context menus with the option to modify synchronization criteria at a later time. http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/labs.html (8 of 17) [25/04/02 11:12:51] LABS – Local Area Backup Solutions that

Setup

Peer- to-peer synchronization and replication software, such as PeerSync, must be installed on each participating PC or workstation. Once installed, a common profile can be configured for all users that utilize users’ logon names or assigned computer names as part of the master path (e.g., \\Server\D\Users\%UserName%). This common profile can reside on the primary storage resource from which a login script can be run and be accessed by all users when they logon, thereby reducing the need to administer each installation.

PeerSync’s Command Line Mode enables the configuration of a truly "hands-off" installation, where operation and distribution occurs from within an easily manageable, administrative environment. Profiles can be executed from logon scripts, system batch or command (CMD) files, detailed shortcuts, and shell commands - while also providing full access to PeerSync Profiler customizable features through command line arguments.

PeerSync can be setup to run as an NT service, enabling the program to run outside of logon/logoff, to process for accounts that are not logged on and to run even when there are no logged-on users.

Creating Backup Sets

Files in source data directories may be monitored according to schedule and/or in real-time. When a file is modified, added or deleted, the change is propagated to the storage resource either within seconds of the change, if monitored in real-time, or within seconds after the requested schedule.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/labs.html (9 of 17) [25/04/02 11:12:51] LABS – Local Area Backup Solutions that Backup routines will vary to match individual requirements. Administrators and users with rights access can modify the scope of the backup. In many installations, users will have no access to the file synchronization and replication software or the backup processes.

Upon initial user logon, for example, a complete scan of selected source folders could be compared to target folders to ensure that all changes have been backed up. This will initiate synchronization that may be necessitated if, for example, the local PC was used while the network was unavailable or a laptop was used off-line. Subsequent backups could be only of file changes (incremental).

LABS Advantages

Utilizing existing network infrastructures, or relatively low cost alternatives such as the addition of NAS disk drives, LABS offers the following systemic benefits to organization of various sizes:

Automated or unattended backup in real-time from any client PC on the network

Provides an easy-to-use, network-based file backup solution for user data

Minimal network overhead. Use of existing hardware or even older unused or underused machines with simple file storage capacity.

Data kept “inside the firewall”

Data moved either real-time or incrementally throughout the day

Continuous on-site access to all stored data from original directory

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/labs.html (10 of 17) [25/04/02 11:12:51] LABS – Local Area Backup Solutions that structures

Continuous access to data if additional storage resource is unavailable or damaged

Central availability of data from numerous machines based on logon name

Continuous availability of network and bandwidth without restriction due to traditional backup requirements

Leveraging of existing network security infrastructure.

LABS does not eliminate traditional backup solutions. Instead, it supplements more traditional systems with an intermediate solution.

For example, LABS works in conjunction with traditional methods for periodic backup to removable media (e.g., tape) for off-site storage. While tape backup and restoration are burdensome, time-consuming, vulnerable to human errors and equipment failure, and constrained by proprietary formats, such limitations are mitigated when tapes are used in conjunctions with LABS solely for the extra protection afforded by off-site storage.

LABS also works with “Electronic Vaulting”, in which both current and archived data can be maintained in a safe and remote environment, such as an Internet data center. Electronic vaulting replaces the multi-day practice of trucking backup tapes to safe centers and bringing them back to restore data in case of disaster.

Data can be replicated first through LABS to a target on the LAN/WAN, and then subsequently replicated to either a remote site of the organization or to servers placed at a rented location, such as an Internet data center or a disaster recovery hot site. This strategy ensures that data http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/labs.html (11 of 17) [25/04/02 11:12:51] LABS – Local Area Backup Solutions that is always available and current in at least two physical locations. Data updates and recoveries can transmit across private networks or across the Internet utilizing Virtual Private Network (VPN) technology, which adds encryption and security, thereby creating a private connection over public networks.

LABS Flexibility within Increased Storage Demand Environment

Compounding their responsibility to ensure data integrity, reliability, and availability, businesses and IT managers face a growing demand for file space. Long the repository for file storage, network file servers require time-consuming upgrades, place an I/O burden on the network and may not be available in case of system failure. Nevertheless, many businesses seek or require either no change in their infrastructure or only minimal change that relieves the immediate file storage demand.

The provision of more comprehensive data backup solutions with greater data availability will be achieved by many organizations only if these solutions rely solely or largely on existing storage infrastructures. LABS implementation and deployment requires no additional infrastructure.

LABS and NAS (Network Attached Storage)

LABS also can leverage the gradual implementation of new storage technology as it is deployed. To meet heterogeneous storage demand or consolidate storage pools without dramatically altering their network infrastructures, some enterprises and small and medium-businesses are adding NAS devices, dedicated, high-speed communicating, single- http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/labs.html (12 of 17) [25/04/02 11:12:51] LABS – Local Area Backup Solutions that purpose machines or components that attach to existing LANs. Data from a file system managed on the NAS device is transferred to clients over standard protocols using standard file sharing, thereby providing additional network file storage. NAS is an increasingly popular choice for expanding storage as it:

Lessens the dependence of data accessibility on file server reliability. It is estimated that over 60% of server failures are caused by problems related to storage. Creating separate storage resources for data increases the availability of such data.

Increases file server efficiency, as increased access demands no longer impede data flow. File servers spend significant proportions of time serving file I/O requests, and even higher proportions serving simultaneous requests.

Operates independent of network servers and communicates directly to the existing LAN and with the client. Files remain available in the event of network server downtime.

Connects directly to the existing LAN, and not to a specific server. Users can access data directly over the network, even if the primary server goes down.

Is relatively easy to install, giving organizations the capacity to quickly add storage.

Utilizing both LABS and NAS enables optimized backups through software, such as PeerSync, featuring peer-to-peer file synchronization and replication. In the case of server failure, LABS can provide alternate access to data maintained on NAS storage as well as prompt recovery. In addition, LABS is not client-server and requires only file sharing capacity on the shared storage resource on which it is installed. LABS eases potential network administration burdens as it operates wholly within http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/labs.html (13 of 17) [25/04/02 11:12:51] LABS – Local Area Backup Solutions that network security infrastructures without opening additional TCP/IP ports.

Illustration

A company has a main office and two district offices. First, the company seeks to install LABS in each office. It wants to synchronize all user data every time a user creates or changes a file or directory on PCs within that office. It also wants this data to be available from different locations on the LAN, as many Company employees work from both a laptop and a desktop within each office. The company also requires that newer files on the target be brought back to the source folders on PCs. In addition, the company also wants to centralize distribution of application patches and upgrades to users at initial login at each office.

The company also seeks to automate, standardize, and centralize backup among the offices.

While the company is considering adding NAS disk drives, it will implement solutions utilizing existing hardware. One server in each office, each with significant remaining storage space, is connected to the WAN and provides file sharing. The main office also has a backup server with removable media.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/labs.html (14 of 17) [25/04/02 11:12:51] LABS – Local Area Backup Solutions that

Synchronization and replication software is installed on all machines on each LAN. A login script copies source-target synchronization/replication instructions from each network server to each PC on the LAN and the synchronization/replication profile is launched from each PC. (If the server goes down, the synchronization/replication software can continue to be run locally.)

Selected source folders on local machines are scanned on desktops and laptops upon login to create accurate synchronization on the target, in this case the local network server. A bi-directional synchronization feature is

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/labs.html (15 of 17) [25/04/02 11:12:51] LABS – Local Area Backup Solutions that enabled which ensures that files on the target that are newer than their corresponding source files will be automatically brought back to the source folders. Any file that has a creation date newer than the last time synchronization was run will be added to the source folders. Subsequently, real-time bi-directional synchronization is persistently deployed throughout the day so that changes in user data are continually moved from the source to the target as changed files are saved and closed. Users are assigned security permissions to the user data directory on the target, thereby making such data available on all machines throughout the LAN, even if an employee’s PC fails. In addition, application patches and upgrades will be distributed from the network servers to the PCs in each office through replication to target directories throughout the LAN of the source directory on the server on which these files are initially collected.

The LABS installation described above enables the persistent local backup of changed files in which PC data is recoverable on demand without the traditional time lag that threatens the loss of the most recent and vital work products. LABS also can be a key component in enabling efficient centralized backups over a WAN.

Utilizing the same peer-to-peer synchronization and replication software, the synchronized directories on each network server - which were the targets from local PC source directories - can be replicated as source directories to target directories on the WAN backup server. Following an initial scan to synchronize the user data directories on the local network servers with directories on the central backup server, changes in the user data directories will be replicated to the backup server in real time. Once again, data is immediately recoverable in case of a machine failure; in this case, if a local network server is unavailable. Periodically, backup data is copied to removable media on the central server and moved off-site. System-wide backup is more automated, reliable, and persistent.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/labs.html (16 of 17) [25/04/02 11:12:51] LABS – Local Area Backup Solutions that PeerSync – File Synchronization and Replication from Peer Software

PeerSync provides a peer-to-peer LABS solution that automatically synchronizes and replicates files and folders among laptops, desktops, servers, and attached storage, including NAS disk drives. The peer-to peer approach always conducts live comparisons between the target and source in all operations. Unlike other systems that rely either on client- server or database-driven (“store or forward”) architectures, PeerSync operates in isolation from other applications and from database and client- server logic and processes without impact on existing applications, environments and application databases.

PeerSync features seamless operation, with the same program executable, on Windows 9x/ME, NT4, 95, 98, NT4 and Windows 2000 on either workstation or server. It has an easy to use graphical interface compatible with Windows 9x/ME, Windows NT4 and Window 2000 that is simple and intuitive.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact Us

PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/labs.html (17 of 17) [25/04/02 11:12:51] Continuous Desktop/Workstation Data Protection

Server Solutions Peer Software's family of file management software keeps information secure, in sync and always available, promoting efficient workflow and collaboration. Pick any scenario and we have a solution that meets your needs-- combining simplicity, power and affordability.

Server Solutions

Installed on the server, PeerSync offers an enterprise wide data management solution. Data can be pulled from the workstations (locally or from remote locations). Applications can be distributed system wide. Servers can be mirrored or replicated. PeerSync features include; Real-Time Monitoring, Email Notification, Detailed Scheduling, Network Load Balancing, Multi-Threading, FTP Site Synchronization, Compression, Unicode Support, Revisioning, Multiple Synchronization Profiles, PeerSync Facilitates: One-to-One, One-to-Many, and more! Many-to-Many File Synchronization, Mirroring, and Replication scenarios. With PeerSync, Real-Time File Backup, File Distribution and Disaster Recovery Recommended Products: PeerSync Pro III is possible across LANs, WANs and VPNs ($499) PeerSync Pro IV

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/servsolutions.html (1 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:54] Continuous Desktop/Workstation Data Protection ($899)

Web Farms

It’s not uncommon for a company to have multiple web-servers running

24x7. Throughout the day files need to be updated. PeerSync can be used to push changes from a master server to the server farm without interrupting service. Also, PeerSync can be used to synchronize data between web-servers in real-time. PeerSync’s speed, reliability, and feature set make it an indispensable tool for web farming.

Recommended Products: PeerSync Pro III ($499) PeerSync Pro IV ($899)

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/servsolutions.html (2 of 2) [25/04/02 11:12:54] PeerSync Installation PeerSync Help Manual Last Updated: 08-03-01

PeerSync Installation PeerSync is shipped (downloaded) in a full installation program. To run, simply double-click on the executable in the Explorer window, or choose "Run" from the Start Menu and then select the application. For networked installations, PeerSync supports silent installation by adding "/S" to the installation application’s command line.

Example: %PATH%/PS60.EXE /S

See Additional Configuration Entries for more Information on silent installation configuration.

Additionally, PeerSync can use the PeerSync60.lic file for larger networked sales and site licensing. This file will be placed in the "PeerSync" folder. If PeerSync detects this file at startup then it will use this data and bypass all other registration security checks. If the PeerSync60.lic file is located in the same folder as the PeerSync installation application, this file will then be automatically placed in the PeerSync installation folder. To obtain a PeerSync60.lic file, please specify your requirements during purchase/registration.

License YOU SHOULD READ CAREFULLY THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE USING OR DISTRIBUTING THIS SOFTWARE. USING OR DISTRIBUTING THIS SOFTWARE INDICATES ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS.

COPYRIGHT

This software program (hereafter the "Software") and documentation (hereafter the "Documentation") is copyrighted and remains the property of Peer Software, Inc. (Formerly known as TDM, Inc.) All rights are reserved.

LICENSE

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (1 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation Peer Software, Inc. hereby grants you (hereafter the "Purchaser") a limited, non-exclusive license to use the Software and accompanying Documentation contained in the trial ware distribution package (hereafter called the "Trial ware Package") you received. The Trial ware Package consists of copies of the Software and Documentation received via an electronic transfer mechanism or an electronic storage medium including, but not limited to, diskette, hard disk, removable disk, tape or optical devices such as CD-ROM or WORM.

You may use the Trial ware Package on one or more computers provided there is no chance that it will used simultaneously on more than one computer. If you need to use the Software on more than one computer simultaneously or on a network, please contact Peer Software, Inc. for information about network licenses.

You are not obtaining title to the Software or Documentation or any copyright rights. You may not sub license, lease, rent, sell, convey, translate, modify, decompile, incorporate into another product, convert to another programming language, reverse engineer or disassemble the Software or Documentation for any purpose.

NETWORK LICENSE

Multiple users on a network (e.g. a LAN) requiring access to the Software and Documentation must purchase a Network License. Two forms of Network Licenses are offered, a Site License and a Concurrent User License. With a Site License, any user who accesses the Software or Documentation requires a user license, regardless of the frequency of use. Once a Site License is purchased, Software and Documentation may be copied to all users who have been licensed.

The Concurrent User License allows the licensed number of users to simultaneously access the Software and Documentation. The Purchaser agrees that he will operate metering software which restricts the simultaneous number of users to the quantity purchased. The Software and Documentation must be installed on network servers under the control of metering software.

Both Site and Concurrent User Licenses allow installation of the Software and Documentation to any number of servers on any number of geographic sites, limited only by the quantity of licenses purchased.

TERM AND TRIAL PERIOD

You are permitted to use the Software Package for a trial period (hereafter the "Trial Period") of a limited amount of days or uses (which ever comes first) after receipt of the Trial ware Package. After such time, if you continue to use the Trial ware Package, you must register your copy with Peer Software, Inc. Failure to register after the Trial Period constitutes termination of this license. Upon registration, a password (hereafter called the "Password") will be provided to eliminate the

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (2 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation registration reminder screen.

This license is effective until terminated. You may terminate it by destroying the Software, Documentation, and all copies thereof. This license will also terminate if you fail to comply with any of the terms or conditions herein. You agree, upon such termination, to destroy all Software, Documentation, and copies thereof.

LIMITED WARRANTY

THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. PEER SOFTWARE, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES RELATING TO THIS SOFTWARE, WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND ALL SUCH WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMED.

EXCLUSIVE REMEDY

YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND PEER SOFTWARE, INC.'S ENTIRE LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTIONS WITH THE SOFTWARE, DOCUMENTATION, AND/OR THIS LICENSE (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR INFRINGEMENT) SHALL BE, AT PEER SOFTWARE, INC.'S OPTION, THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR REFUND OF REGISTRATION FEES.

LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY

IN NO EVENT SHALL PEER SOFTWARE, INC. OR ANYONE ELSE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN THE CREATION, PRODUCTION, OR DELIVERY OF THIS SOFTWARE SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH SOFTWARE EVEN IF PEER SOFTWARE, INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR CLAIMS.

Some states do not allow the exclusion of the limit of liability for consequential or incidental damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you.

BACK-UP

You may make as many copies of the Trial ware Package as you need for back-up purposes only.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (3 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

DISTRIBUTION

You may distribute the Trial ware Package to others via an electronic transfer mechanism or electronic storage media provided that no files are deleted from the Original Distribution Trial ware Package or are modified in any way. Files may be added to the Trial ware Package expressly for the purpose of identifying the party distributing the Trial ware Package. You may also place the Trial ware Package into any archive or compressed format for ease of distribution.

You may not distribute the Password to others under any circumstances.

GENERAL

This agreement shall be governed by the laws of the state of New York and shall inure to the benefit of Peer Software, Inc. and any successors, administrators, heirs, and assigns. Any action or proceeding brought by either party against the other arising out of or related to this agreement shall be brought only in a STATE or FEDERAL COURT of competent jurisdiction located in Suffolk County, New York. The parties hereby consent to appear in person in jurisdiction of said courts.

Registration and Passwords If this is an unregistered or Evaluation Copy of PeerSync, you can register it with Peer Software, Inc. as a fully licensed copy by providing credit card information via phone or secure Internet registration, or by sending a check or money order to the address below (see included "readme.txt" file for pricing information). As an integral component of PeerSync 5.0 and all subsequent versions, the PeerSync Profiler application is included as part of registration.

Register online via secure Internet credit card registration at: www.peersoftware.com Register by phone via credit card by calling: (631) 979-1770 between the hours of 9:00 AM and 4:00 PM EST

Register by FAX via Purchase Order: Send Purchase orders to (631) 979-1870

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (4 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation Register by mail, send check or money order to: Peer Software, Inc. 1363 Veterans Highway, Suite 26 Hauppauge, NY 11788

Information Required: -Full name (as it appears on the credit card) -Address (City, State / Province, Country, and Postal Code) -Phone Number -Entire Card Number -Card Expiration Date -Email Address (Peer Software will send the Authorization Key required to unlock PeerSync’s Evaluation Counter to this )

Quantity Discounts (See Web site or contact us for more information)

Upon registering PeerSync, user information will be generated according to the name and company name (if any) you specified during registration, as well as a password specific to the product version you have licensed. This information will be emailed to you and will be used to activate your current copy. Additional license fees must be paid for multi-user use.

PeerSync may not be commercially distributed or distributed by government agencies including their contractors UNLESS registration fees are paid for by the distributing party.

See License agreement for product redistribution.

See Product Editions and Licensing for different version of the PeerSync and types of licensing we offer.

Note Regarding Updates: As new updates/changes become available, updated versions of the software will be posted on our Internet Web page "www.peersoftware.com." Check this page

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (5 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation periodically to download the latest executables. Your Authorization Key will continue to work with updated versions unless a major release is issued, or PeerSync is installed in a different folder than the previously installed/authorized version.

Entering Your User Information and Password

Through an Evaluation Copy of PeerSync:

After registration with Peer Software, Inc, you will receive Registration Information generated, which is from the information you provided during registration. The password you receive will be specific to the PeerSync product you have licensed and registered with Peer Software. Upon entering valid password and user information into your Evaluation Copy, that copy will be immediately converted to a fully licensed version of the appropriate PeerSync product. The instructions below apply to a "Registered Evaluation Copy" of PeerSync, that being one whose evaluation period is still active.

To activate your registered and licensed PeerSync product, first run your Evaluation Copy of PeerSync. Then choose "About" from the Help Menu located on the far right of the PeerSync Profiler Menu Bar. To activate your registered and licensed PeerSync product, first run your Evaluation Copy of PeerSync. Then choose "About" from the Help Menu located on the far right of the PeerSync Profiler Menu Bar. This opens the About PeerSync screen, which contains "User Name," "Company", "Options" and "Password" fields.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (6 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Be sure to enter this information exactly as you received it, with the same spacing, hyphenation, punctuation, and cases (i.e. if a comma or period contained within a company name is omitted, registration will not be accepted). It is advisable to cut-and-paste passwords directly from the Email registration information. If passwords are typed using lower case letters where upper cases have been indicated, or if other information is typed incorrectly, the message shown below will be displayed. This message indicates that registration was unsuccessful; shows the number of attempts made to register, and contains’ a link to Peer Software, Inc. You will only be allowed a limited number of attempts before the application closes entirely and will need to be opened again in order to retry.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (7 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

If registration is successful, your will receive a success dialog such as that shown below for an Enterprise version of PeerSync. Your Evaluation Copy will have been immediately activated as a registered version of the PeerSync product you have licensed (in this example an Enterprise version), with this change indicated on the interface title bar. Click "OK" on the success dialog to begin usage of your newly activated PeerSync product. You will not have to exit and restart the application to do so.

Through an Unregistered Copy of PeerSync:

Unregistered copies of PeerSync are Evaluation Copies whose evaluation period has expired, or copies into which a valid password and user information has not yet been entered. These copies can still be activated as fully licensed versions of whichever PeerSync product whose usage you have purchased from Peer Software, Inc.

After registration with Peer Software, you will receive Registration Information which is generated from the information you provided during registration. The password you receive will be specific to the PeerSync product you have licensed.

To activate your copy of PeerSync as a fully licensed version, first run the copy. Because your copy is unregistered, the application will not open in its entirety, but the following About PeerSync screen will open. This screen contains "User Name," "Company", "Options" and "Password" fields.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (8 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Be sure to enter this information exactly as you received it, with the same spacing, hyphenation, punctuation, and cases (i.e. if a comma or period contained within a company name is omitted, registration will not be accepted). It is advisable to cut-and-paste passwords directly from the Email registration information. If passwords are typed using lower case letters where upper cases have been indicated, or if other information is typed incorrectly, the message shown below will be displayed. This message indicates that registration was unsuccessful; shows the number of attempts made to register, and contains’ a link to Peer Software, Inc. You will only be allowed a limited number of attempts before the application closes entirely and will need to be opened again in order to retry.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (9 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

If registration is successful, your will receive a success dialog such as that shown below for an Enterprise version of PeerSync. Your copy will now have been immediately activated as a registered version of the PeerSync product you have licensed (in this example an Enterprise version). Click "OK" on the success dialog to begin using your registered copy: the About PeerSync screen will close and the full application interface will be displayed. You will not have to exit and restart the application to begin usage.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS

READ LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THIS PROGRAM.

Please send any suggestions, comments or requests for support to the proprietor of PeerSync:

Peer Software, Inc. 1363 Veterans Highway, Suite 26, Hauppauge, NY 11788 Phone: (631) 979-1770 FAX: (631) 979-1870 Email: [email protected]

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (10 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Copyright 1994-2001, Peer Software, Inc. PeerSync is a registered trademark of Peer Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Reproduction in whole or in part without permission is strictly prohibited.

PeerSync History and Description Welcome to Peer Software, Inc's Folder Synchronization Utility Software, PeerSync. With this utility you will be able to conveniently synchronize folders for back-up purposes or portability requirements. Never again will you overwrite newer data by attempting to manually update an individual file or the contents of a folder.

History PeerSync has been available for download/purchase since early 1995. Since then hundreds of downloads have been logged from the various international forums where PeerSync was made available and thousands of copies have been sold. PeerSync is an MS Windows-based product. Originally written in Visual Basic, the current product is written in Delphi Object Pascal. PeerSync originated as a solution to a problem frequently encountered by our own developers, that of keeping files in sync between multiple hard drives. Developers working on-site at customers’ locations or at home during crunch schedules would then have to synchronize their data back to the office server. This was most often done manually, with each individual file being dragged to the appropriate server folder. Invariably, data would be lost when one or several of the server files contained new information, which was subsequently overwritten. In addition to loss of work and resulting frustration, the process was also time consuming. Anywhere from 20 minutes to 2 hours would be spent during each synchronization. After reviewing several commercially available products, it became apparent that an effective and user-friendly solution to this common problem did not exist: hence the development of PeerSync.

Description Configured through PeerSync Profiler, an intuitive and easy-to-use application, PeerSync automatically synchronizes multiple directories and sub-directories from user-defined Source to Target Folders. While removing the frustration and loss of time associated with manual synchronization, PeerSync prevents loss of data by checking file dates and times to ensure that newer information is not overwritten. Synchronization can occur between any mapped or UNC connected drives located on local computers or computer networks.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (11 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation While processing and performing any number of simultaneous tasks, PeerSync retains and expands upon the selectivity and precision of manual synchronization by offering a suite of automated file inclusion and exclusion features. Files can be included within synchronization according to standard DOS-type wild cards and excluded using sub-string comparisons or file attribute settings. Files can be also be excluded according to their date and size. In addition, PeerSync can be configured to update or add files, which are out-dated, or non-existent in the current Target Folder. Precision and scope are further enhanced through PeerSync Filters and Command Line Modes. A virtually unlimited number of folder combinations (Filters) can be created and stored in Profiles which can be run manually or automatically using command line arguments. While synchronizing large numbers of folder combinations at once, each combination can have a unique set of exceptions. In this way PeerSync combines the benefits of precise folder matching with that of an automated environment. Real-time Source Folder monitoring and repetitive operations on the host PC are also available with PeerSync’s options. PeerSync can also be used for network file management purposes. Reports run during synchronization can display added, updated, and opened files as well as directories created, and can display unmatched files found in Target directories.

Command Line Arguments PeerSync’s Command Line Mode offers users the ability to configure a truly "hands-off" installation, where operation and distribution occurs from within an easily manageable, administrative environment. This mode allows Profiles to be executed from logon scripts, system batch (BAT) or command (CMD) files, detailed shortcuts, and shell commands -- while also providing full access to PeerSync Profiler features through command line arguments.

Profiles will need to be created through PeerSync Profiler first in order to be further modified through the arguments described in this topic (See PeerSync Profiler Overview and related Help Topics).

Command Line Arguments are entered into a Profile shortcut, created during build through the "Add to Desktop" Button found on Profiler’s Startup Options screen.

Note: For the command line arguments described in this topic, note that attention is paid to punctuation, to the order in which arguments are entered, and that appropriate spaces are used to separate these arguments. Follow the format outlined in the examples provided.

Also: Profile .SNC file names are the only command line variables associated with operation of PeerSync Profiler. All other arguments described in this topic are used to configure operation of the PeerSync engine and its execution of

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (12 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Profiles.

Profiler Command Line Arguments As noted above, Profile (.SNC) file names are the only variables associated with operation of PeerSync Profiler. To change an .SNC file name through the command line:

I. Right click the Profile shortcut you created during build (see StartUp Options, "Add to Desktop" Button).

II. Select the "Properties" item from the pop-up menu.

III. Select the "Shortcut" tab. As shown in the following sample, the "Target" field will contain a command line for the Profile, where "Profile One" represents a sample Profile name:

"C:\Program Files\PeerSync\PeerSync.exe" "C:\Program Files\PeerSync\Profile One.SNC" /A /M

I. Manually change the Profile Name to reflect that of the new .SNC file.

II. Click "OK."

PeerSync Command Line Arguments The following arguments are appended to the end of the command line followed by a space and forward slash (i.e. /A). A space and forward slash are also used to separate each additional argument (i.e. /A /M).

Note: Command line arguments can also be identified through hints displayed on the Profiler interface. If you have selected to display hints through the View Menu (either on the application interface or in its Status Bar), a hint will be displayed for Profiler features upon passing the mouse cursor over them. These hints will display both a description of the feature as well as its related command line argument (if any).

Command Line Arguments:

/A (Run Automatically): If this argument is appended to the command line, the Profile can be run through its associated shortcut. As non-persistent processes, Automatic Operations are run a single time upon manual initiation by the user.

Example: "C:\PeerSync\PeerSync50.exe" "Profile One.SNC" /A

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (13 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

/AP (Run a Pre-Sync Report): If the /AP argument is used a Pre-Sync Report will be generated and files/folders will not be synchronized. If you add an O to the /AP then the previous Pre-Sync report will be Over written, if you exclude the O then the file will be appended to an existing Pre-Sync report. If you add an S to the /AP then the Pre-Sync report will be Shown at the end of the run (i.e.: /AP, /APO, /APOS or /APS).

/C (Custom Configuration Files): A user-generated Configuration File can be automatically loaded by using the /C command line argument followed by a colon and the file name ( /C:FILENAME ):

Example: "C:\PeerSync\PeerSync50.EXE" "/C:C:\PeerSync\MyConfig.CFG"

/D (Delay Warning): To have a delay warning dialog box displayed prior to Automatic Operation, enter a blank space, then add /D and then the desired length of delay (in seconds) to the end of the command line. If you’ve chosen this option any Automatic Operation can be canceled through this dialog box if done so within the designated interval. For example, /D5 would provide you with a 5 second delay during which the operation can be canceled. This delay can only be used with Automatic Operations.

Example: "C:\PeerSync\PeerSync50.EXE" "Profile 1.SNC" /A /D5

Note: If the /D argument includes an H, i.e. DH60, then the delay timer will be hidden during operation. This feature is intended for systems that run PeerSync upon starting Windows. This will allow PeerSync to begin after other applications have been loaded.

Default Folders: Additional command line arguments can designate default folders for PeerSync to synchronize upon launch. If one folder name is entered as follows, that folder will be selected by default for both Source and Target:

Example: "C:\PeerSync\PeerSync50.EXE" "C:\DOCS"

If two folders are listed, separated by a space, the first folder becomes the default Source folder and the second becomes the default Target folder.

Example: "C:\DOCS" "G:\DOCS"

Note: For variable command line folder paths, see Folder Selection Help.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (14 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

DLL file to improve interaction with WordPerfect v8 and v9: Working with the Corel corporation, Peer Software, Inc. developed a 3rd party utility that disabled the Save function in WordPerfect for "unmodified" documents. This reduces the possible "File Access Denied" error that WordPerfect produces when PeerSync is synchronizing the active document. To use this option you must rerun the PeerSync installation program a second time. The file "PSWPMod.DLL" will be installed in the Windows System32 folder.

For WordPerfect 9, add "/WPMOD9" (or "/WPMOD" default) on the PeerSync command line, which will modify the registry as follows:

Key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\COREL\WordPerfect\9\Third Party

String: DLL16

Value: C:\WinNT\System32\PSWPMod.DLL

For WordPerfect 8, add "/WPMOD8" on the PeerSync command line, which will modify the registry as follows:

Key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\COREL\WordPerfect\8\Third Party

String: DLL16

Value: C:\WinNT\System32\PSWPMod.DLL

Note: The DLL16 string may vary based on the installation of other 3rd party add-ons to your WordPerfect installation. The value could be DLL15, DLL14, etc.

/E (Suppress Real-time Filters): This argument will suppress real-time Filters until the initial synchronization has completed.

/GAn (Set Empty file delay time): If file size is 0 bytes then delay n milliseconds and check file size again. If byte count is then greater than 0, try sending again.

/GBn (Set Shadow Detection Sensitivity): Set amount of time (in milliseconds) to allow multiple changes to be ignored for same file in real-time detection mode. Default is 250 milliseconds (1/4 of a second)

/GCn (Set file comparison value to add to target file): Set the amount of time in seconds to http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (15 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation be added to the target file for comparison purposes. This option is useful when comparing source and target files that reside on computers that are running different operating systems. File time conversion can vary between half and one and a half seconds causing PeerSync to force file to be updated when they are actually unchanged. Default is 1.

/H (Hide Splash Screen): Available through all registered versions of PeerSync, this argument will suppress and hide the splash screen for both the PeerSync and PSProfiler applications.

/I (Ignore Target Drive Space): The /I argument configures PeerSync to attempt file synchronization without first checking for available Target drive space.

/J (Move Files After Sync): The /J argument configures PeerSync to delete Source files after successful copy to Target.

/K5 (Display activity back to Profiler): This argument will display activity and statistics back to the Profiler Current Profile Activity screen.

/M (Show as Tray Icon): If this argument is used, a tray icon will be shown during execution of the Profile by the PeerSync engine.

/MCT:n (Multiple Copy Threads): This argument will allow for multiple copy threads during synchronization which will allow for parallel synchronization of files (i.e. /MCT:25).

/MFT:n (Multiple Filter Threads): This argument will allow for multiple Filter threads during synchronization which will allow for parallel synchronization of Filters (i.e. /MFT:200).

/NDD (Use Universal System event detection method): This argument disables use of the Windows NT device driver.

Note: The device driver is required during Real-time Operations for non-NT drives.

/O (Overwrite Target Files): The /O argument configures PeerSync to always overwrite http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (16 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Target files regardless of their date.

/PERFORMANCEn (PeerSync Priority Performance: n = 0-2): This command line argument will set the main application and real-time detection threads in PeerSync to pre determined levels 0-low, 1-normal or 2-high.

/PRIORITYAPPn (PeerSync Application thread: n = 0-2): This command line argument will override the Performance setting and set the main PeerSync Application thread in PeerSync to the selected level. The following describes each priority setting.

0 = IDLE_PRIORITY_CLASS Specify this class for a process whose threads run only when the system is idle. The threads of the process are preempted by the threads of any process running in a higher priority class. An example is a screen saver. The idle-priority class is inherited by child processes.

1 = NORMAL_PRIORITY_CLASS Specify this class for a process with no special scheduling needs.

2 = HIGH_PRIORITY_CLASS Specify this class for a process that performs time-critical tasks that must be executed immediately. The threads of the process preempt the threads of normal or idle priority class processes. An example is Windows Task List, which must respond quickly when called by the user, regardless of the load on the operating system. Use extreme care when using the high-priority class, because a high-priority class application can use nearly all available CPU time.

/PRIORITYRTn (Real-time detection thread: n = 0-6): This command line argument will override the Performance setting and set the real-time detection thread in PeerSync to the selected level. The Default is tpNormal unless the application is in Enhanced real-time mode then it gets set to tpHighest. The following describes each priority setting.

0 = tpIdle The thread executes only when the system is idle-Windows won't interrupt other threads to execute a thread with tpIdle priority.

1 = tpLowest The thread's priority is two points below normal.

2 = tpLower The thread's priority is one point below normal.

3 = tpNormal The thread has normal priority.

4 = tpHigher

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (17 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

The thread's priority is one point above normal.

5 = tpHighest The thread's priority is two points above normal.

6 = tpTimeCritical The thread gets highest priority.

/Progress (Show Progress during synchronization): When this command line argument is sent to PeerSync the Profiler will be started and will display the synchronization progress.

/Q (Monitoring Target Folders): The /Q argument configures PeerSync to monitor the Target Folder automatically.

/R (Real-time Monitoring Argument): The /R argument activates Real-time Mode.

Example: "PeerSync50.exe" "MyProfile.Snc" /A /M /R or "PeerSync50.exe" "C:\MyData C:\Target" /A /R

Note: The /A argument must also be used in order for /R to be recognized.

Monitoring Requirements and Additional Commands:

If the "Include Sub Folders" option has been chosen from the Folder Selection Screen, then the active folder and all sub-folders will be monitored as a single selection.

Network folders are only checked for changes made from the monitoring PC. If the network folders are changed by another user on the network, this change will not be detected.

If changes occur during a long update, requests for additional updates are added to a queue and processed by active folder first, then first-in, first-out (FIFO). To set an interval (in seconds) determining how frequently the queue will be checked, add an S to the /R argument followed by the desired number of seconds (i.e. /RS5 for 5 seconds). The default interval is one second.

You can set the number of changes that must occur to the monitored folders before the synchronization process will begin. To set this change count, use the argument /W followed by a number indicating the desired number of changes (i.e. /W3).

Note: The /W argument will be disabled if /S is being used, or if the "Run Filter Every X Minutes" option has

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (18 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

been checked on Profiler’s Automation screen.

/ROxCz (Retry Open Files): When PeerSync cannot copy an open Source file, this option will automatically place the open file information into a list that will be retried on a recurring basis and can be limited to the number of retry attempts. A sample command line argument for this option would be /RO30C10, where /R starts Real-time Operations; O30 turns on the Open file retry and repeats the attempt every 30 seconds, and C10 (optional) sets the number of tries (Count) attempted before no additional attempts will be made. The default setting directs PeerSync to repeat continuously until a file is synchronized.

/S (Run Scheduled Operation): The /S argument enables or disables Scheduled Operation Mode for the entire Profile. This option must be selected in order for all Scheduled Operations set for individual Filters to be recognized. Scheduled Mode does not apply a global schedule to the entire Profile: rather, it enables those schedules set for all individual Filters on to run at their specified intervals.

All Scheduled Operations set for individual Filters will be ignored if this mode is not selected. If none of the Filters within a Profile are set for Scheduled Operation and this mode is selected, all active Filters within the Profile will be assigned a default synchronization schedule of five minutes.

/Sx (Synchronization Timer Argument): The /Sx option is used to run Peer Sync automatically at regular intervals. This argument sets PeerSync to synchronize the selected Profile every x minutes. Through this option PeerSync remains persistent and will not terminate upon completion.

Example: "PeerSync50.exe" "MyProfile.Snc" /A /M /S10 (Synchronization will be performed every 10 minutes)

or

Example: "PeerSync50.exe" "C:\MyData C:\Target" /A /M /S10 (Synchronization will be performed every 10 minutes)

/SxKz (Synchronization Timer Argument with Keyboard Activity): The /SxKz option is used to run PeerSync automatically at regular intervals only when it senses keyboard activity. This argument sets PeerSync to synchronize the selected Profile every x minutes upon Keyboard activity and will always run every z cycles with/without keyboard activity. The z is optional and

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (19 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation will be ignored if set to 0. Through this option PeerSync remains persistent and will not terminate upon completion.

/T (Terminate Running Copies of PeerSync): This argument broadcasts a terminate message to any currently running copies of the program, and will subsequently terminate the copy from which the command was launched. This can be useful when updating the application from a remote network source.

/TD (Display notice upon completion of synchronization): This argument will display a notice at the end of a manual synchronization with messages, summary information, files added, files updated, files excluded and files deleted.

/TIME (Daily Timer): This argument will allow for scheduling of PeerSync for specific times of the day down to the minute for selected days of the week and selected Filters within a Profile.

If you use a /TIMEF argument all selections at the Filter level from the Automation screen will be used.

You can also specify Global Daily Timer selections for the entire profile from the Operation Mode Screen or by using the following format:

1. Select the time of day (by default all Filters will be run all days)

/TIME:HH:MM Where HH is replaced with the value of 00-23 in military time and MM is replaced with 00-59 in minutes

Examples: Every Day at 12:00 am: /TIME:00:00 Every Day at 1:00 am: /TIME:01:00 Every Day at 8:00 am: /TIME:08:00 Every Day at 12:00 pm: /TIME:12:00 Every Day at 8:00 pm: /TIME:20:00

2. (Optional) - To select the days of week to run append the following:

D:SMTWTFS Where the days are substituted with 1 (On) and 0 (Off)

Sunday: D:1000000 Monday: D:0100000 Tuesday: D:0010000 http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (20 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Wednesday: D:0001000 Thursday: D:0000100 Friday: D:0000010 Saturday: D:0000001

Examples: M, W & F at 8:00 am: /TIME:08:00D:0101010 Sat & Sun at 5:15 pm: /TIME:17:15D:1000001 Mon - Fri at 3:30 am: /TIME:03:30D:0111110

3. (Optional) - To select the Filters to run append F:f1;f2;f3

Where f1-fn are the Filter numbers.

Examples: Filter 1 Every day at 6:00 am: /TIME:06:00F:1 Filters 1 - 5 Every day at 8:25 pm: /TIME:20:25F:1;2;3;4;5 Filters 1, 3 & 5 Mon - Fri at 3:30 am: /TIME:03:30D:0111110F:1;3;5

Note: Will accept multiple command lines.

Example: Filter 1 Every day at 8:00 am, Filters 1 - 5 Every day at 8:25 pm and Filters 1, 3 & 5 Mon - Fri at 3:30 am /TIME:08:00F:1 /TIME:20:25F:1;2;3;4;5 /TIME:03:30D:0111110F:1;3;5

Sample: Complete command line to run PeerSync with Test.snc, all Filters, at 3:00 am Mon -Fri, (M)inimized on the tray. "C:\Program Files\PeerSync\PeerSync.exe" "C:\Program Files\PeerSync\test.snc" /TIME:3:00D:0111110 /M

/UDD (Use Device Driver method): This argument uses of the Windows NT device driver for real-time detection.

/< (Applications to Ignore): If using the Device Driver method for real-time detection you can select applications to ignore by appending application names (semicolon delimited) to the /< argument.

Example: /

/V (Verify User Logon): The /V argument verifies that the last known PeerSync user name (from logon name) matches that of the currently logged user. If the names do not match, a

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (21 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation notification dialog will be displayed. To disable the dialog warning and exit PeerSync if the user names do not match, enter an R to the /V argument, i.e. /VR.

Note: User names will not be stored for future comparison unless this function has been activated.

Note: Unlike other command line arguments, this function is not accessible through a corresponding feature on the Profiler interface.

/W (Change Count before Sync): This argument is used in conjunction with /R to set the number of changes that must occur to the monitored folders before the synchronization process will begin. To set this change count, use /W followed by a number indicating the desired number of changes (i.e. /W3).

Note: The /W argument will be disabled if /S is being used, or if the "Run Filter Every X Minutes" option has been checked on Profiler’s Automation screen.

/X (Disable Initial Synchronization During Startup): The /X command line argument disables initial synchronization during /A /M /R operations at PeerSync startup

Quick-Sync Quick-Sync Folder selection directly from MS Windows Explorer

This feature is a quick and easy way to synchronize folder(s) on the fly to backup location(s) with the option to modify your filtering criteria at a later time.

Simply right click on any folder you wish to sync and select "Quick-Sync Folder..."

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (22 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

This will launch PSWizard, which will ask you to select a target folder to sync to...

...and your ready to run the Quick-Sync. You also have the options to edit and/or add the current sync Filter to your Quick-Sync Profile or any other selected Profile.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (23 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Anytime you select a folder if it matches any source or target selections in the Quick-Sync Profile then the Filters will be listed to pick from or you have the option to add a new Filter.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (24 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Overview (See Next: Menus)

With the 6.0 release of PeerSync, Peer Software Inc. introduced an even easier, more efficient, and more comprehensive way to execute our proven method for local and network-wide file synchronization and management: PeerSync Profiler. This application allows users to configure a vast number of different and highly specified tasks through a single browser-style interface - without requiring direct interaction with the PeerSync software engine.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (25 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Profiler is used to create PeerSync Profiles. A Profile can contain as many as 255 individual synchronization tasks, or Filters. A Filter is defined by identifying a Source Folder, a Target Folder (to which the contents of the Source will be synchronized), and then choosing from more than 80 easily specified Filter Settings. These settings determine which contents will be synchronized, in what manner, and when they will be synchronized -- according to your choice of Real-time, Scheduled, or manually initiated operations. The process of building a Profile is made quick and simple by allowing you to easily create Filters and then follow the sequentially arranged list of Settings screens accessed through the Selection

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (26 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation Tree, which is located on the left side of the application interface. The user begins by first selecting a single Filter or multiple Filters from the Profile Filter List.Then specific synchronization criteria are applied to the selected items using Filter Settings. Once synchronization criteria have been configured for each Filter, Global Settings are used to define and execute launch of the entire Profile. By offering a Tool Button Toolbar as well as separate Selection Tree and Profile Filter List windows, Profiler’s browser-based interface allows you to easily view, create, copy, rename, move, or delete Filters regardless of which Settings screen is currently being displayed.

Product Definitions

Synchronization: Updating any existing files or adding new files in the target folder using the source folder as the guide. When completed, the target folder should contain all of the files in the source folder with matching content and time stamps.

Replication: Same as synchronization, except files that are in the target folder that do not have a matching source file will be deleted.

Profiles: A Profile is a description of a complete synchronization scenario. Profiles can contain many source-target combinations allowing the end-user to define very detailed file synchronizations and run them all within a single request. For example, you could build a profile that contains multiple source and target folders such as:

Source = C:\My Documents Target = N:\USERS\TEST\My Documents Source = D:\LocalData Target = N:\USERS\TEST\LocalData Source = C:\WINDOWS\Profiles Target = N:\USERS\TEST\Profiles

Each of these Source-Target entries can then be further detailed with more than 65 options each making each entry a completely self contained process, and still allowing it to be run as part of a bigger set or Profile.

Filters: A filter is a single entry in a profile. A Profile can contain from one to 255 filters and each filter contains more than 80 individual option settings.

Real-Time Mode: In this mode of operation, PeerSync will automatically detect changes made to the source folder(s) and execute the synchronization options selected for the matching filter. Typically, the target folder is updated with the source folder change within moments of the change. Note that PeerSync may have completed the operation before Windows actually displays the change in the target folder Explorer window.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (27 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation Scheduled Mode: In this mode of operation, PeerSync will execute the designated filter at the selected time. Each filter in the profile can have the same or different time interval.

Product Support

All support of PeerSync products will be handled on our web site (www.peersoftware.com) support page or by sending email to our support box at [email protected].

The manufacturer of PeerSync makes no warranties, implied or otherwise, for use of this product. User assumes all responsibility for any data loss or damage.

Menus (See Next: Tool Buttons)

In addition to special options found only on Profiler menus, menu items replicate those features accessed through Profiler Tool Buttons. As a result, you can still access essential Profile and Filter Settings even if you have chosen to hide Tool Buttons using the View Menu.

File: This menu includes items allowing you to create and save new Profiles, open existing Profiles, create Profile desktop shortcuts, and exit the application. New: Create a new Profile. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Open: Open an existing Profile. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Reopen: Reopen a recently used Profile. Save: Save the current Profile. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Save as: Rename and save the current Profile. Profile - Revert to Saved: Revert to the last saved settings of the current Profile. Profile - Merge Existing: Merge an existing Profile into the current Profile. Profile - Create Shortcut on Desktop: Create and add a shortcut to PeerSync of the current

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (28 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation Profile and settings/command line arguments to the desktop. Profile - Save Defaults: Save the current settings of the Profile as the default settings. Exit: Close/exit the application.

Edit: Allows you to move one step up or down between Selection Tree options screens while providing a shortcut to the Current Profile Activity screen. Back: Move back to the previous screen. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Next: Move on to the next screen. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Current Profile Activity: Go to the Current Profile Activity screen.

View: Allows you to change the appearance of the application interface. "Hint" items enable or disable pop-up hints activated by passing the mouse pointer over interface features, as well as those displayed in the Status Bar located at the bottom of the application interface. In addition to a description of Profiler features, hints will identify command line arguments associated with those features (if any). Toolbars - Tool Buttons: Show/hide the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Toolbars - Profile Description: Show/hide the Profile Description Toolbar. Toolbars - with Hot Tracks: Show/hide the hot tracks features for the Toolbars. Toolbars - with Text Labels: Show/hide description text labels for the Toolbars. Selection Tree: Show/hide the Selection Tree left side panel. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Status Bar: Show/hide the Status Bar at the bottom of the application. Hints - on Application: Show/hide pop-up hints displayed on the application. Hints - on Status Bar: Show/hide hints displayed on the Status Bar.

Options: Allows you to select options pertaining to the way PeerSync, the Profiler and the Wizard interact with each other and Windows Explorer. Use Wizard to Add Filters: If selected, directs Profiler to open the PeerSync Wizard application as an easier and more simple way to add new Filters to a Profile. If not selected, the http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (29 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Add Filter option will use the saved Filter defaults. This feature is toggled on or off depending on which option was used the last time that a Filter was added (with Defaults or with Wizard). Create SNC extension association: If selected, creates an association of any file that has an SNC extension with the Profiler to be used as the default application to open these files. If not selected, the association of SNC files with the Profiler will be removed. This feature is also accessible from the Startup Options screen. Add Quick-Sync Folder option to Explorer menu: If selected, will add our Quick-Sync feature to Windows Explorer. To access this feature simply right-click on any folder in Explorer or on your Desktop and you will be able to sync the folder to selected target folder(s), add the job to a Quick-Sync Profile that is stored out in memory and given the ability to modify/add to the jobs using the Profiler. This feature is also accessible from the Startup Options screen.

Run: Allows you to Launch the Current Profile, Terminate the Active Profile and Update the Current Profile. Launch Current Profile: This option will launch the current Profile (filter/global settings) in PeerSync. During this process, an instance of PeerSync will be started with the the current Profile as the first parameter and the arguments selected from the Operation Mode screen as the subsequent parameters. You can automate this process via a shortcut, through the startup folder, in the registry or as a service by selecting one of these features from the StartUp Options screen. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Terminate Active Profile: This option, when available, will allow a user to terminate an instance of PeerSync that contains an active Profile that is connected to the Profiler. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Update Current Profile: This option, when available, will allow a user to update an instance of PeerSync with the current Profile opened in the Profiler. Note: Because it is separate from the core software engine, the Profiler allows you to create and configure new Profiles while PeerSync runs Synchronization Operations at optimum efficiency. In both this Help file and on Profiler screens "Current" refers to the Profile currently being configured but not yet launched, while "Active" most often refers to the Profile presently being run by the PeerSync engine.

Filter: Allows you to manipulate Filters within the current Profile. If "Allow Multiple Selection" has been checked on this menu you will be able to select and apply settings to multiple Filters.

Add - Filter with Defaults: Creates and adds a Filter to the current Profile using the saved

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (30 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation Filter defaults. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar and the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Add - Filter with Wizard: Opens the PeerSync Wizard application which allows you to select a pre determined canned scenario and add it as a Filter to the current Profile. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar and the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Copy: Creates a duplicate copy of the currently selected Filter and all of its settings. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar and the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Rename: Allows for the renaming of the selected Filter. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar and the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Delete: Allows for the deletion of the currently selected Filter(s). This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar and the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Clear All: Will close the current Profile allowing for the user to create a new Profile.

Select All: Will select all of the Filters.

Invert Selection: Will change the selected state of all the Filters.

Allow Multiple Selection: Gives the ability to select and apply settings to multiple Filters.

Move Up: Moves the currently selected Filter up one in the list. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar and the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Move Down: Moves the currently selected Filter down one in the list. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar and the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Save Defaults: Stores the currently selected Filter Settings as the default for all subsequent new added Filters.

Help: While allowing you to access Help files and the About screen, this menu also provides demonstrations of PeerSync's Real-time Monitoring and Scheduled Operation modes.

Demos - Real-time Monitoring: This feature will start an instance of PeerSync in a demo mode to display it's real-time synchronization capabilities. Demos - Scheduled Operations: This feature will start an instance of PeerSync in a demo

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (31 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation mode to display it's scheduled synchronization capabilities. Web Site: This menu item will have many links back to our web site for product information, downloads, updates and support. PeerSync Help: Will open the application help file to the contents section. You may also access specific parts of the help file for features you are currently observing by pressing 'F1' on your keyboard. License Information: Will display the different Product Editions and Licensing available for PeerSync, as well as, what the current edition has available and other useful information about the current package you are running. About PeerSync: Will display an about screen, that contains information about the current package you are running.

Evaluation: Only displayed in evaluation copies of the software, this menu item will contain features that we believe are helpful to the user during evaluation such as demos, read me files and other evaluation oriented features.

View Popup Menu: Activated by right clicking on the application Menu, Tool Buttons Toolbar, Profile DescriptionToolbar or the Status Bar, you can select many of the options available from the application View Menu.

Tool Buttons (See Next: Profile Description)

Profiler offers a simple set of browser-style Tool Buttons allowing you to easily modify the current Profile and its Filters, regardless of which screen has been chosen from the Selection Tree. These Buttons can be hidden by un checking the "Tool Buttons" option, accessed through the "Toolbars" item on the View Menu. Even if this Toolbar has been hidden you will still be able to access its options by using the File, Edit, and Filter Menus. You can also change the placement of these Buttons by clicking on the left side of the Toolbar and dragging it to rest above or below the

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (32 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation Profile Description Toolbar. The following descriptions are listed in the order in which they appear left to right on the Tool Buttons Toolbar and are all accessible via the application Menus.

New Profile: Located on the far left of the Toolbar, this Button creates a new Profile. If another Profile containing unsaved changes is currently open when this Button is pressed, a dialog box will open asking you if you want to save changes to the current Profile before opening a new one. (See Save Profile Button Below). If you choose "No," the new Profile will replace the current one and no changes will be saved. Note: If the current Profile has not been previously saved and "No" is chosen, the entire Profile will be lost.

Open Profile: This Button displays a "Select Profile File" dialog box allowing you to open an existing Profile. By default, it will open in the path in which PeerSync has been installed (i.e. C:\Program Files\PeerSync). Links to previously opened Profiles can be accessible through a drop-down list opened by clicking on the arrow key attached to this Button.

Save Profile: This Button allows you to save new Profiles, or save changes made to existing Profiles. If you are saving a new Profile, a "Save As" dialog box will open allowing you to name and store it as an .SNC file in your choice of folders, with "NewProfile" as the default name and the path in which PeerSync has been installed as the default directory. Profiles and Profile modifications must be saved in order to be subsequently accessible.

Launch Current Profile: This option will launch the current Profile (filter/global settings) in PeerSync. During this process, an instance of PeerSync will be started with the the current Profile as the first parameter and the arguments selected from the Operation Mode screen as the subsequent parameters. You can automate this process via a shortcut, through the startup folder, in the registry or as a service by selecting one of these features from the StartUp Options screen.

Terminate Active Profile: This option, when available, will allow a user to terminate an instance of PeerSync that contains an active Profile that is connected to the Profiler.

Add Filter: This Button adds a Filter to the bottom of the current list (See Profile Filter List). Filters are named "New Filter Item" and assigned a number by default. If you have selected

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (33 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation "Use Wizard to Add New Filters" from the Options Menu, the PeerSync Wizard application will open when this Button is pressed. The Wizard provides a guided, step-by-step method for creating and configuring new Filters. A drop-down list attached to this Button also allows you to choose between "Add Filter With Wizard" or "Add Filter With Defaults" options. If the former is chosen, PeerSync Wizard will open every time this Button is pressed. If the latter is chosen, new Filters added to the list through this Button will be configured manually using Selection Tree screens. These Filters will use whichever default settings are currently applied (See Filter Menu, "Save Defaults"). Note: The first time "Add Filter With Wizard" is chosen from the drop-down list, the Wizard application will open. After that point PeerSync Wizard will be launched by pressing the Add Filter Button.

Copy Filter: Creates a copy of the currently selected Filter and places it at the bottom of the Profile Filter List. Copies will be numbered by default and named after the original (i.e. "Copy 1 of My Syncs").

Rename Filter: Allows you to rename the currently selected Filter. Filters can also be renamed manually by clicking on them after they have been highlighted.

Delete Filter: Deletes the currently selected Filter(s). When this Button is pressed, a dialog box will open asking you to confirm deletion. Filters can also be deleted by selecting them and then pressing the DELETE key on your keyboard.

Move Filter Up: Moves the currently selected Filter up one place within the Profile Filter List.

Move Filter Down: Moves the currently selected Filter down one place within the Profile Filter List.

Show Selection Tree: Shows or hides the Selection Tree. It the Tree has been hidden, its space will be filled within the interface by the currently selected Settings screen. When the tree is hidden, screens can still be selected using the drop-down list attached to the Back Button.

Back: Using the order shown in the Selection Tree, this Button opens the screen located immediately above that which is currently being displayed. Settings screens can also be

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (34 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation accessed using the drop-down list located on the right side of the Back Button; list items follow the same order as that shown on the Selection Tree.

Next: Using the order shown in the Selection Tree, this Button opens the Profile Options screen located immediately below the screen currently being displayed.

Profile Description (See Next: Profile Filter List)

This field displays a textual description of the current Profile. By default the description for an unsaved Profile will read "Profile Filter List." Unless you enter a unique description into this field, a default description will be assigned upon saving the Profile: this default description will match the new Profile name.

Descriptions can be changed at any time; like all Profiler configurations they must be saved prior to closing the Profile or application in order to be stored. You can change the placement of the Profile Description Toolbar by clicking on its left side and dragging it to rest above or below the Tool Buttons Toolbar. The Profile Description can also be hidden by un checking the "Profile Description" option, accessed through the "Toolbars" item on the View Menu.

Profile Filter List (See Next: Selection Tree)

Located beneath the Toolbars, this window displays all Filters associated with the current Profile. Use of this list is central to the Profile-building process: all configurations made on the Filter Settings screens (accessed through the Selection Tree) will only be applied to those Filters currently selected from this list.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (35 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

To select a Filter, highlight it using the left mouse Button. The "Allow Multiple Selection" item must be checked on the Filter Menu in order to select and have settings applied to multiple Filters. To select multiple adjacent Filters, highlight the first Filter, hold down the SHIFT key on your keyboard, and then highlight the last Filter you wish to include. You can also hold down the SHIFT key and then use the up or down arrow keys on your keyboard. To select multiple nonadjacent Filters, highlight the first Filter, then hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard and click on each additional Filter you wish to include. Once you have selected a Filter or Filters, move through the screens found on the Selection Tree and apply settings as desired. Highlighting on the selected Filter(s) will appear gray as you move through these screens, indicating that any settings will only be applied to those selected Filters. Screens found under the Global Settings section of the tree apply to entire Profiles only, as opposed to individual Filters.

Note: The Profile Filter List window will appear gray when global or Profile-related screens, such as those found under Global Settings, are chosen from the Selection Tree. The box appearing to the left of each Filter must be checked in order for that Filter to be included in the active Profile when launched. Although unchecked Filters will not be processed upon launch, they will be saved within the Profile for future use and/or selection.

Upon creating a new Profile, an initial Filter will be displayed bearing the name "New Filter Item 1" by default (this applies to manual Filter creation only). The first New Filter added within an existing Profile will also bear this name. Successive Filters will be named "New Filter Item 2," "New Filter Item 3," etc. Any selected Filter can be renamed through the "Rename" Tool Button, through items found on both the Filter Menu and Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu described below, or manually by selecting it a second time using the left mouse Button. In both new and stored Profiles, you can navigate the Profile Filter List as well as add, copy, delete, and navigate Filters using the Tool Buttons, using items from the Filter Menu, and by using items found on the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu described below. You can also navigate the list and delete items using the DELETE and up and down arrow keys on your keyboard. Note: In order to navigate or modify the Profile Filter List you must have first clicked somewhere within the Profile Filter List window: this ensures that during configuration any options chosen from the Selection Tree Settings screens are applied exclusively to the currently selected Filter. The height of the Profile Filter List window can be changed by passing the mouse pointer over its

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (36 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation bottom border until a double/Arrow cursor appears, then dragging the window to meet the desired size. At minimum size, only a single Filter may be viewed. Adding a new Filter while this view is in effect prompts display of up and down arrow Buttons in the right side of the window. These Buttons allow you to view different Filters within the list.

Pop-Up Menu: Activated by right clicking on the Profile Filter List, this menu duplicates the mostly used features found on the Filter Menu while providing some additional items listed below.

Synchronize Selected Filters: This executes an immediate, non-persistent synchronization of the currently selected Filters ("non- persistent" refers to a one-time sync process; "persistent" refers to ongoing sync operations such as Real-time Monitoring or Scheduled Operations). During this process, persistent arguments set for the current Profile will be ignored. When the Button is depressed, a confirmation dialog will be displayed indicating which Filters have been selected from the active Profile and asking you to confirm synchronization through a "Yes" or "No" Button. If "Yes" is selected, the synchronization will proceed. A message will always be displayed upon completion of this operation. Other sync operations allow you to choose whether or not such a message will be displayed.

Create Pre-Sync Report: This executes a pre-sync of the currently selected Filters. During this process, files and folders will not be modified and persistent arguments set for the current Profile will be ignored. A report will be created/displayed with what work would be done if a sync was actually performed.

Log File - View : This Button allows you to view Log reports by opening the file in a text editor. This feature is also accessible from the Reporting screen.

Log File - Clear: This Button allows you to clear Log reports. This feature is also accessible from the Reporting screen.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (37 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation Last Run On - Reset: This is a display of and a means of resetting the last run date/time of the selected Filter within the current Profile. This is the date/time that will be used when comparing files for the Bi-directional Synchronization Mode option on the Alterations Screen This feature is also displayed on the from the Folder Selection screen.

Selection Tree (See Next: Filter Settings)

The Selection Tree is located at the left side of the PeerSync Profiler interface. The Selection Tree can also be hidden by un checking the "Selection Tree" option, accessed through the "Toolbars" item on the View Menu.

Screens can be accessed through this tree which are used to set synchronization criteria for individual Filters (Filter Settings), as well as set global properties relating to execution of the entire Profile and all related Filters (Global Settings).

Once you have selected a Filter or Filters from the Profile Filter List, all options configured on Filter Settings screens will only be applied to those selections.

After synchronization criteria for all individual Filters have been established, use the Global Settings screens to set global properties relating to all Filters, as well as decide how you would like the Profile to be executed.

The Profile Filter List will appear gray when any Global Settings screen is displayed, indicating that all properties set on that screen will be applied to the entire Profile.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (38 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation The Selection Tree items are customizable and can be viewed or hidden by turning off "Show All Profile Options", right-clicking on the "Selection Tree" and selecting the "Customize" Pop-Up Menu item described below.

Some Selection Tree items will not be accessible depending on the package you are currently using.

Pop-Up Menu: Activated by right clicking on the Selection Tree, this menu duplicates the items listed in the Selection Tree, as well as, the items listed in the drop-down list located on the right side of the Back Button on the Tool Buttons Toolbar. This Menu also offers the following options:

Show All Profile Options: This feature will toggle between showing all Profile Options and the Custom Options in the Selection Tree.

Customize: This feature will allow the user to select which Profile Options to display in the Custom Selection Tree, when the "Show All Profile Options" is turned off. When selected the user will be given the dialog box shown below to pick and choose which Profile Options to use.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (39 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Folder Selection (See Next: FTP Selection)

Each Filter within a Profile is initially defined by using this screen to select a Source and Target Folder. The contents of a Source Folder will be synchronized to a Target Folder according to criteria further defined on other Settings screens. Once you have highlighted a Filter or Filters from the Profile Filter List, this screen offers several different methods to locate and select folders for synchronization. File paths can be typed manually, or you can browse local and network drives to locate and select your desired folders.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (40 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Features:

Source Folder Selection

Source Folder Field: Select a Source Folder by typing the file path into the field provided, or by using the Select Source Folder Button (See Below). By default, the Source Folder field will contain the path in which PeerSync has been installed: in most cases this will be C:\PROGRAM FILES\PeerSync. The convention outlined in this path must be used when manually typing entries, i.e. a drive must be specified followed by a colon, with subsequent folders separated by backslashes. Capital letters are not necessary, though spaces may only be entered where they are part of valid folder names (i.e. "Program Files"). No space should appear between slashes and folder names. This field also supports File/Folder Path Variables and when used the current path will be displayed above the field.

UNC names can be entered manually, or can be selected from the Network Neighborhood using the "Browse for Folder" dialog box (see Select Source Folder Button). UNC names will appear in the form \\COMPUTER\SHAREDDEVICE\PATH.

Example: \\SERVER11\D\USERDATA

Note We do not recommend using UNC paths for folders that reside on the local machine, in this scenario you should use the local path to that folder.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (41 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation Folders can also be dragged and dropped from MS Windows Explorer into the Source Folder Field for automatic insertion.

Select Source Folder Button: This Button opens a "Browse for Folder" dialog box: once this box has opened, locate your chosen Source folder, select it using the left mouse Button, and click "OK."

Explore/Open/Create Button: This Button provides three options, selected from the attached drop-down list. The Button label will change to reflect whichever item has been checked on this list.

When "Explore" has been selected and the Button is depressed, an Explorer-type window will open displaying all available directories. By default, this window will show the folder whose path is currently designated in the Source field. If the folder shown in this field does not exist, Profiler will display a dialog alerting you to this fact and asking if you would like to create it: you can do so by clicking the "Yes" Button located at the bottom of this dialog. Once you have done so the newly created Folder will be shown in the Explorer-type tree.

When "Open" has been selected and the Button is depressed, a traditional MS navigation window is opened displaying the contents of whichever folder is currently shown in the Source Folder Field. If this folder does not exist, Profiler will display a dialog alerting you to this fact and asking if you would like to create it: you can do so by clicking "Yes" Button located at the bottom of this dialog. Once you have done so the newly created Folder will be shown in the navigation window.

When "Create" has been selected and the Button is depressed, a "Select Directory" dialog will open allowing you to specify a Source Folder path by using the mouse to select a desired drive, directory, and folder. Folder paths can also be manually entered into the "Directory Name" field. If you enter a path for a folder that does not exist and hit the ENTER key or click "OK," a dialog box will appear allowing you to create this folder.

Include Sub-folders: If this check box is selected, all sub-folders contained within the Source Folder will be synchronized to the Target.

Target Folder Selection

Selection of Target Folders is accomplished through the same method as that used for Source Folder selection, with the following matching controls:

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (42 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation Target Folder Field: Select a Target Folder by typing the file path into the field provided, or by using the Select Target Folder Button described below. By default, this field will contain the path in which PeerSync has been installed: in most cases this will be C:\PROGRAM FILES\PeerSync. The convention outlined in this path must be used when manually typing entries, i.e. a drive must be specified followed by a colon, with subsequent folders separated by backslashes. Capital letters are not necessary, though spaces may only be entered where they are part of valid folder names (i.e. "Program Files"). No space should appear between slashes and folder names. This field also supports File/Folder Path Variables and when used the current path will be displayed above the field.

UNC names can be entered manually, or can be selected from the Network Neighborhood using the "Browse for Folder" dialog box (see Select Target Folder Button). UNC names will appear in the form \\COMPUTER\SHAREDDEVICE\PATH.

Example: \\DELLSERVER\D\USERDATA

Folders can also be dragged and dropped from MS Windows Explorer into the Target Folder Field for automatic insertion.

Select Target Folder Button: This Button opens a "Browse for Folder" dialog box: once this box has opened, locate your chosen Target folder, select it using the left mouse Button, and click "OK."

Explore/Open/Create Button: This Button provides three options, selected from the attached drop-down list. The Button label will change to reflect whichever item has been checked on this list.

When "Explore" has been selected and the Button is depressed, an Explorer-type window will open displaying all available directories. By default, this window will show the folder whose path is currently designated in the Target field. If the folder shown in this field does not exist, Profiler will display a dialog alerting you to this fact and asking if you would like to create it: you can do so by clicking the "Yes" Button located at the bottom of this dialog. Once you have done so the newly created Folder will be shown in the Explorer-type tree.

When "Open" has been selected and the Button is depressed, a traditional MS navigation window is opened displaying the contents of whichever folder is currently shown in the Target Folder Field. If this folder does not exist, Profiler will display a dialog alerting you to this fact and asking if you would like to create it: you can do so by clicking "Yes" Button located at the bottom of this dialog. Once you have done so the newly created Folder will be shown in the navigation window.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (43 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation When "Create" has been selected and the Button is depressed, a "Select Directory" dialog will open allowing you to specify a Target Folder path by using the mouse to select a desired drive, directory, and folder (See image in "Source Folder Selection" topic above). Folder paths can also be manually entered into the "Directory Name" field. If you enter a path for a folder that does not exist and hit the ENTER key or click "OK," a dialog box will appear allowing you to create this folder.

Additional Features:

Source and Target Folder Popup Menu

Activated by right clicking on the Source or Target Folder fields , this menu allows the user to Browse , Explore, Open and/or Create the Source or Target Folder. It also gives the user access of selecting Network Logon settings for the Source and Target Folder selections.

Swap Source and Target Folders

This Button reverses placement of the file paths shown in the Source and Target Folder Fields (so that what was formerly a Source Folder now becomes a Target Folder, and vice versa).

Last Run On

This is the date/time that will be used when comparing files for the Bi-directional Synchronization Mode option on the Alterations Screen This feature is also displayed and can be reset from the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Goto FTP Selection ( Pro III )

This link will bring you to the FTP selection screen to edit an FTP path.

Dynamic Network Drive Mapping and Unmapping

PeerSync allows for the ability to dynamically map and unmap a source or target folder selection. The way you do this is to add a letter to the beginning of the UNC path that you wish to map the drive to. This can be done for the source or target selection. (i.e.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (44 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

n\\COMPUTER\SHAREDDEVICE\PATH)

Example: n\\DELLSERVER\D\USERDATA

The example above will map the D drive on the DELLSERVER to the N drive upon start of PeerSync and will unmap the drive when Peersync terminates. This is quite useful feature especially when running PeerSync as a service in the scenario where you want to synchronize to mapped drive(s) while the local machine is not currently logged into this feature will allow for it to occur seemlessly.

Note:. If you are going to run PeerSync as a Service it is advised to use UNC paths or PeerSync's Dynamic Network Drive Mapping and Unmapping feature instead of using mapped drives do to the fact that mapped drives are not understood when a user is not logged on.

File/Folder Path Variables

Variable file/folder paths can be used to create:

Dynamic archives for yearly, monthly, weekly and/or daily backups.

Dynamic synchronization based on date.

Dynamic synchronization based on logged on user or machine name.

Dynamic synchronization based on personal folders or other variables read in from the registry.

Log file storage, manipulation and organization.

Administrative report file storage, manipulation and organization.

Deleted file storage, manipulation and organization.

The following variables can be used in any folder path filter setting available through the Profiler:

Date %Date% Time %Time% Date/Time %DateTime%

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (45 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation Minute %Minute% Hour %Hour% Day %Day% Year %Year% Month/Year %MonthYear%

Minute (all formats) %n, nn% Hour (all formats) %h, hh% Day (all formats) %d, dd, ddd, dddd, ddddd, dddddd% Month (all formats) %m, mm, mmm, mmmm, mmmm% Year (all formats) %y, yy%

User Name variable %UserName% Computer Name variable %ComputerName%

Windows Directory %WinDir% Windows %Windows% (also %SystemRoot%) System Temp Path %Temp% System Tmp Path %Tmp% System Drive Letter %SystemDrive% System 32 (WIN 9x/NT/00) %System32%

Note: You can also use any variables that are located in the registry under: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Explorer\Shell Folder

Depending upon the argument used, these folders will be dated, named after the currently logged user, named for the PC from which synchronization was launched, or based on a pre-determined variable stored out and read in from the registry.

Network Logon

Activated by right clicking on the Source or Target Folder fields and selecting Logon: Source Folder or Logon: Target Folder, this feature allows for network logon Name and Password information for remote source and target folder selections.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (46 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Exceptions (See Next: Reporting)

The Exceptions screen is used after you have selected a Filter or Filters from the Profile Filter List and then created an associated Source and Target Folder on the Folder Selection screen. Through Exception options, PeerSync allows you to selectively apply synchronization to files contained within the Source Folder according to a wide range of explicit criteria.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (47 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Features:

Include File Types (using wild cards): Use this field to determine which file types will be included as part of synchronization. File Type Inclusions are specified by a star command followed by the file extension (i.e. *.doc).

The default setting ( * ) includes all files.

Multiple Inclusions can be used and are semicolon delimited (i.e. *.doc;*.txt;*.exe)

Inclusions are not case sensitive, i.e. "A" = "a".

Inclusions can be typed manually, or can be specified using either the Include File Types Button or drop-down list located to the right of the field.

Include File Types Button: Opens an "Exceptions" dialog box into which file extensions may be entered. The "include all files" command ( * ) will be shown by default.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (48 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

To add an extension, click "New", then type the desired extension into the field located at the bottom of the dialog. Repeat this process for each desired file type. Inclusions can be deleted by selecting them from the list and clicking the "Delete" key at the bottom of the dialog box. Once you have finished, click the "OK" Button. The dialog will close and all of the Inclusions you have specified will automatically appear in the Include File Types field in the proper format (separated by semi/Colons).

The drop-down list located to the right of this field will be dynamically populated with Inclusions as they are set through the "Exceptions" dialog described above. They are also added to the list when you exit the field after manually editing the Include File Types field. Inclusions can then be specified by selecting them from this list. This provides a way to store and/or retrieve sets of Inclusions for later use with other Filters.

Exclude Files (using sub-strings): Through this field, files can be selectively excluded from synchronization. Exclusions are set by specifying individual characters (i.e. "s"), sets of characters (i.e. "user"), or file extensions (i.e. ".tmp") which, if found within a file name, will exclude that file from synchronization.

Multiple characters and strings can be used and are semicolon delimited (i.e. s;.tmp;.bak)

These settings are not case sensitive, i.e. "A" = "a"

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (49 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation Exclusions can be typed manually, or can be specified using either the Exclude Files Button or drop-down list located to the right of the field. Exclude Files Button: Opens a dialog box into which Exclusions may be entered.

To add an Exclusion click "New," then type the desired character or string into the field located at the bottom of the dialog. Repeat this process for each Exclusion. Entries can be deleted by selecting them from the list and clicking the "Delete" key at the bottom of the box. Once you have finished, click the "OK" Button. The box will close and all of the Exclusions you have specified will automatically appear in the Exclude Files field. The drop-down list located to the right of this field will be dynamically populated with Exclusions as they are set through the dialog box described above. They are also added to the list when you exit the field after manually editing the Exclude Files field. Exclusions can then be specified by selecting them from this list. This provides a way to store and/or retrieve sets of Exclusions for later use with other Filters. Sample Exclusions:

s - excludes any file containing the character "s" tmp - excludes any file that contains the string "tmp" .tmp - excludes any file bearing the extension ".tmp"

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (50 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation .tmp;.bak;s - excludes any file bearing the extensions ".tmp,", ".bak" or the character "s"

Exclude Folders: Use this field to exclude folders from synchronization by specifying a folder name in file path format, i.e. "\TEMP" or "C:\WINDOWS." These examples will exclude any folder path that contains these strings including sub-folders. If you wish to exclude only a specific or root folder such as "C:\WINDOWS" but include sub-folders you must include a '#' in front of the complete folder path i.e. "#C:\WINDOWS". This example will exclude any files in this directory but include any files in its sub-folders. A semi/Colon separates multiple folder exclusions. Folder name exclusions are not case sensitive. Exclusions can be typed manually, or can be specified using either the Exclude Folders Button or drop-down list located to the right of the field. Exclude Folders Button: Opens a dialog box into which Folder Exclusions may be entered.

To add an Exclusion click "New," then type the desired folder name into the field located at the bottom of the dialog. Repeat this process for each Exclusion. Entries can be deleted by selecting them from the list and clicking the "Delete" key at the bottom of the box. Once

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (51 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation you have finished, click the "OK" Button. The box will close and all of the Exclusions you have specified will automatically appear in the Exclude Folders field. The drop-down list located to the right of this field will be dynamically populated with Exclusions as they are added. Exclusions can then be specified by selecting them from this list. This provides a way to store and/or retrieve sets of Exclusions for later use with other Filters.

Exclude File Sizes: Use the Greater Than or Less Then fields to exclude files based upon their size in bytes. Zero, the default, includes all files.

Current Attributes: Using the characters "NASHR," this field displays which file attributes (Normal, Archive, System, Hidden, and Read-Only) have been selected as criteria for synchronization. All attributes are selected by default. Clicking the Button to the right of this field opens a window from which file attributes may be included or excluded.

Selected File Dates: Use this field to specify files set for synchronization according to their date stamp. The default setting includes all file dates. Clicking the Button to the right of this field opens a "Select File Dates" screen.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (52 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

This screen allows you to include all files, include files more than x days old, include files bearing the current and past x day’s date, or specify a range of dates. The Set Today’s Date Button automatically updates the existing range to reflect the current day.

Reporting (See Next: Admin Reporting)

PeerSync automatically generates Log Files providing a detailed history of all synchronization events. This screen is used to view Log Files and set their reporting characteristics.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (53 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Features:

Use Log File: This option enables or disables Log File generation. The default file, PeerSync.Log, is located in the path in which PeerSync has been installed. This field also supports File/Folder Path Variables and when used the current path will be displayed above the field.

Overwrite Existing Log File: Use this option to report only the most recent PeerSync activity in the Log File. If this option is not selected, all PeerSync processes will be reported in succession.

View Log File: This Button allows you to view Log reports by opening the file in a text editor.

Clear Log File: This Button allows you to clear Log reports.

Include the following: Using the check boxes provided in this section of the Reporting screen, you can specify what will be reported in the Log File. The Default setting is to include all items except Folder Names.

Updated Files: This option adds an entry for any file that has been updated in the Target.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (54 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Added Files: This option adds an entry for any file that has been added to the Target.

Folder Names: Indicates the names of synchronized folders.

File Size: Includes size of each file contained in the Log.

File Date: Includes date associated with each file contained in the log.

File Time: Includes time associated with each file contained in the log.

Folder Creation: This option creates an entry for any folders that did not exist in the Target and had to be created during the synchronization process.

Application Errors: This option logs any application errors found during synchronization.

Summary: Appends a summary of activity to the end of the report.

Transfer Time: Includes time it takes to transfer the file in milliseconds.

Note: Application errors are additionally written to a file called "PSError.log," regardless of whether or not that option has been selected.

Set the maximum log file size to x bytes: By entering an amount into this field you can limit the size of Log Files created by PeerSync. When this limit is reached, the next reporting session will first rename the existing file to FILENAME.BAK and then create a new, blank Log File to which subsequent data will be added.

File Options (See Next: Performance)

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (55 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Features:

Mode Selection

Add - synchronize new files to target: If the Source contains files not found within the Target and this option is selected, those files will be added to the Target Folder during synchronization. This option is selected by default.

Update - synchronize existing files in target: If this option is selected, Target Folder files which are also found within the Source will be updated to match those Source files during synchronization. This option is selected by default.

Replicate - Delete unmatched files/folders: If this option is selected, any unmatched files found in Target folders will be deleted automatically.

CAUTION: Use this feature carefully. If not configured properly, needed files may be permanently deleted. A deletion warning is NOT displayed by default: Profiler must be first set to display this warning through the "Deletion Warning Message" check box described below.

Deletion Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (56 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Once this box has opened, the upper section of this screen allows you to enable or disable a Deletion Warning Message, as well as set the number of seconds for which a Message will be displayed. (As stated above, a message is NOT enabled by default and is not available during enhanced real-time). In addition, you can also choose to display a message requiring manual intervention in order to activate deletion.

The lower section of this screen provides a field where the user can designate an alternate folder to which unmatched files will be moved in order to avoid permanent deletion. This folder path can be typed manually, or selected using the Browse Button provided to the right of the field. If the designated folder exists, all unmatched files will be moved there, allowing you the opportunity to recover files deleted from the Target. This field also supports File/Folder Path Variables and when used the current path will be displayed above the field. Beneath this field are check boxes. The first check box allows you to Preserve the Paths of the deleted files under the specified path. The second check box allows you to specify the Windows Recycle Bin as a location for unmatched files.

Notes:

1. Only one copy of any file can exist in your designated Recovery folder if the Preserve Paths option is not selected.

2. To avoid filling up your hard drive unnecessarily, you should periodically check this folder and delete unwanted files.

3. Only files deleted from a local drive will be moved to the Recycle Bin, and all network files will be http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (57 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

permanently deleted.

4. When synchronizing to an FTP target, the Move unmatched target files option is not available.

5. When using Compression, the Move unmatched target files option is not available.

6. Deletion Warning Message is not available during Enhanced Real-time.

Additional File Includes

Include open files (if possible): Open files are those that are currently in use during synchronization. If these files are set for synchronization and this option is selected, PeerSync attempts to include them within the synchronization process. This option is selected by default.

Notes:

1. If PeerSync is able to synchronize files which are in use by other applications, access to those applications may in certain instances be temporarily lost during synchronization.

2. The include open files (if possible) option should be used if you are using the Performance Options: Multiple Filter Threads and Multiple Copy Threads.

Include unicode files: This option allows for the synchronization of files/folders that contain unicode characters in their names.

Notes:

1. The Include unicode files option does not work with FTP Selections.

2. Unicode characters are not compatible with to Admin Reporting or Email Reporting messages.

3. Even if the Include Unicode files option is on it may or may not work depending on the Real-Time Monitoring Method and/or the operating system environment.

Include attribute change as synchronization criteria: This option allows for the synchronization of files that have different attributes. If this option has been selected, a Source file whose attributes do not match the Target will still be included in the synchronization process.

Compression (See Next: Pre/Post Process)

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (58 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

While compressing your choice of folders, the Compression utility also employs a unique method to minimize file damage. While creating Target directory structures to match those found in the Source, the folder compression option creates a single file for every folder contained within the Target Folder set. This minimizes the amount of data added to each compressed file. If a single file were used for the entire directory structure were to become corrupt, all files might be lost. PeerSync’s "one file per folder" scenario ensures that if damage occurs, it is limited to individual folders only. We also offer file compression, which will compress the source files to the corresponding target files down to the file level which adds even more flexibility. During folder compression, all selected Source files are synchronized to the compressed Target folder file bearing the name of the active folder plus the user selected extension (default extension is "ZIP"). During file compression, all selected Source files are synchronized to the compressed Target folder file bearing the name of the active file plus the user selected extension (default extension is "ZIP"). Compressed folder files can be expanded using most PKZip compatible extraction utilities. In addition, passwords can be specified and entered on this screen to protect against unauthorized access to compressed files.

Features:

Use folder compression: This check box enables or disables the folder compression

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (59 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation feature which will compress files in each sub-folder to a single file per sub-folder.

Use file compression: This check box enables or disables the file compression feature will will compress file by file.

Notes:

1. Compression options will not work with an FTP source or target selection.

2. Compression options will not work during Enhanced Real-time.

3. The File Deletion Options, Move unmatched target files feature does not work when using compression.

4. The Transfer NT security descriptions (ACLs) feature does not work when using compression.

Compress target: Selecting this option enables compression of the Target folder.

Expand source: This option extracts (expands) the Source folder. Use this option to extract files from Source Folders that have already undergone compression.

Compression Speed: Allows for Normal compression, Maximum compression or maximum speed.

Note: A compressed Source Folder can not be synchronized to a compressed Target Folder.

Compressed File Extension: The extension entered into this field will be applied to the compressed folder file name. For example, if "rar" is entered for a folder named "Samples," the compressed folder file name will be "Samples.rar".

Note: it is NOT necessary to add a period (" . ") before this extension name. The default extension is "ZIP," which associates the file with a Zip application (i.e. WinZip).

Password - Encryption: The password entered into this field will be used as a key to encrypt the compressed files. Without this key the original file CAN NOT be extracted from the compressed files. Do Not Lose This Password. Without it you will not have access to your encrypted files, nor will Peer Software be able to recover them.

Change Password: Selecting this Button will display a dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (60 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

This allows you to change your existing password for the selected Filter. This box requires you to enter your old password in addition to whichever new one you wish to begin using. This dialog box is also used to create a password if you do not currently have one. The password will be encrypted and saved for the selected Filter.

Note: You may only change the password for a single Filter at a time. The old password must be checked against the stored password for this option to be changed.

Automation (See Next: Compression)

The Automation screen allows you to apply Real-time Monitored or Scheduled synchronization to individual Filters within a given Profile. Real-time operations (also referred to as "File/Folder Change Detection") monitor Source Folders for any changes and synchronize them to the specified Target as they occur (and vice versa). Scheduled operations automatically launch synchronization according to a user-specified schedule. Through these settings, PeerSync allows you to build a Profile with as many as 255 different Filters -- each run according to a unique schedule or in Real- time (See Also Operation Mode).

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (61 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Features:

Scheduling Options

Run on an interval every x minute(s): Checking this option assigns a Scheduled operation to the selected Filter(s). The field associated with this option allows you to set an interval in minutes: after this time has elapsed the selected folders will be synchronized. 5 minutes is the default setting. Intervals in seconds can be specified through the use of decimals, i.e. 0.5, 2.5, etc. The minimum interval is 0.01.

Use daily timer scheduling:* ( Pro III ) Checking this option will allow for the synchronization of filters at a specific times of the day for selected days of the week. This feature may also be selected at the profile level from the Operation Mode screen

Daily Timer Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (62 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Once this box has opened, it gives you the following features:

List of Filter Selections: This is a list of the currently selected Daily Timer selections. You can Add New selections by selecting the New Button and Delete existing selections by selecting the Delete Button.

Run selected filters at: Selecting this option will run the filter at the selected time of day.

Select days of week to run: Allows you to turn on/off which days to run this schedule.

Re-load profile prior to daily run: This option will have Peersync re-load the profile, if any changes have been made, before running the selected daily run. This feature allows for dynamic re-loading of PeerSync Profiles.

Real-time File/Folder Change Detection

Activate real-time monitoring: Selects the current Filter(s) for Real-time Monitoring.

Real-time Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (63 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Once this box has opened, it allows you to choose from two Real-time operations. The first is a Folder Replication feature, which monitors for changes to the Source Folder and synchronizes the Target accordingly. The second, a Folder Restoration feature, monitors for changes to the Target Folder and restores files on the Target accordingly. To properly use the restore feature, you will need to select the "Always overwrite target files" option.

Notes:

1. Enable bi-directional synchronization mode will not work for real-time filters.

2. You cannot monitor an FTP source in real-time.

3. When synchronizing to an FTP target, PeerSync will suppress real-time Filters until initial synchronization has completed.

Use enhanced real-time monitoring* ( Pro III ): Enhanced Real-time file monitoring and updating option. This option allows the Real-time feature in PeerSync to detect individual changes to files and synchronize only the file that changed without scanning the entire folder where the change occurred. Normally synchronization software scans and compares all files in a folder that is being synchronized. This option does not scan folders unless the change is indeterminate. Under MS Windows NT4/2000, this feature is extended to the file/folder rename operations as well. If a file or folder is renamed, PeerSync will rename the corresponding target file or folder using rename functions as opposed to copying the

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (64 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation newly renamed source folder to the target and then subsequently deleting the outdated target file/folder. This option greatly reduces time to synchronize and network band width requirements.

Notes:

1. When synchronizing to an FTP target, the Enhanced real-time monitoring option should not be used.

4. Enhanced real-time does not work with Enable bi-directional synchronization mode, During comparison subtract/add x minute(s) from target or Folder Compression.

3. It is recommended either use the Enhanced real-time option for all or none of your real-time filters in a Profile.

4. During enhanced real-time Trigger Selections are ignored.

5. Using Enhanced real-time will produce a different file output format for all modes of reporting and message logging (Reporting, Admin Reporting and Email Reporting). The output will NOT contain a start and stop section or a summary, each entry will also be initially marked with a date and time stamp. If use summary is selected for Admin or Email reporting then the standard selection will be used. The reason this is done is due to the fact that processes will be running in parallel.

* Note: Some features described on this page require a Pro III or Pro IV Edition of PeerSync.

Admin Reporting (See Next: Email Reporting)

This screen allows you to create a unique report for administration purposes. Admin Reports generated during sync operations can be saved to a specific administrative folder (in a local or network path). Admin Reports are made uniquely identifiable through a choice of naming conventions, i.e. Computer Name or User Name with date\time stamps.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (65 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Features:

Create administrative report files: This option enables or disables the Administrative Reporting feature.

Note: Admin reporting files do not display Unicode characters.

Report file name: Allows you to choose between a default-named (PC and date\time) or User-named Administrative Report.

Use standard report file content: This option directs Report content to follow those conventions also utilized in PeerSync Log Files.

Use summary information only: Appends a summary of activity to the end of the report.

Note: When in enhanced real-time or when using multiple copy threads standard reporting will be used if summary is selected.

Report file path: This field displays the location of Admin Report files. This field also supports File/Folder Path Variables and when used the current path will be displayed above the field.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (66 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation Use SNMP reporting (errors only)* ( Pro IV ): Use Small Network Management Protocol error reporting.

SNMP Options Button* ( Pro IV ): This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Once this box has opened, it allows you to select the Destination IP and Trap Prefix to be used for SNMP reporting. Please refer to your SNMP management software for more details.

* Note: Some features described on this page require a Pro IV Edition of PeerSync.

Alterations (See Next: Additional Features)

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (67 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Features:

Target File/Folder Alterations

Transfer NT security descriptions (ACLs): If this option is checked, PeerSync will transfer over and match the security descriptions (ACLs) to the target file upon synchronization, under Windows NT.

Note: The Transfer NT security descriptions option does not work when using Compression.

Force target file attribute settings: If this option is selected the file attributes options dialog will be displayed. In this dialog, you may select to force any attribute on or off for the target files that are synchronized within the selected Filter(s).

File Attribute Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (68 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Once this box has opened, it allows the user the selection to ignore, force on or force off attribute settings on target files that are synchronized within the selected Filter(s).

Always go to (or create) initial target folder: If this option is checked, PeerSync will automatically create a sub-folder in the root of the Target Folder. This sub-folder’s name will match the Source Folder name. If this option is not checked, root contents of the Source Folder will be synchronized to the root of the Target Folder even if the names do not match.

Use intermediate file during copy: If this box is checked, a temporary file will be created in the Target Folder: the contents of the Source file will then be copied into this temporary file. After a successful copy, the Target file will be deleted and the temporary file will be renamed to bear the Target file name. This option ensures that the updated file will only replace the Target file if copy is successful. If the copy process should be interrupted because of some outside factor (network down, power outage, etc), the original Target file will still be preserved.

File Revisioning Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (69 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Once this box has opened, the screen provides a field that is used to specify how many back- up copies of the Target file will be created. PeerSync will automatically add the ".PSBAK1" extension to the existing target file before replacing it with the updated Source file (i.e. "NEWDOC.DOC" will become "NEWDOC.DOC.PSBAK1"). If more than one backup is selected, each file will be renamed so that the newest backup files will always bear the lowest number.

Note: If the "Delete Unmatched" option is selected for the selected Filter, and the Source file that has corresponding PSBAK Target files is deleted, all associated PSBAK files will also be deleted except for the latest file (PSBAK1). PSBAK1 files will have to be deleted manually.

Exclude empty source folders: This option will exclude and will not sync empty source folders to the target.

Delete Exceptions from target folder: This option will delete any exceptions selected from the Exceptions screen from the target folder if the 'Replicate - Delete unmatched files/folders' option is selected from the File Options screen.

Restore Files - Always overwrite Target files (even if they are newer): This option automatically overwrites any files in the Target folder that have a different date\time stamp than their corresponding Source file, even if the Target file is newer. This option can be used to restore folders to a previous state either for backup/restore operations or to reset files after training operations.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (70 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Source File/Folder Alterations

Turn file archive attribute off after synchronization: This option resets the archive flag on the Source and Target file after synchronization. The Windows file system automatically sets the archive bit for every file that has changed; normally, this is used to indicate that a given file has been modified since the last time its archive bit was set. Most tape back-up programs use this flag to determine which files have changed since the last backup. This is the only option in PeerSync that alters Source files. PeerSync uses this option to reduce the number of files that are checked on the Source drive.

Note: Source files that are not being synchronized to Target folders will NOT have their archive flags reset. This process only occurs after successful synchronization of a changed file.

Hint: To reset all Source file archive flags, use the "Always Overwrite Target Files" feature. This configures all files for synchronization and resultantly qualifies them for reset of archive flags. This option only needs to be selected once to be applied to existing sync operations.

Move Files - Delete source file after successful copy to target: This option will attempt to delete (or move, if specified; see "Delete Unmatched Target Files," Miscellaneous) the Source file after a successful synchronization to Target.

Enable bi-directional synchronization mode* ( Pro III ): Bi-directional synchronization feature with Smart-Delete. Files on the target that are newer than their corresponding source files or do not exist on the source side will be automatically brought back to the source folders. Any file that has a creation date newer than the last time the Filter was run will be added to the source folders even if the Delete-Unmatched target file option is selected. This mode will only work when an entire folder is synchronized by PeerSync and does not apply to enhanced real-time mode where only the changed file is being added, deleted or updated.

Notes: 1. This feature will not work with filters selected for Real-time monitoring. 2. This feature will not work with an FTP source or target selection.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (71 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

* Note: Some features described on this page require a Pro III or Pro IV Edition of PeerSync.

Trigger Selections (See Next: Global Settings)

These settings ensure that Target Folders always remain updated to their corresponding Source by comparing dates indicated by individual Trigger Files. If a Source Trigger is found to be newer than a corresponding Target Trigger, for example, a synchronization process will be allowed to proceed for the selected Filter(s). If the files date and time stamps match then the synchronization will not be processed, in essence, the running of the sync process is determined by the trigger files.

Features:

Use Global Trigger File: This option is used to activate or trigger synchronization based upon date comparison between an individual Source Trigger File and a separate Target Trigger File. If the Target Trigger File is older then the Source Trigger File, the entire Source Folder(s) will be synchronized.

Default File Name: Displays the Default Global Trigger File Name: GLBCHG.000

Source Trigger File: This field allows you to specify a Global Trigger File by entering it

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (72 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation manually, or by selecting it using the Browse Button located at the right side of the field.

Use Current Paths: Automatically selects the current Trigger Files associated with the Source and Target Folders.

Target Trigger File: This field allows you to specify a Global Trigger File by entering it manually, or by selecting it using the Browse Button located at the right side of the field.

Note:. During Enhanced real-time Trigger Selections will be ignored.

Pre/Post Process (See Next: Trigger Selections)

This screen allows the user to choose external applications / scripts to be run before and after the processing of a given Filter.

Features:

Select Application/Script to Run Before: Use this field to specify (by file path) which application you would like to run before processing a PeerSync Profile. File paths can be manually entered, or the open folder icon can be used to locate files.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (73 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Select Application/Script to Run After: Use this field to specify (by file path) which application you would like to run after processing a PeerSync Profile. File paths can be manually entered, or the open folder icon can be used to locate files.

Wait for application to end before continuing: Check this option if you want PeerSync to wait for the applications specified in the "Before" and "After" fields to close before processing additional tasks.

Use maximum wait time of x seconds: Selecting this option sets a limit (in seconds) for how long PeerSync will wait for the applications specified in the "Run Before" and "Run After" fields to close. In order to activate this function, the "Wait for Application to Terminate" function must be checked. The default, when this option is not checked, is to wait indefinitely.

Performance (See Next: Alterations)

Features:

File Read/Write Buffer Size: This option allows you to change the read/write buffer sizes

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (74 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation to optimize performance/speed across various network environments or on the local machine. In most cases this will increase performance dramatically but you will probably need to test this option in your environment to determine what advantages can be gained from altering this size.

The minimum value is 256 bytes. The default value is 32 KB. The maximum value that can be set using the track bar is 128 KB. The maximum value that can be set using the up arrow or by manually typing in the spin edit field is 128 KB* ( Pro IV Upper Limit is 1 MB)

Enable intelligent network load balancing (when applicable)* ( Pro III ): Network load balancing option will automatically set read/write buffer size based on recommendation from NIC network cards. (Installed network card must also support this feature.)

Throttle bandwidth - Use x percent of available bandwidth* ( Pro IV ): This option will limit/slow down the pulse of reads and writes performed by PeerSync, at the percentage specified, in order to keep bandwidth available for other applications.

Set maximum number of copy threads to x* ( Pro IV ): This option will limit the number of copy threads to be spawned and used for the selected Filters.

* Note: Some features described on this page require a Pro III or Pro IV Edition of PeerSync.

FTP Selection ( Pro III ) (See Next: Exceptions)

FTP site file synchronization option. This option allows any Filter to automatically logon to an FTP server and synchronize files either to or from the local folders. This feature supports proxy servers/firewalls and has an option to adjust for GMT time on the FTP server side.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (75 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Features:

Use FTP for Source: This option enables or disables the FTP Source selection.

Notes:

1. You cannot monitor an FTP or any remote folder in real-time.

2. When synchronizing to an FTP target, PeerSync will suppress real-time Filters until initial synchronization has completed and the Enhanced Real-time monitoring option should not be used.

3. Compression, Bi-directional synchronization mode, Include unicode files, File Recovery and CRC32 features will not work with an FTP selections.

4. Multiple copy threads will not be used with FTP selections.

FTP Source Folder Field: Select an FTP Source Folder by typing the path into the field provided. This field also supports File/Folder Path Variables and when used the current path will be displayed above the field.

Configure FTP Source Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (76 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Once this box has opened, you can select a Host Name, User ID, Password, Time Out Interval and the port in which to connect on. You also have the options to adjust for GMT time on the FTP server side and to use a proxy server/firewall and the designated Host Name, User ID, Password for the proxy server/firewall, as well as, the ability to Enable Passive Mode.

Include Sub-folders: If this check box is selected, all sub-folders contained within the Source Folder will be synchronized to the Target.

Use FTP for Target: This option enables or disables the FTP Target selection.

FTP Target Folder Field: Select an FTP Target Folder by typing the path into the field provided. This field also supports File/Folder Path Variables and when used the current path will be displayed above the field.

Configure FTP Target Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (77 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Once this box has opened, you can select a Host Name, User ID, Password, Time Out Interval and the port in which to connect on. You also have the options to adjust for GMT time on the FTP server side and to use a proxy server/firewall and the designated Host Name, User ID, Password for the proxy server/firewalls, as well as, the ability to Enable Passive Mode.

Files to transfer as ASCII (using sub-strings): Through this field, file types can be selectively tagged for transfer as ASCII upon synchronization. These file types are set by specifying file extensions (i.e. ".txt") which, if found within a file name, will be transferred as an ASCII file during synchronization. Multiple strings will be semi/Colon delimited. These settings are not case sensitive, i.e. "A" = "a" File types can be typed manually, or can be specified using either the Files to Transfer as ASCII Button or drop-down list located to the right of the field. The drop-down list located to the right of this field will be dynamically populated with file types as they are set through the dialog box described above. They are also added to the list when you exit the field after manually editing the file types field. File types can then be specified by selecting them from this list. This provides a way to store and/or retrieve sets of file types for later use with other Filters.

Files to transfer as ASCII Button: opens a dialog box into which file types may be entered. http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (78 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

To add a File Type click "New," then type the desired file type into the field located at the bottom of the dialog. Repeat this process for each File type. Entries can be deleted by selecting them from the list and clicking the "Delete" key at the bottom of the box. Once you have finished, click the "OK" Button. The box will close and all of the file types you have specified will automatically appear in the Files to transfer as ASCII field.

Additional Features:

Swap Source and Target Folders

This Button reverses placement of the file paths shown in the Source and Target Folder Fields (so that what was formerly a Source Folder now becomes a Target Folder, and vice versa) and all configured FTP settings.

Goto Folder Selection

This link will bring you to the Folder Selection screen to edit a non FTP path.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (79 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

* Note: All features described on this page require at least a Pro III Edition of PeerSync.

Email Reporting ( Pro III ) (See Next: File Options)

This screen allows you to create a unique report for administration purposes. Email Reports generated during sync operations can be sent to an administrator, shared mailbox or a specified user. Email notification of synchronization activity can be sent upon completion of entire Profile or during persistent synchronization operations. Email Reports are made uniquely identifiable through a choice of naming conventions, i.e. Computer Name or User Name with date\time stamps.

Features:

Create administrative Email messages: This option enables or disables the Email Reporting feature.

Note: Email reporting messages do not display Unicode characters.

Report file name: Allows you to choose between a default-named (PC and date\time) or

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (80 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation User-named Email Report.

Use standard report file content: This option directs Report content to follow those conventions also utilized in PeerSync Log Files.

Use summary information only: Appends a summary of activity to the end of the report.

Note: When in enhanced real-time or when using multiple copy threads standard reporting will be used if summary is selected.

Email Configuration Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Once this box has opened, it allows you to select the SMTP Host, User ID, Port, who to send to, who to send Carbon Copies to and what email address to send from.

* Note: All features described on this page require at least a Pro III Edition of PeerSync.

Global Settings

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (81 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation (See Next: Operation Mode)

Global Settings are global to the current Profile. These settings and options pertain to all of the filters in the current Profile and are used to define, configure and execute the launch of PeerSync Profiles via the PeerSync engine.

Arguments to be sent to PeerSync can be selected and setup from the Operation Mode Screen.

PeerSync Profiles can then be launched from the Profiler through the following scenarios:

By using the Launch Profile Menu Item in the Run Menu.

By using the Launch Current Profile Button on the Tool Buttons Toolbar.

By using the Launch Current Profile Button on the Current Profile Activity screen.

PeerSync Profiles can also be setup/run externally without the Profiler from the Startup Options screen in the following ways:

Setup/run from a Shortcut on the Desktop.

Setup/run from the Startup Folder.

Setup/run at boot from the Registry.

Setup/run as a NT Service.

Notes:

1. Individual Filters can be synchronized using the 'Synchronize Selected Filters' feature, found in the Profile Filter List Popup Menu.

2. Another way of running PeerSync is by using the Quick-Sync Folder Feature by right-clicking on a folder from MS Windows Explorer.

StartUp Options (See Next: Current Profile Activity)

This screen allows the user to specify whether or not PeerSync will be run upon startup of the

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (82 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation active PC, while also defining its interaction with the network (if applicable). This screen provides shortcuts for installing PeerSync as a service, adding it to the Windows StartUp list, or to the Windows registry for automatic loading upon startup.

Features:

Disable all Startup Options: Check this option to prevent PeerSync from automatically loading at Windows startup/logon.

Create Shortcut on Desktop: This Button will place the current Profile into a shortcut on your desktop (See "Automatic Execution of Profile List," Operation Mode). A Profile Shortcut will need to be created through this feature in order to use PeerSync's Command Line Mode.

Add to Windows StartUp: Check this option if you want PeerSync to run automatically when a user logs on to the PC.

Show StartUp Folder: This Button opens the Windows StartUp folder, showing links to files and programs that open automatically upon user logon. This Button is only accessible when "Add to Windows Startup Folder" is checked.

Add to Windows registry: Check this option if you want PeerSync to run automatically

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (83 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

when Windows boots through specification in the Windows registry.

Run RegEdit: This Button opens the Windows Registry Editor. This Button is only accessible when "Add to Windows registry to run at boot" is checked.

Install as an NT Service: Check this option if you want PeerSync to run automatically as a service under Windows NT. To configure and run the service you must go to your "Services" located in the "Control Panel" and select "PeerSync." By default the service is installed with the "Local System account" selected for the service "Log on as:" option.

Caution: If any of your source or target Folder Selections are not located on the local machine, then you will have to configure the service to "Log on as:" an alternate account on your domain so that the service has the rights to access the remote machines and/or devices. If you do not do this the service will most likely not run properly.

Notes:

1. If PeerSync is running as a Service it is advised to use UNC paths or PeerSync's Dynamic Network Drive Mapping and Unmapping feature instead of using mapped drives do to the fact that mapped drives are not understood when a user is not logged on.

2. You can add the argument /LSE (Log Service Events to NT Application Log) to the following entry in the registry (HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\PeerSoftware\PeerSync\Service\Parameters). This will have PeerSync log all changes to be reported to application log in addition to the normal logging of the start, stop, pause and continue of the service.

3. If PeerSync is running in real-time mode as a service, subsequent real-time Profiles will interfere with service operation and should not be employed. Both Scheduled Operations and Manual (non-persistent) operations should perform without interference to a service installation of PeerSync.

Details: This Button is used to view the details of the currently installed PeerSync service.

Remove: This Button is used to remove the currently installed PeerSync service.

Create SNC extension association for PeerSync Profiler: Checking this option causes any file with the extension .SNC to be associated with PeerSync: PeerSync Profiles bear this extension by default. Once this option has been selected, double/Clicking on any SNC file will open PeerSync Profiler and load that particular file.

Add Quick-Sync Folder option to Explorer menu: Checking this option adds or removes the Quick-Sync Folder selection from Windows Explorer. This feature is a quick and easy http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (84 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation way to synchronize folder(s) on the fly to backup location(s) with the option to modify your filtering criteria at a later time

PeerSync Application Path: This field is used to specify the location of the PeerSync executable file. You can use the open folder icon to browse drives in order to locate this executable file.

Operation Mode (See Next: Startup Options) This screen allows you to determine the execution of the current Profile by selecting the arguments to use. Part of the Basic Argument Options, an Automatic Operation allows you to perform an immediate launch of the current Profile. As a non-persistent process, Automatic Operations are run a single time upon manual initiation by the user. Part of the Advanced Argument Options, Real-time Operations monitor Source Folders for any changes and synchronize them to the specified Target as they occur (and vice versa). Also an Advanced option, Scheduled Operations automatically launch synchronization according to a user-specified schedule. The Operation Mode screen allows you apply all of these modes simultaneously to the same Profile. Individual Profile Filters may be configured to run according to their own Real-time or Scheduled Operations (See Automation).

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (85 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation Features:

Basic Argument Options

Automatic execution: This option directs PeerSync to run the current Profile as an Automatic Operation. An Automatic Operation allows you to perform an immediate launch of the current Profile. As a non-persistent process, Automatic Operations are run a single time upon manual initiation by the user. We also refer to this type of run as an Initial Sync.

Pre-Sync Report Options: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Once this box has opened, it allows you to select a Pre-Sync Report. During this process, files and folders will not be modified and persistent arguments set for the current Profile will be ignored. A report will be created/displayed with what work would be done if a sync was actually performed. You also have the options of Overwriting the existing Pre-Sync report file and the Option to show the Pre-Sync report file at the end of the run.

Show tray icon: If this option is selected, an icon will appear on the system tray when the PeerSync Engine is loaded . When you right/Click on this icon a menu will appear. Through this menu the Profiler interface can be shown, the About PeerSync screen can be

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (86 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation accessed, and the PeerSync Engine can be terminated.

Set Access Password Button: Use this Button to set or change a tray icon access password via the Password Change dialog box:

This allows you to set/reset a password and once a password has been set, only authorized users will be able to terminate the PeerSync Engine.

Enable display options: If this option is selected, the Display Options Button becomes available, in which you are able to select how and when to display status of profile activity.

Display Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (87 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Once this box has opened, it gives you the following features:

Display status in Profiler - This option will have PeerSync open the Profiler, if it is not already open, and send status messages to be displayed on the Current Profile Activity screen.

Display status in PeerSync* ( Pro IV ) - This option will have PeerSync show its PeerSync - Status Display dialog box during synchronization so the user can see activity, status and other information while PeerSync is running.

Display status in PeerSync upon completion - This option will have PeerSync show its PeerSync - Status Display dialog box at the end of synchronization (only in non-persistent modes) so the user can see activity, status and other information upon completion.

Enable performance options: If this option is selected, the Performance Options Button becomes available, in which you are able to select how and when to display status of profile activity.

Performance Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (88 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Once this box has opened, it gives you the ability to Set the Application Priority allowing Peersync to run at a higher or lower priority then other applications. It also allows for Multiple Thread Selection features ( Pro IV ). You can turn on and specify how many filter and copy threads to allow PeerSync to use. Filter threads allow for filters to run in parallel processes while copy threads allow for multiple files to be copied in parallel processes. (i.e. Simultaneous Distribution - Synchronizing from one server to multiple servers simultaneously in a Web Farm type environment )

Notes:

1. Using Multiple copy threads will produce a different file output format for all modes of reporting and message logging (Reporting, Admin Reporting and Email Reporting). The output will NOT contain a start and stop section or a summary, each entry will also be initially marked with a date and time stamp. If use summary is selected for Admin or Email reporting then the standard selection will be used. The reason this is done is due to the fact that processes will be running in parallel.

2. The Include open files (if possible) option should be used if you are using the Performance Options: Multiple Filter Threads and Multiple Copy Threads

Advanced Argument Options

Use interval scheduling: This option enables or disables Scheduled Operation Mode for the entire Profile. This option must be selected in order for all Scheduled Operations set for individual Filters on the Automation Screen to be recognized. Scheduled Mode does not

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (89 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation apply a global schedule to the entire Profile: rather, it enables those schedules set for all individual Filters on to run at their specified intervals.

All Scheduled Operations set for individual Filters will be ignored if this mode is not selected. If none of the Filters within a Profile are set for Scheduled Operation and this mode is selected, all active Filters within the Profile will be assigned a default synchronization schedule of five minutes.

Global Interval Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Once this box has opened, it gives you the following features:

Run all scheduled filters every x minutes: Selecting this option will override all scheduled Filters set in the Automation screen with the value set in the minutes field. This will make a scheduled run set to a global timer for all Filters in the Profile.

Wait for keyboard activity to trigger operation: When this option is checked, the Scheduled operation will run only when it senses keyboard activity. Otherwise, it will not run at the interval specified in the "Run Filter every X minutes" field.

Always run every z cycles: This field is only available when the "Wait for keyboard activity" option is checked. When a number has been entered into this field, (e.g. 5 cycles), http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (90 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation PeerSync will make five attempts to launch synchronization at the scheduled interval. If it senses no keyboard activity after the 5th attempt it will launch the specified synchronization. The default setting is one cycle.

Use daily timer scheduling: Checking this option will allow for the synchronization of the entire profile at a specific time of the day for selected days of the week. This feature may also be selected at the Filter level from the Automation screen.

Daily Timer Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Once this box has opened, it gives you the following features:

List of Global Selections: This is a list of the currently selected Daily Timer selections for the profile. You can Add New selections by selecting the New Button and Delete existing selections by selecting the Delete Button.

Run entire profile at: Selecting this option will run the profile at the selected time of day.

Select days of week to run: Allows you to turn on/off which days to run this schedule.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (91 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation Re-load profile prior to daily run: Allows for the re-loading of a Profile to assure the latest changes to the profile are used.

Use Filter Settings - Daily timer scheduling selections: This option will be turned on/off depending if there are any Daily Timer selections at the filter level. If there are filter level selections this option will be turned on and the /TIMEF argument will be added to the current arguments. You can manually turn this option off to ignore/override all Filter Settings - Daily timer scheduling selections selected from the Automation screen.

Use real-time monitoring: This option enables or disables Real-time Mode for the entire Profile. This option must be selected in order for all Real-time Operations set for individual Filters on the Automation Screen to be recognized. Once selected, Source/Target Folders for those Filters will be monitored for changes and synchronized as changes are detected.

All Real-time Operations set for individual Filters will be ignored if this mode is not selected. If none of the Filters within a Profile are configured for Real-time Monitoring and this mode is selected, all active Filters within the Profile will be then be set for Real-time Monitoring.

Real-time Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (92 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation Once this box has opened, it gives you the following features:

Retry open files every x seconds: Use this option to specify, in seconds, how often PeerSync will attempt to synchronize Source files that are in use. If the "Include open files" option on the File Options Screen has not been checked and "Retry" is selected PeerSync will continue attempting to synchronize files that are opened by other applications. "Retry" will also work when "Include open files" has been checked and a file is read-locked by another application. When the "Retry" option is on, PeerSync will synchronize the open file within X seconds after the file has been closed.

Set maximum number of retries to x: This option sets a limit indicating how many times PeerSync will attempt to process open files. The default, 0, indicates an indefinite number of retries.

Select Real-Time Monitoring Method for NT: This option allows you to select the method of detecting real-time changes under Windows NT.

Note: Even if the Include Unicode files option is on it may or may not work depending on the Real- Time Monitoring Method and/or the operating system environment.

Suppress initial execution of real time filters: If this option has been selected, Real-time Filters will not be synchronized upon initial launch of PeerSync (assuming "Automatic execution of Profile list," described above, is also selected). These Filters will be synchronized if changes are detected subsequent to initial launch.

Current Arguments: This section displays the current arguments selected for the Profile and will also allows for the selection and modification of additional arguments by double- clicking this field or selecting the Current Arguments Button to the right of the field.

Current Arguments Button: This Button opens a "Current Command Line Argument Selection" dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (93 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Once this box has opened, you can modify, add or delete arguments to be used when launching PeerSync through any of the modes described in the Startup Options Screen or via the Current Profile Activity Screen.

* Note: Some features described on this page require a Pro III or Pro IV Edition of PeerSync.

Current Profile Activity (Back to: Overview)

This screen is used to Launch the current Profile and to view Current Profile Activity. If the 'Display Status in Profiler' option is turned on from the Operation Mode screen this screen will be shown upon execution of a Profile and will dynamically show the status of synchronization of the current Profile as the process occurs. This screen will also be shown upon using the 'Synchronize Selected Filters' feature, found in the Profile Filter List Popup Menu to display the Current Activity of the filters sent to Peersync as a temporary Profile.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (94 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Features:

Profile: Displays the name of the Profile actively being processed. This label may not match the name of the Profile currently being configured through Profiler. Filter: This indicator will dynamically display the name of whichever Filter is presently being processed for the Active Profile. Mode: Displays the Operation Mode (Real-time Mode, Scheduled Operation, etc.) applied to synchronization of the Active Profile. Launch Current Profile/Terminate Active Profile: This Button allows you to launch the current Profile. Once a Profile has been launched, its processing may also be terminated through this Button (the label will change to read "Terminate Active Profile"). This Button offers one of three ways to initiate an Automatic Operation. Source: Displays a file path for the Source Folder presently being synchronized. Target: Displays a file path for the Target Folder presently being synchronized from the Source indicated above. Folders: This indicator provides a count of all unsynchronized folders contained within the Source, and will decrease as each folder is synchronized. An additional "thermometer"

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (95 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation indicator will also track the progress of folder synchronization. Files: This indicator displays the total number of files contained within the Source while also providing a count of synchronized files. In addition, a "thermometer" indicator will show file synchronization progress by increasing according to the size of the current folder, with 100% representing the cumulative size of files contained within the Source Filter set. File: Indicates the name of the file currently being synchronized. Skip File: This Button will appear once the active Profile has been launched. This feature allows you to skip synchronization of the file currently displayed in the indicator described below. Skip Files enables you to avoid delays caused by large files on slow network or dial- up connections. Size: Indicates the size (in bytes) of the file currently being synchronized. A related "thermometer" indicator tracks the progress of synchronization for that file. Checked: This indicator displays the total number of files contained in the selected Source Folders. Excluded: Indicates the number of files that were excluded from synchronization (See Exceptions) Messages: Indicates the number of error messages generated during Profile processing. Updated: Indicates the number of Target files that were updated during synchronization of Profile Filters. Added: Indicates the number of new files added to Target Folders during synchronization of Profile Filters. Deleted: Indicates the number of files deleted (or moved) during synchronization of Profile Filters. Target Space: Indicates the Target Folder space remaining during synchronization of Profile Filters. Elapsed Time: Indicates the amount of time that has elapsed during the current profile activity.

Upgrade Information To upgrade, simply double-click on the executable in the Explorer window, or choose "Run" from the Start Menu and then select the application.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (96 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation If you are upgrading the current version of PeerSync (i.e 6.0.1 to 6.0.2) simple install the application over the existing PeerSync and the previous version be backed up in a sub-folder called 'BACKUP' if you select this option during installation. If you are evaluating a new version of PeerSync (6.1) and you already have an existing copy of PeerSync (6.0) please select a new directory during installation. If you wish to remove previous versions of PeerSync you must go to the 'Start Menu-Settings- Control Panel', select the 'Add/Remove Programs' utility and remove the PeerSync versions you no longer need.

Product Editions and Licensing PeerSync comes in different levels, each level or edition contains features from the previous level with additional features.

Product Editions

Pro II - This edition includes the following:

Folder Selection All Options Exceptions All Options Reporting All Options File Options All Options Compression All Options Pre/Post Process All Options Trigger Selections All Options Startup Options All Options Current Profile Activity All Options Automation Most Options Operation Mode Most Options Admin Reporting Most Options Alterations Some Options Performance Some Options

Pro III - This edition includes the following:

- All Options from the Pro II Edition

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (97 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation FTP Selection All Options Email Reporting All Options Additional Features All Options Automation Enhanced Real-time Monitoring Automation Use daily timer scheduling Automation Daily Timer Options Performance Intelligent network load balancing Alterations Bi-directional synchronization

Pro IV - This edition includes the following:

- All Options from the Pro II Edition - All Options from the Pro III Edition

Admin Reporting SNMP Reporting Performance Throttle Bandwidth Performance Maximum Copy Threads Performance File Read/Write Buffer Upper Limit Additional Features Target File Time Change Option Operation Mode Display status in PeerSync Operation Mode Performance Options - Multiple Filter Threads Operation Mode Performance Options - Multiple Copy Thread

Product Licensing

All levels of PeerSync can be licensed for single or multiple users and/or single or multiple remote connections.

User Licensing: A single user license, by default, comes with right to install/execute the software on one PC (Server or Workstation) and connect to one remote PC or unlimited local drives. A license must be purchased for each PC where the product will be installed, executed or launched. This also applies to Enterprise installations that run the software off a network file server.

Connection Licensing: PeerSync comes with the ability to connect to one remote PC. If you need to synchronize files from the local PC to multiple remote PCs, you will need to purchase a connection license for each additional remote PC you want to connect to. A remote connection license applies to all drives/folders on a single remote PC you are connecting to.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (98 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

For more information about Product Editions and Licensing please visit our web site: www.peersoftware.com

To purchase additional Remote Connection licenses, please contact us for additional information.

Note: Peer Software is quite flexible in assembling different combinations of option packages then the ones listed here for enterprise installations with customers requirements in mind. Please contact us for such requests and for more detail of the PeerSync option packages that are available.

Filter Settings (See Next: Folder Selection)

A Filter is a source-target backup/synchronization scenario. Filters are created by identifying a Source Folder and a Target Folder, to which the contents of the Source Folder will be synchronized . Then you the ability to select from more than 80 options, settings and modes to be applied to the source-target backup/synchronization. These options, settings and modes are categorized into Screens based on what they will do to the Filter or what they will do to the data to by modified by the Filter. These selections determine which contents will be synchronized and in what manner they will be synchronized. As well as, when they will be synchronized according to your choice of real-time, interval scheduling, daily timer scheduling, trigger driven or manually initiated operations.

Additional Features (Pro III or Pro IV) (See Next: Automation)

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (99 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Features:

Additional Options

Enable file recovery: File recovery option to continue a file copy that was interrupted for some reason. If the source and target file name and date match but the target file is smaller, PeerSync will start the copy operation from the last byte that was sent the next time a sync operation is executed on the folder.

Note: Enable file recovery does not work with FTP.

During comparison subtract/add x minute(s) from target: Option to add or delete time from target file during folder comparison. This allows for synchronization of files between dissimilar time zones or to allow for some time difference between source and target in case target machine date is slightly different from source.

Note: Enhanced real-time does not work with the During comparison subtract/add x minute(s) from target option.

Validation Options

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (100 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation Perform binary comparison on all files (using CRC32): Option to check all source and target files for binary match during folder scan/compare cycle (using CRC32). This check ensures that what is on the target matches the source at a binary level.

Validate target file (using CRC32): Option to validate file using CRC32 binary comparison after successful file copy operation.

Note: Perform binary comparison on all files and Validate target file (CRC32 features) do not work with FTP.

Retry Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Once this box has opened, it allows for the selection of if the file is not validated to retry the CRC32 validation x times.

Replace In-use Files Options

Replace in-use files upon reboot: If this option is selected, when a file is open and locked on the target folder, it will be set to be replaced the next time the machine is rebooted.

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (101 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation Reboot Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Once this box has opened, you have the options to be given a dialog to decide if you want to reboot or to automatically reboot if a file is in-use and needs to be replaced. The default is to not reboot when an in-use file is detected

Target File Time Change Option* ( Pro IV )

After synchronization subtract/add x minute(s) from target* ( Pro IV ): Option to add or delete time from target file after synchronization. This allows for synchronization of files between dissimilar time zones or to allow for some time difference between source and target in case target machine date is slightly different from source.

* Note: All features described on this page require at least a Pro III or Pro IV Edition of PeerSync.

Additional Configuration Entries

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (102 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Installation

Silent Installation

If a PSDef.CFG file exists in the folder containing the installation application, the following items from that file will be used: [Application Options] Installation Folder= C:\Test\PeerSync User Name= Company= Options= Password= If the PSDef.CFG file is not found and /S is used, then all defaults will be used and no operator intervention will be required.

Temp Folder

If this entry is found in the PSDef.CFG file, the given path will be used for a temporary folder for the application to use. If the path does not exist, an attempt will be made to create it. If it cannot be created, the default will be used which is the logon users system Temp path. [Misc Options] TempFolder=MyTempFolder

http://www.peersoftware.com/ps60.html (103 of 103) [25/04/02 11:13:40] PeerSync Help Manual PeerSync Help Manual Last Updated: 04-02-02

Overview (See Next: Menus)

With the 6.0 release of PeerSync, Peer Software Inc. introduced an even easier, more efficient, and more comprehensive way to execute our proven method for local and network-wide file synchronization and management: PeerSync Profiler. This application allows users to configure a vast number of different and highly specified tasks through a single browser-style interface - without requiring direct interaction with the PeerSync software engine.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (1 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual

Profiler is used to create PeerSync Profiles. A Profile can contain as many as 255 individual synchronization tasks, or Filters. A Filter is defined by identifying a Source Folder, a Target Folder (to which the contents of the Source will be synchronized), and then choosing from more than 80 easily specified Filter Settings. These settings determine which contents will be synchronized, in what manner, and when they will be synchronized -- according to your choice of Real-time, Scheduled, or manually initiated operations. The process of building a Profile is made quick and simple by allowing you to easily create Filters and then follow the sequentially arranged list of Settings screens accessed through the Selection Tree, which is located on the left side of the application interface. The user begins by first selecting a single Filter or multiple Filters from the Profile Filter List. Then specific synchronization criteria are applied to the selected items using Filter Settings. Once synchronization criteria have been configured for each Filter, Global Settings are used to define and execute launch of the entire Profile. By offering a Tool Button Toolbar as well as separate Selection Tree and Profile Filter List windows, Profiler’s browser-based interface allows you to easily view, create, copy, rename, move, or delete Filters regardless of which Settings screen is currently being displayed.

Product Definitions

Synchronization: Updating any existing files or adding new files in the target folder using the source folder as the guide. When completed, the target folder should contain all of the files in the source folder with matching content and time stamps.

Replication: Same as synchronization, except files that are in the target folder that do not have a matching source file will be deleted.

Profiles: A Profile is a description of a complete synchronization scenario. Profiles can contain many source-target combinations allowing the end-user to define very detailed file synchronizations and run them all within a single request. For example, you could build a profile that contains multiple source and target folders such as:

Source = C:\My Documents Target = N:\USERS\TEST\My Documents Source = D:\LocalData Target = N:\USERS\TEST\LocalData

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (2 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual Source = C:\WINDOWS\Profiles Target = N:\USERS\TEST\Profiles

Each of these Source-Target entries can then be further detailed with more than 65 options each making each entry a completely self contained process, and still allowing it to be run as part of a bigger set or Profile.

Filters: A filter is a single entry in a profile. A Profile can contain from one to 255 filters and each filter contains more than 80 individual option settings.

Real-Time Mode: In this mode of operation, PeerSync will automatically detect changes made to the source folder(s) and execute the synchronization options selected for the matching filter. Typically, the target folder is updated with the source folder change within moments of the change. Note that PeerSync may have completed the operation before Windows actually displays the change in the target folder Explorer window.

Scheduled Mode: In this mode of operation, PeerSync will execute the designated filter at the selected time. Each filter in the profile can have the same or different time interval.

Product Support

All support of PeerSync products will be handled on our web site (www.peersoftware.com) support page or by sending email to our support box at [email protected].

The manufacturer of PeerSync makes no warranties, implied or otherwise, for use of this product. User assumes all responsibility for any data loss or damage.

Menus (See Next: Tool Buttons)

In addition to special options found only on Profiler menus, menu items replicate those features accessed through Profiler Tool Buttons. As a result, you can still access essential Profile and Filter Settings even if you have chosen to hide Tool Buttons using the View Menu.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (3 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual File: This menu includes items allowing you to create and save new Profiles, open existing Profiles, create Profile desktop shortcuts, and exit the application. New: Create a new Profile. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Open: Open an existing Profile. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Reopen: Reopen a recently used Profile. Save: Save the current Profile. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Save as: Rename and save the current Profile. Profile - Revert to Saved: Revert to the last saved settings of the current Profile. Profile - Merge Existing: Merge an existing Profile into the current Profile. Profile - Create Shortcut on Desktop: Create and add a shortcut to PeerSync of the current Profile and settings/command line arguments to the desktop. Profile - Save Defaults: Save the current settings of the Profile as the default settings. Exit: Close/exit the application.

Edit: Allows you to move one step up or down between Selection Tree options screens while providing a shortcut to the Current Profile Activity screen. Back: Move back to the previous screen. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Next: Move on to the next screen. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Current Profile Activity: Go to the Current Profile Activity screen.

View: Allows you to change the appearance of the application interface. "Hint" items enable or disable pop-up hints activated by passing the mouse pointer over interface features, as well as those displayed in the Status Bar located at the bottom of the application interface. In addition to a description of Profiler features, hints will identify command line arguments associated with those features (if any). Toolbars - Tool Buttons: Show/hide the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Toolbars - Profile Description: Show/hide the Profile Description Toolbar. Toolbars - with Hot Tracks: Show/hide the hot tracks features for the Toolbars. http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (4 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual

Toolbars - with Text Labels: Show/hide description text labels for the Toolbars. Selection Tree: Show/hide the Selection Tree left side panel. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Status Bar: Show/hide the Status Bar at the bottom of the application. Hints - on Application: Show/hide pop-up hints displayed on the application. Hints - on Status Bar: Show/hide hints displayed on the Status Bar.

Options: Allows you to select options pertaining to the way PeerSync, the Profiler and the Wizard interact with each other and Windows Explorer. Use Wizard to Add Filters: If selected, directs Profiler to open the PeerSync Wizard application as an easier and simpler way to add new Filters to a Profile. If not selected, the Add Filter option will use the saved Filter defaults. This feature is toggled on or off depending on which option was used the last time that a Filter was added (with Defaults or with Wizard). Create SNC extension association: If selected, creates an association of any file that has an SNC extension with the Profiler to be used as the default application to open these files. If not selected, the association of SNC files with the Profiler will be removed. This feature is also accessible from the Startup Options screen. Add Quick-Sync Folder option to Explorer menu: If selected, will add our Quick-Sync feature to Windows Explorer. To access this feature simply right-click on any folder in Explorer or on your Desktop and you will be able to sync the folder to selected target folder(s), add the job to a Quick-Sync Profile that is stored out in memory and given the ability to modify/add to the jobs using the Profiler. This feature is also accessible from the Startup Options screen.

Run: Allows you to Launch the Current Profile, Terminate the Active Profile and Update the Current Profile. Launch Current Profile: This option will launch the current Profile (filter/global settings) in PeerSync. During this process, an instance of PeerSync will be started with the current Profile as the first parameter and the arguments selected from the Operation Mode screen as the subsequent parameters. You can automate this process via a shortcut, through the startup folder, in the registry or as a service by selecting one of these features from the StartUp Options screen. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Terminate Active Profile: This option, when available, will allow a user to terminate an

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (5 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual instance of PeerSync that contains an active Profile that is connected to the Profiler. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Update Current Profile: This option, when available, will allow a user to update an instance of PeerSync with the current Profile opened in the Profiler. Note: Because it is separate from the core software engine, the Profiler allows you to create and configure new Profiles while PeerSync runs Synchronization Operations at optimum efficiency. In both this Help file and on Profiler screens "Current" refers to the Profile currently being configured but not yet launched, while "Active" most often refers to the Profile presently being run by the PeerSync engine.

Filter: Allows you to manipulate Filters within the current Profile. If "Allow Multiple Selection" has been checked on this menu you will be able to select and apply settings to multiple Filters.

Add - Filter with Defaults: Creates and adds a Filter to the current Profile using the saved Filter defaults. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar and the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Add - Filter with Wizard: Opens the PeerSync Wizard application that allows you to select a pre determined canned scenario and add it as a Filter to the current Profile. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar and the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Copy: Creates a duplicate copy of the currently selected Filter and all of its settings. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar and the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Rename: Allows for the renaming of the selected Filter. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar and the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Delete: Allows for the deletion of the currently selected Filter(s). This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar and the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Clear All: Will close the current Profile allowing for the user to create a new Profile.

Select All: Will select all of the Filters.

Invert Selection: Will change the selected state of all the Filters.

Allow Multiple Selection: Gives the ability to select and apply settings to multiple Filters.

Move Up: Moves the currently selected Filter up one in the list. This feature is also accessible http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (6 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual

from the Tool Buttons Toolbar and the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Move Down: Moves the currently selected Filter down one in the list. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar and the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Save Defaults: Stores the currently selected Filter Settings as the default for all subsequent new added Filters.

Help: While allowing you to access Help files and the About screen, this menu also provides demonstrations of PeerSync's Real-time Monitoring and Scheduled Operation modes.

Demos - Real-time Monitoring: This feature will start an instance of PeerSync in a demo mode to display it's real-time synchronization capabilities. Demos - Scheduled Operations: This feature will start an instance of PeerSync in a demo mode to display it's scheduled synchronization capabilities. Web Site: This menu item will have many links back to our web site for product information, downloads, updates and support. PeerSync Help: Will open the application help file to the contents section. You may also access specific parts of the help file for features you are currently observing by pressing 'F1' on your keyboard. License Information: Will display the different Product Editions and Licensing available for PeerSync, as well as, what the current edition has available and other useful information about the current package you are running. About PeerSync: Will display an about screen, that contains information about the current package you are running.

Evaluation: Only displayed in evaluation copies of the software, this menu item will contain features that we believe are helpful to the user during evaluation such as demos, read me files and other evaluation oriented features.

View Popup Menu: Activated by right clicking on the application Menu, Tool Buttons Toolbar, Profile Description Toolbar or the Status Bar, you can select many of the options available from the application View Menu.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (7 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual

Tool Buttons (See Next: Profile Description)

Profiler offers a simple set of browser-style Tool Buttons allowing you to easily modify the current Profile and its Filters, regardless of which screen has been chosen from the Selection Tree. These Buttons can be hidden by un checking the "Tool Buttons" option, accessed through the "Toolbars" item on the View Menu. Even if this Toolbar has been hidden you will still be able to access its options by using the File, Edit, and Filter Menus. You can also change the placement of these Buttons by clicking on the left side of the Toolbar and dragging it to rest above or below the Profile Description Toolbar. The following descriptions are listed in the order in which they appear left to right on the Tool Buttons Toolbar and are all accessible via the application Menus.

New Profile: Located on the far left of the Toolbar, this Button creates a new Profile. If another Profile containing unsaved changes is currently open when this Button is pressed, a dialog box will open asking you if you want to save changes to the current Profile before opening a new one. (See Save Profile Button Below). If you choose "No," the new Profile will replace the current one and no changes will be saved. Note: If the current Profile has not been previously saved and "No" is chosen, the entire Profile will be lost.

Open Profile: This Button displays a "Select Profile File" dialog box allowing you to open an existing Profile. By default, it will open in the path in which PeerSync has been installed (i.e. C:\Program Files\PeerSync). Links to previously opened Profiles can be accessible through a drop-down list opened by clicking on the arrow key attached to this Button.

Save Profile: This Button allows you to save new Profiles, or save changes made to existing Profiles. If you are saving a new Profile, a "Save As" dialog box will open allowing you to name and store it as an .SNC file in your choice of folders, with "NewProfile" as the default

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (8 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual name and the path in which PeerSync has been installed as the default directory. Profiles and Profile modifications must be saved in order to be subsequently accessible.

Launch Current Profile: This option will launch the current Profile (filter/global settings) in PeerSync. During this process, an instance of PeerSync will be started with the current Profile as the first parameter and the arguments selected from the Operation Mode screen as the subsequent parameters. You can automate this process via a shortcut, through the startup folder, in the registry or as a service by selecting one of these features from the StartUp Options screen.

Terminate Active Profile: This option, when available, will allow a user to terminate an instance of PeerSync that contains an active Profile that is connected to the Profiler.

Add Filter: This Button adds a Filter to the bottom of the current list (See Profile Filter List). Filters are named "New Filter Item" and assigned a number by default. If you have selected "Use Wizard to Add New Filters" from the Options Menu, the PeerSync Wizard application will open when this Button is pressed. The Wizard provides a guided, step-by-step method for creating and configuring new Filters. A drop-down list attached to this Button also allows you to choose between "Add Filter With Wizard" or "Add Filter With Defaults" options. If the former is chosen, PeerSync Wizard will open every time this Button is pressed. If the latter is chosen, new Filters added to the list through this Button will be configured manually using Selection Tree screens. These Filters will use whichever default settings are currently applied (See Filter Menu, "Save Defaults"). Note: The first time "Add Filter With Wizard" is chosen from the drop-down list, the Wizard application will open. After that point PeerSync Wizard will be launched by pressing the Add Filter Button.

Copy Filter: Creates a copy of the currently selected Filter and places it at the bottom of the Profile Filter List. Copies will be numbered by default and named after the original (i.e. "Copy 1 of My Syncs").

Rename Filter: Allows you to rename the currently selected Filter. Filters can also be renamed manually by clicking on them after they have been highlighted.

Delete Filter: Deletes the currently selected Filter(s). When this Button is pressed, a dialog box

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (9 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual will open asking you to confirm deletion. Filters can also be deleted by selecting them and then pressing the DELETE key on your keyboard.

Move Filter Up: Moves the currently selected Filter up one place within the Profile Filter List.

Move Filter Down: Moves the currently selected Filter down one place within the Profile Filter List.

Show Selection Tree: Shows or hides the Selection Tree. It the Tree has been hidden, its space will be filled within the interface by the currently selected Settings screen. When the tree is hidden, screens can still be selected using the drop-down list attached to the Back Button.

Back: Using the order shown in the Selection Tree, this Button opens the screen located immediately above that, which is currently being displayed. Settings screens can also be accessed using the drop-down list located on the right side of the Back Button; list items follow the same order as that shown on the Selection Tree.

Next: Using the order shown in the Selection Tree, this Button opens the Profile Options screen located immediately below the screen currently being displayed.

Profile Description (See Next: Profile Filter List)

This field displays a textual description of the current Profile. By default the description for an unsaved Profile will read "Profile Filter List." Unless you enter a unique description into this field, a default description will be assigned upon saving the Profile: this default description will match the new Profile name.

Descriptions can be changed at any time; like all Profiler configurations they must be saved prior to closing the Profile or application in order to be stored. You can change the placement of the Profile Description Toolbar by clicking on its left side and dragging it to rest above or below the

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (10 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual Tool Buttons Toolbar. The Profile Description can also be hidden by un checking the "Profile Description" option, accessed through the "Toolbars" item on the View Menu.

Profile Filter List (See Next: Selection Tree)

Located beneath the Toolbars, this window displays all Filters associated with the current Profile. Use of this list is central to the Profile-building process: all configurations made on the Filter Settings screens (accessed through the Selection Tree) will only be applied to those Filters currently selected from this list.

To select a Filter, highlight it using the left mouse Button. The "Allow Multiple Selection" item must be checked on the Filter Menu in order to select and have settings applied to multiple Filters. To select multiple adjacent Filters, highlight the first Filter, hold down the SHIFT key on your keyboard, and then highlight the last Filter you wish to include. You can also hold down the SHIFT key and then use the up or down arrow keys on your keyboard. To select multiple nonadjacent Filters, highlight the first Filter, then hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard and click on each additional Filter you wish to include. Once you have selected a Filter or Filters, move through the screens found on the Selection Tree and apply settings as desired. Highlighting on the selected Filter(s) will appear gray as you move through these screens, indicating that any settings will only be applied to those selected Filters. Screens found under the Global Settings section of the tree apply to entire Profiles only, as opposed to individual Filters. Note: The Profile Filter List window will appear gray when global or Profile-related screens, such as those found under Global Settings, are chosen from the Selection Tree. The box appearing to the left of each Filter must be checked in order for that Filter to be included in the active Profile when launched. Although unchecked Filters will not be processed upon launch, they will be saved within the Profile for future use and/or selection.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (11 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual

Upon creating a new Profile, an initial Filter will be displayed bearing the name "New Filter Item 1" by default (this applies to manual Filter creation only). The first New Filter added within an existing Profile will also bear this name. Successive Filters will be named "New Filter Item 2," "New Filter Item 3," etc. Any selected Filter can be renamed through the "Rename" Tool Button, through items found on both the Filter Menu and Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu described below, or manually by selecting it a second time using the left mouse Button. In both new and stored Profiles, you can navigate the Profile Filter List as well as add, copy, delete, and navigate Filters using the Tool Buttons, using items from the Filter Menu, and by using items found on the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu described below. You can also navigate the list and delete items using the DELETE and up and down arrow keys on your keyboard. Note: In order to navigate or modify the Profile Filter List you must have first clicked somewhere within the Profile Filter List window: this ensures that during configuration any options chosen from the Selection Tree Settings screens are applied exclusively to the currently selected Filter. The height of the Profile Filter List window can be changed by passing the mouse pointer over its bottom border until a double/Arrow cursor appears, then dragging the window to meet the desired size. At minimum size, only a single Filter may be viewed. Adding a new Filter while this view is in effect prompts display of up and down arrow Buttons in the right side of the window. These Buttons allow you to view different Filters within the list.

Pop-Up Menu: Activated by right clicking on the Profile Filter List, this menu duplicates the mostly used features found on the Filter Menu while providing some additional items listed below.

Synchronize Selected Filters: This executes an immediate, non-persistent synchronization of the currently selected Filters ("non- persistent" refers to a one-time sync process; "persistent" refers to ongoing sync operations such as Real-time Monitoring or Scheduled Operations). During this process, persistent arguments set for the current Profile will be ignored. When the Button is depressed, a confirmation dialog will be displayed indicating which Filters have been selected from the active Profile and asking you to confirm synchronization through a "Yes" or "No" Button. If "Yes" is selected, the synchronization will proceed. A message will always be displayed upon completion of this operation. Other sync operations allow you to

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (12 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual choose whether or not such a message will be displayed.

Create Pre-Sync Report: This executes a pre-sync of the currently selected Filters. During this process, files and folders will not be modified and persistent arguments set for the current Profile will be ignored. A report will be created/displayed with what work would be done if a sync was actually performed.

Log File - View: This Button allows you to view Log reports by opening the file in a text editor. This feature is also accessible from the Reporting screen.

Log File - Clear: This Button allows you to clear Log reports. This feature is also accessible from the Reporting screen.

Last Run On - Reset: This is a display of and a means of resetting the last run date/time of the selected Filter within the current Profile. This is the date/time that will be used when comparing files for the Bi-directional Synchronization Mode option on the Alterations Screen. This feature is also displayed on the from the Folder Selection screen.

Selection Tree (See Next: Filter Settings)

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (13 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual The Selection Tree is located at the left side of the PeerSync Profiler interface. The Selection Tree can also be hidden by un checking the "Selection Tree" option, accessed through the "Toolbars" item on the View Menu.

Screens can be accessed through this tree, which are used to set synchronization criteria for individual Filters (Filter Settings), as well as set global properties relating to execution of the entire Profile and all related Filters (Global Settings).

Once you have selected a Filter or Filters from the Profile Filter List, all options configured on Filter Settings screens will only be applied to those selections.

After synchronization criteria for all individual Filters have been established, use the Global Settings screens to set global properties relating to all Filters, as well as decide how you would like the Profile to be executed.

The Profile Filter List will appear gray when any Global Settings screen is displayed, indicating that all properties set on that screen will be applied to the entire Profile.

The Selection Tree items are customizable and can be viewed or hidden by turning off "Show All Profile Options", right-clicking on the "Selection Tree" and selecting the "Customize" Pop-Up Menu item described below.

Some Selection Tree items will not be accessible depending on the package you are currently using.

Pop-Up Menu: Activated by right clicking on the Selection Tree, this menu duplicates the items listed in the Selection Tree, as well as, the items listed in the drop-down list located on the right side of the Back Button on the Tool Buttons Toolbar. This Menu also offers the following options:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (14 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual

Show All Profile Options: This feature will toggle between showing all Profile Options and the Custom Options in the Selection Tree.

Customize: This feature will allow the user to select which Profile Options to display in the Custom Selection Tree, when the "Show All Profile Options" is turned off. When selected the user will be given the dialog box shown below to pick and choose which Profile Options to use.

Quick-Sync Quick-Sync Folder selection directly from MS Windows Explorer

This feature is a quick and easy way to synchronize folder(s) on the fly to backup location(s) with the option to modify your filtering criteria at a later time.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (15 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual

Simply right click on any folder you wish to sync and select "Quick-Sync Folder..."

This will launch PSWizard, which will ask you to select a target folder to sync to...

...and your ready to run the Quick-Sync. You also have the options to edit and/or add the current

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (16 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual sync Filter to your Quick-Sync Profile or any other selected Profile.

Anytime you select a folder if it matches any source or target selections in the Quick-Sync Profile then the Filters will be listed to pick from or you have the option to add a new Filter.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (17 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual

Command Line Arguments PeerSync’s Command Line Mode offers users the ability to configure a truly "hands-off" installation, where operation and distribution occurs from within an easily manageable, administrative environment. This mode allows Profiles to be executed from logon scripts, system batch (BAT) or command (CMD) files, detailed shortcuts, and shell commands -- while also providing full access to PeerSync Profiler features through command line arguments.

Profiles will need to be created through PeerSync Profiler first in order to be further modified through the arguments described in this topic (See PeerSync Profiler Overview and related Help Topics).

Command Line Arguments are entered into a Profile shortcut, created during build through the "Add to Desktop" Button found on Profiler’s Startup Options screen.

Note: For the command line arguments described in this topic, note that attention is paid to punctuation, to the order in which arguments are entered, and that appropriate spaces are used to separate these arguments. Follow the format outlined in the examples provided.

Also: Profile .SNC file names are the only command line variables associated with operation of PeerSync Profiler. All other arguments described in this topic are used to configure operation of the PeerSync engine and its execution of

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (18 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual

Profiles.

Profiler Command Line Arguments As noted above, Profile (.SNC) file names are the only variables associated with operation of PeerSync Profiler. To change an .SNC file name through the command line:

I. Right click the Profile shortcut you created during build (see StartUp Options, "Add to Desktop" Button).

II. Select the "Properties" item from the pop-up menu.

III. Select the "Shortcut" tab. As shown in the following sample, the "Target" field will contain a command line for the Profile, where "Profile One" represents a sample Profile name:

"C:\Program Files\PeerSync\PeerSync.exe" "C:\Program Files\PeerSync\Profile One.SNC" /A /M

I. Manually change the Profile Name to reflect that of the new .SNC file.

II. Click "OK."

PeerSync Command Line Arguments The following arguments are appended to the end of the command line followed by a space and forward slash ( i.e. /A ). A space and forward slash are also used to separate each additional argument ( i.e. /A /M).

Note: Command line arguments can also be identified through hints displayed on the Profiler interface. If you have selected to display hints through the View Menu (either on the application interface or in its Status Bar), a hint will be displayed for Profiler features upon passing the mouse cursor over them. These hints will display both a description of the feature as well as its related command line argument (if any).

Command Line Arguments:

/A (Run Automatically): If this argument is appended to the command line, the Profile can be run through its associated shortcut. As non-persistent processes, Automatic Operations are run a single time upon manual initiation by the user.

Example: "C:\PeerSync\PeerSync50.exe" "Profile One.SNC" /A

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (19 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual

/AP (Run a Pre-Sync Report): If the /AP argument is used a Pre-Sync Report will be generated and files/folders will not be synchronized. If you add an O to the /AP then the previous Pre-Sync report will be Over written, if you exclude the O then the file will be appended to an existing Pre-Sync report. If you add an S to the /AP then the Pre-Sync report will be Shown at the end of the run (i.e.: /AP, /APO, /APOS or /APS).

/C (Custom Configuration Files): A user-generated Configuration File can be automatically loaded by using the /C command line argument followed by a colon and the file name ( /C:FILENAME ):

Example: "C:\PeerSync\PeerSync50.EXE" "/C:C:\PeerSync\MyConfig.CFG"

/D (Delay Warning): To have a delay warning dialog box displayed prior to Automatic Operation, enter a blank space, then add /D and then the desired length of delay (in seconds) to the end of the command line. If you’ve chosen this option any Automatic Operation can be canceled through this dialog box if done so within the designated interval. For example, /D5 would provide you with a 5 second delay during which the operation can be canceled. This delay can only be used with Automatic Operations.

Example: "C:\PeerSync\PeerSync50.EXE" "Profile 1.SNC" /A /D5

Note: If the /D argument includes an H, i.e. DH60, then the delay timer will be hidden during operation. This feature is intended for systems that run PeerSync upon starting Windows. This will allow PeerSync to begin after other applications have been loaded.

Default Folders: Additional command line arguments can designate default folders for PeerSync to synchronize upon launch. If one folder name is entered as follows, that folder will be selected by default for both Source and Target:

Example: "C:\PeerSync\PeerSync50.EXE" "C:\DOCS"

If two folders are listed, separated by a space, the first folder becomes the default Source folder and the second becomes the default Target folder.

Example: "C:\DOCS" "G:\DOCS"

Note: For variable command line folder paths, see Folder Selection Help.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (20 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual

DLL file to improve interaction with WordPerfect v8 and v9: Working with the Corel corporation, Peer Software, Inc. developed a 3rd party utility that disabled the Save function in WordPerfect for "unmodified" documents. This reduces the possible "File Access Denied" error that WordPerfect produces when PeerSync is synchronizing the active document. To use this option you must rerun the PeerSync installation program a second time. The file "PSWPMod.DLL" will be installed in the Windows System32 folder.

For WordPerfect 9, add "/WPMOD9" (or "/WPMOD" default) on the PeerSync command line, which will modify the registry as follows:

Key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\COREL\WordPerfect\9\Third Party

String: DLL16

Value: C:\WinNT\System32\PSWPMod.DLL

For WordPerfect 8, add "/WPMOD8" on the PeerSync command line, which will modify the registry as follows:

Key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\COREL\WordPerfect\8\Third Party

String: DLL16

Value: C:\WinNT\System32\PSWPMod.DLL

Note: The DLL16 string may vary based on the installation of other 3rd party add-ons to your WordPerfect installation. The value could be DLL15, DLL14, etc.

/E (Suppress Real-time Filters): This argument will suppress real-time Filters until the initial synchronization has completed.

/GAn (Set Empty file delay time): If file size is 0 bytes then delay n milliseconds and check file size again. If byte count is then greater than 0, try sending again.

/GBn (Set Shadow Detection Sensitivity): Set amount of time (in milliseconds) to allow multiple changes to be ignored for same file in real-time detection mode. Default is 250 milliseconds (1/4 of a second)

/GCn (Set file comparison value to add to target file): Set the amount of time in seconds to http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (21 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual be added to the target file for comparison purposes. This option is useful when comparing source and target files that reside on computers that are running different operating systems. File time conversion can vary between half and one and a half seconds causing PeerSync to force file to be updated when they are actually unchanged. Default is 1.

/H (Hide Splash Screen): Available through all registered versions of PeerSync, this argument will suppress and hide the splash screen for both the PeerSync and PSProfiler applications.

/I (Ignore Target Drive Space): The /I argument configures PeerSync to attempt file synchronization without first checking for available Target drive space.

/J (Move Files After Sync): The /J argument configures PeerSync to delete Source files after successful copy to Target.

/K5 (Display activity back to Profiler): This argument will display activity and statistics back to the Profiler Current Profile Activity screen.

/M (Show as Tray Icon): If this argument is used, a tray icon will be shown during execution of the Profile by the PeerSync engine.

/MCT:n (Multiple Copy Threads): This argument will allow for multiple copy threads during synchronization which will allow for parallel synchronization of files (i.e. /MCT:25).

/MFT:n (Multiple Filter Threads): This argument will allow for multiple Filter threads during synchronization which will allow for parallel synchronization of Filters (i.e. /MFT:200).

/NDD (Use Universal System event detection method): This argument disables use of the Windows NT device driver.

Note: The device driver is required during Real-time Operations for non-NT drives.

/O (Overwrite Target Files): The /O argument configures PeerSync to always overwrite http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (22 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual Target files regardless of their date.

/PERFORMANCEn (PeerSync Priority Performance: n = 0-2): This command line argument will set the main application and real-time detection threads in PeerSync to pre determined levels 0-low, 1-normal or 2-high.

/PRIORITYAPPn (PeerSync Application thread: n = 0-2): This command line argument will override the Performance setting and set the main PeerSync Application thread in PeerSync to the selected level. The following describes each priority setting.

0 = IDLE_PRIORITY_CLASS Specify this class for a process whose threads run only when the system is idle. The threads of the process are preempted by the threads of any process running in a higher priority class. An example is a screen saver. The idle-priority class is inherited by child processes.

1 = NORMAL_PRIORITY_CLASS Specify this class for a process with no special scheduling needs.

2 = HIGH_PRIORITY_CLASS Specify this class for a process that performs time-critical tasks that must be executed immediately. The threads of the process preempt the threads of normal or idle priority class processes. An example is Windows Task List, which must respond quickly when called by the user, regardless of the load on the operating system. Use extreme care when using the high-priority class, because a high-priority class application can use nearly all available CPU time.

/PRIORITYRTn (Real-time detection thread: n = 0-6): This command line argument will override the Performance setting and set the real-time detection thread in PeerSync to the selected level. The Default is tpNormal unless the application is in Enhanced real-time mode then it gets set to tpHighest. The following describes each priority setting.

0 = tpIdle The thread executes only when the system is idle-Windows won't interrupt other threads to execute a thread with tpIdle priority.

1 = tpLowest The thread's priority is two points below normal.

2 = tpLower The thread's priority is one point below normal.

3 = tpNormal The thread has normal priority.

4 = tpHigher

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (23 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual

The thread's priority is one point above normal.

5 = tpHighest The thread's priority is two points above normal.

6 = tpTimeCritical The thread gets highest priority.

/Progress (Show Progress during synchronization): When this command line argument is sent to PeerSync the Profiler will be started and will display the synchronization progress.

/Q (Monitoring Target Folders): The /Q argument configures PeerSync to monitor the Target Folder automatically.

/R (Real-time Monitoring Argument): The /R argument activates Real-time Mode.

Example: "PeerSync50.exe" "MyProfile.Snc" /A /M /R or "PeerSync50.exe" "C:\MyData C:\Target" /A /R

Note: The /A argument must also be used in order for /R to be recognized.

Monitoring Requirements and Additional Commands:

If the "Include Sub Folders" option has been chosen from the Folder Selection Screen, then the active folder and all sub-folders will be monitored as a single selection.

Network folders are only checked for changes made from the monitoring PC. If the network folders are changed by another user on the network, this change will not be detected.

If changes occur during a long update, requests for additional updates are added to a queue and processed by active folder first, then first-in, first-out (FIFO). To set an interval (in seconds) determining how frequently the queue will be checked, add an S to the /R argument followed by the desired number of seconds (i.e. /RS5 for 5 seconds). The default interval is one second.

You can set the number of changes that must occur to the monitored folders before the synchronization process will begin. To set this change count, use the argument /W followed by a number indicating the desired number of changes (i.e. /W3).

Note: The /W argument will be disabled if /S is being used, or if the "Run Filter Every X Minutes" option has

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (24 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual

been checked on Profiler’s Automation screen.

/ROxCz (Retry Open Files): When PeerSync cannot copy an open Source file, this option will automatically place the open file information into a list that will be retried on a recurring basis and can be limited to the number of retry attempts. A sample command line argument for this option would be /RO30C10, where /R starts Real-time Operations; O30 turns on the Open file retry and repeats the attempt every 30 seconds, and C10 (optional) sets the number of tries (Count) attempted before no additional attempts will be made. The default setting directs PeerSync to repeat continuously until a file is synchronized.

/S (Run Scheduled Operation): The /S argument enables or disables Scheduled Operation Mode for the entire Profile. This option must be selected in order for all Scheduled Operations set for individual Filters to be recognized. Scheduled Mode does not apply a global schedule to the entire Profile: rather, it enables those schedules set for all individual Filters on to run at their specified intervals.

All Scheduled Operations set for individual Filters will be ignored if this mode is not selected. If none of the Filters within a Profile are set for Scheduled Operation and this mode is selected, all active Filters within the Profile will be assigned a default synchronization schedule of five minutes.

/Sx (Synchronization Timer Argument): The /Sx option is used to run Peer Sync automatically at regular intervals. This argument sets PeerSync to synchronize the selected Profile every x minutes. Through this option PeerSync remains persistent and will not terminate upon completion.

Example: "PeerSync50.exe" "MyProfile.Snc" /A /M /S10 (Synchronization will be performed every 10 minutes)

or

Example: "PeerSync50.exe" "C:\MyData C:\Target" /A /M /S10 (Synchronization will be performed every 10 minutes)

/SxKz (Synchronization Timer Argument with Keyboard Activity): The /SxKz option is used to run Peer Sync automatically at regular intervals only when it senses keyboard activity. This argument sets PeerSync to synchronize the selected Profile every x minutes upon Keyboard activity and will always run every z cycles with/without keyboard activity. The z is optional and

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (25 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual will be ignored if set to 0. Through this option PeerSync remains persistent and will not terminate upon completion.

/T (Terminate Running Copies of PeerSync): This argument broadcasts a terminate message to any currently running copies of the program, and will subsequently terminate the copy from which the command was launched. This can be useful when updating the application from a remote network source.

/TD (Display notice upon completion of synchronization): This argument will display a notice at the end of a manual synchronization with messages, summary information, files added, files updated, files excluded and files deleted.

/TIME (Daily Timer): This argument will allow for scheduling of PeerSync for specific times of the day down to the minute for selected days of the week and selected Filters within a Profile.

If you use a /TIMEF argument all selections at the Filter level from the Automation screen will be used.

You can also specify Global Daily Timer selections for the entire profile from the Operation Mode Screen or by using the following format:

1. Select the time of day (by default all Filters will be run all days)

/TIME:HH:MM Where HH is replaced with the value of 00-23 in military time and MM is replaced with 00-59 in minutes

Examples: Every Day at 12:00 am: /TIME:00:00 Every Day at 1:00 am: /TIME:01:00 Every Day at 8:00 am: /TIME:08:00 Every Day at 12:00 pm: /TIME:12:00 Every Day at 8:00 pm: /TIME:20:00

2. (Optional) - To select the days of week to run append the following:

D:SMTWTFS Where the days are substituted with 1 (On) and 0 (Off)

Sunday: D:1000000 Monday: D:0100000 Tuesday: D:0010000 http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (26 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual

Wednesday: D:0001000 Thursday: D:0000100 Friday: D:0000010 Saturday: D:0000001

Examples: M, W & F at 8:00 am: /TIME:08:00D:0101010 Sat & Sun at 5:15 pm: /TIME:17:15D:1000001 Mon - Fri at 3:30 am: /TIME:03:30D:0111110

3. (Optional) - To select the Filters to run append F:f1;f2;f3

Where f1-fn are the Filter numbers.

Examples: Filter 1 Every day at 6:00 am: /TIME:06:00F:1 Filters 1 - 5 Every day at 8:25 pm: /TIME:20:25F:1;2;3;4;5 Filters 1, 3 & 5 Mon - Fri at 3:30 am: /TIME:03:30D:0111110F:1;3;5

Note: Will accept multiple command lines.

Example: Filter 1 Every day at 8:00 am, Filters 1 - 5 Every day at 8:25 pm and Filters 1, 3 & 5 Mon - Fri at 3:30 am /TIME:08:00F:1 /TIME:20:25F:1;2;3;4;5 /TIME:03:30D:0111110F:1;3;5

Sample: Complete command line to run PeerSync with Test.snc, all Filters, at 3:00 am Mon -Fri, (M)inimized on the tray. "C:\Program Files\PeerSync\PeerSync.exe" "C:\Program Files\PeerSync\test.snc" /TIME:3:00D:0111110 /M

/UDD (Use Device Driver method): This argument uses of the Windows NT device driver for real-time detection.

/< (Applications to Ignore): If using the Device Driver method for real-time detection you can select applications to ignore by appending application names (semicolon delimited) to the /< argument.

Example: /

/V (Verify User Logon): The /V argument verifies that the last known PeerSync user name (from logon name) matches that of the currently logged user. If the names do not match, a

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (27 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual notification dialog will be displayed. To disable the dialog warning and exit PeerSync if the user names do not match, enter an R to the /V argument, i.e. /VR.

Note: User names will not be stored for future comparison unless this function has been activated.

Note: Unlike other command line arguments, this function is not accessible through a corresponding feature on the Profiler interface.

/W (Change Count before Sync): This argument is used in conjunction with /R to set the number of changes that must occur to the monitored folders before the synchronization process will begin. To set this change count, use /W followed by a number indicating the desired number of changes (i.e. /W3).

Note: The /W argument will be disabled if /S is being used, or if the "Run Filter Every X Minutes" option has been checked on Profiler’s Automation screen.

/X (Disable Initial Synchronization During Startup): The /X command line argument disables initial synchronization during /A /M /R operations at PeerSync startup

Additional Configuration Entries

Silent Installation

If a PSDef.CFG file exists in the folder containing the installation application, the following items from that file will be used: [Application Options] Installation Folder= C:\Test\PeerSync User Name= Company= Options= Password= If the PSDef.CFG file is not found and /S is used, then all defaults will be used and no operator intervention will be required.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (28 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual Temp Folder

If this entry is found in the PSDef.CFG file, the given path will be used for a temporary folder for the application to use. If the path does not exist, an attempt will be made to create it. If it cannot be created, the default will be used which is the logon users system Temp path. [Misc Options] TempFolder=MyTempFolder

Filter Settings (See Next: Folder Selection)

A Filter is a source-target backup/synchronization scenario. Filters are created by identifying a Source Folder and a Target Folder, to which the contents of the Source Folder will be synchronized . Then you the ability to select from more than 80 options, settings and modes to be applied to the source-target backup/synchronization. These options, settings and modes are categorized into Screens based on what they will do to the Filter or what they will do to the data to by modified by the Filter. These selections determine which contents will be synchronized and in what manner they will be synchronized. As well as, when they will be synchronized according to your choice of real-time, interval scheduling, daily timer scheduling, trigger driven or manually initiated operations.

Folder Selection (See Next: FTP Selection)

Each Filter within a Profile is initially defined by using this screen to select a Source and Target Folder. The contents of a Source Folder will be synchronized to a Target Folder according to criteria further defined on other Settings screens. Once you have highlighted a Filter or Filters from the Profile Filter List, this screen offers several different methods to locate and select folders for synchronization. File paths can be typed manually, or you can browse local and network drives to locate and select your desired folders.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (29 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual

Features:

Source Folder Selection

Source Folder Field: Select a Source Folder by typing the file path into the field provided, or by using the Select Source Folder Button (See Below). By default, the Source Folder field will contain the path in which PeerSync has been installed: in most cases this will be C:\PROGRAM FILES\PeerSync. The convention outlined in this path must be used when manually typing entries, i.e. a drive must be specified followed by a colon, with subsequent folders separated by backslashes. Capital letters are not necessary, though spaces may only be entered where they are part of valid folder names (i.e. "Program Files"). No space should appear between slashes and folder names. This field also supports File/Folder Path Variables and when used the current path will be displayed above the field.

UNC names can be entered manually, or can be selected from the Network Neighborhood using the "Browse for Folder" dialog box (see Select Source Folder Button). UNC names will appear in the form \\COMPUTER\SHAREDDEVICE\PATH.

Example: \\SERVER11\D\USERDATA

Note We do not recommend using UNC paths for folders that reside on the local machine, in this scenario you should use the local path to that folder.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (30 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual Folders can also be dragged and dropped from MS Windows Explorer into the Source Folder Field for automatic insertion.

Select Source Folder Button: This Button opens a "Browse for Folder" dialog box: once this box has opened, locate your chosen Source folder, select it using the left mouse Button, and click "OK."

Explore/Open/Create Button: This Button provides three options, selected from the attached drop-down list. The Button label will change to reflect whichever item has been checked on this list.

When "Explore" has been selected and the Button is depressed, an Explorer-type window will open displaying all available directories. By default, this window will show the folder whose path is currently designated in the Source field. If the folder shown in this field does not exist, Profiler will display a dialog alerting you to this fact and asking if you would like to create it: you can do so by clicking the "Yes" Button located at the bottom of this dialog. Once you have done so the newly created Folder will be shown in the Explorer-type tree.

When "Open" has been selected and the Button is depressed, a traditional MS navigation window is opened displaying the contents of whichever folder is currently shown in the Source Folder Field. If this folder does not exist, Profiler will display a dialog alerting you to this fact and asking if you would like to create it: you can do so by clicking "Yes" Button located at the bottom of this dialog. Once you have done so the newly created Folder will be shown in the navigation window.

When "Create" has been selected and the Button is depressed, a "Select Directory" dialog will open allowing you to specify a Source Folder path by using the mouse to select a desired drive, directory, and folder. Folder paths can also be manually entered into the "Directory Name" field. If you enter a path for a folder that does not exist and hit the ENTER key or click "OK," a dialog box will appear allowing you to create this folder.

Include Sub-folders: If this check box is selected, all sub-folders contained within the Source Folder will be synchronized to the Target.

Target Folder Selection

Selection of Target Folders is accomplished through the same method as that used for Source Folder selection, with the following matching controls:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (31 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual Target Folder Field: Select a Target Folder by typing the file path into the field provided, or by using the Select Target Folder Button described below. By default, this field will contain the path in which PeerSync has been installed: in most cases this will be C:\PROGRAM FILES\PeerSync. The convention outlined in this path must be used when manually typing entries, i.e. a drive must be specified followed by a colon, with subsequent folders separated by backslashes. Capital letters are not necessary, though spaces may only be entered where they are part of valid folder names (i.e. "Program Files"). No space should appear between slashes and folder names. This field also supports File/Folder Path Variables and when used the current path will be displayed above the field.

UNC names can be entered manually, or can be selected from the Network Neighborhood using the "Browse for Folder" dialog box (see Select Target Folder Button). UNC names will appear in the form \\COMPUTER\SHAREDDEVICE\PATH.

Example: \\DELLSERVER\D\USERDATA

Folders can also be dragged and dropped from MS Windows Explorer into the Target Folder Field for automatic insertion.

Select Target Folder Button: This Button opens a "Browse for Folder" dialog box: once this box has opened, locate your chosen Target folder, select it using the left mouse Button, and click "OK."

Explore/Open/Create Button: This Button provides three options, selected from the attached drop-down list. The Button label will change to reflect whichever item has been checked on this list.

When "Explore" has been selected and the Button is depressed, an Explorer-type window will open displaying all available directories. By default, this window will show the folder whose path is currently designated in the Target field. If the folder shown in this field does not exist, Profiler will display a dialog alerting you to this fact and asking if you would like to create it: you can do so by clicking the "Yes" Button located at the bottom of this dialog. Once you have done so the newly created Folder will be shown in the Explorer-type tree.

When "Open" has been selected and the Button is depressed, a traditional MS navigation window is opened displaying the contents of whichever folder is currently shown in the Target Folder Field. If this folder does not exist, Profiler will display a dialog alerting you to this fact and asking if you would like to create it: you can do so by clicking "Yes" Button located at the bottom of this dialog. Once you have done so the newly created Folder will be shown in the navigation window.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (32 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual When "Create" has been selected and the Button is depressed, a "Select Directory" dialog will open allowing you to specify a Target Folder path by using the mouse to select a desired drive, directory, and folder (See image in "Source Folder Selection" topic above). Folder paths can also be manually entered into the "Directory Name" field. If you enter a path for a folder that does not exist and hit the ENTER key or click "OK," a dialog box will appear allowing you to create this folder.

Additional Features:

Source and Target Folder Popup Menu

Activated by right clicking on the Source or Target Folder fields , this menu allows the user to Browse , Explore, Open and/or Create the Source or Target Folder. It also gives the user access of selecting Network Logon settings for the Source and Target Folder selections.

Swap Source and Target Folders

This Button reverses placement of the file paths shown in the Source and Target Folder Fields (so that what was formerly a Source Folder now becomes a Target Folder, and vice versa).

Last Run On

This is the date/time that will be used when comparing files for the Bi-directional Synchronization Mode option on the Alterations Screen This feature is also displayed and can be reset from the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Goto FTP Selection ( Pro III )

This link will bring you to the FTP selection screen to edit an FTP path.

Dynamic Network Drive Mapping and Unmapping

PeerSync allows for the ability to dynamically map and unmap a source or target folder selection. The way you do this is to add a letter to the beginning of the UNC path that you wish to map the drive to. This can be done for the source or target selection. (i.e.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (33 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual

n\\COMPUTER\SHAREDDEVICE\PATH)

Example: n\\DELLSERVER\D\USERDATA

The example above will map the D drive on the DELLSERVER to the N drive upon start of PeerSync and will unmap the drive when PeerSync terminates. This is quite useful feature especially when running PeerSync as a service in the scenario where you want to synchronize to mapped drive(s) while the local machine is not currently logged into this feature will allow for it to occur seamlessly.

Note:. If you are going to run PeerSync as a Service it is advised to use UNC paths or PeerSync's Dynamic Network Drive Mapping and Unmapping feature instead of using mapped drives do to the fact that mapped drives are not understood when a user is not logged on.

File/Folder Path Variables

Variable file/folder paths can be used to create:

Dynamic archives for yearly, monthly, weekly and/or daily backups.

Dynamic synchronization based on date.

Dynamic synchronization based on logged on user or machine name.

Dynamic synchronization based on personal folders or other variables read in from the registry.

Log file storage, manipulation and organization.

Administrative report file storage, manipulation and organization.

Deleted file storage, manipulation and organization.

The following variables can be used in any folder path filter setting available through the Profiler:

Date %Date% Time %Time% Date/Time %DateTime%

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (34 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual Minute %Minute% Hour %Hour% Day %Day% Year %Year% Month/Year %MonthYear%

Minute (all formats) %n, nn% Hour (all formats) %h, hh% Day (all formats) %d, dd, ddd, dddd, ddddd, dddddd% Month (all formats) %m, mm, mmm, mmmm, mmmm% Year (all formats) %y, yy%

User Name variable %UserName% Computer Name variable %ComputerName%

Windows Directory %WinDir% Windows %Windows% (also %SystemRoot%) System Temp Path %Temp% System Tmp Path %Tmp% System Drive Letter %SystemDrive% System 32 (WIN 9x/NT/00) %System32%

Note: You can also use any variables that are located in the registry under: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Explorer\Shell Folder

Depending upon the argument used, these folders will be dated, named after the currently logged user, named for the PC from which synchronization was launched, or based on a pre-determined variable stored out and read in from the registry.

Network Logon

Activated by right clicking on the Source or Target Folder fields and selecting Logon: Source Folder or Logon: Target Folder, this feature allows for network logon Name and Password information for remote source and target folder selections.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (35 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual

FTP Selection ( Pro III ) (See Next: Exceptions)

FTP site file synchronization option. This option allows any Filter to automatically logon to an FTP server and synchronize files either to or from the local folders. This feature supports proxy servers/firewalls and has an option to adjust for GMT time on the FTP server side.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (36 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual

Features:

Use FTP for Source: This option enables or disables the FTP Source selection.

Notes:

1. You cannot monitor an FTP or any remote folder in real-time.

2. When synchronizing to an FTP target, PeerSync will suppress real-time Filters until initial synchronization has completed.

3. Compression, Bi-directional synchronization mode, Include unicode files, File Recovery and CRC32 features will not work with an FTP selections.

4. Multiple copy threads will not be used with FTP selections.

5. Selecting an FTP Source and an FTP Target for the same filter is not recommended or supported.

FTP Source Folder Field: Select an FTP Source Folder by typing the path into the field provided. This field also supports File/Folder Path Variables and when used the current path will be displayed above the field.

Configure FTP Source Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (37 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:24] PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, you can select a Host Name, User ID, Password, Time Out Interval and the port in which to connect on. You also have the options to adjust for GMT time on the FTP server side and to use a proxy server/firewall and the designated Host Name, User ID, Password for the proxy server/firewall, as well as, the ability to Enable Passive Mode.

Include Sub-folders: If this check box is selected, all sub-folders contained within the Source Folder will be synchronized to the Target.

Use FTP for Target: This option enables or disables the FTP Target selection.

FTP Target Folder Field: Select an FTP Target Folder by typing the path into the field provided. This field also supports File/Folder Path Variables and when used the current path will be displayed above the field.

Configure FTP Target Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (38 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, you can select a Host Name, User ID, Password, Time Out Interval and the port in which to connect on. You also have the options to adjust for GMT time on the FTP server side and to use a proxy server/firewall and the designated Host Name, User ID, Password for the proxy server/firewalls, as well as, the ability to Enable Passive Mode.

Files to transfer as ASCII (using sub-strings): Through this field, file types can be selectively tagged for transfer as ASCII upon synchronization. These file types are set by specifying file extensions (i.e. ".txt") which, if found within a file name, will be transferred as an ASCII file during synchronization. Multiple strings will be semi/Colon delimited. These settings are not case sensitive, i.e. "A" = "a" File types can be typed manually, or can be specified using either the Files to Transfer as ASCII Button or drop-down list located to the right of the field. The drop-down list located to the right of this field will be dynamically populated with file types as they are set through the dialog box described above. They are also added to the list when you exit the field after manually editing the file types field. File types can then be specified by selecting them from this list. This provides a way to store and/or retrieve sets of file types for later use with other Filters.

Files to transfer as ASCII Button: opens a dialog box into which file types may be entered. http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (39 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

To add a File Type click "New," then type the desired file type into the field located at the bottom of the dialog. Repeat this process for each File type. Entries can be deleted by selecting them from the list and clicking the "Delete" key at the bottom of the box. Once you have finished, click the "OK" Button. The box will close and all of the file types you have specified will automatically appear in the Files to transfer as ASCII field.

Additional Features:

Swap Source and Target Folders

This Button reverses placement of the file paths shown in the Source and Target Folder Fields (so that what was formerly a Source Folder now becomes a Target Folder, and vice versa) and all configured FTP settings.

Goto Folder Selection

This link will bring you to the Folder Selection screen to edit a non FTP path.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (40 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

* Note: All features described on this page require at least a Pro III Edition of PeerSync.

Exceptions (See Next: Reporting)

The Exceptions screen is used after you have selected a Filter or Filters from the Profile Filter List and then created an associated Source and Target Folder on the Folder Selection screen. Through Exception options, PeerSync allows you to selectively apply synchronization to files contained within the Source Folder according to a wide range of explicit criteria.

Features:

Include File Types (using wild cards): Use this field to determine which file types will be included as part of synchronization. File Type Inclusions are specified by a star command followed by the file extension (i.e. *.doc).

The default setting ( * ) includes all files.

Multiple Inclusions can be used and are semicolon delimited (i.e. *.doc;*.txt;*.exe)

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (41 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual Inclusions are not case sensitive, i.e. "A" = "a".

Inclusions can be typed manually, or can be specified using either the Include File Types Button or drop-down list located to the right of the field.

Include File Types Button: Opens an "Exceptions" dialog box into which file extensions may be entered. The "include all files" command ( * ) will be shown by default.

To add an extension, click "New", then type the desired extension into the field located at the bottom of the dialog. Repeat this process for each desired file type. Inclusions can be deleted by selecting them from the list and clicking the "Delete" key at the bottom of the dialog box. Once you have finished, click the "OK" Button. The dialog will close and all of the Inclusions you have specified will automatically appear in the Include File Types field in the proper format (separated by semi/Colons).

The drop-down list located to the right of this field will be dynamically populated with Inclusions as they are set through the "Exceptions" dialog described above. They are also added to the list when you exit the field after manually editing the Include File Types field. Inclusions can then be specified by selecting them from this list. This provides a way to store and/or retrieve sets of Inclusions for later use with other Filters.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (42 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Exclude Files (using sub-strings): Through this field, files can be selectively excluded from synchronization. Exclusions are set by specifying individual characters (i.e. "s"), sets of characters (i.e. "user"), or file extensions (i.e. ".tmp") which, if found within a file name, will exclude that file from synchronization.

Multiple characters and strings can be used and are semicolon delimited (i.e. s;.tmp;.bak)

These settings are not case sensitive, i.e. "A" = "a" Exclusions can be typed manually, or can be specified using either the Exclude Files Button or drop-down list located to the right of the field. Exclude Files Button: Opens a dialog box into which Exclusions may be entered.

To add an Exclusion click "New," then type the desired character or string into the field located at the bottom of the dialog. Repeat this process for each Exclusion. Entries can be deleted by selecting them from the list and clicking the "Delete" key at the bottom of the box. Once you have finished, click the "OK" Button. The box will close and all of the Exclusions you have specified will automatically appear in the Exclude Files field. The drop-down list located to the right of this field will be dynamically populated with

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (43 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual Exclusions as they are set through the dialog box described above. They are also added to the list when you exit the field after manually editing the Exclude Files field. Exclusions can then be specified by selecting them from this list. This provides a way to store and/or retrieve sets of Exclusions for later use with other Filters. Sample Exclusions:

s - excludes any file containing the character "s" tmp - excludes any file that contains the string "tmp" .tmp - excludes any file bearing the extension ".tmp" .tmp;.bak;s - excludes any file bearing the extensions ".tmp,", ".bak" or the character "s"

Exclude Folders: Use this field to exclude folders from synchronization by specifying a folder name in file path format, i.e. "\TEMP" or "C:\WINDOWS." These examples will exclude any folder path that contains these strings including sub-folders. If you wish to exclude only a specific or root folder such as "C:\WINDOWS" but include sub-folders you must include a '#' in front of the complete folder path i.e. "#C:\WINDOWS". This example will exclude any files in this directory but include any files in its sub-folders. A semi/Colon separates multiple folder exclusions. Folder name exclusions are not case sensitive. Exclusions can be typed manually, or can be specified using either the Exclude Folders Button or drop-down list located to the right of the field. Exclude Folders Button: Opens a dialog box into which Folder Exclusions may be entered.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (44 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

To add an Exclusion click "New," then type the desired folder name into the field located at the bottom of the dialog. Repeat this process for each Exclusion. Entries can be deleted by selecting them from the list and clicking the "Delete" key at the bottom of the box. Once you have finished, click the "OK" Button. The box will close and all of the Exclusions you have specified will automatically appear in the Exclude Folders field. The drop-down list located to the right of this field will be dynamically populated with Exclusions as they are added. Exclusions can then be specified by selecting them from this list. This provides a way to store and/or retrieve sets of Exclusions for later use with other Filters.

Exclude File Sizes: Use the Greater Than or Less Then fields to exclude files based upon their size in bytes. Zero, the default, includes all files.

Current Attributes: Using the characters "NASHR," this field displays which file attributes (Normal, Archive, System, Hidden, and Read-Only) have been selected as criteria for synchronization. All attributes are selected by default. Clicking the Button to the right of this field opens a window from which file attributes may be included or excluded.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (45 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Selected File Dates: Use this field to specify files set for synchronization according to their date stamp. The default setting includes all file dates. Clicking the Button to the right of this field opens a "Select File Dates" screen.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (46 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual This screen allows you to include all files, include files more than x days old, include files bearing the current and past x day’s date, or specify a range of dates. The Set Today’s Date Button automatically updates the existing range to reflect the current day.

Reporting (See Next: Admin Reporting)

PeerSync automatically generates Log Files providing a detailed history of all synchronization events. This screen is used to view Log Files and set their reporting characteristics.

Features:

Use Log File: This option enables or disables Log File generation. The default file, PeerSync.Log, is located in the path in which PeerSync has been installed. This field also supports File/Folder Path Variables and when used the current path will be displayed above the field.

Overwrite Existing Log File: Use this option to report only the most recent PeerSync activity in the Log File. If this option is not selected, all PeerSync processes will be reported in succession.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (47 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

View Log File: This Button allows you to view Log reports by opening the file in a text editor.

Clear Log File: This Button allows you to clear Log reports.

Include the following: Using the check boxes provided in this section of the Reporting screen, you can specify what will be reported in the Log File. The Default setting is to include all items except Folder Names.

Updated Files: This option adds an entry for any file that has been updated in the Target.

Added Files: This option adds an entry for any file that has been added to the Target.

Folder Names: Indicates the names of synchronized folders.

File Size: Includes size of each file contained in the Log.

File Date: Includes date associated with each file contained in the log.

File Time: Includes time associated with each file contained in the log.

Folder Creation: This option creates an entry for any folders that did not exist in the Target and had to be created during the synchronization process.

Messages: This option logs any messages or application errors found during synchronization.

Summary: Appends a summary of activity to the end of the report.

Transfer Time: Includes time it takes to transfer the file in milliseconds.

Note: Application errors are additionally written to a file called "PSError.log," regardless of whether or not that option has been selected.

Set the maximum log file size to x bytes: By entering an amount into this field you can limit the size of Log Files created by PeerSync. When this limit is reached, the next reporting session will first rename the existing file to FILENAME.BAK and then create a new, blank Log File to which subsequent data will be added.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (48 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Admin Reporting (See Next: Email Reporting)

This screen allows you to create a unique report for administration purposes. Admin Reports generated during sync operations can be saved to a specific administrative folder (in a local or network path). Admin Reports are made uniquely identifiable through a choice of naming conventions, i.e. Computer Name or User Name with date\time stamps.

Features:

Create administrative report files: This option enables or disables the Administrative Reporting feature.

Note: Admin reporting files do not display Unicode characters.

Report file name: Allows you to choose between a default-named (PC and date\time) or User-named Administrative Report.

Report file path: This field displays the location of Admin Report files. This field also

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (49 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual supports File/Folder Path Variables and when used the current path will be displayed above the field.

Use standard report file content: This option directs Report content to follow those conventions also utilized in PeerSync Log Files.

Use summary information only: Appends a summary of activity to the end of the report.

Note: When in enhanced real-time or when using multiple copy threads standard reporting will be used if summary is selected.

Use error information only: Only reports messages and application errors.

Use SNMP reporting (errors only)* ( Pro IV ): Use Small Network Management Protocol error reporting.

SNMP Options Button* ( Pro IV ): This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Once this box has opened, it allows you to select the Destination IP and Trap Prefix to be used for SNMP reporting. Please refer to your SNMP management software for more details.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (50 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

* Note: Some features described on this page require a Pro IV Edition of PeerSync.

Email Reporting ( Pro III ) (See Next: File Options)

This screen allows you to create a unique report for administration purposes. Email Reports generated during sync operations can be sent to an administrator, shared mailbox or a specified user. Email notification of synchronization activity can be sent upon completion of entire Profile or during persistent synchronization operations. Email Reports are made uniquely identifiable through a choice of naming conventions, i.e. Computer Name or User Name with date\time stamps.

Features:

Create administrative Email messages: This option enables or disables the Email Reporting feature.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (51 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Note: Email reporting messages do not display Unicode characters.

Use standard report file content: This option directs Report content to follow those conventions also utilized in PeerSync Log Files.

Use summary information only: Appends a summary of activity to the end of the report.

Note: When in enhanced real-time or when using multiple copy threads standard reporting will be used if summary is selected.

Use error information only: Only reports messages and application errors.

Report file name: Allows you to choose between a default-named (PC and date\time) or User-named Email Report.

Attach log file to messages: Allows you to attach the reporting section log file to emails generated by this application.

Delete log file after successful send: Deletes the log file after a successful email attached send.

Email Configuration Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (52 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual Once this box has opened, it allows you to select the SMTP Host, User ID, Port, who to send to, who to send Carbon Copies to and what email address to send from.

* Note: All features described on this page require at least a Pro III Edition of PeerSync.

File Options (See Next: Performance)

Features:

Mode Selection

Add - synchronize new files to target: If the Source contains files not found within the Target and this option is selected, those files will be added to the Target Folder during synchronization. This option is selected by default.

Update - synchronize existing files in target: If this option is selected, Target Folder files which are also found within the Source will be updated to match those Source files during

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (53 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual synchronization. This option is selected by default.

Replicate - Delete unmatched files/folders: If this option is selected, any unmatched files found in Target folders will be deleted automatically.

CAUTION: Use this feature carefully. If not configured properly, needed files may be permanently deleted. A deletion warning is NOT displayed by default: Profiler must be first set to display this warning through the "Deletion Warning Message" check box described below.

Deletion Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Once this box has opened, the upper section of this screen allows you to enable or disable a Deletion Warning Message, as well as set the number of seconds for which a Message will be displayed. (As stated above, a message is NOT enabled by default and is not available during enhanced real-time). In addition, you can also choose to display a message requiring manual intervention in order to activate deletion.

The lower section of this screen provides a field where the user can designate an alternate folder to which unmatched files will be moved in order to avoid permanent deletion. This folder path can be typed manually, or selected using the Browse Button provided to the right of the field. If the designated folder exists, all unmatched files will be moved there, allowing you the opportunity to recover files deleted from the Target. This field also supports File/Folder Path Variables and when used the current path will be displayed

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (54 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual above the field. Beneath this field are check boxes. The first check box allows you to Preserve the Paths of the deleted files under the specified path. The second check box allows you to specify the Windows Recycle Bin as a location for unmatched files.

Notes:

1. Only one copy of any file can exist in your designated Recovery folder if the Preserve Paths option is not selected.

2. To avoid filling up your hard drive unnecessarily, you should periodically check this folder and delete unwanted files.

3. Only files deleted from a local drive will be moved to the Recycle Bin, and all network files will be permanently deleted.

4. When synchronizing to an FTP target, the Move unmatched target files option is not available.

5. When using Compression, the Move unmatched target files option is not available.

6. Deletion Warning Message is not available during Enhanced Real-time.

Additional File Includes

Include open files (if possible): Open files are those that are currently in use during synchronization. If these files are set for synchronization and this option is selected, PeerSync attempts to include them within the synchronization process. This option is selected by default.

Notes:

1. If PeerSync is able to synchronize files which are in use by other applications, access to those applications may in certain instances be temporarily lost during synchronization.

2. The include open files (if possible) option should be used if you are using the Performance Options: Multiple Filter Threads and Multiple Copy Threads.

Include unicode files: This option allows for the synchronization of files/folders that contain unicode characters in their names.

Notes:

1. The Include unicode files option does not work with FTP Selections.

2. Unicode characters are not compatible with to Admin Reporting or Email Reporting messages.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (55 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

3. Even if the Include Unicode files option is on it may or may not work depending on the Real-Time Monitoring Method and/or the operating system environment.

Include attribute change as synchronization criteria: This option allows for the synchronization of files that have different attributes. If this option has been selected, a Source file whose attributes do not match the Target will still be included in the synchronization process.

Alterations (See Next: Additional Features)

Features:

Target File/Folder Alterations

Transfer NT security descriptions (ACLs): If this option is checked, PeerSync will transfer over and match the security descriptions (ACLs) to the target file upon synchronization, under Windows NT.

Note: The Transfer NT security descriptions option does not work when using Compression.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (56 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Force target file attribute settings: If this option is selected the file attributes options dialog will be displayed. In this dialog, you may select to force any attribute on or off for the target files that are synchronized within the selected Filter(s).

File Attribute Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Once this box has opened, it allows the user the selection to ignore, force on or force off attribute settings on target files that are synchronized within the selected Filter(s).

Always go to (or create) initial target folder: If this option is checked, PeerSync will automatically create a sub-folder in the root of the Target Folder. This sub-folder’s name will match the Source Folder name. If this option is not checked, root contents of the Source Folder will be synchronized to the root of the Target Folder even if the names do not match.

Use intermediate file during copy: If this box is checked, a temporary file will be created in the Target Folder: the contents of the Source file will then be copied into this temporary file. After a successful copy, the Target file will be deleted and the temporary file will be renamed to bear the Target file name. This option ensures that the updated file will only replace the Target file if copy is successful. If the copy process should be interrupted because of some outside factor (network down, power outage, etc), the original Target file will still be preserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (57 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

File Revisioning Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Once this box has opened, the screen provides a field that is used to specify how many back- up copies of the Target file will be created. PeerSync will automatically add the ".PSBAK1" extension to the existing target file before replacing it with the updated Source file (i.e. "NEWDOC.DOC" will become "NEWDOC.DOC.PSBAK1"). If more than one backup is selected, each file will be renamed so that the newest backup files will always bear the lowest number.

Note: If the "Delete Unmatched" option is selected for the selected Filter, and the Source file that has corresponding PSBAK Target files is deleted, all associated PSBAK files will also be deleted except for the latest file (PSBAK1). PSBAK1 files will have to be deleted manually.

Exclude empty source folders: This option will exclude and will not sync empty source folders to the target.

Delete Exceptions from target folder: This option will delete any exceptions selected from the Exceptions screen from the target folder if the 'Replicate - Delete unmatched files/folders' option is selected from the File Options screen.

Restore Files - Always overwrite Target files (even if they are newer): This option automatically overwrites any files in the Target folder that have a different date\time stamp

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (58 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual than their corresponding Source file, even if the Target file is newer. This option can be used to restore folders to a previous state either for backup/restore operations or to reset files after training operations.

Source File/Folder Alterations

Turn file archive attribute off after synchronization: This option resets the archive flag on the Source and Target file after synchronization. The Windows file system automatically sets the archive bit for every file that has changed; normally, this is used to indicate that a given file has been modified since the last time its archive bit was set. Most tape back-up programs use this flag to determine which files have changed since the last backup. This is the only option in PeerSync that alters Source files. PeerSync uses this option to reduce the number of files that are checked on the Source drive.

Note: Source files that are not being synchronized to Target folders will NOT have their archive flags reset. This process only occurs after successful synchronization of a changed file.

Hint: To reset all Source file archive flags, use the "Always Overwrite Target Files" feature. This configures all files for synchronization and resultantly qualifies them for reset of archive flags. This option only needs to be selected once to be applied to existing sync operations.

Move Files - Delete source file after successful copy to target: This option will attempt to delete (or move, if specified; see "Delete Unmatched Target Files," Miscellaneous) the Source file after a successful synchronization to Target.

Enable bi-directional synchronization mode* ( Pro III ): Bi-directional synchronization feature with Smart-Delete. Files on the target that are newer than their corresponding source files or do not exist on the source side will be automatically brought back to the source folders. Any file that has a creation date newer than the last time the Filter was run will be added to the source folders even if the Delete-Unmatched target file option is selected. This mode will only work when an entire folder is synchronized by PeerSync and does not apply to enhanced real-time mode where only the changed file is being added, deleted or updated.

Notes: 1. This feature will not work with filters selected for Real-time monitoring. 2. This feature will not work with an FTP source or target selection.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (59 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

* Note: Some features described on this page require a Pro III or Pro IV Edition of PeerSync.

Performance (See Next: Alterations)

Features:

File Read/Write Buffer Size: This option allows you to change the read/write buffer sizes to optimize performance/speed across various network environments or on the local machine. In most cases this will increase performance dramatically but you will probably need to test this option in your environment to determine what advantages can be gained from altering this size.

The minimum value is 256 bytes. The default value is 32 KB. The maximum value that can be set using the track bar is 128 KB. The maximum value that can be set using the up arrow or by manually typing in the spin edit field is 128 KB* ( Pro IV Upper Limit is 1 MB)

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (60 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Enable intelligent network load balancing (when applicable)* ( Pro III ): Network load balancing option will automatically set read/write buffer size based on recommendation from NIC network cards. (Installed network card must also support this feature.)

Throttle bandwidth - Use x percent of available bandwidth* ( Pro IV ): This option will limit/slow down the pulse of reads and writes performed by PeerSync, at the percentage specified, in order to keep bandwidth available for other applications.

Set maximum number of copy threads to x* ( Pro IV ): This option will limit the number of copy threads to be spawned and used for the selected Filters.

* Note: Some features described on this page require a Pro III or Pro IV Edition of PeerSync.

Additional Features ( Pro III or Pro IV ) (See Next: Automation)

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (61 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual Features:

Additional Options

Enable file recovery: File recovery option to continue a file copy that was interrupted for some reason. If the source and target file name and date match but the target file is smaller, PeerSync will start the copy operation from the last byte that was sent the next time a sync operation is executed on the folder.

Note: Enable file recovery does not work with FTP.

During comparison subtract/add x minute(s) from target: Option to add or delete time from target file during folder comparison. This allows for synchronization of files between dissimilar time zones or to allow for some time difference between source and target in case target machine date is slightly different from source.

Note: Enhanced real-time does not work with the 'During comparison subtract/add x minute(s) from target' option.

Validation Options

Perform binary comparison on all files (using CRC32): Option to check all source and target files for binary match during folder scan/compare cycle (using CRC32). This check ensures that what is on the target matches the source at a binary level.

Validate target file (using CRC32): Option to validate file using CRC32 binary comparison after successful file copy operation.

Note: Perform binary comparison on all files and Validate target file (CRC32 features) do not work with FTP.

Retry Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (62 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, it allows for the selection of if the file is not validated to retry the CRC32 validation x times.

Replace In-use Files Options

Replace in-use files upon reboot: If this option is selected, when a file is open and locked on the target folder, it will be set to be replaced the next time the machine is rebooted.

Reboot Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (63 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, you have the options to be given a dialog to decide if you want to reboot or to automatically reboot if a file is in-use and needs to be replaced. The default is to not reboot when an in-use file is detected

Target File Time Change Option* ( Pro IV )

After synchronization subtract/add x minute(s) from target* ( Pro IV ): Option to add or delete time from target file after synchronization. This allows for synchronization of files between dissimilar time zones or to allow for some time difference between source and target in case target machine date is slightly different from source.

* Note: All features described on this page require at least a Pro III or Pro IV Edition of PeerSync.

Automation (See Next: Compression)

The Automation screen allows you to apply Real-time Monitored or Scheduled synchronization to

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (64 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual individual Filters within a given Profile. Real-time operations (also referred to as "File/Folder Change Detection") monitor Source Folders for any changes and synchronize them to the specified Target as they occur (and vice versa). Scheduled operations automatically launch synchronization according to a user-specified schedule. Through these settings, PeerSync allows you to build a Profile with as many as 255 different Filters -- each run according to a unique schedule or in Real- time (See Also Operation Mode).

Features:

Scheduling Options

Run on an interval every x minute(s): Checking this option assigns a Scheduled operation to the selected Filter(s). The field associated with this option allows you to set an interval in minutes: after this time has elapsed the selected folders will be synchronized. 5 minutes is the default setting. Intervals in seconds can be specified through the use of decimals, i.e. 0.5, 2.5, etc. The minimum interval is 0.01.

Use daily timer scheduling:* ( Pro III ) Checking this option will allow for the synchronization of filters at a specific times of the day for selected days of the week. This feature may also be selected at the profile level from the Operation Mode screen

Daily Timer Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (65 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, it gives you the following features:

List of Filter Selections: This is a list of the currently selected Daily Timer selections. You can Add New selections by selecting the New Button and Delete existing selections by selecting the Delete Button.

Run selected filters at: Selecting this option will run the filter at the selected time of day.

Select days of week to run: Allows you to turn on/off which days to run this schedule.

Re-load profile prior to daily run: This option will have PeerSync re-load the profile, if any changes have been made, before running the selected daily run. This feature allows for dynamic re-loading of PeerSync Profiles.

Real-time File/Folder Change Detection

Activate real-time monitoring: Selects the current Filter(s) for Real-time Monitoring.

Real-time Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (66 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, it allows you to choose from two Real-time operations. The first is a Folder Replication feature, which monitors for changes to the Source Folder and synchronizes the Target accordingly. The second, a Folder Restoration feature, monitors for changes to the Target Folder and restores files on the Target accordingly. To properly use the restore feature, you will need to select the "Always overwrite target files" option.

Notes:

1. Enable bi-directional synchronization mode will not work for real-time filters.

2. You cannot monitor an FTP source in real-time.

3. When synchronizing to an FTP target, PeerSync will suppress real-time Filters until initial synchronization has completed.

Use enhanced real-time monitoring* ( Pro III ): Enhanced Real-time file monitoring and updating option. This option allows the Real-time feature in PeerSync to detect individual changes to files and synchronize only the file that changed without scanning the entire folder where the change occurred. Normally synchronization software scans and compares all files in a folder that is being synchronized. This option does not scan folders unless the change is indeterminate. Under MS Windows NT4/2000, this feature is extended to the file/folder rename operations as well. If a file or folder is renamed, PeerSync will rename

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (67 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual the corresponding target file or folder using rename functions as opposed to copying the newly renamed source folder to the target and then subsequently deleting the outdated target file/folder. This option greatly reduces time to synchronize and network band width requirements.

Notes:

1. When synchronizing to an FTP target, the Enhanced real-time monitoring option should not be used.

4. Enhanced real-time does not work with Enable bi-directional synchronization mode, During comparison subtract/add x minute(s) from target or Folder Compression.

3. It is recommended either use the Enhanced real-time option for all or none of your real-time filters in a Profile.

4. During enhanced real-time Trigger Selections are ignored.

5. Using Enhanced real-time will produce a different file output format for all modes of reporting and message logging (Reporting, Admin Reporting and Email Reporting). The output will NOT contain a start and stop section or a summary, each entry will also be initially marked with a date and time stamp. If use summary is selected for Admin or Email reporting then the standard selection will be used. The reason this is done is due to the fact that processes will be running in parallel.

* Note: Some features described on this page require a Pro III or Pro IV Edition of PeerSync.

Compression (See Next: Pre/Post Process)

While compressing your choice of folders, the Compression utility also employs a unique method to minimize file damage. While creating Target directory structures to match those found in the Source, the folder compression option creates a single file for every folder contained within the Target Folder set. This minimizes the amount of data added to each compressed file. If a single file were used for the entire directory structure were to become corrupt, all files might be lost. PeerSync’s "one file per folder" scenario ensures that if damage occurs, it is limited to individual folders only. We also offer file compression, which will compress the source files to the corresponding target files down to the file level which adds even more flexibility. During folder compression, all selected Source files are synchronized to the compressed Target folder file bearing the name of the active folder plus the user selected extension (default extension is "ZIP"). During file compression, all selected Source files are synchronized to the compressed Target folder

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (68 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual file bearing the name of the active file plus the user selected extension (default extension is "ZIP"). Compressed folder files can be expanded using most PKZip compatible extraction utilities. In addition, passwords can be specified and entered on this screen to protect against unauthorized access to compressed files.

Features:

Use folder compression: This check box enables or disables the folder compression feature which will compress files in each sub-folder to a single file per sub-folder.

Use file compression: This check box enables or disables the file compression feature will compress file by file.

Notes:

1. Compression options will not work with an FTP source or target selection.

2. Compression options will not work during Enhanced Real-time.

3. The File Deletion Options, Move unmatched target files feature does not work when using compression.

4. The Transfer NT security descriptions (ACLs) feature does not work when using compression.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (69 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual Compress target: Selecting this option enables compression of the Target folder.

Expand source: This option extracts (expands) the Source folder. Use this option to extract files from Source Folders that have already undergone compression.

Compression Speed: Allows for Normal compression, Maximum compression or maximum speed.

Note: A compressed Source Folder can not be synchronized to a compressed Target Folder.

Compressed File Extension: The extension entered into this field will be applied to the compressed folder file name. For example, if "rar" is entered for a folder named "Samples," the compressed folder file name will be "Samples.rar".

Note: it is NOT necessary to add a period (" . ") before this extension name. The default extension is "ZIP," which associates the file with a Zip application (i.e. WinZip).

Password - Encryption: The password entered into this field will be used as a key to encrypt the compressed files. Without this key the original file CAN NOT be extracted from the compressed files. Do Not Lose This Password. Without it you will not have access to your encrypted files, nor will Peer Software be able to recover them.

Change Password: Selecting this Button will display a dialog box:

This allows you to change your existing password for the selected Filter. This box requires you to enter your old password in addition to whichever new one you wish to begin using. This dialog box is also used to create a password if you do not currently have one. The password will be encrypted and saved for the selected Filter.

Note: You may only change the password for a single Filter at a time. The old password must be checked against the stored password for this option to be changed.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (70 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual Pre/Post Process (See Next: Trigger Selections)

This screen allows the user to choose external applications / scripts to be run before and after the processing of a given Filter.

Features:

Select Application/Script to Run Before: Use this field to specify (by file path) which application you would like to run before processing a PeerSync Profile. File paths can be manually entered, or the open folder icon can be used to locate files.

Select Application/Script to Run After: Use this field to specify (by file path) which application you would like to run after processing a PeerSync Profile. File paths can be manually entered, or the open folder icon can be used to locate files.

Wait for application to end before continuing: Check this option if you want PeerSync to wait for the applications specified in the "Before" and "After" fields to close before processing additional tasks.

Use maximum wait time of x seconds: Selecting this option sets a limit (in seconds) for

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (71 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual how long PeerSync will wait for the applications specified in the "Run Before" and "Run After" fields to close. In order to activate this function, the "Wait for Application to Terminate" function must be checked. The default, when this option is not checked, is to wait indefinitely.

Trigger Selections (See Next: Global Settings)

These settings ensure that Target Folders always remain updated to their corresponding Source by comparing dates indicated by individual Trigger Files. If a Source Trigger is found to be newer than a corresponding Target Trigger, for example, a synchronization process will be allowed to proceed for the selected Filter(s). If the files date and time stamps match then the synchronization will not be processed, in essence, the running of the sync process is determined by the trigger files.

Features:

Use Global Trigger File: This option is used to activate or trigger synchronization based upon date comparison between an individual Source Trigger File and a separate Target Trigger File. If the Target Trigger File is older then the Source Trigger File, the entire Source Folder(s) will be synchronized.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (72 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual Default File Name: Displays the Default Global Trigger File Name: GLBCHG.000

Source Trigger File: This field allows you to specify a Global Trigger File by entering it manually, or by selecting it using the Browse Button located at the right side of the field.

Use Current Paths: Automatically selects the current Trigger Files associated with the Source and Target Folders.

Target Trigger File: This field allows you to specify a Global Trigger File by entering it manually, or by selecting it using the Browse Button located at the right side of the field.

Note:. During Enhanced real-time Trigger Selections will be ignored.

Global Settings (See Next: Operation Mode)

Global Settings are global to the current Profile. These settings and options pertain to all of the filters in the current Profile and are used to define, configure and execute the launch of PeerSync Profiles via the PeerSync engine.

Arguments to be sent to PeerSync can be selected and setup from the Operation Mode Screen.

PeerSync Profiles can then be launched from the Profiler through the following scenarios:

By using the Launch Profile Menu Item in the Run Menu.

By using the Launch Current Profile Button on the Tool Buttons Toolbar.

By using the Launch Current Profile Button on the Current Profile Activity screen.

PeerSync Profiles can also be setup/run externally without the Profiler from the Startup Options screen in the following ways:

Setup/run from a Shortcut on the Desktop.

Setup/run from the Startup Folder.

Setup/run at boot from the Registry.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (73 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Setup/run as a NT Service.

Notes:

1. Individual Filters can be synchronized using the 'Synchronize Selected Filters' feature, found in the Profile Filter List Popup Menu.

2. Another way of running PeerSync is by using the Quick-Sync Folder Feature by right-clicking on a folder from MS Windows Explorer.

Operation Mode (See Next: Startup Options) This screen allows you to determine the execution of the current Profile by selecting the arguments to use. Part of the Basic Argument Options, an Automatic Operation allows you to perform an immediate launch of the current Profile. As a non-persistent process, Automatic Operations are run a single time upon manual initiation by the user. Part of the Advanced Argument Options, Real-time Operations monitor Source Folders for any changes and synchronize them to the specified Target as they occur (and vice versa). Also an Advanced option, Scheduled Operations automatically launch synchronization according to a user-specified schedule. The Operation Mode screen allows you apply all of these modes simultaneously to the same Profile. Individual Profile Filters may be configured to run according to their own Real-time or Scheduled Operations (See Automation).

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (74 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Features:

Basic Argument Options

Automatic execution: This option directs PeerSync to run the current Profile as an Automatic Operation. An Automatic Operation allows you to perform an immediate launch of the current Profile. As a non-persistent process, Automatic Operations are run a single time upon manual initiation by the user. We also refer to this type of run as an Initial Sync.

Pre-Sync Report Options: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (75 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, it allows you to select a Pre-Sync Report. During this process, files and folders will not be modified and persistent arguments set for the current Profile will be ignored. A report will be created/displayed with what work would be done if a sync was actually performed. You also have the options of Overwriting the existing Pre-Sync report file and the Option to show the Pre-Sync report file at the end of the run.

Show tray icon: If this option is selected, an icon will appear on the system tray when the PeerSync Engine is loaded . When you right/Click on this icon a menu will appear. Through this menu the Profiler interface can be shown, the About PeerSync screen can be accessed, and the PeerSync Engine can be terminated.

Set Access Password Button: Use this Button to set or change a tray icon access password via the Password Change dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (76 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

This allows you to set/reset a password and once a password has been set, only authorized users will be able to terminate the PeerSync Engine.

Enable display options: If this option is selected, the Display Options Button becomes available, in which you are able to select how and when to display status of profile activity.

Display Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Once this box has opened, it gives you the following features:

Display status in Profiler - This option will have PeerSync open the Profiler, if it is not already open, and send status messages to be displayed on the Current Profile Activity http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (77 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual screen.

Display status in PeerSync* ( Pro IV ) - This option will have PeerSync show its PeerSync - Status Display dialog box during synchronization so the user can see activity, status and other information while PeerSync is running.

Display status in PeerSync upon completion - This option will have PeerSync show its PeerSync - Status Display dialog box at the end of synchronization (only in non-persistent modes) so the user can see activity, status and other information upon completion.

Enable performance options: If this option is selected, the Performance Options Button becomes available, in which you are able to select how and when to display status of profile activity.

Performance Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Once this box has opened, it gives you the ability to Set the Application Priority allowing PeerSync to run at a higher or lower priority then other applications. It also allows for Multiple Thread Selection features ( Pro IV ). You can turn on and specify how many filter and copy threads to allow PeerSync to use. Filter threads allow for filters to run in parallel processes while copy threads allow for multiple files to be copied in parallel processes. (i.e. http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (78 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual Simultaneous Distribution - Synchronizing from one server to multiple servers simultaneously in a Web Farm type environment )

Notes:

1. Using Multiple copy threads will produce a different file output format for all modes of reporting and message logging (Reporting, Admin Reporting and Email Reporting). The output will NOT contain a start and stop section or a summary, each entry will also be initially marked with a date and time stamp. If use summary is selected for Admin or Email reporting then the standard selection will be used. The reason this is done is due to the fact that processes will be running in parallel.

2. The Include open files (if possible) option should be used if you are using the Performance Options: Multiple Filter Threads and Multiple Copy Threads

Advanced Argument Options

Use interval scheduling: This option enables or disables Scheduled Operation Mode for the entire Profile. This option must be selected in order for all Scheduled Operations set for individual Filters on the Automation Screen to be recognized. Scheduled Mode does not apply a global schedule to the entire Profile: rather, it enables those schedules set for all individual Filters on to run at their specified intervals.

All Scheduled Operations set for individual Filters will be ignored if this mode is not selected. If none of the Filters within a Profile are set for Scheduled Operation and this mode is selected, all active Filters within the Profile will be assigned a default synchronization schedule of five minutes.

Global Interval Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (79 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, it gives you the following features:

Run all scheduled filters every x minutes: Selecting this option will override all scheduled Filters set in the Automation screen with the value set in the minutes field. This will make a scheduled run set to a global timer for all Filters in the Profile.

Wait for keyboard activity to trigger operation: When this option is checked, the Scheduled operation will run only when it senses keyboard activity. Otherwise, it will not run at the interval specified in the "Run Filter every X minutes" field.

Always run every z cycles: This field is only available when the "Wait for keyboard activity" option is checked. When a number has been entered into this field, (e.g. 5 cycles), PeerSync will make five attempts to launch synchronization at the scheduled interval. If it senses no keyboard activity after the 5th attempt it will launch the specified synchronization. The default setting is one cycle.

Use daily timer scheduling: Checking this option will allow for the synchronization of the entire profile at a specific time of the day for selected days of the week. This feature may also be selected at the Filter level from the Automation screen.

Daily Timer Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box: http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (80 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, it gives you the following features:

List of Global Selections: This is a list of the currently selected Daily Timer selections for the profile. You can Add New selections by selecting the New Button and Delete existing selections by selecting the Delete Button.

Run entire profile at: Selecting this option will run the profile at the selected time of day.

Select days of week to run: Allows you to turn on/off which days to run this schedule.

Re-load profile prior to daily run: Allows for the re-loading of a Profile to assure the latest changes to the profile are used.

Use Filter Settings - Daily timer scheduling selections: This option will be turned on/off depending if there are any Daily Timer selections at the filter level. If there are filter level selections this option will be turned on and the /TIMEF argument will be added to the current arguments. You can manually turn this option off to ignore/override all Filter Settings - Daily timer scheduling selections selected from the Automation screen.

Use real-time monitoring: This option enables or disables Real-time Mode for the entire http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (81 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual Profile. This option must be selected in order for all Real-time Operations set for individual Filters on the Automation Screen to be recognized. Once selected, Source/Target Folders for those Filters will be monitored for changes and synchronized as changes are detected.

All Real-time Operations set for individual Filters will be ignored if this mode is not selected. If none of the Filters within a Profile are configured for Real-time Monitoring and this mode is selected, all active Filters within the Profile will be then be set for Real-time Monitoring.

Real-time Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Once this box has opened, it gives you the following features:

Retry open files every x seconds: Use this option to specify, in seconds, how often PeerSync will attempt to synchronize Source files that are in use. If the "Include open files" option on the File Options Screen has not been checked and "Retry" is selected PeerSync will continue attempting to synchronize files that are opened by other applications. "Retry" will also work when "Include open files" has been checked and a file is read-locked by another application. When the "Retry" option is on, PeerSync will synchronize the open file within X seconds after the file has been closed.

Set maximum number of retries to x: This option sets a limit indicating how many http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (82 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual times PeerSync will attempt to process open files. The default, 0, indicates an indefinite number of retries.

Select Real-Time Monitoring Method for NT: This option allows you to select the method of detecting real-time changes under Windows NT.

Note: Even if the Include Unicode files option is on it may or may not work depending on the Real-Time Monitoring Method and/or the operating system environment.

Suppress initial execution of real time filters: If this option has been selected, Real-time Filters will not be synchronized upon initial launch of PeerSync (assuming "Automatic execution of Profile list," described above, is also selected). These Filters will be synchronized if changes are detected subsequent to initial launch.

Current Arguments: This section displays the current arguments selected for the Profile and will also allows for the selection and modification of additional arguments by double- clicking this field or selecting the Current Arguments Button to the right of the field.

Current Arguments Button: This Button opens a "Current Command Line Argument Selection" dialog box:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (83 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, you can modify, add or delete arguments to be used when launching PeerSync through any of the modes described in the Startup Options Screen or via the Current Profile Activity Screen.

* Note: Some features described on this page require a Pro III or Pro IV Edition of PeerSync.

StartUp Options (See Next: Current Profile Activity)

This screen allows the user to specify whether or not PeerSync will be run upon startup of the active PC, while also defining its interaction with the network (if applicable). This screen provides shortcuts for installing PeerSync as a service, adding it to the Windows StartUp list, or to the Windows registry for automatic loading upon startup.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (84 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Features:

Disable all Startup Options: Check this option to prevent PeerSync from automatically loading at Windows startup/logon.

Create Shortcut on Desktop: This Button will place the current Profile into a shortcut on your desktop (See "Automatic Execution of Profile List," Operation Mode). A Profile Shortcut will need to be created through this feature in order to use PeerSync's Command Line Mode.

Add to Windows StartUp: Check this option if you want PeerSync to run automatically when a user logs on to the PC.

Show StartUp Folder: This Button opens the Windows StartUp folder, showing links to files and programs that open automatically upon user logon. This Button is only accessible when "Add to Windows Startup Folder" is checked.

Add to Windows registry: Check this option if you want PeerSync to run automatically when Windows boots through specification in the Windows registry.

Run RegEdit: This Button opens the Windows Registry Editor. This Button is only accessible when "Add to Windows registry to run at boot" is checked.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (85 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Install as an NT Service: Check this option if you want PeerSync to run automatically as a service under Windows NT. To configure and run the service you must go to your "Services" located in the "Control Panel" and select "PeerSync." By default the service is installed with the "Local System account" selected for the service "Log on as:" option.

Caution: If any of your source or target Folder Selections are not located on the local machine, then you will have to configure the service to "Log on as:" an alternate account on your domain so that the service has the rights to access the remote machines and/or devices. If you do not do this the service will most likely not run properly.

Notes:

1. If PeerSync is running as a Service it is advised to use UNC paths or PeerSync's Dynamic Network Drive Mapping and Unmapping feature instead of using mapped drives do to the fact that mapped drives are not understood when a user is not logged on.

2. You can add the argument /LSE (Log Service Events to NT Application Log) to the following entry in the registry (HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\PeerSoftware\PeerSync\Service\Parameters). This will have PeerSync log all changes to be reported to application log in addition to the normal logging of the start, stop, pause and continue of the service.

3. If PeerSync is running in real-time mode as a service, subsequent real-time Profiles will interfere with service operation and should not be employed. Both Scheduled Operations and Manual (non-persistent) operations should perform without interference to a service installation of PeerSync.

Details: This Button is used to view the details of the currently installed PeerSync service.

Remove: This Button is used to remove the currently installed PeerSync service.

Create SNC extension association for PeerSync Profiler: Checking this option causes any file with the extension .SNC to be associated with PeerSync: PeerSync Profiles bear this extension by default. Once this option has been selected, double/Clicking on any SNC file will open PeerSync Profiler and load that particular file.

Add Quick-Sync Folder option to Explorer menu: Checking this option adds or removes the Quick-Sync Folder selection from Windows Explorer. This feature is a quick and easy way to synchronize folder(s) on the fly to backup location(s) with the option to modify your filtering criteria at a later time

PeerSync Application Path: This field is used to specify the location of the PeerSync http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (86 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual executable file. You can use the open folder icon to browse drives in order to locate this executable file.

Current Profile Activity (Back to: Overview)

This screen is used to Launch the current Profile and to view Current Profile Activity. If the 'Display Status in Profiler' option is turned on from the Operation Mode screen this screen will be shown upon execution of a Profile and will dynamically show the status of synchronization of the current Profile as the process occurs. This screen will also be shown upon using the 'Synchronize Selected Filters' feature, found in the Profile Filter List Popup Menu to display the Current Activity of the filters sent to PeerSync as a temporary Profile.

Features:

Profile: Displays the name of the Profile actively being processed. This label may not match the name of the Profile currently being configured through Profiler. Filter: This indicator will dynamically display the name of whichever Filter is presently being processed for the Active Profile.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (87 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Mode: Displays the Operation Mode (Real-time Mode, Scheduled Operation, etc.) applied to synchronization of the Active Profile. Launch Current Profile/Terminate Active Profile: This Button allows you to launch the current Profile. Once a Profile has been launched, its processing may also be terminated through this Button (the label will change to read "Terminate Active Profile"). This Button offers one of three ways to initiate an Automatic Operation. Source: Displays a file path for the Source Folder presently being synchronized. Target: Displays a file path for the Target Folder presently being synchronized from the Source indicated above. Folders: This indicator provides a count of all unsynchronized folders contained within the Source, and will decrease as each folder is synchronized. An additional "thermometer" indicator will also track the progress of folder synchronization. Files: This indicator displays the total number of files contained within the Source while also providing a count of synchronized files. In addition, a "thermometer" indicator will show file synchronization progress by increasing according to the size of the current folder, with 100% representing the cumulative size of files contained within the Source Filter set. File: Indicates the name of the file currently being synchronized. Skip File: This Button will appear once the active Profile has been launched. This feature allows you to skip synchronization of the file currently displayed in the indicator described below. Skip Files enables you to avoid delays caused by large files on slow network or dial- up connections. Size: Indicates the size (in bytes) of the file currently being synchronized. A related "thermometer" indicator tracks the progress of synchronization for that file. Checked: This indicator displays the total number of files contained in the selected Source Folders. Excluded: Indicates the number of files that were excluded from synchronization (See Exceptions) Messages: Indicates the number of error messages generated during Profile processing. Updated: Indicates the number of Target files that were updated during synchronization of Profile Filters. Added: Indicates the number of new files added to Target Folders during synchronization of Profile Filters. Deleted: Indicates the number of files deleted (or moved) during synchronization of Profile

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (88 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual Filters. Target Space: Indicates the Target Folder space remaining during synchronization of Profile Filters. Elapsed Time: Indicates the amount of time that has elapsed during the current profile activity.

License YOU SHOULD READ CAREFULLY THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE USING OR DISTRIBUTING THIS SOFTWARE. USING OR DISTRIBUTING THIS SOFTWARE INDICATES ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS.

COPYRIGHT

This software program (hereafter the "Software") and documentation (hereafter the "Documentation") is copyrighted and remains the property of Peer Software, Inc. (Formerly known as TDM, Inc.) All rights are reserved.

LICENSE

Peer Software, Inc. hereby grants you (hereafter the "Purchaser") a limited, non-exclusive license to use the Software and accompanying Documentation contained in the trial ware distribution package (hereafter called the "Trial ware Package") you received. The Trial ware Package consists of copies of the Software and Documentation received via an electronic transfer mechanism or an electronic storage medium including, but not limited to, diskette, hard disk, removable disk, tape or optical devices such as CD-ROM or WORM.

You may use the Trial ware Package on one or more computers provided there is no chance that it will used simultaneously on more than one computer. If you need to use the Software on more than one computer simultaneously or on a network, please contact Peer Software, Inc. for information about network licenses.

You are not obtaining title to the Software or Documentation or any copyright rights. You may not sub license, lease, rent, sell, convey, translate, modify, decompile, incorporate into another product, convert to another programming language, reverse engineer or disassemble the Software or Documentation for any purpose.

NETWORK LICENSE

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (89 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Multiple users on a network (e.g. a LAN) requiring access to the Software and Documentation must purchase a Network License. Two forms of Network Licenses are offered, a Site License and a Concurrent User License. With a Site License, any user who accesses the Software or Documentation requires a user license, regardless of the frequency of use. Once a Site License is purchased, Software and Documentation may be copied to all users who have been licensed.

The Concurrent User License allows the licensed number of users to simultaneously access the Software and Documentation. The Purchaser agrees that he will operate metering software which restricts the simultaneous number of users to the quantity purchased. The Software and Documentation must be installed on network servers under the control of metering software.

Both Site and Concurrent User Licenses allow installation of the Software and Documentation to any number of servers on any number of geographic sites, limited only by the quantity of licenses purchased.

TERM AND TRIAL PERIOD

You are permitted to use the Software Package for a trial period (hereafter the "Trial Period") of a limited amount of days or uses (which ever comes first) after receipt of the Trial ware Package. After such time, if you continue to use the Trial ware Package, you must register your copy with Peer Software, Inc. Failure to register after the Trial Period constitutes termination of this license. Upon registration, a password (hereafter called the "Password") will be provided to eliminate the registration reminder screen.

This license is effective until terminated. You may terminate it by destroying the Software, Documentation, and all copies thereof. This license will also terminate if you fail to comply with any of the terms or conditions herein. You agree, upon such termination, to destroy all Software, Documentation, and copies thereof.

LIMITED WARRANTY

THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. PEER SOFTWARE, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES RELATING TO THIS SOFTWARE, WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND ALL SUCH WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMED.

EXCLUSIVE REMEDY

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (90 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND PEER SOFTWARE, INC.'S ENTIRE LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTIONS WITH THE SOFTWARE, DOCUMENTATION, AND/OR THIS LICENSE (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR INFRINGEMENT) SHALL BE, AT PEER SOFTWARE, INC.'S OPTION, THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR REFUND OF REGISTRATION FEES.

LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY

IN NO EVENT SHALL PEER SOFTWARE, INC. OR ANYONE ELSE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN THE CREATION, PRODUCTION, OR DELIVERY OF THIS SOFTWARE SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH SOFTWARE EVEN IF PEER SOFTWARE, INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR CLAIMS.

Some states do not allow the exclusion of the limit of liability for consequential or incidental damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you.

BACK-UP

You may make as many copies of the Trial ware Package as you need for back-up purposes only.

DISTRIBUTION

You may distribute the Trial ware Package to others via an electronic transfer mechanism or electronic storage media provided that no files are deleted from the Original Distribution Trial ware Package or are modified in any way. Files may be added to the Trial ware Package expressly for the purpose of identifying the party distributing the Trial ware Package. You may also place the Trial ware Package into any archive or compressed format for ease of distribution.

You may not distribute the Password to others under any circumstances.

GENERAL

This agreement shall be governed by the laws of the state of New York and shall inure to the benefit of Peer Software, Inc. and any successors, administrators, heirs, and assigns. Any action or proceeding brought by either party against the other arising out of or related to this agreement shall be brought only in a STATE or FEDERAL COURT of competent jurisdiction located in Suffolk County, New York. The parties hereby consent to appear in person in jurisdiction of said courts.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (91 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

PeerSync Installation PeerSync is shipped (downloaded) in a full installation program. To run, simply double-click on the executable in the Explorer window, or choose "Run" from the Start Menu and then select the application. For networked installations, PeerSync supports silent installation by adding "/S" to the installation application’s command line.

Example: %PATH%/PS60.EXE /S

See Additional Configuration Entries for more Information on silent installation configuration.

Additionally, PeerSync can use the PeerSync60.lic file for larger networked sales and site licensing. This file will be placed in the "PeerSync" folder. If PeerSync detects this file at startup then it will use this data and bypass all other registration security checks. If the PeerSync60.lic file is located in the same folder as the PeerSync installation application, this file will then be automatically placed in the PeerSync installation folder. To obtain a PeerSync60.lic file, please specify your requirements during purchase/registration.

PeerSync History and Description Welcome to Peer Software, Inc's Folder Synchronization Utility Software, PeerSync. With this utility you will be able to conveniently synchronize folders for back-up purposes or portability requirements. Never again will you overwrite newer data by attempting to manually update an individual file or the contents of a folder.

History PeerSync has been available for download/purchase since early 1995. Since then hundreds of downloads have been logged from the various international forums where PeerSync was made available and thousands of copies have been sold. PeerSync is an MS Windows-based product. Originally written in Visual Basic, the current product is written in Delphi Object Pascal. PeerSync originated as a solution to a problem frequently encountered by our own developers, that of keeping files in sync between multiple hard drives. Developers working on-site at customers’ locations or at home during crunch schedules would then have to synchronize their data back to the

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (92 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual office server. This was most often done manually, with each individual file being dragged to the appropriate server folder. Invariably, data would be lost when one or several of the server files contained new information which was subsequently overwritten. In addition to loss of work and resulting frustration, the process was also time consuming. Anywhere from 20 minutes to 2 hours would be spent during each synchronization. After reviewing several commercially available products, it became apparent that an effective and user-friendly solution to this common problem did not exist: hence the development of PeerSync.

Description Configured through PeerSync Profiler, an intuitive and easy-to-use application, PeerSync automatically synchronizes multiple directories and sub-directories from user-defined Source to Target Folders. While removing the frustration and loss of time associated with manual synchronization, PeerSync prevents loss of data by checking file dates and times to ensure that newer information is not overwritten. Synchronization can occur between any mapped or UNC connected drives located on local computers or computer networks. While processing and performing any number of simultaneous tasks, PeerSync retains and expands upon the selectivity and precision of manual synchronization by offering a suite of automated file inclusion and exclusion features. Files can be included within synchronization according to standard DOS-type wild cards and excluded using sub-string comparisons or file attribute settings. Files can be also be excluded according to their date and size. In addition, PeerSync can be configured to update or add files which are out-dated or non-existent in the current Target Folder. Precision and scope are further enhanced through PeerSync Filters and Command Line Modes. A virtually unlimited number of folder combinations (Filters) can be created and stored in Profiles which can be run manually or automatically using command line arguments. While synchronizing large numbers of folder combinations at once, each combination can have a unique set of exceptions. In this way PeerSync combines the benefits of precise folder matching with that of an automated environment. Real-time Source Folder monitoring and repetitive operations on the host PC are also available with PeerSync’s options. PeerSync can also be used for network file management purposes. Reports run during synchronization can display added, updated, and opened files as well as directories created, and can display unmatched files found in Target directories.

Product Editions and Licensing PeerSync comes in different levels, each level or edition contains features from the previous level with additional features.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (93 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Product Editions

Pro II - This edition includes the following:

Folder Selection All Options Exceptions All Options Reporting All Options File Options All Options Compression All Options Pre/Post Process All Options Trigger Selections All Options Startup Options All Options Current Profile Activity All Options Automation Most Options Operation Mode Most Options Admin Reporting Most Options Alterations Some Options Performance Some Options

Pro III - This edition includes the following:

- All Options from the Pro II Edition

FTP Selection All Options Email Reporting All Options Additional Features All Options Automation Enhanced Real-time Monitoring Automation Use daily timer scheduling Automation Daily Timer Options Performance Intelligent network load balancing Alterations Bi-directional synchronization

Pro IV - This edition includes the following:

- All Options from the Pro II Edition - All Options from the Pro III Edition

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (94 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Admin Reporting SNMP Reporting Performance Throttle Bandwidth Performance Maximum Copy Threads Performance File Read/Write Buffer Upper Limit Additional Features Target File Time Change Option Operation Mode Display status in PeerSync Operation Mode Performance Options - Multiple Filter Threads Operation Mode Performance Options - Multiple Copy Thread

Product Licensing

All levels of PeerSync can be licensed for single or multiple users and/or single or multiple remote connections.

User Licensing: A single user license, by default, comes with right to install/execute the software on one PC (Server or Workstation) and connect to one remote PC or unlimited local drives. A license must be purchased for each PC where the product will be installed, executed or launched. This also applies to Enterprise installations that run the software off a network file server.

Connection Licensing: PeerSync comes with the ability to connect to one remote PC. If you need to synchronize files from the local PC to multiple remote PCs, you will need to purchase a connection license for each additional remote PC you want to connect to. A remote connection license applies to all drives/folders on a single remote PC you are connecting to.

For more information about Product Editions and Licensing please visit our web site: www.peersoftware.com

To purchase additional Remote Connection licenses, please contact us for additional information.

Note: Peer Software is quite flexible in assembling different combinations of option packages then the ones listed here for enterprise installations with customers' requirements in mind. Please contact us for such requests and for more detail of the PeerSync option packages that are available.

Registration and Passwords If this is an unregistered or Evaluation Copy of PeerSync, you can register it with Peer Software, Inc. as a fully licensed copy by providing credit card information via phone or secure Internet registration, or by sending a check or money order to the address below (see included "readme.txt"

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (95 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual file for pricing information). As an integral component of PeerSync 5.0 and all subsequent versions, the PeerSync Profiler application is included as part of registration.

Register online via secure Internet credit card registration at: www.peersoftware.com Register by phone via credit card by calling: (631) 979-1770 between the hours of 9:00 AM and 4:00 PM EST

Register by FAX via Purchase Order: Send Purchase orders to (631) 979-1870

Register by mail, send check or money order to: Peer Software, Inc. 1363 Veterans Highway, Suite 26 Hauppauge, NY 11788

Information Required: -Full name (as it appears on the credit card) -Address (City, State / Province, Country, and Postal Code) -Phone Number -Entire Card Number -Card Expiration Date -Email Address (Peer Software will send the Authorization Key required to unlock PeerSync’s Evaluation Counter to this )

Quantity Discounts (See Web site or contact us for more information)

Upon registering PeerSync, user information will be generated according to the name and company name (if any) you specified during registration, as well as a password specific to the product version you have licensed. This information will be emailed to you and will be used to

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (96 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual activate your current copy. Additional license fees must be paid for multi-user use.

PeerSync may not be commercially distributed or distributed by government agencies including their contractors UNLESS registration fees are paid for by the distributing party.

See License agreement for product redistribution.

See Product Editions and Licensing for different version of the PeerSync and types of licensing we offer.

Note Regarding Updates: As new updates/changes become available, updated versions of the software will be posted on our Internet Web page "www.peersoftware.com." Check this page periodically to download the latest executables. Your Authorization Key will continue to work with updated versions unless a major release is issued, or PeerSync is installed in a different folder than the previously installed/authorized version.

Entering Your User Information and Password

Through an Evaluation Copy of PeerSync:

After registration with Peer Software, Inc, you will receive Registration Information generated which is from the information you provided during registration. The password you receive will be specific to the PeerSync product you have licensed and registered with Peer Software. Upon entering valid password and user information into your Evaluation Copy, that copy will be immediately converted to a fully licensed version of the appropriate PeerSync product. The instructions below apply to a "Registered Evaluation Copy" of PeerSync, that being one whose evaluation period is still active.

To activate your registered and licensed PeerSync product, first run your Evaluation Copy of PeerSync. Then choose "About" from the Help Menu located on the far right of the PeerSync Profiler Menu Bar. To activate your registered and licensed PeerSync product, first run your Evaluation Copy of PeerSync. Then choose "About" from the Help Menu located on the far right of the PeerSync Profiler Menu Bar. This opens the About PeerSync screen, which contains "User Name," "Company", "Options" and "Password" fields.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (97 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Be sure to enter this information exactly as you received it, with the same spacing, hyphenation, punctuation, and cases (i.e. if a comma or period contained within a company name is omitted, registration will not be accepted). It is advisable to cut-and-paste passwords directly from the Email registration information. If passwords are typed using lower case letters where upper cases have been indicated, or if other information is typed incorrectly, the message shown below will be displayed. This message indicates that registration was unsuccessful; shows the number of attempts made to register, and contains’ a link to Peer Software, Inc. You will only be allowed a limited number of attempts before the application closes entirely and will need to be opened again in order to retry.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (98 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

If registration is successful, your will receive a success dialog such as that shown below for an Enterprise version of PeerSync. Your Evaluation Copy will have been immediately activated as a registered version of the PeerSync product you have licensed (in this example an Enterprise version), with this change indicated on the interface title bar. Click "OK" on the success dialog to begin usage of your newly activated PeerSync product. You will not have to exit and restart the application to do so.

Through an Unregistered Copy of PeerSync:

Unregistered copies of PeerSync are Evaluation Copies whose evaluation period has expired, or copies into which a valid password and user information has not yet been entered. These copies can still be activated as fully licensed versions of whichever PeerSync product whose usage you have purchased from Peer Software, Inc.

After registration with Peer Software, you will receive Registration Information which is generated from the information you provided during registration. The password you receive will be specific to the PeerSync product you have licensed.

To activate your copy of PeerSync as a fully licensed version, first run the copy. Because your copy is unregistered, the application will not open in its entirety, but the following About PeerSync screen will open. This screen contains "User Name," "Company", "Options" and "Password" fields.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (99 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Be sure to enter this information exactly as you received it, with the same spacing, hyphenation, punctuation, and cases (i.e. if a comma or period contained within a company name is omitted, registration will not be accepted). It is advisable to cut-and-paste passwords directly from the Email registration information. If passwords are typed using lower case letters where upper cases have been indicated, or if other information is typed incorrectly, the message shown below will be displayed. This message indicates that registration was unsuccessful; shows the number of attempts made to register, and contains’ a link to Peer Software, Inc. You will only be allowed a limited number of attempts before the application closes entirely and will need to be opened again in order to retry.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (100 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

If registration is successful, your will receive a success dialog such as that shown below for an Enterprise version of PeerSync. Your copy will now have been immediately activated as a registered version of the PeerSync product you have licensed (in this example an Enterprise version). Click "OK" on the success dialog to begin using your registered copy: the About PeerSync screen will close and the full application interface will be displayed. You will not have to exit and restart the application to begin usage.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS

READ LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THIS PROGRAM.

Please send any suggestions, comments or requests for support to the proprietor of PeerSync:

Peer Software, Inc. 1363 Veterans Highway, Suite 26, Hauppauge, NY 11788 Phone: (631) 979-1770 FAX: (631) 979-1870 Email: [email protected]

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (101 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

Copyright 1994-2002, Peer Software, Inc. PeerSync is a registered trademark of Peer Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Reproduction in whole or in part without permission is strictly prohibited.

Upgrade Information To upgrade, simply double-click on the executable in the Explorer window, or choose "Run" from the Start Menu and then select the application. If you are upgrading the current version of PeerSync (i.e. 6.0.1 to 6.0.2) simple install the application over the existing PeerSync and the previous version be backed up in a sub-folder called 'BACKUP' if you select this option during installation. If you are evaluating a new version of PeerSync (6.1) and you already have an existing copy of PeerSync (6.0) please select a new directory during installation. If you wish to remove previous versions of PeerSync you must go to the 'Start Menu-Settings- Control Panel', select the 'Add/Remove Programs' utility and remove the PeerSync versions you no longer need.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/ps60.html (102 of 102) [25/04/02 11:14:25] PeerSync Help Manual

PeerSync Help Manual Last Updated: 04-02-02

Overview

(See Next: Menus)

With the 6.0 release of PeerSync, Peer Software Inc. introduced an even easier, more efficient, and more comprehensive way to execute our proven method for local and network-wide file synchronization and management: PeerSync Profiler. This application allows users to configure a vast number of different and highly specified tasks through a single browser-style interface - without requiring direct interaction with the PeerSync software engine.

Profiler is used to create PeerSync Profiles. A Profile can contain as many as 255 individual

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 1 PeerSync Help Manual synchronization tasks, or Filters. A Filter is defined by identifying a Source Folder, a Target Folder (to which the contents of the Source will be synchronized), and then choosing from more than 80 easily specified Filter Settings. These settings determine which contents will be synchronized, in what manner, and when they will be synchronized -- according to your choice of Real-time, Scheduled, or manually initiated operations. The process of building a Profile is made quick and simple by allowing you to easily create Filters and then follow the sequentially arranged list of Settings screens accessed through the Selection Tree, which is located on the left side of the application interface. The user begins by first selecting a single Filter or multiple Filters from the Profile Filter List. Then specific synchronization criteria are applied to the selected items using Filter Settings. Once synchronization criteria have been configured for each Filter, Global Settings are used to define and execute launch of the entire Profile. By offering a Tool Button Toolbar as well as separate Selection Tree and Profile Filter List windows, Profiler’s browser-based interface allows you to easily view, create, copy, rename, move, or delete Filters regardless of which Settings screen is currently being displayed.

Product Definitions

Synchronization: Updating any existing files or adding new files in the target folder using the source folder as the guide. When completed, the target folder should contain all of the files in the source folder with matching content and time stamps.

Replication: Same as synchronization, except files that are in the target folder that do not have a matching source file will be deleted.

Profiles: A Profile is a description of a complete synchronization scenario. Profiles can contain many source-target combinations allowing the end-user to define very detailed file synchronizations and run them all within a single request. For example, you could build a profile that contains multiple source and target folders such as:

Source = C:\My Documents Target = N:\USERS\TEST\My Documents Source = D:\LocalData Target = N:\USERS\TEST\LocalData Source = C:\WINDOWS\Profiles Target = N:\USERS\TEST\Profiles

Each of these Source-Target entries can then be further detailed with more than 65 options each making each entry a completely self contained process, and still allowing it to be run as part of a bigger set or Profile.

Filters: A filter is a single entry in a profile. A Profile can contain from one to 255 filters and each filter contains more than 80 individual option settings.

Real-Time Mode: In this mode of operation, PeerSync will automatically detect changes made to the source folder(s) and execute the synchronization options selected for the matching filter. Typically, the target folder is updated with the source folder change within moments of the change. Note that PeerSync may have completed the operation before Windows actually displays the change in the target folder Explorer window.

Scheduled Mode: In this mode of operation, PeerSync will execute the designated filter at the selected time. Each filter in the profile can have the same or different time interval.

Product Support

All support of PeerSync products will be handled on our web site (www.peersoftware.com) support page or by sending email to our support box at [email protected].

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 2 PeerSync Help Manual

The manufacturer of PeerSync makes no warranties, implied or otherwise, for use of this product. User assumes all responsibility for any data loss or damage.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 3 PeerSync Help Manual

Menus

(See Next: Tool Buttons)

In addition to special options found only on Profiler menus, menu items replicate those features accessed through Profiler Tool Buttons. As a result, you can still access essential Profile and Filter Settings even if you have chosen to hide Tool Buttons using the View Menu.

File: This menu includes items allowing you to create and save new Profiles, open existing Profiles, create Profile desktop shortcuts, and exit the application. New: Create a new Profile. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Open: Open an existing Profile. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Reopen: Reopen a recently used Profile. Save: Save the current Profile. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Save as: Rename and save the current Profile. Profile - Revert to Saved: Revert to the last saved settings of the current Profile. Profile - Merge Existing: Merge an existing Profile into the current Profile. Profile - Create Shortcut on Desktop: Create and add a shortcut to PeerSync of the current Profile and settings/command line arguments to the desktop. Profile - Save Defaults: Save the current settings of the Profile as the default settings. Exit: Close/exit the application.

Edit: Allows you to move one step up or down between Selection Tree options screens while providing a shortcut to the Current Profile Activity screen. Back: Move back to the previous screen. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Next: Move on to the next screen. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Current Profile Activity: Go to the Current Profile Activity screen.

View: Allows you to change the appearance of the application interface. "Hint" items enable or disable pop-up hints activated by passing the mouse pointer over interface features, as well as those displayed in the Status Bar located at the bottom of the application interface. In addition to a description of Profiler features, hints will identify command line arguments associated with those features (if any). Toolbars - Tool Buttons: Show/hide the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Toolbars - Profile Description: Show/hide the Profile Description Toolbar. Toolbars - with Hot Tracks: Show/hide the hot tracks features for the Toolbars. Toolbars - with Text Labels: Show/hide description text labels for the Toolbars. Selection Tree: Show/hide the Selection Tree left side panel. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 4 PeerSync Help Manual

Status Bar: Show/hide the Status Bar at the bottom of the application. Hints - on Application: Show/hide pop-up hints displayed on the application. Hints - on Status Bar: Show/hide hints displayed on the Status Bar.

Options: Allows you to select options pertaining to the way PeerSync, the Profiler and the Wizard interact with each other and Windows Explorer. Use Wizard to Add Filters: If selected, directs Profiler to open the PeerSync Wizard application as an easier and simpler way to add new Filters to a Profile. If not selected, the Add Filter option will use the saved Filter defaults. This feature is toggled on or off depending on which option was used the last time that a Filter was added (with Defaults or with Wizard). Create SNC extension association: If selected, creates an association of any file that has an SNC extension with the Profiler to be used as the default application to open these files. If not selected, the association of SNC files with the Profiler will be removed. This feature is also accessible from the Startup Options screen. Add Quick-Sync Folder option to Explorer menu: If selected, will add our Quick-Sync feature to Windows Explorer. To access this feature simply right-click on any folder in Explorer or on your Desktop and you will be able to sync the folder to selected target folder(s), add the job to a Quick- Sync Profile that is stored out in memory and given the ability to modify/add to the jobs using the Profiler. This feature is also accessible from the Startup Options screen.

Run: Allows you to Launch the Current Profile, Terminate the Active Profile and Update the Current Profile. Launch Current Profile: This option will launch the current Profile (filter/global settings) in PeerSync. During this process, an instance of PeerSync will be started with the current Profile as the first parameter and the arguments selected from the Operation Mode screen as the subsequent parameters. You can automate this process via a shortcut, through the startup folder, in the registry or as a service by selecting one of these features from the StartUp Options screen. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Terminate Active Profile: This option, when available, will allow a user to terminate an instance of PeerSync that contains an active Profile that is connected to the Profiler. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar. Update Current Profile: This option, when available, will allow a user to update an instance of PeerSync with the current Profile opened in the Profiler. Note: Because it is separate from the core software engine, the Profiler allows you to create and configure new Profiles while PeerSync runs Synchronization Operations at optimum efficiency. In both this Help file and on Profiler screens "Current" refers to the Profile currently being configured but not yet launched, while "Active" most often refers to the Profile presently being run by the PeerSync engine.

Filter: Allows you to manipulate Filters within the current Profile. If "Allow Multiple Selection" has been checked on this menu you will be able to select and apply settings to multiple Filters.

Add - Filter with Defaults: Creates and adds a Filter to the current Profile using the saved Filter defaults. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar and the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Add - Filter with Wizard: Opens the PeerSync Wizard application that allows you to select a pre determined canned scenario and add it as a Filter to the current Profile. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar and the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 5 PeerSync Help Manual

Copy: Creates a duplicate copy of the currently selected Filter and all of its settings. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar and the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Rename: Allows for the renaming of the selected Filter. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar and the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Delete: Allows for the deletion of the currently selected Filter(s). This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar and the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Clear All: Will close the current Profile allowing for the user to create a new Profile.

Select All: Will select all of the Filters.

Invert Selection: Will change the selected state of all the Filters.

Allow Multiple Selection: Gives the ability to select and apply settings to multiple Filters.

Move Up: Moves the currently selected Filter up one in the list. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar and the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Move Down: Moves the currently selected Filter down one in the list. This feature is also accessible from the Tool Buttons Toolbar and the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Save Defaults: Stores the currently selected Filter Settings as the default for all subsequent new added Filters.

Help: While allowing you to access Help files and the About screen, this menu also provides demonstrations of PeerSync's Real-time Monitoring and Scheduled Operation modes.

Demos - Real-time Monitoring: This feature will start an instance of PeerSync in a demo mode to display it's real-time synchronization capabilities. Demos - Scheduled Operations: This feature will start an instance of PeerSync in a demo mode to display it's scheduled synchronization capabilities. Web Site: This menu item will have many links back to our web site for product information, downloads, updates and support. PeerSync Help: Will open the application help file to the contents section. You may also access specific parts of the help file for features you are currently observing by pressing 'F1' on your keyboard. License Information: Will display the different Product Editions and Licensing available for PeerSync, as well as, what the current edition has available and other useful information about the current package you are running. About PeerSync: Will display an about screen, that contains information about the current package you are running.

Evaluation: Only displayed in evaluation copies of the software, this menu item will contain features that we believe are helpful to the user during evaluation such as demos, read me files and other evaluation oriented features.

View Popup Menu: Activated by right clicking on the application Menu, Tool Buttons Toolbar, Profile Description Toolbar or the Status Bar, you can select many of the options available from the application View Menu.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 6 PeerSync Help Manual

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 7 PeerSync Help Manual

Tool Buttons

(See Next: Profile Description)

Profiler offers a simple set of browser-style Tool Buttons allowing you to easily modify the current Profile and its Filters, regardless of which screen has been chosen from the Selection Tree. These Buttons can be hidden by un checking the "Tool Buttons" option, accessed through the "Toolbars" item on the View Menu. Even if this Toolbar has been hidden you will still be able to access its options by using the File, Edit, and Filter Menus. You can also change the placement of these Buttons by clicking on the left side of the Toolbar and dragging it to rest above or below the Profile Description Toolbar. The following descriptions are listed in the order in which they appear left to right on the Tool Buttons Toolbar and are all accessible via the application Menus.

New Profile: Located on the far left of the Toolbar, this Button creates a new Profile. If another Profile containing unsaved changes is currently open when this Button is pressed, a dialog box will open asking you if you want to save changes to the current Profile before opening a new one. (See Save Profile Button Below). If you choose "No," the new Profile will replace the current one and no changes will be saved. Note: If the current Profile has not been previously saved and "No" is chosen, the entire Profile will be lost.

Open Profile: This Button displays a "Select Profile File" dialog box allowing you to open an existing Profile. By default, it will open in the path in which PeerSync has been installed (i.e. C:\Program Files\PeerSync). Links to previously opened Profiles can be accessible through a drop-down list opened by clicking on the arrow key attached to this Button.

Save Profile: This Button allows you to save new Profiles, or save changes made to existing Profiles. If you are saving a new Profile, a "Save As" dialog box will open allowing you to name and store it as an .SNC file in your choice of folders, with "NewProfile" as the default name and the path in which PeerSync has been installed as the default directory. Profiles and Profile modifications must be saved in order to be subsequently accessible.

Launch Current Profile: This option will launch the current Profile (filter/global settings) in PeerSync. During this process, an instance of PeerSync will be started with the current Profile as the first parameter and the arguments selected from the Operation Mode screen as the subsequent parameters. You can automate this process via a shortcut, through the startup folder, in the registry or as a service by selecting one of these features from the StartUp Options screen.

Terminate Active Profile: This option, when available, will allow a user to terminate an instance of PeerSync that contains an active Profile that is connected to the Profiler.

Add Filter: This Button adds a Filter to the bottom of the current list (See Profile Filter List). Filters are named "New Filter Item" and assigned a number by default. If you have selected "Use Wizard to Add New Filters" from the Options Menu, the PeerSync Wizard application will open when this Button is pressed. The Wizard provides a guided, step-by-step method for creating and configuring new Filters. A drop-down list attached to this Button also allows you to choose between "Add Filter With Wizard" or

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 8 PeerSync Help Manual

"Add Filter With Defaults" options. If the former is chosen, PeerSync Wizard will open every time this Button is pressed. If the latter is chosen, new Filters added to the list through this Button will be configured manually using Selection Tree screens. These Filters will use whichever default settings are currently applied (See Filter Menu, "Save Defaults"). Note: The first time "Add Filter With Wizard" is chosen from the drop-down list, the Wizard application will open. After that point PeerSync Wizard will be launched by pressing the Add Filter Button.

Copy Filter: Creates a copy of the currently selected Filter and places it at the bottom of the Profile Filter List. Copies will be numbered by default and named after the original (i.e. "Copy 1 of My Syncs").

Rename Filter: Allows you to rename the currently selected Filter. Filters can also be renamed manually by clicking on them after they have been highlighted.

Delete Filter: Deletes the currently selected Filter(s). When this Button is pressed, a dialog box will open asking you to confirm deletion. Filters can also be deleted by selecting them and then pressing the DELETE key on your keyboard.

Move Filter Up: Moves the currently selected Filter up one place within the Profile Filter List.

Move Filter Down: Moves the currently selected Filter down one place within the Profile Filter List.

Show Selection Tree: Shows or hides the Selection Tree. It the Tree has been hidden, its space will be filled within the interface by the currently selected Settings screen. When the tree is hidden, screens can still be selected using the drop-down list attached to the Back Button.

Back: Using the order shown in the Selection Tree, this Button opens the screen located immediately above that, which is currently being displayed. Settings screens can also be accessed using the drop- down list located on the right side of the Back Button; list items follow the same order as that shown on the Selection Tree.

Next: Using the order shown in the Selection Tree, this Button opens the Profile Options screen located immediately below the screen currently being displayed.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 9 PeerSync Help Manual

Profile Description

(See Next: Profile Filter List)

This field displays a textual description of the current Profile. By default the description for an unsaved Profile will read "Profile Filter List." Unless you enter a unique description into this field, a default description will be assigned upon saving the Profile: this default description will match the new Profile name.

Descriptions can be changed at any time; like all Profiler configurations they must be saved prior to closing the Profile or application in order to be stored. You can change the placement of the Profile Description Toolbar by clicking on its left side and dragging it to rest above or below the Tool Buttons Toolbar. The Profile Description can also be hidden by un checking the "Profile Description" option, accessed through the "Toolbars" item on the View Menu.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 10 PeerSync Help Manual

Profile Filter List

(See Next: Selection Tree)

Located beneath the Toolbars, this window displays all Filters associated with the current Profile. Use of this list is central to the Profile-building process: all configurations made on the Filter Settings screens (accessed through the Selection Tree) will only be applied to those Filters currently selected from this list.

To select a Filter, highlight it using the left mouse Button. The "Allow Multiple Selection" item must be checked on the Filter Menu in order to select and have settings applied to multiple Filters. To select multiple adjacent Filters, highlight the first Filter, hold down the SHIFT key on your keyboard, and then highlight the last Filter you wish to include. You can also hold down the SHIFT key and then use the up or down arrow keys on your keyboard. To select multiple nonadjacent Filters, highlight the first Filter, then hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard and click on each additional Filter you wish to include. Once you have selected a Filter or Filters, move through the screens found on the Selection Tree and apply settings as desired. Highlighting on the selected Filter(s) will appear gray as you move through these screens, indicating that any settings will only be applied to those selected Filters. Screens found under the Global Settings section of the tree apply to entire Profiles only, as opposed to individual Filters. Note: The Profile Filter List window will appear gray when global or Profile-related screens, such as those found under Global Settings, are chosen from the Selection Tree. The box appearing to the left of each Filter must be checked in order for that Filter to be included in the active Profile when launched. Although unchecked Filters will not be processed upon launch, they will be saved within the Profile for future use and/or selection.

Upon creating a new Profile, an initial Filter will be displayed bearing the name "New Filter Item 1" by default (this applies to manual Filter creation only). The first New Filter added within an existing Profile will also bear this name. Successive Filters will be named "New Filter Item 2," "New Filter Item 3," etc. Any selected Filter can be renamed through the "Rename" Tool Button, through items found on both the Filter Menu and Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu described below, or manually by selecting it a second time using the left mouse Button. In both new and stored Profiles, you can navigate the Profile Filter List as well as add, copy, delete, and navigate Filters using the Tool Buttons, using items from the Filter Menu, and by using items found on the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu described below. You can also navigate the list and delete items using the DELETE and up and down arrow keys on your keyboard.

Note: In order to navigate or modify the Profile Filter List you must have first clicked somewhere within the Profile Filter List window: this ensures that during configuration any options chosen from the Selection Tree Settings screens are applied exclusively to the currently selected Filter. The height of the Profile Filter List window can be changed by passing the mouse pointer over its bottom border until a double/Arrow cursor appears, then dragging the window to meet the desired size. At minimum size, only a single Filter may be viewed. Adding a new Filter while this view is in effect prompts display of up and down arrow Buttons in the right side of the window. These Buttons allow you to view different Filters within the list.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 11 PeerSync Help Manual

Pop-Up Menu: Activated by right clicking on the Profile Filter List, this menu duplicates the mostly used features found on the Filter Menu while providing some additional items listed below.

Synchronize Selected Filters: This executes an immediate, non-persistent synchronization of the currently selected Filters ("non-persistent" refers to a one-time sync process; "persistent" refers to ongoing sync operations such as Real-time Monitoring or Scheduled Operations). During this process, persistent arguments set for the current Profile will be ignored. When the Button is depressed, a confirmation dialog will be displayed indicating which Filters have been selected from the active Profile and asking you to confirm synchronization through a "Yes" or "No" Button. If "Yes" is selected, the synchronization will proceed. A message will always be displayed upon completion of this operation. Other sync operations allow you to choose whether or not such a message will be displayed.

Create Pre-Sync Report: This executes a pre-sync of the currently selected Filters. During this process, files and folders will not be modified and persistent arguments set for the current Profile will be ignored. A report will be created/displayed with what work would be done if a sync was actually performed.

Log File - View: This Button allows you to view Log reports by opening the file in a text editor. This feature is also accessible from the Reporting screen.

Log File - Clear: This Button allows you to clear Log reports. This feature is also accessible from the Reporting screen.

Last Run On - Reset: This is a display of and a means of resetting the last run date/time of the selected Filter within the current Profile. This is the date/time that will be used when comparing files for the Bi-directional Synchronization Mode option on the Alterations Screen. This feature is also displayed on the from the Folder Selection screen.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 12 PeerSync Help Manual

Selection Tree

(See Next: Filter Settings)

The Selection Tree is located at the left side of the PeerSync Profiler interface. The Selection Tree can also be hidden by un checking the "Selection Tree" option, accessed through the "Toolbars" item on the View Menu.

Screens can be accessed through this tree, which are used to set synchronization criteria for individual Filters (Filter Settings), as well as set global properties relating to execution of the entire Profile and all related Filters (Global Settings).

Once you have selected a Filter or Filters from the Profile Filter List, all options configured on Filter Settings screens will only be applied to those selections.

After synchronization criteria for all individual Filters have been established, use the Global Settings screens to set global properties relating to all Filters, as well as decide how you would like the Profile to be executed.

The Profile Filter List will appear gray when any Global Settings screen is displayed, indicating that all properties set on that screen will be applied to the entire Profile.

The Selection Tree items are customizable and can be viewed or hidden by turning off "Show All Profile Options", right-clicking on the "Selection Tree" and selecting the "Customize" Pop-Up Menu item described below.

Some Selection Tree items will not be accessible depending on the package you are currently using.

Pop-Up Menu: Activated by right clicking on the Selection Tree, this menu duplicates the items listed in the Selection Tree, as well as, the items listed in the drop-down list located on the right side of the Back Button on the Tool Buttons Toolbar. This Menu also offers the following options:

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 13 PeerSync Help Manual

Show All Profile Options: This feature will toggle between showing all Profile Options and the Custom Options in the Selection Tree.

Customize: This feature will allow the user to select which Profile Options to display in the Custom Selection Tree, when the "Show All Profile Options" is turned off. When selected the user will be given the dialog box shown below to pick and choose which Profile Options to use.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 14 PeerSync Help Manual

Quick-Sync

Quick-Sync Folder selection directly from MS Windows Explorer

This feature is a quick and easy way to synchronize folder(s) on the fly to backup location(s) with the option to modify your filtering criteria at a later time.

Simply right click on any folder you wish to sync and select "Quick-Sync Folder..."

This will launch PSWizard, which will ask you to select a target folder to sync to...

...and your ready to run the Quick-Sync. You also have the options to edit and/or add the current sync Filter to your Quick-Sync Profile or any other selected Profile.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 15 PeerSync Help Manual

Anytime you select a folder if it matches any source or target selections in the Quick-Sync Profile then the Filters will be listed to pick from or you have the option to add a new Filter.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 16 PeerSync Help Manual

Command Line Arguments

PeerSync’s Command Line Mode offers users the ability to configure a truly "hands-off" installation, where operation and distribution occurs from within an easily manageable, administrative environment. This mode allows Profiles to be executed from logon scripts, system batch (BAT) or command (CMD) files, detailed shortcuts, and shell commands -- while also providing full access to PeerSync Profiler features through command line arguments.

Profiles will need to be created through PeerSync Profiler first in order to be further modified through the arguments described in this topic (See PeerSync Profiler Overview and related Help Topics).

Command Line Arguments are entered into a Profile shortcut, created during build through the "Add to Desktop" Button found on Profiler’s Startup Options screen.

Note: For the command line arguments described in this topic, note that attention is paid to punctuation, to the order in which arguments are entered, and that appropriate spaces are used to separate these arguments. Follow the format outlined in the examples provided.

Also: Profile .SNC file names are the only command line variables associated with operation of PeerSync Profiler. All other arguments described in this topic are used to configure operation of the PeerSync engine and its execution of Profiles.

Profiler Command Line Arguments As noted above, Profile (.SNC) file names are the only variables associated with operation of PeerSync Profiler. To change an .SNC file name through the command line: I. Right click the Profile shortcut you created during build (see StartUp Options, "Add to Desktop" Button). II. Select the "Properties" item from the pop-up menu. III. Select the "Shortcut" tab. As shown in the following sample, the "Target" field will contain a command line for the Profile, where "Profile One" represents a sample Profile name:

"C:\Program Files\PeerSync\PeerSync.exe" "C:\Program Files\PeerSync\Profile One.SNC" /A /M

I. Manually change the Profile Name to reflect that of the new .SNC file. II. Click "OK."

PeerSync Command Line Arguments The following arguments are appended to the end of the command line followed by a space and forward slash ( i.e. /A ). A space and forward slash are also used to separate each additional argument ( i.e. /A /M).

Note: Command line arguments can also be identified through hints displayed on the Profiler interface. If you have selected to display hints through the View Menu (either on the application interface or in its Status Bar), a hint will be displayed for Profiler features upon passing the mouse cursor over them. These hints will display both a description of the feature as well as its related command line argument (if any).

Command Line Arguments:

/A (Run Automatically): If this argument is appended to the command line, the Profile can be run through its associated shortcut. As non-persistent processes, Automatic Operations are run a single time upon manual initiation by the user.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 17 PeerSync Help Manual

Example: "C:\PeerSync\PeerSync50.exe" "Profile One.SNC" /A

/AP (Run a Pre-Sync Report): If the /AP argument is used a Pre-Sync Report will be generated and files/folders will not be synchronized. If you add an O to the /AP then the previous Pre-Sync report will be Over written, if you exclude the O then the file will be appended to an existing Pre-Sync report. If you add an S to the /AP then the Pre-Sync report will be Shown at the end of the run (i.e.: /AP, /APO, /APOS or /APS).

/C (Custom Configuration Files): A user-generated Configuration File can be automatically loaded by using the /C command line argument followed by a colon and the file name ( /C:FILENAME ):

Example: "C:\PeerSync\PeerSync50.EXE" "/C:C:\PeerSync\MyConfig.CFG"

/D (Delay Warning): To have a delay warning dialog box displayed prior to Automatic Operation, enter a blank space, then add /D and then the desired length of delay (in seconds) to the end of the command line. If you’ve chosen this option any Automatic Operation can be canceled through this dialog box if done so within the designated interval. For example, /D5 would provide you with a 5 second delay during which the operation can be canceled. This delay can only be used with Automatic Operations.

Example: "C:\PeerSync\PeerSync50.EXE" "Profile 1.SNC" /A /D5

Note: If the /D argument includes an H, i.e. DH60, then the delay timer will be hidden during operation. This feature is intended for systems that run PeerSync upon starting Windows. This will allow PeerSync to begin after other applications have been loaded.

Default Folders: Additional command line arguments can designate default folders for PeerSync to synchronize upon launch. If one folder name is entered as follows, that folder will be selected by default for both Source and Target:

Example: "C:\PeerSync\PeerSync50.EXE" "C:\DOCS"

If two folders are listed, separated by a space, the first folder becomes the default Source folder and the second becomes the default Target folder.

Example: "C:\DOCS" "G:\DOCS"

Note: For variable command line folder paths, see Folder Selection Help.

DLL file to improve interaction with WordPerfect v8 and v9: Working with the Corel corporation, Peer Software, Inc. developed a 3rd party utility that disabled the Save function in WordPerfect for "unmodified" documents. This reduces the possible "File Access Denied" error that WordPerfect produces when PeerSync is synchronizing the active document. To use this option you must rerun the PeerSync installation program a second time. The file "PSWPMod.DLL" will be installed in the Windows System32 folder.

For WordPerfect 9, add "/WPMOD9" (or "/WPMOD" default) on the PeerSync command line, which will modify the registry as follows:

Key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\COREL\WordPerfect\9\Third Party

String: DLL16

Value: C:\WinNT\System32\PSWPMod.DLL

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 18 PeerSync Help Manual

For WordPerfect 8, add "/WPMOD8" on the PeerSync command line, which will modify the registry as follows:

Key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\COREL\WordPerfect\8\Third Party

String: DLL16

Value: C:\WinNT\System32\PSWPMod.DLL

Note: The DLL16 string may vary based on the installation of other 3rd party add-ons to your WordPerfect installation. The value could be DLL15, DLL14, etc.

/E (Suppress Real-time Filters): This argument will suppress real-time Filters until the initial synchronization has completed.

/GAn (Set Empty file delay time): If file size is 0 bytes then delay n milliseconds and check file size again. If byte count is then greater than 0, try sending again.

/GBn (Set Shadow Detection Sensitivity): Set amount of time (in milliseconds) to allow multiple changes to be ignored for same file in real-time detection mode. Default is 250 milliseconds (1/4 of a second)

/GCn (Set file comparison value to add to target file): Set the amount of time in seconds to be added to the target file for comparison purposes. This option is useful when comparing source and target files that reside on computers that are running different operating systems. File time conversion can vary between half and one and a half seconds causing PeerSync to force file to be updated when they are actually unchanged. Default is 1.

/H (Hide Splash Screen): Available through all registered versions of PeerSync, this argument will suppress and hide the splash screen for both the PeerSync and PSProfiler applications.

/I (Ignore Target Drive Space): The /I argument configures PeerSync to attempt file synchronization without first checking for available Target drive space.

/J (Move Files After Sync): The /J argument configures PeerSync to delete Source files after successful copy to Target.

/K5 (Display activity back to Profiler): This argument will display activity and statistics back to the Profiler Current Profile Activity screen.

/M (Show as Tray Icon): If this argument is used, a tray icon will be shown during execution of the Profile by the PeerSync engine.

/MCT:n (Multiple Copy Threads): This argument will allow for multiple copy threads during synchronization which will allow for parallel synchronization of files (i.e. /MCT:25).

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 19 PeerSync Help Manual

/MFT:n (Multiple Filter Threads): This argument will allow for multiple Filter threads during synchronization which will allow for parallel synchronization of Filters (i.e. /MFT:200).

/NDD (Use Universal System event detection method): This argument disables use of the Windows NT device driver.

Note: The device driver is required during Real-time Operations for non-NT drives.

/O (Overwrite Target Files): The /O argument configures PeerSync to always overwrite Target files regardless of their date.

/PERFORMANCEn (PeerSync Priority Performance: n = 0-2): This command line argument will set the main application and real-time detection threads in PeerSync to pre determined levels 0-low, 1- normal or 2-high.

/PRIORITYAPPn (PeerSync Application thread: n = 0-2): This command line argument will override the Performance setting and set the main PeerSync Application thread in PeerSync to the selected level. The following describes each priority setting.

0 = IDLE_PRIORITY_CLASS Specify this class for a process whose threads run only when the system is idle. The threads of the process are preempted by the threads of any process running in a higher priority class. An example is a screen saver. The idle-priority class is inherited by child processes.

1 = NORMAL_PRIORITY_CLASS Specify this class for a process with no special scheduling needs.

2 = HIGH_PRIORITY_CLASS Specify this class for a process that performs time-critical tasks that must be executed immediately. The threads of the process preempt the threads of normal or idle priority class processes. An example is Windows Task List, which must respond quickly when called by the user, regardless of the load on the operating system. Use extreme care when using the high-priority class, because a high-priority class application can use nearly all available CPU time.

/PRIORITYRTn (Real-time detection thread: n = 0-6): This command line argument will override the Performance setting and set the real-time detection thread in PeerSync to the selected level. The Default is tpNormal unless the application is in Enhanced real-time mode then it gets set to tpHighest. The following describes each priority setting.

0 = tpIdle The thread executes only when the system is idle-Windows won't interrupt other threads to execute a thread with tpIdle priority.

1 = tpLowest The thread's priority is two points below normal.

2 = tpLower The thread's priority is one point below normal.

3 = tpNormal The thread has normal priority.

4 = tpHigher The thread's priority is one point above normal.

5 = tpHighest The thread's priority is two points above normal.

6 = tpTimeCritical The thread gets highest priority.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 20 PeerSync Help Manual

/Progress (Show Progress during synchronization): When this command line argument is sent to PeerSync the Profiler will be started and will display the synchronization progress.

/Q (Monitoring Target Folders): The /Q argument configures PeerSync to monitor the Target Folder automatically.

/R (Real-time Monitoring Argument): The /R argument activates Real-time Mode.

Example: "PeerSync50.exe" "MyProfile.Snc" /A /M /R or "PeerSync50.exe" "C:\MyData C:\Target" /A /R

Note: The /A argument must also be used in order for /R to be recognized.

Monitoring Requirements and Additional Commands:

If the "Include Sub Folders" option has been chosen from the Folder Selection Screen, then the active folder and all sub-folders will be monitored as a single selection.

Network folders are only checked for changes made from the monitoring PC. If the network folders are changed by another user on the network, this change will not be detected.

If changes occur during a long update, requests for additional updates are added to a queue and processed by active folder first, then first-in, first-out (FIFO). To set an interval (in seconds) determining how frequently the queue will be checked, add an S to the /R argument followed by the desired number of seconds (i.e. /RS5 for 5 seconds). The default interval is one second.

You can set the number of changes that must occur to the monitored folders before the synchronization process will begin. To set this change count, use the argument /W followed by a number indicating the desired number of changes (i.e. /W3).

Note: The /W argument will be disabled if /S is being used, or if the "Run Filter Every X Minutes" option has been checked on Profiler’s Automation screen.

/ROxCz (Retry Open Files): When PeerSync cannot copy an open Source file, this option will automatically place the open file information into a list that will be retried on a recurring basis and can be limited to the number of retry attempts. A sample command line argument for this option would be /RO30C10, where /R starts Real-time Operations; O30 turns on the Open file retry and repeats the attempt every 30 seconds, and C10 (optional) sets the number of tries (Count) attempted before no additional attempts will be made. The default setting directs PeerSync to repeat continuously until a file is synchronized.

/S (Run Scheduled Operation): The /S argument enables or disables Scheduled Operation Mode for the entire Profile. This option must be selected in order for all Scheduled Operations set for individual Filters to be recognized. Scheduled Mode does not apply a global schedule to the entire Profile: rather, it enables those schedules set for all individual Filters on to run at their specified intervals.

All Scheduled Operations set for individual Filters will be ignored if this mode is not selected. If none of the Filters within a Profile are set for Scheduled Operation and this mode is selected, all active Filters within the Profile will be assigned a default synchronization schedule of five minutes.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 21 PeerSync Help Manual

/Sx (Synchronization Timer Argument): The /Sx option is used to run Peer Sync automatically at regular intervals. This argument sets PeerSync to synchronize the selected Profile every x minutes. Through this option PeerSync remains persistent and will not terminate upon completion.

Example: "PeerSync50.exe" "MyProfile.Snc" /A /M /S10 (Synchronization will be performed every 10 minutes)

or

Example: "PeerSync50.exe" "C:\MyData C:\Target" /A /M /S10 (Synchronization will be performed every 10 minutes)

/SxKz (Synchronization Timer Argument with Keyboard Activity): The /SxKz option is used to run Peer Sync automatically at regular intervals only when it senses keyboard activity. This argument sets PeerSync to synchronize the selected Profile every x minutes upon Keyboard activity and will always run every z cycles with/without keyboard activity. The z is optional and will be ignored if set to 0. Through this option PeerSync remains persistent and will not terminate upon completion.

/T (Terminate Running Copies of PeerSync): This argument broadcasts a terminate message to any currently running copies of the program, and will subsequently terminate the copy from which the command was launched. This can be useful when updating the application from a remote network source.

/TD (Display notice upon completion of synchronization): This argument will display a notice at the end of a manual synchronization with messages, summary information, files added, files updated, files excluded and files deleted.

/TIME (Daily Timer): This argument will allow for scheduling of PeerSync for specific times of the day down to the minute for selected days of the week and selected Filters within a Profile.

If you use a /TIMEF argument all selections at the Filter level from the Automation screen will be used.

You can also specify Global Daily Timer selections for the entire profile from the Operation Mode Screen or by using the following format:

1. Select the time of day (by default all Filters will be run all days)

/TIME:HH:MM Where HH is replaced with the value of 00-23 in military time and MM is replaced with 00-59 in minutes

Examples: Every Day at 12:00 am: /TIME:00:00 Every Day at 1:00 am: /TIME:01:00 Every Day at 8:00 am: /TIME:08:00 Every Day at 12:00 pm: /TIME:12:00 Every Day at 8:00 pm: /TIME:20:00

2. (Optional) - To select the days of week to run append the following:

D:SMTWTFS Where the days are substituted with 1 (On) and 0 (Off)

Sunday: D:1000000 Monday: D:0100000 Tuesday: D:0010000

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 22 PeerSync Help Manual

Wednesday: D:0001000 Thursday: D:0000100 Friday: D:0000010 Saturday: D:0000001

Examples: M, W & F at 8:00 am: /TIME:08:00D:0101010 Sat & Sun at 5:15 pm: /TIME:17:15D:1000001 Mon - Fri at 3:30 am: /TIME:03:30D:0111110

3. (Optional) - To select the Filters to run append F:f1;f2;f3

Where f1-fn are the Filter numbers.

Examples: Filter 1 Every day at 6:00 am: /TIME:06:00F:1 Filters 1 - 5 Every day at 8:25 pm: /TIME:20:25F:1;2;3;4;5 Filters 1, 3 & 5 Mon - Fri at 3:30 am: /TIME:03:30D:0111110F:1;3;5

Note: Will accept multiple command lines.

Example: Filter 1 Every day at 8:00 am, Filters 1 - 5 Every day at 8:25 pm and Filters 1, 3 & 5 Mon - Fri at 3:30 am /TIME:08:00F:1 /TIME:20:25F:1;2;3;4;5 /TIME:03:30D:0111110F:1;3;5

Sample: Complete command line to run PeerSync with Test.snc, all Filters, at 3:00 am Mon -Fri, (M)inimized on the tray. "C:\Program Files\PeerSync\PeerSync.exe" "C:\Program Files\PeerSync\test.snc" /TIME:3:00D:0111110 /M

/UDD (Use Device Driver method): This argument uses of the Windows NT device driver for real- time detection.

/< (Applications to Ignore): If using the Device Driver method for real-time detection you can select applications to ignore by appending application names (semicolon delimited) to the /< argument.

Example: /

/V (Verify User Logon): The /V argument verifies that the last known PeerSync user name (from logon name) matches that of the currently logged user. If the names do not match, a notification dialog will be displayed. To disable the dialog warning and exit PeerSync if the user names do not match, enter an R to the /V argument, i.e. /VR.

Note: User names will not be stored for future comparison unless this function has been activated.

Note: Unlike other command line arguments, this function is not accessible through a corresponding feature on the Profiler interface.

/W (Change Count before Sync): This argument is used in conjunction with /R to set the number of changes that must occur to the monitored folders before the synchronization process will begin. To set this change count, use /W followed by a number indicating the desired number of changes (i.e. /W3).

Note: The /W argument will be disabled if /S is being used, or if the "Run Filter Every X Minutes" option has been checked on Profiler’s Automation screen.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 23 PeerSync Help Manual

/X (Disable Initial Synchronization During Startup): The /X command line argument disables initial synchronization during /A /M /R operations at PeerSync startup

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 24 PeerSync Help Manual

Additional Configuration Entries

Silent Installation

If a PSDef.CFG file exists in the folder containing the installation application, the following items from that file will be used: [Application Options] Installation Folder= C:\Test\PeerSync User Name= Company= Options= Password= If the PSDef.CFG file is not found and /S is used, then all defaults will be used and no operator intervention will be required.

Temp Folder

If this entry is found in the PSDef.CFG file, the given path will be used for a temporary folder for the application to use. If the path does not exist, an attempt will be made to create it. If it cannot be created, the default will be used which is the logon users system Temp path. [Misc Options] TempFolder=MyTempFolder

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 25 PeerSync Help Manual

Filter Settings

(See Next: Folder Selection)

A Filter is a source-target backup/synchronization scenario. Filters are created by identifying a Source Folder and a Target Folder, to which the contents of the Source Folder will be synchronized . Then you the ability to select from more than 80 options, settings and modes to be applied to the source-target backup/synchronization. These options, settings and modes are categorized into Screens based on what they will do to the Filter or what they will do to the data to by modified by the Filter. These selections determine which contents will be synchronized and in what manner they will be synchronized. As well as, when they will be synchronized according to your choice of real-time, interval scheduling, daily timer scheduling, trigger driven or manually initiated operations.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 26 PeerSync Help Manual

Folder Selection

(See Next: FTP Selection)

Each Filter within a Profile is initially defined by using this screen to select a Source and Target Folder. The contents of a Source Folder will be synchronized to a Target Folder according to criteria further defined on other Settings screens. Once you have highlighted a Filter or Filters from the Profile Filter List, this screen offers several different methods to locate and select folders for synchronization. File paths can be typed manually, or you can browse local and network drives to locate and select your desired folders.

Features:

Source Folder Selection

Source Folder Field: Select a Source Folder by typing the file path into the field provided, or by using the Select Source Folder Button (See Below). By default, the Source Folder field will contain the path in which PeerSync has been installed: in most cases this will be C:\PROGRAM FILES\PeerSync. The convention outlined in this path must be used when manually typing entries, i.e. a drive must be specified followed by a colon, with subsequent folders separated by backslashes. Capital letters are not necessary, though spaces may only be entered where they are part of valid folder names (i.e. "Program Files"). No space should appear between slashes and folder names. This field also supports File/Folder Path Variables and when used the current path will be displayed above the field.

UNC names can be entered manually, or can be selected from the Network Neighborhood using the "Browse for Folder" dialog box (see Select Source Folder Button). UNC names will appear in the form \\COMPUTER\SHAREDDEVICE\PATH.

Example: \\SERVER11\D\USERDATA

Note We do not recommend using UNC paths for folders that reside on the local machine, in this scenario you should use the local path to that folder.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 27 PeerSync Help Manual

Folders can also be dragged and dropped from MS Windows Explorer into the Source Folder Field for automatic insertion.

Select Source Folder Button: This Button opens a "Browse for Folder" dialog box: once this box has opened, locate your chosen Source folder, select it using the left mouse Button, and click "OK."

Explore/Open/Create Button: This Button provides three options, selected from the attached drop-down list. The Button label will change to reflect whichever item has been checked on this list.

When "Explore" has been selected and the Button is depressed, an Explorer-type window will open displaying all available directories. By default, this window will show the folder whose path is currently designated in the Source field. If the folder shown in this field does not exist, Profiler will display a dialog alerting you to this fact and asking if you would like to create it: you can do so by clicking the "Yes" Button located at the bottom of this dialog. Once you have done so the newly created Folder will be shown in the Explorer-type tree.

When "Open" has been selected and the Button is depressed, a traditional MS navigation window is opened displaying the contents of whichever folder is currently shown in the Source Folder Field. If this folder does not exist, Profiler will display a dialog alerting you to this fact and asking if you would like to create it: you can do so by clicking "Yes" Button located at the bottom of this dialog. Once you have done so the newly created Folder will be shown in the navigation window.

When "Create" has been selected and the Button is depressed, a "Select Directory" dialog will open allowing you to specify a Source Folder path by using the mouse to select a desired drive, directory, and folder. Folder paths can also be manually entered into the "Directory Name" field. If you enter a path for a folder that does not exist and hit the ENTER key or click "OK," a dialog box will appear allowing you to create this folder.

Include Sub-folders: If this check box is selected, all sub-folders contained within the Source Folder will be synchronized to the Target.

Target Folder Selection

Selection of Target Folders is accomplished through the same method as that used for Source Folder selection, with the following matching controls:

Target Folder Field: Select a Target Folder by typing the file path into the field provided, or by using the Select Target Folder Button described below. By default, this field will contain the path in which PeerSync has been installed: in most cases this will be C:\PROGRAM FILES\PeerSync. The convention outlined in this path must be used when manually typing entries, i.e. a drive must be specified followed by a colon, with subsequent folders separated by backslashes. Capital letters are not necessary, though spaces may only be entered where they are part of valid folder names (i.e. "Program Files"). No space should appear between slashes and folder names. This field also supports File/Folder Path Variables and when used the current path will be displayed above the field.

UNC names can be entered manually, or can be selected from the Network Neighborhood using the "Browse for Folder" dialog box (see Select Target Folder Button). UNC names will appear in the form \\COMPUTER\SHAREDDEVICE\PATH.

Example: \\DELLSERVER\D\USERDATA

Folders can also be dragged and dropped from MS Windows Explorer into the Target Folder Field for automatic insertion.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 28 PeerSync Help Manual

Select Target Folder Button: This Button opens a "Browse for Folder" dialog box: once this box has opened, locate your chosen Target folder, select it using the left mouse Button, and click "OK."

Explore/Open/Create Button: This Button provides three options, selected from the attached drop-down list. The Button label will change to reflect whichever item has been checked on this list.

When "Explore" has been selected and the Button is depressed, an Explorer-type window will open displaying all available directories. By default, this window will show the folder whose path is currently designated in the Target field. If the folder shown in this field does not exist, Profiler will display a dialog alerting you to this fact and asking if you would like to create it: you can do so by clicking the "Yes" Button located at the bottom of this dialog. Once you have done so the newly created Folder will be shown in the Explorer-type tree.

When "Open" has been selected and the Button is depressed, a traditional MS navigation window is opened displaying the contents of whichever folder is currently shown in the Target Folder Field. If this folder does not exist, Profiler will display a dialog alerting you to this fact and asking if you would like to create it: you can do so by clicking "Yes" Button located at the bottom of this dialog. Once you have done so the newly created Folder will be shown in the navigation window.

When "Create" has been selected and the Button is depressed, a "Select Directory" dialog will open allowing you to specify a Target Folder path by using the mouse to select a desired drive, directory, and folder (See image in "Source Folder Selection" topic above). Folder paths can also be manually entered into the "Directory Name" field. If you enter a path for a folder that does not exist and hit the ENTER key or click "OK," a dialog box will appear allowing you to create this folder.

Additional Features:

Source and Target Folder Popup Menu

Activated by right clicking on the Source or Target Folder fields , this menu allows the user to Browse , Explore, Open and/or Create the Source or Target Folder. It also gives the user access of selecting Network Logon settings for the Source and Target Folder selections.

Swap Source and Target Folders

This Button reverses placement of the file paths shown in the Source and Target Folder Fields (so that what was formerly a Source Folder now becomes a Target Folder, and vice versa).

Last Run On

This is the date/time that will be used when comparing files for the Bi-directional Synchronization Mode option on the Alterations Screen This feature is also displayed and can be reset from the Profile Filter List Pop-Up Menu.

Goto FTP Selection ( Pro III )

This link will bring you to the FTP selection screen to edit an FTP path.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 29 PeerSync Help Manual

Dynamic Network Drive Mapping and Unmapping

PeerSync allows for the ability to dynamically map and unmap a source or target folder selection. The way you do this is to add a letter to the beginning of the UNC path that you wish to map the drive to. This can be done for the source or target selection. (i.e. n\\COMPUTER\SHAREDDEVICE\PATH)

Example: n\\DELLSERVER\D\USERDATA

The example above will map the D drive on the DELLSERVER to the N drive upon start of PeerSync and will unmap the drive when PeerSync terminates. This is quite useful feature especially when running PeerSync as a service in the scenario where you want to synchronize to mapped drive(s) while the local machine is not currently logged into this feature will allow for it to occur seamlessly.

Note:. If you are going to run PeerSync as a Service it is advised to use UNC paths or PeerSync's Dynamic Network Drive Mapping and Unmapping feature instead of using mapped drives do to the fact that mapped drives are not understood when a user is not logged on.

File/Folder Path Variables

Variable file/folder paths can be used to create:

Dynamic archives for yearly, monthly, weekly and/or daily backups. Dynamic synchronization based on date. Dynamic synchronization based on logged on user or machine name. Dynamic synchronization based on personal folders or other variables read in from the registry. Log file storage, manipulation and organization. Administrative report file storage, manipulation and organization. Deleted file storage, manipulation and organization.

The following variables can be used in any folder path filter setting available through the Profiler:

Date %Date% Time %Time% Date/Time %DateTime% Minute %Minute% Hour %Hour% Day %Day% Year %Year% Month/Year %MonthYear%

Minute (all formats) %n, nn% Hour (all formats) %h, hh% Day (all formats) %d, dd, ddd, dddd, ddddd, dddddd% Month (all formats) %m, mm, mmm, mmmm, mmmm% Year (all formats) %y, yy%

User Name variable %UserName% Computer Name variable %ComputerName%

Windows Directory %WinDir% Windows %Windows% (also %SystemRoot%) System Temp Path %Temp% System Tmp Path %Tmp% System Drive Letter %SystemDrive% System 32 (WIN 9x/NT/00) %System32%

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 30 PeerSync Help Manual

Note: You can also use any variables that are located in the registry under: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Explorer\Shell Folder

Depending upon the argument used, these folders will be dated, named after the currently logged user, named for the PC from which synchronization was launched, or based on a pre-determined variable stored out and read in from the registry.

Network Logon

Activated by right clicking on the Source or Target Folder fields and selecting Logon: Source Folder or Logon: Target Folder, this feature allows for network logon Name and Password information for remote source and target folder selections.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 31 PeerSync Help Manual

FTP Selection ( Pro III )

(See Next: Exceptions)

FTP site file synchronization option. This option allows any Filter to automatically logon to an FTP server and synchronize files either to or from the local folders. This feature supports proxy servers/firewalls and has an option to adjust for GMT time on the FTP server side.

Features:

Use FTP for Source: This option enables or disables the FTP Source selection.

Notes:

1. You cannot monitor an FTP or any remote folder in real-time.

2. When synchronizing to an FTP target, PeerSync will suppress real-time Filters until initial synchronization has completed.

3. Compression, Bi-directional synchronization mode, Include unicode files, File Recovery and CRC32 features will not work with an FTP selections.

4. Multiple copy threads will not be used with FTP selections.

5. Selecting an FTP Source and an FTP Target for the same filter is not recommended or supported.

FTP Source Folder Field: Select an FTP Source Folder by typing the path into the field provided. This field also supports File/Folder Path Variables and when used the current path will be displayed above the field.

Configure FTP Source Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 32 PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, you can select a Host Name, User ID, Password, Time Out Interval and the port in which to connect on. You also have the options to adjust for GMT time on the FTP server side and to use a proxy server/firewall and the designated Host Name, User ID, Password for the proxy server/firewall, as well as, the ability to Enable Passive Mode.

Include Sub-folders: If this check box is selected, all sub-folders contained within the Source Folder will be synchronized to the Target.

Use FTP for Target: This option enables or disables the FTP Target selection.

FTP Target Folder Field: Select an FTP Target Folder by typing the path into the field provided. This field also supports File/Folder Path Variables and when used the current path will be displayed above the field.

Configure FTP Target Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 33 PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, you can select a Host Name, User ID, Password, Time Out Interval and the port in which to connect on. You also have the options to adjust for GMT time on the FTP server side and to use a proxy server/firewall and the designated Host Name, User ID, Password for the proxy server/firewalls, as well as, the ability to Enable Passive Mode.

Files to transfer as ASCII (using sub-strings): Through this field, file types can be selectively tagged for transfer as ASCII upon synchronization. These file types are set by specifying file extensions (i.e. ".txt") which, if found within a file name, will be transferred as an ASCII file during synchronization. Multiple strings will be semi/Colon delimited. These settings are not case sensitive, i.e. "A" = "a" File types can be typed manually, or can be specified using either the Files to Transfer as ASCII Button or drop-down list located to the right of the field. The drop-down list located to the right of this field will be dynamically populated with file types as they are set through the dialog box described above. They are also added to the list when you exit the field after manually editing the file types field. File types can then be specified by selecting them from this list. This provides a way to store and/or retrieve sets of file types for later use with other Filters.

Files to transfer as ASCII Button: opens a dialog box into which file types may be entered.

To add a File Type click "New," then type the desired file type into the field located at the bottom of the dialog. Repeat this process for each File type. Entries can be deleted by selecting them from the list and clicking the "Delete" key at the bottom of the box. Once you have finished, click the "OK" Button. The box will close and all of the file types you have specified will automatically appear in the Files to transfer as ASCII field.

Additional Features:

Swap Source and Target Folders

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 34 PeerSync Help Manual

This Button reverses placement of the file paths shown in the Source and Target Folder Fields (so that what was formerly a Source Folder now becomes a Target Folder, and vice versa) and all configured FTP settings.

Goto Folder Selection

This link will bring you to the Folder Selection screen to edit a non FTP path.

* Note: All features described on this page require at least a Pro III Edition of PeerSync.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 35 PeerSync Help Manual

Exceptions

(See Next: Reporting)

The Exceptions screen is used after you have selected a Filter or Filters from the Profile Filter List and then created an associated Source and Target Folder on the Folder Selection screen. Through Exception options, PeerSync allows you to selectively apply synchronization to files contained within the Source Folder according to a wide range of explicit criteria.

Features:

Include File Types (using wild cards): Use this field to determine which file types will be included as part of synchronization. File Type Inclusions are specified by a star command followed by the file extension (i.e. *.doc).

The default setting ( * ) includes all files.

Multiple Inclusions can be used and are semicolon delimited (i.e. *.doc;*.txt;*.exe)

Inclusions are not case sensitive, i.e. "A" = "a".

Inclusions can be typed manually, or can be specified using either the Include File Types Button or drop-down list located to the right of the field.

Include File Types Button: Opens an "Exceptions" dialog box into which file extensions may be entered. The "include all files" command ( * ) will be shown by default.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 36 PeerSync Help Manual

To add an extension, click "New", then type the desired extension into the field located at the bottom of the dialog. Repeat this process for each desired file type. Inclusions can be deleted by selecting them from the list and clicking the "Delete" key at the bottom of the dialog box. Once you have finished, click the "OK" Button. The dialog will close and all of the Inclusions you have specified will automatically appear in the Include File Types field in the proper format (separated by semi/Colons).

The drop-down list located to the right of this field will be dynamically populated with Inclusions as they are set through the "Exceptions" dialog described above. They are also added to the list when you exit the field after manually editing the Include File Types field. Inclusions can then be specified by selecting them from this list. This provides a way to store and/or retrieve sets of Inclusions for later use with other Filters.

Exclude Files (using sub-strings): Through this field, files can be selectively excluded from synchronization. Exclusions are set by specifying individual characters (i.e. "s"), sets of characters (i.e. "user"), or file extensions (i.e. ".tmp") which, if found within a file name, will exclude that file from synchronization.

Multiple characters and strings can be used and are semicolon delimited (i.e. s;.tmp;.bak)

These settings are not case sensitive, i.e. "A" = "a" Exclusions can be typed manually, or can be specified using either the Exclude Files Button or drop-down list located to the right of the field. Exclude Files Button: Opens a dialog box into which Exclusions may be entered.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 37 PeerSync Help Manual

To add an Exclusion click "New," then type the desired character or string into the field located at the bottom of the dialog. Repeat this process for each Exclusion. Entries can be deleted by selecting them from the list and clicking the "Delete" key at the bottom of the box. Once you have finished, click the "OK" Button. The box will close and all of the Exclusions you have specified will automatically appear in the Exclude Files field. The drop-down list located to the right of this field will be dynamically populated with Exclusions as they are set through the dialog box described above. They are also added to the list when you exit the field after manually editing the Exclude Files field. Exclusions can then be specified by selecting them from this list. This provides a way to store and/or retrieve sets of Exclusions for later use with other Filters. Sample Exclusions:

s - excludes any file containing the character "s" tmp - excludes any file that contains the string "tmp" .tmp - excludes any file bearing the extension ".tmp" .tmp;.bak;s - excludes any file bearing the extensions ".tmp,", ".bak" or the character "s"

Exclude Folders: Use this field to exclude folders from synchronization by specifying a folder name in file path format, i.e. "\TEMP" or "C:\WINDOWS." These examples will exclude any folder path that contains these strings including sub-folders. If you wish to exclude only a specific or root folder such as "C:\WINDOWS" but include sub-folders you must include a '#' in front of the complete folder path i.e. "#C:\WINDOWS". This example will exclude any files in this directory but include any files in its sub-folders. A semi/Colon separates multiple folder exclusions. Folder name exclusions are not case sensitive. Exclusions can be typed manually, or can be specified using either the Exclude Folders Button or drop-down list located to the right of the field. Exclude Folders Button: Opens a dialog box into which Folder Exclusions may be entered.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 38 PeerSync Help Manual

To add an Exclusion click "New," then type the desired folder name into the field located at the bottom of the dialog. Repeat this process for each Exclusion. Entries can be deleted by selecting them from the list and clicking the "Delete" key at the bottom of the box. Once you have finished, click the "OK" Button. The box will close and all of the Exclusions you have specified will automatically appear in the Exclude Folders field. The drop-down list located to the right of this field will be dynamically populated with Exclusions as they are added. Exclusions can then be specified by selecting them from this list. This provides a way to store and/or retrieve sets of Exclusions for later use with other Filters.

Exclude File Sizes: Use the Greater Than or Less Then fields to exclude files based upon their size in bytes. Zero, the default, includes all files.

Current Attributes: Using the characters "NASHR," this field displays which file attributes (Normal, Archive, System, Hidden, and Read-Only) have been selected as criteria for synchronization. All attributes are selected by default. Clicking the Button to the right of this field opens a window from which file attributes may be included or excluded.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 39 PeerSync Help Manual

Selected File Dates: Use this field to specify files set for synchronization according to their date stamp. The default setting includes all file dates. Clicking the Button to the right of this field opens a "Select File Dates" screen.

This screen allows you to include all files, include files more than x days old, include files bearing the current and past x day’s date, or specify a range of dates. The Set Today’s Date Button automatically updates the existing range to reflect the current day.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 40 PeerSync Help Manual

Reporting

(See Next: Admin Reporting)

PeerSync automatically generates Log Files providing a detailed history of all synchronization events. This screen is used to view Log Files and set their reporting characteristics.

Features:

Use Log File: This option enables or disables Log File generation. The default file, PeerSync.Log, is located in the path in which PeerSync has been installed. This field also supports File/Folder Path Variables and when used the current path will be displayed above the field.

Overwrite Existing Log File: Use this option to report only the most recent PeerSync activity in the Log File. If this option is not selected, all PeerSync processes will be reported in succession.

View Log File: This Button allows you to view Log reports by opening the file in a text editor.

Clear Log File: This Button allows you to clear Log reports.

Include the following: Using the check boxes provided in this section of the Reporting screen, you can specify what will be reported in the Log File. The Default setting is to include all items except Folder Names.

Updated Files: This option adds an entry for any file that has been updated in the Target.

Added Files: This option adds an entry for any file that has been added to the Target.

Folder Names: Indicates the names of synchronized folders.

File Size: Includes size of each file contained in the Log.

File Date: Includes date associated with each file contained in the log.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 41 PeerSync Help Manual

File Time: Includes time associated with each file contained in the log.

Folder Creation: This option creates an entry for any folders that did not exist in the Target and had to be created during the synchronization process.

Messages: This option logs any messages or application errors found during synchronization.

Summary: Appends a summary of activity to the end of the report.

Transfer Time: Includes time it takes to transfer the file in milliseconds.

Note: Application errors are additionally written to a file called "PSError.log," regardless of whether or not that option has been selected.

Set the maximum log file size to x bytes: By entering an amount into this field you can limit the size of Log Files created by PeerSync. When this limit is reached, the next reporting session will first rename the existing file to FILENAME.BAK and then create a new, blank Log File to which subsequent data will be added.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 42 PeerSync Help Manual

Admin Reporting

(See Next: Email Reporting)

This screen allows you to create a unique report for administration purposes. Admin Reports generated during sync operations can be saved to a specific administrative folder (in a local or network path). Admin Reports are made uniquely identifiable through a choice of naming conventions, i.e. Computer Name or User Name with date\time stamps.

Features:

Create administrative report files: This option enables or disables the Administrative Reporting feature.

Note: Admin reporting files do not display Unicode characters.

Report file name: Allows you to choose between a default-named (PC and date\time) or User- named Administrative Report.

Report file path: This field displays the location of Admin Report files. This field also supports File/Folder Path Variables and when used the current path will be displayed above the field.

Use standard report file content: This option directs Report content to follow those conventions also utilized in PeerSync Log Files.

Use summary information only: Appends a summary of activity to the end of the report.

Note: When in enhanced real-time or when using multiple copy threads standard reporting will be used if summary is selected.

Use error information only: Only reports messages and application errors.

Use SNMP reporting (errors only)* ( Pro IV ): Use Small Network Management Protocol error

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 43 PeerSync Help Manual

reporting.

SNMP Options Button* ( Pro IV ): This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Once this box has opened, it allows you to select the Destination IP and Trap Prefix to be used for SNMP reporting. Please refer to your SNMP management software for more details.

* Note: Some features described on this page require a Pro IV Edition of PeerSync.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 44 PeerSync Help Manual

Email Reporting ( Pro III )

(See Next: File Options)

This screen allows you to create a unique report for administration purposes. Email Reports generated during sync operations can be sent to an administrator, shared mailbox or a specified user. Email notification of synchronization activity can be sent upon completion of entire Profile or during persistent synchronization operations. Email Reports are made uniquely identifiable through a choice of naming conventions, i.e. Computer Name or User Name with date\time stamps.

Features:

Create administrative Email messages: This option enables or disables the Email Reporting feature.

Note: Email reporting messages do not display Unicode characters.

Use standard report file content: This option directs Report content to follow those conventions also utilized in PeerSync Log Files.

Use summary information only: Appends a summary of activity to the end of the report.

Note: When in enhanced real-time or when using multiple copy threads standard reporting will be used if summary is selected.

Use error information only: Only reports messages and application errors.

Report file name: Allows you to choose between a default-named (PC and date\time) or User- named Email Report.

Attach log file to messages: Allows you to attach the reporting section log file to emails generated by this application.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 45 PeerSync Help Manual

Delete log file after successful send: Deletes the log file after a successful email attached send.

Email Configuration Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Once this box has opened, it allows you to select the SMTP Host, User ID, Port, who to send to, who to send Carbon Copies to and what email address to send from.

* Note: All features described on this page require at least a Pro III Edition of PeerSync.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 46 PeerSync Help Manual

File Options

(See Next: Performance)

Features:

Mode Selection

Add - synchronize new files to target: If the Source contains files not found within the Target and this option is selected, those files will be added to the Target Folder during synchronization. This option is selected by default.

Update - synchronize existing files in target: If this option is selected, Target Folder files which are also found within the Source will be updated to match those Source files during synchronization. This option is selected by default.

Replicate - Delete unmatched files/folders: If this option is selected, any unmatched files found in Target folders will be deleted automatically.

CAUTION: Use this feature carefully. If not configured properly, needed files may be permanently deleted. A deletion warning is NOT displayed by default: Profiler must be first set to display this warning through the "Deletion Warning Message" check box described below.

Deletion Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 47 PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, the upper section of this screen allows you to enable or disable a Deletion Warning Message, as well as set the number of seconds for which a Message will be displayed. (As stated above, a message is NOT enabled by default and is not available during enhanced real-time). In addition, you can also choose to display a message requiring manual intervention in order to activate deletion.

The lower section of this screen provides a field where the user can designate an alternate folder to which unmatched files will be moved in order to avoid permanent deletion. This folder path can be typed manually, or selected using the Browse Button provided to the right of the field. If the designated folder exists, all unmatched files will be moved there, allowing you the opportunity to recover files deleted from the Target. This field also supports File/Folder Path Variables and when used the current path will be displayed above the field. Beneath this field are check boxes. The first check box allows you to Preserve the Paths of the deleted files under the specified path. The second check box allows you to specify the Windows Recycle Bin as a location for unmatched files.

Notes:

1. Only one copy of any file can exist in your designated Recovery folder if the Preserve Paths option is not selected.

2. To avoid filling up your hard drive unnecessarily, you should periodically check this folder and delete unwanted files.

3. Only files deleted from a local drive will be moved to the Recycle Bin, and all network files will be permanently deleted.

4. When synchronizing to an FTP target, the Move unmatched target files option is not available.

5. When using Compression, the Move unmatched target files option is not available.

6. Deletion Warning Message is not available during Enhanced Real-time.

Additional File Includes

Include open files (if possible): Open files are those that are currently in use during synchronization. If these files are set for synchronization and this option is selected, PeerSync attempts to include them within the synchronization process. This option is selected by default.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 48 PeerSync Help Manual

Notes:

1. If PeerSync is able to synchronize files which are in use by other applications, access to those applications may in certain instances be temporarily lost during synchronization.

2. The include open files (if possible) option should be used if you are using the Performance Options: Multiple Filter Threads and Multiple Copy Threads.

Include unicode files: This option allows for the synchronization of files/folders that contain unicode characters in their names.

Notes:

1. The Include unicode files option does not work with FTP Selections.

2. Unicode characters are not compatible with to Admin Reporting or Email Reporting messages.

3. Even if the Include Unicode files option is on it may or may not work depending on the Real-Time Monitoring Method and/or the operating system environment.

Include attribute change as synchronization criteria: This option allows for the synchronization of files that have different attributes. If this option has been selected, a Source file whose attributes do not match the Target will still be included in the synchronization process.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 49 PeerSync Help Manual

Alterations

(See Next: Additional Features)

Features:

Target File/Folder Alterations

Transfer NT security descriptions (ACLs): If this option is checked, PeerSync will transfer over and match the security descriptions (ACLs) to the target file upon synchronization, under Windows NT.

Note: The Transfer NT security descriptions option does not work when using Compression.

Force target file attribute settings: If this option is selected the file attributes options dialog will be displayed. In this dialog, you may select to force any attribute on or off for the target files that are synchronized within the selected Filter(s).

File Attribute Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 50 PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, it allows the user the selection to ignore, force on or force off attribute settings on target files that are synchronized within the selected Filter(s).

Always go to (or create) initial target folder: If this option is checked, PeerSync will automatically create a sub-folder in the root of the Target Folder. This sub-folder’s name will match the Source Folder name. If this option is not checked, root contents of the Source Folder will be synchronized to the root of the Target Folder even if the names do not match.

Use intermediate file during copy: If this box is checked, a temporary file will be created in the Target Folder: the contents of the Source file will then be copied into this temporary file. After a successful copy, the Target file will be deleted and the temporary file will be renamed to bear the Target file name. This option ensures that the updated file will only replace the Target file if copy is successful. If the copy process should be interrupted because of some outside factor (network down, power outage, etc), the original Target file will still be preserved.

File Revisioning Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 51 PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, the screen provides a field that is used to specify how many back-up copies of the Target file will be created. PeerSync will automatically add the ".PSBAK1" extension to the existing target file before replacing it with the updated Source file (i.e. "NEWDOC.DOC" will become "NEWDOC.DOC.PSBAK1"). If more than one backup is selected, each file will be renamed so that the newest backup files will always bear the lowest number.

Note: If the "Delete Unmatched" option is selected for the selected Filter, and the Source file that has corresponding PSBAK Target files is deleted, all associated PSBAK files will also be deleted except for the latest file (PSBAK1). PSBAK1 files will have to be deleted manually.

Exclude empty source folders: This option will exclude and will not sync empty source folders to the target.

Delete Exceptions from target folder: This option will delete any exceptions selected from the Exceptions screen from the target folder if the 'Replicate - Delete unmatched files/folders' option is selected from the File Options screen.

Restore Files - Always overwrite Target files (even if they are newer): This option automatically overwrites any files in the Target folder that have a different date\time stamp than their corresponding Source file, even if the Target file is newer. This option can be used to restore folders to a previous state either for backup/restore operations or to reset files after training operations.

Source File/Folder Alterations

Turn file archive attribute off after synchronization: This option resets the archive flag on the Source and Target file after synchronization. The Windows file system automatically sets the archive bit for every file that has changed; normally, this is used to indicate that a given file has been modified since the last time its archive bit was set. Most tape back-up programs use this flag to determine which files have changed since the last backup. This is the only option in PeerSync that alters Source files. PeerSync uses this option to reduce the number of files that are checked on the Source drive.

Note: Source files that are not being synchronized to Target folders will NOT have their archive flags reset. This process only occurs after successful synchronization of a changed file.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 52 PeerSync Help Manual

Hint: To reset all Source file archive flags, use the "Always Overwrite Target Files" feature. This configures all files for synchronization and resultantly qualifies them for reset of archive flags. This option only needs to be selected once to be applied to existing sync operations.

Move Files - Delete source file after successful copy to target: This option will attempt to delete (or move, if specified; see "Delete Unmatched Target Files," Miscellaneous) the Source file after a successful synchronization to Target.

Enable bi-directional synchronization mode* ( Pro III ): Bi-directional synchronization feature with Smart-Delete. Files on the target that are newer than their corresponding source files or do not exist on the source side will be automatically brought back to the source folders. Any file that has a creation date newer than the last time the Filter was run will be added to the source folders even if the Delete-Unmatched target file option is selected. This mode will only work when an entire folder is synchronized by PeerSync and does not apply to enhanced real-time mode where only the changed file is being added, deleted or updated.

Notes: 1. This feature will not work with filters selected for Real-time monitoring. 2. This feature will not work with an FTP source or target selection.

* Note: Some features described on this page require a Pro III or Pro IV Edition of PeerSync.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 53 PeerSync Help Manual

Performance

(See Next: Alterations)

Features:

File Read/Write Buffer Size: This option allows you to change the read/write buffer sizes to optimize performance/speed across various network environments or on the local machine. In most cases this will increase performance dramatically but you will probably need to test this option in your environment to determine what advantages can be gained from altering this size.

The minimum value is 256 bytes. The default value is 32 KB. The maximum value that can be set using the track bar is 128 KB. The maximum value that can be set using the up arrow or by manually typing in the spin edit field is 128 KB* ( Pro IV Upper Limit is 1 MB)

Enable intelligent network load balancing (when applicable)* ( Pro III ): Network load balancing option will automatically set read/write buffer size based on recommendation from NIC network cards. (Installed network card must also support this feature.)

Throttle bandwidth - Use x percent of available bandwidth* ( Pro IV ): This option will limit/slow down the pulse of reads and writes performed by PeerSync, at the percentage specified, in order to keep bandwidth available for other applications.

Set maximum number of copy threads to x* ( Pro IV ): This option will limit the number of copy threads to be spawned and used for the selected Filters.

* Note: Some features described on this page require a Pro III or Pro IV Edition of PeerSync.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 54 PeerSync Help Manual

Additional Features ( Pro III or Pro IV )

(See Next: Automation)

Features:

Additional Options

Enable file recovery: File recovery option to continue a file copy that was interrupted for some reason. If the source and target file name and date match but the target file is smaller, PeerSync will start the copy operation from the last byte that was sent the next time a sync operation is executed on the folder.

Note: Enable file recovery does not work with FTP.

During comparison subtract/add x minute(s) from target: Option to add or delete time from target file during folder comparison. This allows for synchronization of files between dissimilar time zones or to allow for some time difference between source and target in case target machine date is slightly different from source.

Note: Enhanced real-time does not work with the 'During comparison subtract/add x minute(s) from target' option.

Validation Options

Perform binary comparison on all files (using CRC32): Option to check all source and target files for binary match during folder scan/compare cycle (using CRC32). This check ensures that what is on the target matches the source at a binary level.

Validate target file (using CRC32): Option to validate file using CRC32 binary comparison after successful file copy operation.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 55 PeerSync Help Manual

Note: Perform binary comparison on all files and Validate target file (CRC32 features) do not work with FTP.

Retry Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Once this box has opened, it allows for the selection of if the file is not validated to retry the CRC32 validation x times.

Replace In-use Files Options

Replace in-use files upon reboot: If this option is selected, when a file is open and locked on the target folder, it will be set to be replaced the next time the machine is rebooted.

Reboot Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 56 PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, you have the options to be given a dialog to decide if you want to reboot or to automatically reboot if a file is in-use and needs to be replaced. The default is to not reboot when an in-use file is detected

Target File Time Change Option* ( Pro IV )

After synchronization subtract/add x minute(s) from target* ( Pro IV ): Option to add or delete time from target file after synchronization. This allows for synchronization of files between dissimilar time zones or to allow for some time difference between source and target in case target machine date is slightly different from source.

* Note: All features described on this page require at least a Pro III or Pro IV Edition of PeerSync.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 57 PeerSync Help Manual

Automation

(See Next: Compression)

The Automation screen allows you to apply Real-time Monitored or Scheduled synchronization to individual Filters within a given Profile. Real-time operations (also referred to as "File/Folder Change Detection") monitor Source Folders for any changes and synchronize them to the specified Target as they occur (and vice versa). Scheduled operations automatically launch synchronization according to a user- specified schedule. Through these settings, PeerSync allows you to build a Profile with as many as 255 different Filters -- each run according to a unique schedule or in Real-time (See Also Operation Mode).

Features:

Scheduling Options

Run on an interval every x minute(s): Checking this option assigns a Scheduled operation to the selected Filter(s). The field associated with this option allows you to set an interval in minutes: after this time has elapsed the selected folders will be synchronized. 5 minutes is the default setting. Intervals in seconds can be specified through the use of decimals, i.e. 0.5, 2.5, etc. The minimum interval is 0.01.

Use daily timer scheduling:* ( Pro III ) Checking this option will allow for the synchronization of filters at a specific times of the day for selected days of the week. This feature may also be selected at the profile level from the Operation Mode screen

Daily Timer Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 58 PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, it gives you the following features:

List of Filter Selections: This is a list of the currently selected Daily Timer selections. You can Add New selections by selecting the New Button and Delete existing selections by selecting the Delete Button.

Run selected filters at: Selecting this option will run the filter at the selected time of day.

Select days of week to run: Allows you to turn on/off which days to run this schedule.

Re-load profile prior to daily run: This option will have PeerSync re-load the profile, if any changes have been made, before running the selected daily run. This feature allows for dynamic re-loading of PeerSync Profiles.

Real-time File/Folder Change Detection

Activate real-time monitoring: Selects the current Filter(s) for Real-time Monitoring.

Real-time Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 59 PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, it allows you to choose from two Real-time operations. The first is a Folder Replication feature, which monitors for changes to the Source Folder and synchronizes the Target accordingly. The second, a Folder Restoration feature, monitors for changes to the Target Folder and restores files on the Target accordingly. To properly use the restore feature, you will need to select the "Always overwrite target files" option.

Notes:

1. Enable bi-directional synchronization mode will not work for real-time filters.

2. You cannot monitor an FTP source in real-time.

3. When synchronizing to an FTP target, PeerSync will suppress real-time Filters until initial synchronization has completed.

Use enhanced real-time monitoring* ( Pro III ): Enhanced Real-time file monitoring and updating option. This option allows the Real-time feature in PeerSync to detect individual changes to files and synchronize only the file that changed without scanning the entire folder where the change occurred. Normally synchronization software scans and compares all files in a folder that is being synchronized. This option does not scan folders unless the change is indeterminate. Under MS Windows NT4/2000, this feature is extended to the file/folder rename operations as well. If a file or folder is renamed, PeerSync will rename the corresponding target file or folder using rename functions as opposed to copying the newly renamed source folder to the target and then subsequently deleting the outdated target file/folder. This option greatly reduces time to synchronize and network band width requirements.

Notes:

1. When synchronizing to an FTP target, the Enhanced real-time monitoring option should not be used.

4. Enhanced real-time does not work with Enable bi-directional synchronization mode, During comparison subtract/add x minute(s) from target or Folder Compression.

3. It is recommended either use the Enhanced real-time option for all or none of your real-time filters in a Profile.

4. During enhanced real-time Trigger Selections are ignored.

5. Using Enhanced real-time will produce a different file output format for all modes of reporting and message logging (Reporting, Admin Reporting and Email Reporting). The output will NOT contain a start and stop section or a summary,

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 60 PeerSync Help Manual

each entry will also be initially marked with a date and time stamp. If use summary is selected for Admin or Email reporting then the standard selection will be used. The reason this is done is due to the fact that processes will be running in parallel.

* Note: Some features described on this page require a Pro III or Pro IV Edition of PeerSync.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 61 PeerSync Help Manual

Compression

(See Next: Pre/Post Process)

While compressing your choice of folders, the Compression utility also employs a unique method to minimize file damage. While creating Target directory structures to match those found in the Source, the folder compression option creates a single file for every folder contained within the Target Folder set. This minimizes the amount of data added to each compressed file. If a single file were used for the entire directory structure were to become corrupt, all files might be lost. PeerSync’s "one file per folder" scenario ensures that if damage occurs, it is limited to individual folders only. We also offer file compression, which will compress the source files to the corresponding target files down to the file level which adds even more flexibility. During folder compression, all selected Source files are synchronized to the compressed Target folder file bearing the name of the active folder plus the user selected extension (default extension is "ZIP"). During file compression, all selected Source files are synchronized to the compressed Target folder file bearing the name of the active file plus the user selected extension (default extension is "ZIP"). Compressed folder files can be expanded using most PKZip compatible extraction utilities. In addition, passwords can be specified and entered on this screen to protect against unauthorized access to compressed files.

Features:

Use folder compression: This check box enables or disables the folder compression feature which will compress files in each sub-folder to a single file per sub-folder.

Use file compression: This check box enables or disables the file compression feature will compress file by file.

Notes:

1. Compression options will not work with an FTP source or target selection.

2. Compression options will not work during Enhanced Real-time.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 62 PeerSync Help Manual

3. The File Deletion Options, Move unmatched target files feature does not work when using compression.

4. The Transfer NT security descriptions (ACLs) feature does not work when using compression.

Compress target: Selecting this option enables compression of the Target folder.

Expand source: This option extracts (expands) the Source folder. Use this option to extract files from Source Folders that have already undergone compression.

Compression Speed: Allows for Normal compression, Maximum compression or maximum speed.

Note: A compressed Source Folder can not be synchronized to a compressed Target Folder.

Compressed File Extension: The extension entered into this field will be applied to the compressed folder file name. For example, if "rar" is entered for a folder named "Samples," the compressed folder file name will be "Samples.rar".

Note: it is NOT necessary to add a period (" . ") before this extension name. The default extension is "ZIP," which associates the file with a Zip application (i.e. WinZip).

Password - Encryption: The password entered into this field will be used as a key to encrypt the compressed files. Without this key the original file CAN NOT be extracted from the compressed files. Do Not Lose This Password. Without it you will not have access to your encrypted files, nor will Peer Software be able to recover them.

Change Password: Selecting this Button will display a dialog box:

This allows you to change your existing password for the selected Filter. This box requires you to enter your old password in addition to whichever new one you wish to begin using. This dialog box is also used to create a password if you do not currently have one. The password will be encrypted and saved for the selected Filter.

Note: You may only change the password for a single Filter at a time. The old password must be checked against the stored password for this option to be changed.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 63 PeerSync Help Manual

Pre/Post Process

(See Next: Trigger Selections)

This screen allows the user to choose external applications / scripts to be run before and after the processing of a given Filter.

Features:

Select Application/Script to Run Before: Use this field to specify (by file path) which application you would like to run before processing a PeerSync Profile. File paths can be manually entered, or the open folder icon can be used to locate files.

Select Application/Script to Run After: Use this field to specify (by file path) which application you would like to run after processing a PeerSync Profile. File paths can be manually entered, or the open folder icon can be used to locate files.

Wait for application to end before continuing: Check this option if you want PeerSync to wait for the applications specified in the "Before" and "After" fields to close before processing additional tasks.

Use maximum wait time of x seconds: Selecting this option sets a limit (in seconds) for how long PeerSync will wait for the applications specified in the "Run Before" and "Run After" fields to close. In order to activate this function, the "Wait for Application to Terminate" function must be checked. The default, when this option is not checked, is to wait indefinitely.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 64 PeerSync Help Manual

Trigger Selections

(See Next: Global Settings)

These settings ensure that Target Folders always remain updated to their corresponding Source by comparing dates indicated by individual Trigger Files. If a Source Trigger is found to be newer than a corresponding Target Trigger, for example, a synchronization process will be allowed to proceed for the selected Filter(s). If the files date and time stamps match then the synchronization will not be processed, in essence, the running of the sync process is determined by the trigger files.

Features:

Use Global Trigger File: This option is used to activate or trigger synchronization based upon date comparison between an individual Source Trigger File and a separate Target Trigger File. If the Target Trigger File is older then the Source Trigger File, the entire Source Folder(s) will be synchronized.

Default File Name: Displays the Default Global Trigger File Name: GLBCHG.000

Source Trigger File: This field allows you to specify a Global Trigger File by entering it manually, or by selecting it using the Browse Button located at the right side of the field.

Use Current Paths: Automatically selects the current Trigger Files associated with the Source and Target Folders.

Target Trigger File: This field allows you to specify a Global Trigger File by entering it manually, or by selecting it using the Browse Button located at the right side of the field.

Note:. During Enhanced real-time Trigger Selections will be ignored.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 65 PeerSync Help Manual

Global Settings

(See Next: Operation Mode)

Global Settings are global to the current Profile. These settings and options pertain to all of the filters in the current Profile and are used to define, configure and execute the launch of PeerSync Profiles via the PeerSync engine.

Arguments to be sent to PeerSync can be selected and setup from the Operation Mode Screen.

PeerSync Profiles can then be launched from the Profiler through the following scenarios: By using the Launch Profile Menu Item in the Run Menu. By using the Launch Current Profile Button on the Tool Buttons Toolbar. By using the Launch Current Profile Button on the Current Profile Activity screen.

PeerSync Profiles can also be setup/run externally without the Profiler from the Startup Options screen in the following ways: Setup/run from a Shortcut on the Desktop. Setup/run from the Startup Folder. Setup/run at boot from the Registry. Setup/run as a NT Service.

Notes:

1. Individual Filters can be synchronized using the 'Synchronize Selected Filters' feature, found in the Profile Filter List Popup Menu.

2. Another way of running PeerSync is by using the Quick-Sync Folder Feature by right-clicking on a folder from MS Windows Explorer.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 66 PeerSync Help Manual

Operation Mode

(See Next: Startup Options) This screen allows you to determine the execution of the current Profile by selecting the arguments to use. Part of the Basic Argument Options, an Automatic Operation allows you to perform an immediate launch of the current Profile. As a non-persistent process, Automatic Operations are run a single time upon manual initiation by the user. Part of the Advanced Argument Options, Real-time Operations monitor Source Folders for any changes and synchronize them to the specified Target as they occur (and vice versa). Also an Advanced option, Scheduled Operations automatically launch synchronization according to a user-specified schedule. The Operation Mode screen allows you apply all of these modes simultaneously to the same Profile. Individual Profile Filters may be configured to run according to their own Real-time or Scheduled Operations (See Automation).

Features:

Basic Argument Options

Automatic execution: This option directs PeerSync to run the current Profile as an Automatic Operation. An Automatic Operation allows you to perform an immediate launch of the current Profile. As a non-persistent process, Automatic Operations are run a single time upon manual initiation by the user. We also refer to this type of run as an Initial Sync.

Pre-Sync Report Options: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 67 PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, it allows you to select a Pre-Sync Report. During this process, files and folders will not be modified and persistent arguments set for the current Profile will be ignored. A report will be created/displayed with what work would be done if a sync was actually performed. You also have the options of Overwriting the existing Pre-Sync report file and the Option to show the Pre-Sync report file at the end of the run.

Show tray icon: If this option is selected, an icon will appear on the system tray when the PeerSync Engine is loaded . When you right/Click on this icon a menu will appear. Through this menu the Profiler interface can be shown, the About PeerSync screen can be accessed, and the PeerSync Engine can be terminated.

Set Access Password Button: Use this Button to set or change a tray icon access password via the Password Change dialog box:

This allows you to set/reset a password and once a password has been set, only authorized users will be able to terminate the PeerSync Engine.

Enable display options: If this option is selected, the Display Options Button becomes available, in which you are able to select how and when to display status of profile activity.

Display Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 68 PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, it gives you the following features:

Display status in Profiler - This option will have PeerSync open the Profiler, if it is not already open, and send status messages to be displayed on the Current Profile Activity screen.

Display status in PeerSync* ( Pro IV ) - This option will have PeerSync show its PeerSync - Status Display dialog box during synchronization so the user can see activity, status and other information while PeerSync is running.

Display status in PeerSync upon completion - This option will have PeerSync show its PeerSync - Status Display dialog box at the end of synchronization (only in non-persistent modes) so the user can see activity, status and other information upon completion.

Enable performance options: If this option is selected, the Performance Options Button becomes available, in which you are able to select how and when to display status of profile activity.

Performance Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 69 PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, it gives you the ability to Set the Application Priority allowing PeerSync to run at a higher or lower priority then other applications. It also allows for Multiple Thread Selection features ( Pro IV ). You can turn on and specify how many filter and copy threads to allow PeerSync to use. Filter threads allow for filters to run in parallel processes while copy threads allow for multiple files to be copied in parallel processes. (i.e. Simultaneous Distribution - Synchronizing from one server to multiple servers simultaneously in a Web Farm type environment )

Notes:

1. Using Multiple copy threads will produce a different file output format for all modes of reporting and message logging (Reporting, Admin Reporting and Email Reporting). The output will NOT contain a start and stop section or a summary, each entry will also be initially marked with a date and time stamp. If use summary is selected for Admin or Email reporting then the standard selection will be used. The reason this is done is due to the fact that processes will be running in parallel.

2. The Include open files (if possible) option should be used if you are using the Performance Options: Multiple Filter Threads and Multiple Copy Threads

Advanced Argument Options

Use interval scheduling: This option enables or disables Scheduled Operation Mode for the entire Profile. This option must be selected in order for all Scheduled Operations set for individual Filters on the Automation Screen to be recognized. Scheduled Mode does not apply a global schedule to the entire Profile: rather, it enables those schedules set for all individual Filters on to run at their specified intervals.

All Scheduled Operations set for individual Filters will be ignored if this mode is not selected. If none of the Filters within a Profile are set for Scheduled Operation and this mode is selected, all active Filters within the Profile will be assigned a default synchronization schedule of five minutes.

Global Interval Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 70 PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, it gives you the following features:

Run all scheduled filters every x minutes: Selecting this option will override all scheduled Filters set in the Automation screen with the value set in the minutes field. This will make a scheduled run set to a global timer for all Filters in the Profile.

Wait for keyboard activity to trigger operation: When this option is checked, the Scheduled operation will run only when it senses keyboard activity. Otherwise, it will not run at the interval specified in the "Run Filter every X minutes" field.

Always run every z cycles: This field is only available when the "Wait for keyboard activity" option is checked. When a number has been entered into this field, (e.g. 5 cycles), PeerSync will make five attempts to launch synchronization at the scheduled interval. If it senses no keyboard activity after the 5th attempt it will launch the specified synchronization. The default setting is one cycle.

Use daily timer scheduling: Checking this option will allow for the synchronization of the entire profile at a specific time of the day for selected days of the week. This feature may also be selected at the Filter level from the Automation screen.

Daily Timer Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 71 PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, it gives you the following features:

List of Global Selections: This is a list of the currently selected Daily Timer selections for the profile. You can Add New selections by selecting the New Button and Delete existing selections by selecting the Delete Button.

Run entire profile at: Selecting this option will run the profile at the selected time of day.

Select days of week to run: Allows you to turn on/off which days to run this schedule.

Re-load profile prior to daily run: Allows for the re-loading of a Profile to assure the latest changes to the profile are used.

Use Filter Settings - Daily timer scheduling selections: This option will be turned on/off depending if there are any Daily Timer selections at the filter level. If there are filter level selections this option will be turned on and the /TIMEF argument will be added to the current arguments. You can manually turn this option off to ignore/override all Filter Settings - Daily timer scheduling selections selected from the Automation screen.

Use real-time monitoring: This option enables or disables Real-time Mode for the entire Profile. This option must be selected in order for all Real-time Operations set for individual Filters on the Automation Screen to be recognized. Once selected, Source/Target Folders for those Filters will be monitored for changes and synchronized as changes are detected.

All Real-time Operations set for individual Filters will be ignored if this mode is not selected. If none of the Filters within a Profile are configured for Real-time Monitoring and this mode is selected, all active Filters within the Profile will be then be set for Real-time Monitoring.

Real-time Options Button: This Button opens an "Additional Options" dialog box:

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 72 PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, it gives you the following features:

Retry open files every x seconds: Use this option to specify, in seconds, how often PeerSync will attempt to synchronize Source files that are in use. If the "Include open files" option on the File Options Screen has not been checked and "Retry" is selected PeerSync will continue attempting to synchronize files that are opened by other applications. "Retry" will also work when "Include open files" has been checked and a file is read-locked by another application. When the "Retry" option is on, PeerSync will synchronize the open file within X seconds after the file has been closed.

Set maximum number of retries to x: This option sets a limit indicating how many times PeerSync will attempt to process open files. The default, 0, indicates an indefinite number of retries.

Select Real-Time Monitoring Method for NT: This option allows you to select the method of detecting real-time changes under Windows NT.

Note: Even if the Include Unicode files option is on it may or may not work depending on the Real-Time Monitoring Method and/or the operating system environment.

Suppress initial execution of real time filters: If this option has been selected, Real-time Filters will not be synchronized upon initial launch of PeerSync (assuming "Automatic execution of Profile list," described above, is also selected). These Filters will be synchronized if changes are detected subsequent to initial launch.

Current Arguments: This section displays the current arguments selected for the Profile and will also allows for the selection and modification of additional arguments by double-clicking this field or selecting the Current Arguments Button to the right of the field.

Current Arguments Button: This Button opens a "Current Command Line Argument Selection" dialog box:

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 73 PeerSync Help Manual

Once this box has opened, you can modify, add or delete arguments to be used when launching PeerSync through any of the modes described in the Startup Options Screen or via the Current Profile Activity Screen.

* Note: Some features described on this page require a Pro III or Pro IV Edition of PeerSync.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 74 PeerSync Help Manual

StartUp Options

(See Next: Current Profile Activity)

This screen allows the user to specify whether or not PeerSync will be run upon startup of the active PC, while also defining its interaction with the network (if applicable). This screen provides shortcuts for installing PeerSync as a service, adding it to the Windows StartUp list, or to the Windows registry for automatic loading upon startup.

Features:

Disable all Startup Options: Check this option to prevent PeerSync from automatically loading at Windows startup/logon.

Create Shortcut on Desktop: This Button will place the current Profile into a shortcut on your desktop (See "Automatic Execution of Profile List," Operation Mode). A Profile Shortcut will need to be created through this feature in order to use PeerSync's Command Line Mode.

Add to Windows StartUp: Check this option if you want PeerSync to run automatically when a user logs on to the PC.

Show StartUp Folder: This Button opens the Windows StartUp folder, showing links to files and programs that open automatically upon user logon. This Button is only accessible when "Add to Windows Startup Folder" is checked.

Add to Windows registry: Check this option if you want PeerSync to run automatically when Windows boots through specification in the Windows registry.

Run RegEdit: This Button opens the Windows Registry Editor. This Button is only accessible when "Add to Windows registry to run at boot" is checked.

Install as an NT Service: Check this option if you want PeerSync to run automatically as a service under Windows NT. To configure and run the service you must go to your "Services" located in the

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 75 PeerSync Help Manual

"Control Panel" and select "PeerSync." By default the service is installed with the "Local System account" selected for the service "Log on as:" option.

Caution: If any of your source or target Folder Selections are not located on the local machine, then you will have to configure the service to "Log on as:" an alternate account on your domain so that the service has the rights to access the remote machines and/or devices. If you do not do this the service will most likely not run properly.

Notes:

1. If PeerSync is running as a Service it is advised to use UNC paths or PeerSync's Dynamic Network Drive Mapping and Unmapping feature instead of using mapped drives do to the fact that mapped drives are not understood when a user is not logged on.

2. You can add the argument /LSE (Log Service Events to NT Application Log) to the following entry in the registry (HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\PeerSoftware\PeerSync\Service\Parameters). This will have PeerSync log all changes to be reported to application log in addition to the normal logging of the start, stop, pause and continue of the service.

3. If PeerSync is running in real-time mode as a service, subsequent real-time Profiles will interfere with service operation and should not be employed. Both Scheduled Operations and Manual (non-persistent) operations should perform without interference to a service installation of PeerSync.

Details: This Button is used to view the details of the currently installed PeerSync service.

Remove: This Button is used to remove the currently installed PeerSync service.

Create SNC extension association for PeerSync Profiler: Checking this option causes any file with the extension .SNC to be associated with PeerSync: PeerSync Profiles bear this extension by default. Once this option has been selected, double/Clicking on any SNC file will open PeerSync Profiler and load that particular file.

Add Quick-Sync Folder option to Explorer menu: Checking this option adds or removes the Quick-Sync Folder selection from Windows Explorer. This feature is a quick and easy way to synchronize folder(s) on the fly to backup location(s) with the option to modify your filtering criteria at a later time

PeerSync Application Path: This field is used to specify the location of the PeerSync executable file. You can use the open folder icon to browse drives in order to locate this executable file.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 76 PeerSync Help Manual

Current Profile Activity

(Back to: Overview)

This screen is used to Launch the current Profile and to view Current Profile Activity. If the 'Display Status in Profiler' option is turned on from the Operation Mode screen this screen will be shown upon execution of a Profile and will dynamically show the status of synchronization of the current Profile as the process occurs. This screen will also be shown upon using the 'Synchronize Selected Filters' feature, found in the Profile Filter List Popup Menu to display the Current Activity of the filters sent to PeerSync as a temporary Profile.

Features:

Profile: Displays the name of the Profile actively being processed. This label may not match the name of the Profile currently being configured through Profiler. Filter: This indicator will dynamically display the name of whichever Filter is presently being processed for the Active Profile. Mode: Displays the Operation Mode (Real-time Mode, Scheduled Operation, etc.) applied to synchronization of the Active Profile. Launch Current Profile/Terminate Active Profile: This Button allows you to launch the current Profile. Once a Profile has been launched, its processing may also be terminated through this Button (the label will change to read "Terminate Active Profile"). This Button offers one of three ways to initiate an Automatic Operation. Source: Displays a file path for the Source Folder presently being synchronized. Target: Displays a file path for the Target Folder presently being synchronized from the Source indicated above. Folders: This indicator provides a count of all unsynchronized folders contained within the Source, and will decrease as each folder is synchronized. An additional "thermometer" indicator will also track the progress of folder synchronization.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 77 PeerSync Help Manual

Files: This indicator displays the total number of files contained within the Source while also providing a count of synchronized files. In addition, a "thermometer" indicator will show file synchronization progress by increasing according to the size of the current folder, with 100% representing the cumulative size of files contained within the Source Filter set. File: Indicates the name of the file currently being synchronized. Skip File: This Button will appear once the active Profile has been launched. This feature allows you to skip synchronization of the file currently displayed in the indicator described below. Skip Files enables you to avoid delays caused by large files on slow network or dial-up connections. Size: Indicates the size (in bytes) of the file currently being synchronized. A related "thermometer" indicator tracks the progress of synchronization for that file. Checked: This indicator displays the total number of files contained in the selected Source Folders. Excluded: Indicates the number of files that were excluded from synchronization (See Exceptions) Messages: Indicates the number of error messages generated during Profile processing. Updated: Indicates the number of Target files that were updated during synchronization of Profile Filters. Added: Indicates the number of new files added to Target Folders during synchronization of Profile Filters. Deleted: Indicates the number of files deleted (or moved) during synchronization of Profile Filters. Target Space: Indicates the Target Folder space remaining during synchronization of Profile Filters. Elapsed Time: Indicates the amount of time that has elapsed during the current profile activity.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 78 PeerSync Help Manual

License

YOU SHOULD READ CAREFULLY THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE USING OR DISTRIBUTING THIS SOFTWARE. USING OR DISTRIBUTING THIS SOFTWARE INDICATES ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS.

COPYRIGHT

This software program (hereafter the "Software") and documentation (hereafter the "Documentation") is copyrighted and remains the property of Peer Software, Inc. (Formerly known as TDM, Inc.) All rights are reserved.

LICENSE

Peer Software, Inc. hereby grants you (hereafter the "Purchaser") a limited, non-exclusive license to use the Software and accompanying Documentation contained in the trial ware distribution package (hereafter called the "Trial ware Package") you received. The Trial ware Package consists of copies of the Software and Documentation received via an electronic transfer mechanism or an electronic storage medium including, but not limited to, diskette, hard disk, removable disk, tape or optical devices such as CD-ROM or WORM.

You may use the Trial ware Package on one or more computers provided there is no chance that it will used simultaneously on more than one computer. If you need to use the Software on more than one computer simultaneously or on a network, please contact Peer Software, Inc. for information about network licenses.

You are not obtaining title to the Software or Documentation or any copyright rights. You may not sub license, lease, rent, sell, convey, translate, modify, decompile, incorporate into another product, convert to another programming language, reverse engineer or disassemble the Software or Documentation for any purpose.

NETWORK LICENSE

Multiple users on a network (e.g. a LAN) requiring access to the Software and Documentation must purchase a Network License. Two forms of Network Licenses are offered, a Site License and a Concurrent User License. With a Site License, any user who accesses the Software or Documentation requires a user license, regardless of the frequency of use. Once a Site License is purchased, Software and Documentation may be copied to all users who have been licensed.

The Concurrent User License allows the licensed number of users to simultaneously access the Software and Documentation. The Purchaser agrees that he will operate metering software which restricts the simultaneous number of users to the quantity purchased. The Software and Documentation must be installed on network servers under the control of metering software.

Both Site and Concurrent User Licenses allow installation of the Software and Documentation to any number of servers on any number of geographic sites, limited only by the quantity of licenses purchased.

TERM AND TRIAL PERIOD

You are permitted to use the Software Package for a trial period (hereafter the "Trial Period") of a limited amount of days or uses (which ever comes first) after receipt of the Trial ware Package. After such time, if you continue to use the Trial ware Package, you must register your copy with Peer Software, Inc. Failure to register after the Trial Period constitutes termination of this license. Upon registration, a password (hereafter called the "Password") will be provided to eliminate the registration reminder screen.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 79 PeerSync Help Manual

This license is effective until terminated. You may terminate it by destroying the Software, Documentation, and all copies thereof. This license will also terminate if you fail to comply with any of the terms or conditions herein. You agree, upon such termination, to destroy all Software, Documentation, and copies thereof.

LIMITED WARRANTY

THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. PEER SOFTWARE, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES RELATING TO THIS SOFTWARE, WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND ALL SUCH WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMED.

EXCLUSIVE REMEDY

YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND PEER SOFTWARE, INC.'S ENTIRE LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTIONS WITH THE SOFTWARE, DOCUMENTATION, AND/OR THIS LICENSE (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR INFRINGEMENT) SHALL BE, AT PEER SOFTWARE, INC.'S OPTION, THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR REFUND OF REGISTRATION FEES.

LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY

IN NO EVENT SHALL PEER SOFTWARE, INC. OR ANYONE ELSE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN THE CREATION, PRODUCTION, OR DELIVERY OF THIS SOFTWARE SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH SOFTWARE EVEN IF PEER SOFTWARE, INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR CLAIMS.

Some states do not allow the exclusion of the limit of liability for consequential or incidental damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you.

BACK-UP

You may make as many copies of the Trial ware Package as you need for back-up purposes only.

DISTRIBUTION

You may distribute the Trial ware Package to others via an electronic transfer mechanism or electronic storage media provided that no files are deleted from the Original Distribution Trial ware Package or are modified in any way. Files may be added to the Trial ware Package expressly for the purpose of identifying the party distributing the Trial ware Package. You may also place the Trial ware Package into any archive or compressed format for ease of distribution.

You may not distribute the Password to others under any circumstances.

GENERAL

This agreement shall be governed by the laws of the state of New York and shall inure to the benefit of Peer Software, Inc. and any successors, administrators, heirs, and assigns. Any action or proceeding brought by either party against the other arising out of or related to this agreement shall be brought only in a STATE or FEDERAL COURT of competent jurisdiction located in Suffolk County, New York. The parties hereby consent to appear in person in jurisdiction of said courts.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 80 PeerSync Help Manual

PeerSync Installation

PeerSync is shipped (downloaded) in a full installation program. To run, simply double-click on the executable in the Explorer window, or choose "Run" from the Start Menu and then select the application. For networked installations, PeerSync supports silent installation by adding "/S" to the installation application’s command line. Example: %PATH%/PS60.EXE /S

See Additional Configuration Entries for more Information on silent installation configuration.

Additionally, PeerSync can use the PeerSync60.lic file for larger networked sales and site licensing. This file will be placed in the "PeerSync" folder. If PeerSync detects this file at startup then it will use this data and bypass all other registration security checks. If the PeerSync60.lic file is located in the same folder as the PeerSync installation application, this file will then be automatically placed in the PeerSync installation folder. To obtain a PeerSync60.lic file, please specify your requirements during purchase/registration.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 81 PeerSync Help Manual

PeerSync History and Description

Welcome to Peer Software, Inc's Folder Synchronization Utility Software, PeerSync. With this utility you will be able to conveniently synchronize folders for back-up purposes or portability requirements. Never again will you overwrite newer data by attempting to manually update an individual file or the contents of a folder.

History PeerSync has been available for download/purchase since early 1995. Since then hundreds of downloads have been logged from the various international forums where PeerSync was made available and thousands of copies have been sold. PeerSync is an MS Windows-based product. Originally written in Visual Basic, the current product is written in Delphi Object Pascal. PeerSync originated as a solution to a problem frequently encountered by our own developers, that of keeping files in sync between multiple hard drives. Developers working on-site at customers’ locations or at home during crunch schedules would then have to synchronize their data back to the office server. This was most often done manually, with each individual file being dragged to the appropriate server folder. Invariably, data would be lost when one or several of the server files contained new information which was subsequently overwritten. In addition to loss of work and resulting frustration, the process was also time consuming. Anywhere from 20 minutes to 2 hours would be spent during each synchronization. After reviewing several commercially available products, it became apparent that an effective and user- friendly solution to this common problem did not exist: hence the development of PeerSync.

Description Configured through PeerSync Profiler, an intuitive and easy-to-use application, PeerSync automatically synchronizes multiple directories and sub-directories from user-defined Source to Target Folders. While removing the frustration and loss of time associated with manual synchronization, PeerSync prevents loss of data by checking file dates and times to ensure that newer information is not overwritten. Synchronization can occur between any mapped or UNC connected drives located on local computers or computer networks. While processing and performing any number of simultaneous tasks, PeerSync retains and expands upon the selectivity and precision of manual synchronization by offering a suite of automated file inclusion and exclusion features. Files can be included within synchronization according to standard DOS-type wild cards and excluded using sub-string comparisons or file attribute settings. Files can be also be excluded according to their date and size. In addition, PeerSync can be configured to update or add files which are out-dated or non-existent in the current Target Folder. Precision and scope are further enhanced through PeerSync Filters and Command Line Modes. A virtually unlimited number of folder combinations (Filters) can be created and stored in Profiles which can be run manually or automatically using command line arguments. While synchronizing large numbers of folder combinations at once, each combination can have a unique set of exceptions. In this way PeerSync combines the benefits of precise folder matching with that of an automated environment. Real-time Source Folder monitoring and repetitive operations on the host PC are also available with PeerSync’s options. PeerSync can also be used for network file management purposes. Reports run during synchronization can display added, updated, and opened files as well as directories created, and can display unmatched files found in Target directories.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 82 PeerSync Help Manual

Product Editions and Licensing

PeerSync comes in different levels, each level or edition contains features from the previous level with additional features.

Product Editions

Pro II - This edition includes the following:

Folder Selection All Options Exceptions All Options Reporting All Options File Options All Options Compression All Options Pre/Post Process All Options Trigger Selections All Options Startup Options All Options Current Profile Activity All Options Automation Most Options Operation Mode Most Options Admin Reporting Most Options Alterations Some Options Performance Some Options

Pro III - This edition includes the following:

- All Options from the Pro II Edition

FTP Selection All Options Email Reporting All Options Additional Features All Options Automation Enhanced Real-time Monitoring Automation Use daily timer scheduling Automation Daily Timer Options Performance Intelligent network load balancing Alterations Bi-directional synchronization

Pro IV - This edition includes the following:

- All Options from the Pro II Edition - All Options from the Pro III Edition

Admin Reporting SNMP Reporting Performance Throttle Bandwidth Performance Maximum Copy Threads Performance File Read/Write Buffer Upper Limit Additional Features Target File Time Change Option Operation Mode Display status in PeerSync Operation Mode Performance Options - Multiple Filter Threads Operation Mode Performance Options - Multiple Copy Thread

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 83 PeerSync Help Manual

Product Licensing

All levels of PeerSync can be licensed for single or multiple users and/or single or multiple remote connections.

User Licensing: A single user license, by default, comes with right to install/execute the software on one PC (Server or Workstation) and connect to one remote PC or unlimited local drives. A license must be purchased for each PC where the product will be installed, executed or launched. This also applies to Enterprise installations that run the software off a network file server.

Connection Licensing: PeerSync comes with the ability to connect to one remote PC. If you need to synchronize files from the local PC to multiple remote PCs, you will need to purchase a connection license for each additional remote PC you want to connect to. A remote connection license applies to all drives/folders on a single remote PC you are connecting to.

For more information about Product Editions and Licensing please visit our web site: www.peersoftware.com

To purchase additional Remote Connection licenses, please contact us for additional information.

Note: Peer Software is quite flexible in assembling different combinations of option packages then the ones listed here for enterprise installations with customers' requirements in mind. Please contact us for such requests and for more detail of the PeerSync option packages that are available.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 84 PeerSync Help Manual

Registration and Passwords

If this is an unregistered or Evaluation Copy of PeerSync, you can register it with Peer Software, Inc. as a fully licensed copy by providing credit card information via phone or secure Internet registration, or by sending a check or money order to the address below (see included "readme.txt" file for pricing information). As an integral component of PeerSync 5.0 and all subsequent versions, the PeerSync Profiler application is included as part of registration.

Register online via secure Internet credit card registration at: www.peersoftware.com

Register by phone via credit card by calling: (631) 979-1770 between the hours of 9:00 AM and 4:00 PM EST

Register by FAX via Purchase Order: Send Purchase orders to (631) 979-1870

Register by mail, send check or money order to: Peer Software, Inc. 1363 Veterans Highway, Suite 26 Hauppauge, NY 11788

Information Required: -Full name (as it appears on the credit card) -Address (City, State / Province, Country, and Postal Code) -Phone Number -Entire Card Number -Card Expiration Date -Email Address (Peer Software will send the Authorization Key required to unlock PeerSync’s Evaluation Counter to this )

Quantity Discounts (See Web site or contact us for more information)

Upon registering PeerSync, user information will be generated according to the name and company name (if any) you specified during registration, as well as a password specific to the product version you have licensed. This information will be emailed to you and will be used to activate your current copy. Additional license fees must be paid for multi-user use.

PeerSync may not be commercially distributed or distributed by government agencies including their contractors UNLESS registration fees are paid for by the distributing party.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 85 PeerSync Help Manual

See License agreement for product redistribution.

See Product Editions and Licensing for different version of the PeerSync and types of licensing we offer.

Note Regarding Updates: As new updates/changes become available, updated versions of the software will be posted on our Internet Web page "www.peersoftware.com." Check this page periodically to download the latest executables. Your Authorization Key will continue to work with updated versions unless a major release is issued, or PeerSync is installed in a different folder than the previously installed/authorized version.

Entering Your User Information and Password

Through an Evaluation Copy of PeerSync:

After registration with Peer Software, Inc, you will receive Registration Information generated which is from the information you provided during registration. The password you receive will be specific to the PeerSync product you have licensed and registered with Peer Software. Upon entering valid password and user information into your Evaluation Copy, that copy will be immediately converted to a fully licensed version of the appropriate PeerSync product. The instructions below apply to a "Registered Evaluation Copy" of PeerSync, that being one whose evaluation period is still active.

To activate your registered and licensed PeerSync product, first run your Evaluation Copy of PeerSync. Then choose "About" from the Help Menu located on the far right of the PeerSync Profiler Menu Bar. To activate your registered and licensed PeerSync product, first run your Evaluation Copy of PeerSync. Then choose "About" from the Help Menu located on the far right of the PeerSync Profiler Menu Bar. This opens the About PeerSync screen, which contains "User Name," "Company", "Options" and "Password" fields.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 86 PeerSync Help Manual

Be sure to enter this information exactly as you received it, with the same spacing, hyphenation, punctuation, and cases (i.e. if a comma or period contained within a company name is omitted, registration will not be accepted). It is advisable to cut-and-paste passwords directly from the Email registration information. If passwords are typed using lower case letters where upper cases have been indicated, or if other information is typed incorrectly, the message shown below will be displayed. This message indicates that registration was unsuccessful; shows the number of attempts made to register, and contains’ a link to Peer Software, Inc. You will only be allowed a limited number of attempts before the application closes entirely and will need to be opened again in order to retry.

If registration is successful, your will receive a success dialog such as that shown below for an Enterprise

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 87 PeerSync Help Manual version of PeerSync. Your Evaluation Copy will have been immediately activated as a registered version of the PeerSync product you have licensed (in this example an Enterprise version), with this change indicated on the interface title bar. Click "OK" on the success dialog to begin usage of your newly activated PeerSync product. You will not have to exit and restart the application to do so.

Through an Unregistered Copy of PeerSync:

Unregistered copies of PeerSync are Evaluation Copies whose evaluation period has expired, or copies into which a valid password and user information has not yet been entered. These copies can still be activated as fully licensed versions of whichever PeerSync product whose usage you have purchased from Peer Software, Inc.

After registration with Peer Software, you will receive Registration Information which is generated from the information you provided during registration. The password you receive will be specific to the PeerSync product you have licensed.

To activate your copy of PeerSync as a fully licensed version, first run the copy. Because your copy is unregistered, the application will not open in its entirety, but the following About PeerSync screen will open. This screen contains "User Name," "Company", "Options" and "Password" fields.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 88 PeerSync Help Manual

Be sure to enter this information exactly as you received it, with the same spacing, hyphenation, punctuation, and cases (i.e. if a comma or period contained within a company name is omitted, registration will not be accepted). It is advisable to cut-and-paste passwords directly from the Email registration information. If passwords are typed using lower case letters where upper cases have been indicated, or if other information is typed incorrectly, the message shown below will be displayed. This message indicates that registration was unsuccessful; shows the number of attempts made to register, and contains’ a link to Peer Software, Inc. You will only be allowed a limited number of attempts before the application closes entirely and will need to be opened again in order to retry.

If registration is successful, your will receive a success dialog such as that shown below for an Enterprise

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 89 PeerSync Help Manual version of PeerSync. Your copy will now have been immediately activated as a registered version of the PeerSync product you have licensed (in this example an Enterprise version). Click "OK" on the success dialog to begin using your registered copy: the About PeerSync screen will close and the full application interface will be displayed. You will not have to exit and restart the application to begin usage.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS

READ LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THIS PROGRAM.

Please send any suggestions, comments or requests for support to the proprietor of PeerSync:

Peer Software, Inc. 1363 Veterans Highway, Suite 26, Hauppauge, NY 11788 Phone: (631) 979-1770 FAX: (631) 979-1870 Email: [email protected]

Copyright 1994-2002, Peer Software, Inc. PeerSync is a registered trademark of Peer Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Reproduction in whole or in part without permission is strictly prohibited.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 90 PeerSync Help Manual

Upgrade Information

To upgrade, simply double-click on the executable in the Explorer window, or choose "Run" from the Start Menu and then select the application. If you are upgrading the current version of PeerSync (i.e. 6.0.1 to 6.0.2) simple install the application over the existing PeerSync and the previous version be backed up in a sub-folder called 'BACKUP' if you select this option during installation. If you are evaluating a new version of PeerSync (6.1) and you already have an existing copy of PeerSync (6.0) please select a new directory during installation. If you wish to remove previous versions of PeerSync you must go to the 'Start Menu-Settings-Control Panel', select the 'Add/Remove Programs' utility and remove the PeerSync versions you no longer need.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 91 PeerSync Reviewers Guide PeerSync Reviewers Guide Last Updated: 04-02-02

Table of Contents

Introduction to PeerSync Version 6.0 Reviewer's Guide

Platforms

System Requirements

PeerSync Component Applications

New Version Highlights

Glossary of Terms

Reviewer's Demonstration Notes

Demonstration of Real-Time Mode Operation

Demonstration of Scheduled Mode Operation

Evaluation Scenario 1: Synchronize files/folders from laptop to desktop

Evaluation Scenario 2: How to synchronize files and folder over a RAS/VPN

Additional Scenarios

Contact Information

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (1 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide Introduction

(See Next: PeerSync Component Applications)

PeerSync Pro II v 6.0 (PSP) is Peer Software's flagship file synchronization and backup product. PSP v 6.0 facilitates centralized and efficient data consistency, disaster recovery, software distribution and network management across all environments: WANs, LANs, SANS, via a remote connection where files can be synchronized with those on the network, as well as between laptop and desktop. The newest version of PSP works with all storage media, including DAT, Zip drives, optical drives, etc., and offers an expanded range of flexible, scalable and user-friendly data synchronization solutions that ensure data integrity and reliability, while promoting collaboration among workers in today's increasingly distributed work force.

This guide is designed to facilitate a thorough; easy-to-follow evaluation of PeerSync’s feature set and promotes a clear understanding of its real-world applications. Should you require any clarification or more information, please contact Peer Software at (631) 979- 1770. Someone from technical support will expeditiously answer any and all questions to make your evaluation process as smooth and hassle free as possible.

Platforms: Windows 95/98/ME/NT4/2000

System Requirements: Computer capable of running Windows 95/98/ME/NT4/2000. Under Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or Higher

Contact Information

(Return to: Table of Contents)

If you require further information or need clarification on anything contained in this Reviewer’s guide, please contact us at:

PEER SOFTWARE, INC.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (2 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide

Sales and Support: 1 (631) 979-1770 - Fax: 1 (631) 979-1870 [email protected] | [email protected]

About Peer Software Peer Software develops network management and data synchronization tools, which allow organizations to seamlessly and securely manage their digital and human assets. Its’ InSync Solution Series provides centralized management of mission critical processes, promoting data consistency and security, as well as facilitating software distribution, desktop monitoring, knowledge transfer, and a host of activities to sustain seamless business communications and improve operating efficiencies. Customers include the Department of Justice, MCI, Merrill Lynch, Columbia University, VISA, RSA Communications, Fannie Mae, etc. Peer Software products are available online at www.peersoftware.com. The company is privately held

Copyright © 1993-2001 Peer Software, Inc. PeerSync, PeerSync Pro, PeerSync Pro II, PeerSync Pro III, PeerSync Pro IV, Peer Scheduler, File-N-Sync, File-N-Sync Plus, Save-N-Sync and PeerLink are the trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. 1993 -2001 Peer Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

PeerSync Component Applications

(See Next: New Version Highlights)

PeerSync: This application contains all required functions to process and execute designed Synchronization Profiles.

PSProfiler: This application is the front end to PeerSync. Designed to be an easy and well-organized interface to all of the many features of PeerSync. Can be operated simultaneously while the PeerSync engine is running in the background, allowing updates to profiles without having to stop existing synchronization processes.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (3 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide

PSWizard: This application contains many basic synchronization scenarios in a pre-defined format. The end-user need only select a source and target folder to synchronize, and the Wizard fills in all of the detailed information to perform the operation. All scenarios in the Wizard are completely end-user definable, and will support additional user-defined scenarios.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (4 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide

Glossary

(See Next: Reviewer's Demonstration Notes)

Synchronization: Updating any existing files or adding new files in the target folder using the source folder as the guide. When completed, the target folder should contain all of the files in the source folder with matching content and time stamps.

Replication: Same as synchronization, except files that are in the target folder that do not have a matching source file will be deleted.

Profiles: A Profile is a description of a complete synchronization scenario. Profiles can contain many source-target combinations allowing the end-user to define very detailed file synchronizations and run them all within a single request. For example, you could build a profile that contains

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (5 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide

multiple source and target folders such as:

Source = C:\My Documents Target = N:\USERS\TEST\My Documents Source = D:\LocalData Target = N:\USERS\TEST\LocalData Source = C:\WINDOWS\Profiles Target = N:\USERS\TEST\Profiles

Each of these Source-Target entries can then be further detailed with more than 65 options each making each entry a completely self contained process, and still allowing it to be run as part of a bigger set or Profile.

Filters: A filter is a single entry in a profile. A Profile can contain from one to 255 filters and each filter contains more than 65 individual option settings.

Real-Time Mode: In this mode of operation, PeerSync will automatically detect changes made to the source folder(s) and execute the synchronization options selected for the matching filter. Typically, the target folder is updated with the source folder change within moments of the change. Note that PeerSync may have completed the operation before Windows actually displays the change in the target folder Explorer window.

Scheduled Mode: In this mode of operation, PeerSync will execute the designated filter at the selected time. Each filter in the profile can have the same or different time interval.

Quick-Sync Feature (Back to: New Version Highlights)

This feature was introduced for a quick and easy way of constantly synchronizing a work folder on the fly with the option to modify your filtering criteria at a later time.

Simply right click on any folder you wish to sync and select "Quick-Sync Folder..."

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (6 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide

This will launch PSWizard, which will ask you to select a target folder to sync to...

And your ready to run the Quick-Sync. You also have the options to edit and/or add the current sync filter to your Quick-Sync profile or any other selected Profile.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (7 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide

Anytime you select a folder if it matches any source or target selections in the Quick- Sync profile then the filters will be listed to pick from or you have the option to add a new filter.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (8 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide

Pro III and Pro IV Package Options (Back to: New Version Highlights)

The Pro III Package has been created based on the feedback, comments and/or recommendations of our customers and is now an optional add on to the existing PeerSync products. This package includes the following options:

FTP Options FTP site file synchronization option. This option allows any filter to automatically logon to an FTP server and synchronize files either to or from the local folders. Supports proxy servers/firewalls and has option to adjust for GMT time on FTP server side.

Email Reporting Email notification of synchronization activity can be sent upon completion of entire profile or during persistent synchronization operations.

Enhanced Real-time Monitoring (with Pro II Package only)

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (9 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide

Enhanced real-time file monitoring and updating option. This option allows the real-time feature in PeerSync to detect individual changes to files and synchronize only the file that changed without scanning the entire folder where the change occurred. Normally synchronization software scans and compares all files in a folder that is being synchronized. This option does not scan folders unless the change is indeterminate. Under MS Windows NT4/2000, this feature is extended to the file/folder rename operations as well. If a file or folder is renamed, PeerSync will rename the corresponding target file or folder using rename functions as opposed to copying the newly renamed source folder to the target and then subsequently deleting the outdated target file/folder. This option greatly reduces time to synchronize and network band with requirements.

Bi-directional Synchronization Bi-directional synchronization feature with Smart-Delete. Files on target that are newer than their corresponding source files will be automatically brought back to the source folders. Any file that has a creation date newer that the last time the filter was run will be added to the source folders even if Delete-Unmatched target file option is selected.

File Recovery File recovery option to continue a file copy that was interrupted for some reason. If the source and target file name and date match but the target file is smaller, PeerSync will start the copy operation from the last byte that was sent the next time a sync operation is executed on the folder.

Intelligent Network Load Balancing Network load balancing option will automatically set read/write buffer size based on recommendation from NIC network cards. (Installed network card must also support this feature.)

Binary Comparison Option to check all source and target files for binary match during folder scan/compare cycle (using CRC32). This check ensures that what is on the target matches the source at a binary level.

Target File Validation Option to validate file using CRC32 binary comparison after successful file copy operation.

Target File Time Delta Option to add or delete time from target file during folder comparison. This allows for synchronization of files between dissimilar time zones or to allow for some time

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (10 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide difference between source and target in case target machine date is slightly different from source.

The Pro IV Package has been created based on the feedback, comments and/or recommendations of our customers and is now an optional add on to the existing PeerSync products. This package includes the following options:

New Pro IV (Server Edition) Features and How to Use Them

Bandwidth Throttling - Start the PeerSync Profiler interface - Open an existing Profile or add a new filter - Select the 'Show All Profile Options' from the 'Selection Tree' on the bottom left of the interface - Go to the 'Performance' screen - Select the 'Throttle bandwidth - Use x percent of available bandwidth' option

Note: This is a filter setting and can be turned on/off for each filter

SNMP - Start the PeerSync Profiler interface. - Open an existing Profile or add a new filter. - Select the 'Show All Profile Options' from the 'Selection Tree' on the bottom left of the interface. - Go to the 'Admin Reporting' screen. - Select the 'Use SNMP reporting' option. - Select and configure the 'SNMP Options' option.

Note: This is a filter setting and can be turned on/off for each filter.

Multiple Filter Threads - Start the PeerSync Profiler interface. - Open an existing Profile or add a new filter. - Go to the 'Operation Mode' screen. - Select the 'Enable performance options' setting. - Select the 'Performance Options' button. - Select the 'Use multiple filter threads'.

Note: This is a global setting and will create the argument (/MFT:x) where x is the maximum number of filter threads.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (11 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide

Multiple Copy Threads - Start the PeerSync Profiler interface. - Open an existing Profile or add a new filter. - Go to the 'Operation Mode' screen. - Select the 'Enable performance options' setting. - Select the 'Enable Performance Options' button. - Select the 'Use multiple copy threads'.

Note: This is a global setting and will create the argument (/MCT:x) where x is the maximum number of copy threads.

PeerSync Status Display - Start the PeerSync Profiler interface. - Open an existing Profile or add a new filter. - Go to the 'Operation Mode' screen. - Select the 'Enable Display options' setting. - Select the 'Display Options' button. - Select the 'PeerSync Status Display' setting.

New Version Highlights

(See Next: Glossary of Terms)

New Features and Updates!

Folder Selection Screen - Source and Target folder Popup menu with Network Logon Settings feature

FTP Selection Screen - Enable Passive Mode

Reporting Screen - Include Transfer time feature - Clear Log file Button - Log file variable path display

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (12 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide

Admin Reporting Screen - Reporting on errors only feature - SNMP features

Email Reporting Screen - Reporting on errors only feature - Attach log files to message feature

File Options Screen (New Screen) - Include Unicode/Mac/Asian files

Performance Screen (New Screen) - Throttle bandwidth - Use x percent of available bandwidth feature - Set maximum number of copy threads feature

Alterations Screen (New Screen) - Include/exclude empty source folders when coping to target feature - Delete Exceptions from target folder feature

Additional Features (New Screen)

Automation - Daily Timer scheduling per filter

Compression - File or folder compression - Compression - normal, Maximum compression or Maximum speed selection

Operation Mode Screen - Pre-Sync Report Options - Display Options - Turn on/off Profiler Status Display - Turn on/off PeerSync Status Display

- Performance Options Screen - Application Priority Selection (Low-Medium-High) - Multiple Thread Selections - Filter Threads - Copy Threads

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (13 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide

- Daily Timer scheduling (Added to the Interface) - New Real-time Method - Universal System event detection (9x/NT/ME/2000) - Current Argument Display and Selection

Other Overall Interface Features

- New Interface allows you to customize the options to show in the 'Selection Tree.' One way to do this is by right clicking on the tree when 'Show all Profile Options' is not selected and selecting the 'Customize' option.

- Added a launch and terminate button to the Tool Buttons toolbar.

- Added buttons to menus that correspond to available toolbar Tool Buttons toolbar.

- Restructured the selection tree for ease of use.

- Added a status screen viewable from PeerSync, which allows for you to view, print and save file adds, updates, deletions, exclusions, messages and many other status and reporting features.

- Update of Active Profile feature, located under the Run Menu and on the right side of Status Bar from the Profiler when changes are made to a Profile the is currently active and connected to the Profiler.

Pro III and Pro IV Packages The Pro III and Pro IV Packages have been created based on the feedback, comments and/or recommendations of our customers and are now an optional add on to the existing PeerSync products.

Quick-Sync Feature This feature was introduced for a quick and easy way of constantly synchronizing a work folder on the fly with the option to modify your filtering criteria at a later time.

Version 5.0 Enhancements Include:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (14 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide

Quick-Sync feature introduced to sync folders on the fly from within Windows Explorer

Added the tracking and display of the last run time for each filter within each profile

Added drop lists for filter item options that are selected often to improve the ease of creating filters

Added the ability to clear log files from within the interface

Improved message logging and reporting features

Added option to create/access messages from within the PSProfiler

Fixed large font sizing issues with PSProfiler and PSWizard

Added an option to include and add a restoration filter from the PSWizard application

Added a more unique log file naming convention from within the PSWizard application

Added display of the last date/time each filter was executed

PeerSync now creates (*.LTR) files with the last time filters within each profile were executed

Added the ability to exclude file paths with spaces in them

PSWizard: This new addition makes creating filters fast and easy by containing many basic synchronization scenarios in a pre-defined format. All scenarios in the Wizard are completely end-user definable and support a comprehensive range of scenarios.

Improved filter and profile management: A Profile is a description of a complete synchronization scenario. Profiles can contain many source-target combinations allowing the end-user to define very detailed file synchronizations and run them all within a single request. A filter is a single entry in a profile. A Profile can contain from one to 255 filters and each filter contains more than 80 individual option settings.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (15 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide

Sync operations are faster

Improved compression operations

Other Major Enhancements Include:

Separate synchronization engine and user interface that allows Profile editing while synchronization is running.

Moved global profile features into individual filter settings so each filter is more robust and complete than before.

New start-up options for automatically running form start-up folder or creating desktop icon for profile. Improved control over synchronization report file.

Expanded filtering of files and folders.

Ability to run filters as separate profiles without having to create new profiles.

Ability to make multiple filter changes simultaneously during filter editing.

Ability to give each filter a unique title/name.

Feature to merge filters from different profiles into one profile.

Feature to allow filter to control size of read-write buffer during synchronization.

Sync from filter list feature to allow immediate synchronization of source and target

Interface for showing tray icon during synchronization operations.

Pro II has improved file change detection mechanism through new DLL's

Reviewer's Demonstration Notes

(See Next: Demonstration of Real-Time Mode Operation)

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (16 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide

PeerSync can be run in many different ways. To facilitate your evaluation, we developed a new part of PeerSync called the PSWizard. To start an automated demonstration of PeerSync, follow these steps:

I. Install PeerSync on to your PC by running the provided installation application: PS50.EXE. II. From your Windows Start menu, select Programs - Peer Software - PeerSync File Synchronization - PeerSync Wizard. This will start the PSWizard application. III. From the PSWizard application, select the Demonstration Tab and chose either "Demonstration Real -Time - Source to Target" or "Demonstration Scheduled - Source to Target".

Note: You can also access these demonstrations from within PSProfiler under the Help menu item.

Demonstration of Real-Time Mode Operation

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (17 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide

(See Next: Demonstration of Scheduled Mode Operation)

This demonstration will create "\PSDemoSource" and "\PSDemoTarget" folders on your local drive, where PeerSync is installed. PeerSync will be started with this demonstration profile. Additionally, you will see two Windows Explorer windows containing the source and target folders respectively. To view PeerSync operating in real-time mode, try one of the following tests:

Right click the mouse in the source folder, and select New Text Document from the Explorer pop-up menu. The new file should automatically appear in the target folder. Delete a file from the source folder, and the matching target folder should automatically be deleted. Select a few files in the source folder, and copy and past them to the source folder. All newly added files in the source should get matching files in the target folder. Create a new folder under the source folder. The matching target sub-folder should be created.

Note that PeerSync may have completed the operation before Windows actually displays the change in the target folder Explorer window.

To terminate PeerSync, right click on the PeerSync Tray icon in the lower right corner of your display.

Demonstration of Scheduled Mode Operation

(See Next: Evaluation Scenario 1)

This demonstration will create "\PSDemoSource" and "\PSDemoTarget" folders on your local drive where PeerSync is installed. PeerSync will be started with this demonstration profile. Additionally, you will see two Windows Explorer windows containing the source and target folders respectively.

In this mode, PeerSync will synchronize the Source folder to the Target folder every 15 seconds.

To view PeerSync operating in a scheduled mode, try one of the following tests:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (18 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide

I. Right click the mouse in the source folder, and select New Text Document from the Explorer pop-up menu. The new file should automatically appear in the target folder within 15 seconds. II. Delete a file from the source folder, and the matching target folder should automatically be deleted within 15 seconds. III. Select a few files in the source folder, then copy and past them to the source folder. All newly added files in the source should get matching files in the target folder within 15 seconds. IV. Create a new folder under the source folder. The matching target sub- folder should be created within 15 seconds.

Note that PeerSync may have completed the operation before Windows actually displays the change in the Target folder Explorer window.

To terminate PeerSync, right click on the PeerSync Tray icon in the lower right corner of your display.

Evaluation Scenario 1

(See Next: Evaluation Scenario 2)

How to synchronize files and folders from your laptop to your desktop computer?

Objectives: I. Adding, updating and/or replicating files from your laptop to your desktop. II. Creating a shortcut on your desktop to run the synchronization on demand.

Requirement: It is assumed that your laptop will be connected to your network via a docking station, through a PC card or by direct connect cable (refer to Microsoft Windows online help).

1. Open the PeerSync Profiler Application.

2. Select Source and Target Folders. I. Go to the Folder Selection screen. II. Select a Source folder on your laptop that you wish to synchronize from.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (19 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide

III. Select a Target folder on your desktop that you wish to synchronize to.

3. Set File and Folder Exceptions I. Go to the Exceptions screen. II. Specify files/folders to include/exclude by setting the appropriate items.

4. Configure any other items you may require by selecting the appropriate screen.

5. Save the Profile.

6. Add icon to Windows Desktop to execute this Profile. I. Go to the Startup Options screen. II. Click on the "Add to Desktop" button. A Desktop icon will be added to your desktop with the name given to the active Profile that you have just created.

7. Run profile from Desktop Icon.

Evaluation Scenario 2

(See Next: Additional Scenarios)

How to synchronize files and folder over a RAS or VPN connection?

Objectives: I. Automatically connect to a remote network using RAS or VPN. II. Synchronize selected files/folders. III. Disconnect remote network connection.

Requirement: It is assumed that your VPN and or RAS connections have been created and are accessible through your environment.

1. Open the PeerSync Profiler Application.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (20 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide

2. Select Source and Target Folders. I. Go to the Folder Selection screen. II. Select a Source folder on your laptop that you wish to synchronize from. III. Select a Target folder on your desktop that you wish to synchronize to.

3. Set File and Folder Exceptions. I. Go to the Exceptions screen. II. Specify files/folders to include/exclude by setting the appropriate items.

4. Build .CMD or .BAT external batch files to execute. I. Open a text editor such as Notepad and create a new document. II. Add the following line to the document:

start rasdial.exe "Connection Name" /DOMAIN:DomainName (Where Connection Name and Domain Name are replaced with your network connection information as specified in the specific RAS or VPN connection screen.) Please note the use of double quotes around the Connection Name.

III. Save the file as ConnectRAS1.CMD in the PeerSync installed folder "C:\Program Files\PeerSync" (default).

IV. Create a new document, and add the following line:

start rasdial.exe "Connection Name" /DISCONNECT

V. Save this file as DisConnectRAS1.CMD in the PeerSync installed folder "C:\Program Files\PeerSync" (default).

5. Link these CMD files to PeerSync. a. In the PeerSync Profiler, go to the Pre/Post Process screen. b. Be sure the appropriate filter is highlighted in the Filter list. c. Enter the "ConnectRAS1.CMD" file name (with full path) into the Before text field. d. Enter the "DisConnectRAS1.CMD" file name (with full path) into the After text field. e. Check the Wait for application to terminate check box and set the time to wait to zero (0) (indefinite wait).

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (21 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide

6. Configure any other items you may require by selecting the appropriate screen.

7. Save the Profile.

8. Go to The Run Active Profile Screen and Launch the Profile to connect and synchronize with your remote network.

Additional Scenarios

(See Next: Contact Information)

1. Challenge: How to update user’s data folders each day at logon with files that were updated the night before. Additionally, how to push system and application files out to users on the LAN/WAN on a daily basis.

Solution: PeerSync can be configured to run at startup of each PC to synchronize folders from a server to the user’s local PC. Files such as collaboration or databases that get assembled off-line, and then need to be redistributed to the user’s PC daily. A global telecommunications company has been using PeerSync to push updated files (Oracle form files) from a central server to all of their regional teleconferencing centers. These files contain the data that had been generated the previous day. Each user works off a local set of information so they can be more responsive to their customers, and not be delayed by network traffic across their WAN.

Additionally, PeerSync can be used to update software applications that may have been revised or updated without a technician having to physically go to each PC and copy the files. PeerSync can synchronize data from a server directory specifically setup to contain updates that need to be "pulled" out to each individual PC.

2. Challenge: Keep two data folders on each office desktop backed-up to a server, and then backup up to tape for off site remote storage. Backed-up data must be recoverable with-in minutes of loss.

Solution: Run PeerSync on every office PC, monitoring selected data folders for changes. Upon detection of file change, PeerSync synchronizes selected

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (22 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide

folders to server backing up data immediately. Servers are then backed-up to tape on a weekly basis and tapes are stored off site.

Typically, if you use tape backup as the primary back-up method, network traffic can be a problem, each PC in the office will have to be accessible during backup times rendering the PC unusable for a period of time. Data is only as good as the last scheduled backup, which could be days or weeks out of sync. Recovery of data can be difficult because first you have to locate the correct tape then, assuming the tape is recoverable; you have to wade through directory structures on the tape to identify the correct file to be recovered. This process can be time consuming and frustrating.

With the PeerSync scenario recovery of the file can be done from an active server so what took possibly hours or days (if tape is off-site) from a tape can be accomplished in minutes using PeerSync. Office PC’s are backup in real-time so backed-up data is only seconds out of sync and PeerSync works in the back ground so the end-user may not even be aware that the synchronization is taking place.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psrg.html (23 of 23) [25/04/02 11:15:07] PeerSync Reviewers Guide

PeerSync Reviewers Guide Last Updated: 04-02-02

Table of Contents

Introduction to PeerSync Version 6.0 Reviewer's Guide Platforms System Requirements PeerSync Component Applications New Version Highlights Glossary of Terms Reviewer's Demonstration Notes Demonstration of Real-Time Mode Operation Demonstration of Scheduled Mode Operation Evaluation Scenario 1: Synchronize files/folders from laptop to desktop Evaluation Scenario 2: How to synchronize files and folder over a RAS/VPN Additional Scenarios Contact Information

Introduction (See Next: PeerSync Component Applications)

PeerSync Pro II v 6.0 (PSP) is Peer Software's flagship file synchronization and backup product. PSP v 6.0 facilitates centralized and efficient data consistency, disaster recovery, software distribution and network management across all environments: WANs, LANs, SANS, via a remote connection where files can be synchronized with those on the network, as well as between laptop and desktop. The newest version of PSP works with all storage media, including DAT, Zip drives, optical drives, etc., and offers an expanded range of flexible, scalable and user-friendly data synchronization solutions that ensure data integrity and reliability, while promoting collaboration among workers in today's increasingly distributed work force.

This guide is designed to facilitate a thorough; easy-to-follow evaluation of PeerSync’s feature set and promotes a clear understanding of its real-world applications. Should you require any clarification or more information, please contact Peer Software at (631) 979-1770. Someone from technical support will expeditiously answer any and all questions to make your evaluation process as smooth and hassle free as possible.

Platforms: Windows 95/98/ME/NT4/2000

System Requirements: Computer capable of running Windows 95/98/ME/NT4/2000. Under Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or Higher

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 1 PeerSync Reviewers Guide

Contact Information (Return to: Table of Contents)

If you require further information or need clarification on anything contained in this Reviewer’s guide, please contact us at:

PEER SOFTWARE, INC. Sales and Support: 1 (631) 979-1770 - Fax: 1 (631) 979-1870 [email protected] | [email protected]

About Peer Software Peer Software develops network management and data synchronization tools, which allow organizations to seamlessly and securely manage their digital and human assets. Its’ InSync Solution Series provides centralized management of mission critical processes, promoting data consistency and security, as well as facilitating software distribution, desktop monitoring, knowledge transfer, and a host of activities to sustain seamless business communications and improve operating efficiencies. Customers include the Department of Justice, MCI, Merrill Lynch, Columbia University, VISA, RSA Communications, Fannie Mae, etc. Peer Software products are available online at www.peersoftware.com. The company is privately held

Copyright © 1993-2001 Peer Software, Inc. PeerSync, PeerSync Pro, PeerSync Pro II, PeerSync Pro III, PeerSync Pro IV, Peer Scheduler, File-N-Sync, File-N- Sync Plus, Save-N-Sync and PeerLink are the trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. 1993 -2001 Peer Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 2 PeerSync Reviewers Guide

PeerSync Component Applications (See Next: New Version Highlights)

PeerSync: This application contains all required functions to process and execute designed Synchronization Profiles.

PSProfiler: This application is the front end to PeerSync. Designed to be an easy and well- organized interface to all of the many features of PeerSync. Can be operated simultaneously while the PeerSync engine is running in the background, allowing updates to profiles without having to stop existing synchronization processes.

PSWizard: This application contains many basic synchronization scenarios in a pre-defined format. The end-user need only select a source and target folder to synchronize, and the Wizard fills in all of the detailed information to perform the operation. All scenarios in the Wizard are completely end-user definable, and will support

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 3 PeerSync Reviewers Guide

additional user-defined scenarios.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 4 PeerSync Reviewers Guide

Glossary (See Next: Reviewer's Demonstration Notes)

Synchronization: Updating any existing files or adding new files in the target folder using the source folder as the guide. When completed, the target folder should contain all of the files in the source folder with matching content and time stamps.

Replication: Same as synchronization, except files that are in the target folder that do not have a matching source file will be deleted.

Profiles: A Profile is a description of a complete synchronization scenario. Profiles can contain many source-target combinations allowing the end-user to define very detailed file synchronizations and run them all within a single request. For example, you could build a profile that contains multiple source and target folders such as:

Source = C:\My Documents Target = N:\USERS\TEST\My Documents Source = D:\LocalData Target = N:\USERS\TEST\LocalData Source = C:\WINDOWS\Profiles Target = N:\USERS\TEST\Profiles

Each of these Source-Target entries can then be further detailed with more than 65 options each making each entry a completely self contained process, and still allowing it to be run as part of a bigger set or Profile.

Filters: A filter is a single entry in a profile. A Profile can contain from one to 255 filters and each filter contains more than 65 individual option settings.

Real-Time Mode: In this mode of operation, PeerSync will automatically detect changes made to the source folder(s) and execute the synchronization options selected for the matching filter. Typically, the target folder is updated with the source folder change within moments of the change. Note that PeerSync may have completed the operation before Windows actually displays the change in the target folder Explorer window.

Scheduled Mode: In this mode of operation, PeerSync will execute the designated filter at the selected time. Each filter in the profile can have the same or different time interval.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 5 PeerSync Reviewers Guide

Quick-Sync Feature (Back to: New Version Highlights)

This feature was introduced for a quick and easy way of constantly synchronizing a work folder on the fly with the option to modify your filtering criteria at a later time.

Simply right click on any folder you wish to sync and select "Quick-Sync Folder..."

This will launch PSWizard, which will ask you to select a target folder to sync to...

And your ready to run the Quick-Sync. You also have the options to edit and/or add the current sync filter to your Quick-Sync profile or any other selected Profile.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 6 PeerSync Reviewers Guide

Anytime you select a folder if it matches any source or target selections in the Quick-Sync profile then the filters will be listed to pick from or you have the option to add a new filter.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 7 PeerSync Reviewers Guide

Pro III and Pro IV Package Options (Back to: New Version Highlights)

The Pro III Package has been created based on the feedback, comments and/or recommendations of our customers and is now an optional add on to the existing PeerSync products. This package includes the following options:

FTP Options FTP site file synchronization option. This option allows any filter to automatically logon to an FTP server and synchronize files either to or from the local folders. Supports proxy servers/firewalls and has option to adjust for GMT time on FTP server side.

Email Reporting Email notification of synchronization activity can be sent upon completion of entire profile or during persistent synchronization operations.

Enhanced Real-time Monitoring (with Pro II Package only) Enhanced real-time file monitoring and updating option. This option allows the real-time feature in PeerSync to detect individual changes to files and synchronize only the file that changed without scanning the entire folder where the change occurred. Normally synchronization software scans and compares all files in a folder that is being synchronized. This option does not scan folders unless the change is indeterminate. Under MS Windows NT4/2000, this feature is extended to the file/folder rename operations as well. If a file or folder is renamed, PeerSync will rename the corresponding target file or folder using rename functions as opposed to copying the newly renamed source folder to the target and then subsequently deleting the outdated target file/folder. This option greatly reduces time to synchronize and network band with requirements.

Bi-directional Synchronization Bi-directional synchronization feature with Smart-Delete. Files on target that are newer than their corresponding source files will be automatically brought back to the source folders. Any file that has a creation date newer that the last time the filter was run will be added to the source folders even if Delete- Unmatched target file option is selected.

File Recovery File recovery option to continue a file copy that was interrupted for some reason. If the source and target file name and date match but the target file is smaller, PeerSync will start the copy operation from the last byte that was sent the next time a sync operation is executed on the folder.

Intelligent Network Load Balancing Network load balancing option will automatically set read/write buffer size based on recommendation from NIC network cards. (Installed network card must also support this feature.)

Binary Comparison Option to check all source and target files for binary match during folder scan/compare cycle (using CRC32). This check ensures that what is on the target matches the source at a binary level.

Target File Validation Option to validate file using CRC32 binary comparison after successful file copy operation.

Target File Time Delta Option to add or delete time from target file during folder comparison. This allows for synchronization of files between dissimilar time zones or to allow for some time difference between source and target in case target machine date is slightly different from source.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 8 PeerSync Reviewers Guide

The Pro IV Package has been created based on the feedback, comments and/or recommendations of our customers and is now an optional add on to the existing PeerSync products. This package includes the following options:

New Pro IV (Server Edition) Features and How to Use Them

Bandwidth Throttling - Start the PeerSync Profiler interface - Open an existing Profile or add a new filter - Select the 'Show All Profile Options' from the 'Selection Tree' on the bottom left of the interface - Go to the 'Performance' screen - Select the 'Throttle bandwidth - Use x percent of available bandwidth' option

Note: This is a filter setting and can be turned on/off for each filter

SNMP - Start the PeerSync Profiler interface. - Open an existing Profile or add a new filter. - Select the 'Show All Profile Options' from the 'Selection Tree' on the bottom left of the interface. - Go to the 'Admin Reporting' screen. - Select the 'Use SNMP reporting' option. - Select and configure the 'SNMP Options' option.

Note: This is a filter setting and can be turned on/off for each filter.

Multiple Filter Threads - Start the PeerSync Profiler interface. - Open an existing Profile or add a new filter. - Go to the 'Operation Mode' screen. - Select the 'Enable performance options' setting. - Select the 'Performance Options' button. - Select the 'Use multiple filter threads'.

Note: This is a global setting and will create the argument (/MFT:x) where x is the maximum number of filter threads.

Multiple Copy Threads - Start the PeerSync Profiler interface. - Open an existing Profile or add a new filter. - Go to the 'Operation Mode' screen. - Select the 'Enable performance options' setting. - Select the 'Enable Performance Options' button. - Select the 'Use multiple copy threads'.

Note: This is a global setting and will create the argument (/MCT:x) where x is the maximum number of copy threads.

PeerSync Status Display - Start the PeerSync Profiler interface. - Open an existing Profile or add a new filter. - Go to the 'Operation Mode' screen. - Select the 'Enable Display options' setting. - Select the 'Display Options' button.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 9 PeerSync Reviewers Guide

- Select the 'PeerSync Status Display' setting.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 10 PeerSync Reviewers Guide

New Version Highlights (See Next: Glossary of Terms)

New Features and Updates!

Folder Selection Screen - Source and Target folder Popup menu with Network Logon Settings feature

FTP Selection Screen - Enable Passive Mode

Reporting Screen - Include Transfer time feature - Clear Log file Button - Log file variable path display

Admin Reporting Screen - Reporting on errors only feature - SNMP features

Email Reporting Screen - Reporting on errors only feature - Attach log files to message feature

File Options Screen (New Screen) - Include Unicode/Mac/Asian files

Performance Screen (New Screen) - Throttle bandwidth - Use x percent of available bandwidth feature - Set maximum number of copy threads feature

Alterations Screen (New Screen) - Include/exclude empty source folders when coping to target feature - Delete Exceptions from target folder feature

Additional Features (New Screen)

Automation - Daily Timer scheduling per filter

Compression - File or folder compression - Compression - normal, Maximum compression or Maximum speed selection

Operation Mode Screen - Pre-Sync Report Options - Display Options - Turn on/off Profiler Status Display - Turn on/off PeerSync Status Display

- Performance Options Screen - Application Priority Selection (Low-Medium-High) - Multiple Thread Selections - Filter Threads

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 11 PeerSync Reviewers Guide

- Copy Threads

- Daily Timer scheduling (Added to the Interface) - New Real-time Method - Universal System event detection (9x/NT/ME/2000) - Current Argument Display and Selection

Other Overall Interface Features

- New Interface allows you to customize the options to show in the 'Selection Tree.' One way to do this is by right clicking on the tree when 'Show all Profile Options' is not selected and selecting the 'Customize' option.

- Added a launch and terminate button to the Tool Buttons toolbar.

- Added buttons to menus that correspond to available toolbar Tool Buttons toolbar.

- Restructured the selection tree for ease of use.

- Added a status screen viewable from PeerSync, which allows for you to view, print and save file adds, updates, deletions, exclusions, messages and many other status and reporting features.

- Update of Active Profile feature, located under the Run Menu and on the right side of Status Bar from the Profiler when changes are made to a Profile the is currently active and connected to the Profiler.

Pro III and Pro IV Packages The Pro III and Pro IV Packages have been created based on the feedback, comments and/or recommendations of our customers and are now an optional add on to the existing PeerSync products.

Quick-Sync Feature This feature was introduced for a quick and easy way of constantly synchronizing a work folder on the fly with the option to modify your filtering criteria at a later time.

Version 5.0 Enhancements Include: Quick-Sync feature introduced to sync folders on the fly from within Windows Explorer Added the tracking and display of the last run time for each filter within each profile Added drop lists for filter item options that are selected often to improve the ease of creating filters Added the ability to clear log files from within the interface Improved message logging and reporting features Added option to create/access messages from within the PSProfiler Fixed large font sizing issues with PSProfiler and PSWizard Added an option to include and add a restoration filter from the PSWizard application Added a more unique log file naming convention from within the PSWizard application Added display of the last date/time each filter was executed PeerSync now creates (*.LTR) files with the last time filters within each profile were executed Added the ability to exclude file paths with spaces in them

PSWizard: This new addition makes creating filters fast and easy by containing many basic synchronization scenarios in a pre-defined format. All scenarios in the Wizard are completely end-user definable and support a comprehensive range of scenarios.

Improved filter and profile management: A Profile is a description of a complete synchronization scenario. Profiles can contain many source-target combinations allowing the end-user to define very

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 12 PeerSync Reviewers Guide detailed file synchronizations and run them all within a single request. A filter is a single entry in a profile. A Profile can contain from one to 255 filters and each filter contains more than 80 individual option settings.

Sync operations are faster

Improved compression operations

Other Major Enhancements Include:

Separate synchronization engine and user interface that allows Profile editing while synchronization is running. Moved global profile features into individual filter settings so each filter is more robust and complete than before. New start-up options for automatically running form start-up folder or creating desktop icon for profile. Improved control over synchronization report file. Expanded filtering of files and folders. Ability to run filters as separate profiles without having to create new profiles. Ability to make multiple filter changes simultaneously during filter editing. Ability to give each filter a unique title/name. Feature to merge filters from different profiles into one profile. Feature to allow filter to control size of read-write buffer during synchronization. Sync from filter list feature to allow immediate synchronization of source and target Interface for showing tray icon during synchronization operations. Pro II has improved file change detection mechanism through new DLL's

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 13 PeerSync Reviewers Guide

Reviewer's Demonstration Notes (See Next: Demonstration of Real-Time Mode Operation)

PeerSync can be run in many different ways. To facilitate your evaluation, we developed a new part of PeerSync called the PSWizard. To start an automated demonstration of PeerSync, follow these steps:

I. Install PeerSync on to your PC by running the provided installation application: PS50.EXE. II. From your Windows Start menu, select Programs - Peer Software - PeerSync File Synchronization - PeerSync Wizard. This will start the PSWizard application. III. From the PSWizard application, select the Demonstration Tab and chose either "Demonstration Real -Time - Source to Target" or "Demonstration Scheduled - Source to Target".

Note: You can also access these demonstrations from within PSProfiler under the Help menu item.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 14 PeerSync Reviewers Guide

Demonstration of Real-Time Mode Operation (See Next: Demonstration of Scheduled Mode Operation)

This demonstration will create "\PSDemoSource" and "\PSDemoTarget" folders on your local drive, where PeerSync is installed. PeerSync will be started with this demonstration profile. Additionally, you will see two Windows Explorer windows containing the source and target folders respectively. To view PeerSync operating in real-time mode, try one of the following tests:

Right click the mouse in the source folder, and select New Text Document from the Explorer pop-up menu. The new file should automatically appear in the target folder. Delete a file from the source folder, and the matching target folder should automatically be deleted. Select a few files in the source folder, and copy and past them to the source folder. All newly added files in the source should get matching files in the target folder. Create a new folder under the source folder. The matching target sub-folder should be created.

Note that PeerSync may have completed the operation before Windows actually displays the change in the target folder Explorer window.

To terminate PeerSync, right click on the PeerSync Tray icon in the lower right corner of your display.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 15 PeerSync Reviewers Guide

Demonstration of Scheduled Mode Operation (See Next: Evaluation Scenario 1)

This demonstration will create "\PSDemoSource" and "\PSDemoTarget" folders on your local drive where PeerSync is installed. PeerSync will be started with this demonstration profile. Additionally, you will see two Windows Explorer windows containing the source and target folders respectively.

In this mode, PeerSync will synchronize the Source folder to the Target folder every 15 seconds.

To view PeerSync operating in a scheduled mode, try one of the following tests:

I. Right click the mouse in the source folder, and select New Text Document from the Explorer pop-up menu. The new file should automatically appear in the target folder within 15 seconds. II. Delete a file from the source folder, and the matching target folder should automatically be deleted within 15 seconds. III. Select a few files in the source folder, then copy and past them to the source folder. All newly added files in the source should get matching files in the target folder within 15 seconds. IV. Create a new folder under the source folder. The matching target sub-folder should be created within 15 seconds.

Note that PeerSync may have completed the operation before Windows actually displays the change in the Target folder Explorer window.

To terminate PeerSync, right click on the PeerSync Tray icon in the lower right corner of your display.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 16 PeerSync Reviewers Guide

Evaluation Scenario 1 (See Next: Evaluation Scenario 2)

How to synchronize files and folders from your laptop to your desktop computer?

Objectives: I. Adding, updating and/or replicating files from your laptop to your desktop. II. Creating a shortcut on your desktop to run the synchronization on demand.

Requirement: It is assumed that your laptop will be connected to your network via a docking station, through a PC card or by direct connect cable (refer to Microsoft Windows online help).

1. Open the PeerSync Profiler Application.

2. Select Source and Target Folders. I. Go to the Folder Selection screen. II. Select a Source folder on your laptop that you wish to synchronize from. III. Select a Target folder on your desktop that you wish to synchronize to.

3. Set File and Folder Exceptions I. Go to the Exceptions screen. II. Specify files/folders to include/exclude by setting the appropriate items.

4. Configure any other items you may require by selecting the appropriate screen.

5. Save the Profile.

6. Add icon to Windows Desktop to execute this Profile. I. Go to the Startup Options screen. II. Click on the "Add to Desktop" button. A Desktop icon will be added to your desktop with the name given to the active Profile that you have just created.

7. Run profile from Desktop Icon.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 17 PeerSync Reviewers Guide

Evaluation Scenario 2 (See Next: Additional Scenarios)

How to synchronize files and folder over a RAS or VPN connection?

Objectives: I. Automatically connect to a remote network using RAS or VPN. II. Synchronize selected files/folders. III. Disconnect remote network connection.

Requirement: It is assumed that your VPN and or RAS connections have been created and are accessible through your environment.

1. Open the PeerSync Profiler Application.

2. Select Source and Target Folders. I. Go to the Folder Selection screen. II. Select a Source folder on your laptop that you wish to synchronize from. III. Select a Target folder on your desktop that you wish to synchronize to.

3. Set File and Folder Exceptions. I. Go to the Exceptions screen. II. Specify files/folders to include/exclude by setting the appropriate items.

4. Build .CMD or .BAT external batch files to execute. I. Open a text editor such as Notepad and create a new document. II. Add the following line to the document:

start rasdial.exe "Connection Name" /DOMAIN:DomainName (Where Connection Name and Domain Name are replaced with your network connection information as specified in the specific RAS or VPN connection screen.) Please note the use of double quotes around the Connection Name.

III. Save the file as ConnectRAS1.CMD in the PeerSync installed folder "C:\Program Files\PeerSync" (default).

IV. Create a new document, and add the following line:

start rasdial.exe "Connection Name" /DISCONNECT

V. Save this file as DisConnectRAS1.CMD in the PeerSync installed folder "C:\Program Files\PeerSync" (default).

5. Link these CMD files to PeerSync. a. In the PeerSync Profiler, go to the Pre/Post Process screen. b. Be sure the appropriate filter is highlighted in the Filter list. c. Enter the "ConnectRAS1.CMD" file name (with full path) into the Before text field. d. Enter the "DisConnectRAS1.CMD" file name (with full path) into the After text field. e. Check the Wait for application to terminate check box and set the time to wait to zero (0) (indefinite wait).

6. Configure any other items you may require by selecting the appropriate screen.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 18 PeerSync Reviewers Guide

7. Save the Profile.

8. Go to The Run Active Profile Screen and Launch the Profile to connect and synchronize with your remote network.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 19 PeerSync Reviewers Guide

Additional Scenarios (See Next: Contact Information)

1. Challenge: How to update user’s data folders each day at logon with files that were updated the night before. Additionally, how to push system and application files out to users on the LAN/WAN on a daily basis.

Solution: PeerSync can be configured to run at startup of each PC to synchronize folders from a server to the user’s local PC. Files such as collaboration or databases that get assembled off-line, and then need to be redistributed to the user’s PC daily. A global telecommunications company has been using PeerSync to push updated files (Oracle form files) from a central server to all of their regional teleconferencing centers. These files contain the data that had been generated the previous day. Each user works off a local set of information so they can be more responsive to their customers, and not be delayed by network traffic across their WAN.

Additionally, PeerSync can be used to update software applications that may have been revised or updated without a technician having to physically go to each PC and copy the files. PeerSync can synchronize data from a server directory specifically setup to contain updates that need to be "pulled" out to each individual PC.

2. Challenge: Keep two data folders on each office desktop backed-up to a server, and then backup up to tape for off site remote storage. Backed-up data must be recoverable with-in minutes of loss.

Solution: Run PeerSync on every office PC, monitoring selected data folders for changes. Upon detection of file change, PeerSync synchronizes selected folders to server backing up data immediately. Servers are then backed-up to tape on a weekly basis and tapes are stored off site.

Typically, if you use tape backup as the primary back-up method, network traffic can be a problem, each PC in the office will have to be accessible during backup times rendering the PC unusable for a period of time. Data is only as good as the last scheduled backup, which could be days or weeks out of sync. Recovery of data can be difficult because first you have to locate the correct tape then, assuming the tape is recoverable; you have to wade through directory structures on the tape to identify the correct file to be recovered. This process can be time consuming and frustrating.

With the PeerSync scenario recovery of the file can be done from an active server so what took possibly hours or days (if tape is off-site) from a tape can be accomplished in minutes using PeerSync. Office PC’s are backup in real-time so backed-up data is only seconds out of sync and PeerSync works in the back ground so the end-user may not even be aware that the synchronization is taking place.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 20 PeerSync Product Level Guide Introduction

The Peer Software PeerSync Product Level Guide demonstrates the different levels of PeerSync software available. The purpose of this guide is to provide information as to which product level suites your environments needs.

PeerSync

It is important to consider the following prerequisites when evaluating file and network management software:

Flexibility and scalability

Performance and efficiency

Integrity and reliability

Security

Ease of use for developers, runtime administration and end-users

Support of an open system

Why PeerSync?

PeerSync is a data management software package designed for flexible and reliable file synchronization, backup and replication.

Synchronization The process of comparing the last write time, as well as the size of files in a selected source folder with files in the selected target folder and taking a specific action. Files on the target are updated to match the files on the source.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (1 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

Backup Typical backup usually involves selecting, compressing and restoring files and moving them to backup media. Peer “backs up” files to “live” media such as hard drives, networked computers and network attached storage devices (NAS). One advantage is that this allows you to recover files on a folder tree that match the original. The files can be selected immediately for restoration as opposed to waiting for the correct tape to be inserted into a tape drive. Replication Similar to synchronization, with the added benefit of removing files from the select target folders that do not have corresponding files in the source. Using replication, source and target folders more accurately reflect each other’s content.

Three versions of PeerSync have been developed to meet your current and future business needs:

PeerSync Pro II.

PeerSync Pro III.

PeerSync Pro IV (Server Edition).

All versions of PeerSync offer an easy-to-use interface, PSProfiler, which may or may not be shipped with the PeerSync engine.

There are varying levels of synchronization and other features based upon the version of the software you have purchased.

PeerSync v6.0 Features

Overall Features:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (2 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

Runs under Win9x/Me/NT4/2000/XP.

International date/time format support.

Profiler interface application for simple Profile creation and maintenance.

PeerSync Wizard application, which allows for quick “canned” backup and replication scenario selections.

MS Explorer menu item added for “Quick-Sync Folder” selection directly from MS Windows Explorer.

Profiler (GUI) runs independently of PeerSync (engine).

Profiler filter listing displays “Last Run On” date for each filter and allows for Quick-Sync of specific filters without having to check/uncheck filters each time. Floating or pop-up windows are available for quick viewing of important filter information.

Over 200 source/target filter sets can be created and stored in Profile files that can be run manually or automatically from command line arguments. Each filter can have a unique set of options allowing for very precise folder matching in an automated environment.

Allows for multiple configurations and command line operation.

Detailed file/folder synchronization activity and problem reporting with option to overwrite reports and control content and maximum size of reports. Reports are backed-up when they exceed max limit selection.

File attribute transfer from source to target during synchronization operations.

Variable path/folder naming conventions are supported allowing for Profile and command line arguments to be used by multiple users. Some of the supported values are: %USERNAME%, %COMPUTERNAME%, various date and time variables such as %DATE%, %DATETIME%, %MMYY%, etc.

Ability to customize the options to show in the “Selection Tree.” One way to do this is by right clicking on the tree when “Show all Profile Options” is not selected and selecting the “Customize” option.

Tool bar buttons for commonly used menu items.

Status screen viewable from PeerSync, which allows for you to view, print and

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (3 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

save file adds, updates, deletions, exclusions, messages and many other status and reporting features.

Update of Active Profile feature, located under the Run Menu and on the right side of Status Bar from the Profiler when changes are made to a Profile that is currently active and connected to the Profiler.

Filter Settings - Features selectable by (source-target folder selection):

Folder Selection

UNC file path names supported (Network folder selection dialog).

Folder Selection Source and Target folder Popup menu with Network Logon Settings feature.

FTP Selection

*FTP site file synchronization option. This option allows any filter to automatically logon to an FTP server and synchronize files either to or from the local folders. Supports proxy servers/firewalls and has option to adjust for GMT time on FTP server side (tested with IIS FTP server supplied with MS Windows NT4/2000).

*FTP Selection to Enable Passive Mode.

Exceptions

Files/Folders can be updated or added, included or excluded via extensive filtering capabilities.

Reporting

Completion status reporting for manual operations initiated from Profiler.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (4 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

Reporting option to Include Transfer time feature.

Reporting option to clear the log file from the reporting screen.

Reporting option to display the Log file variable path.

Admin Reporting

Additional administrative reporting capability for network environments with multiple users reporting to a common PC for administrative purposes.

Administrative Reporting option to report on errors only

**Administrative SNMP Reporting features.

Email Reporting

*Email notification of synchronization activity can be sent upon completion of entire profile or during persistent synchronization operations.

*Email Reporting option to report on errors only.

*Email Reporting option to attach log files to emails.

File Options

Delete unmatched target files option for complete replication capability.

Ability to Include/exclude Unicode/Mac/Asian files in your synchronization.

Deletion Option to move unmatched target files while preserving paths.

Performance

Option to set the read-write buffer size allowing for better optimization of http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (5 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

network bandwidth. Busier networks work better with smaller buffers. Less traffic and or faster networks benefit from larger buffers by moving data faster reducing transfer delays.

*Network load balancing option will automatically set read/write buffer size based on recommendation from NIC network cards. (Installed NIC must also support this feature.)

**Additional Performance Features.

**Maximum Copy Threads option to be able to give or take away priorities to certain filters.

**Bandwidth throttling option, which allows for the ability to control the amount of CPU used by PeerSync.

**File Read/Write Buffer Size Upper Limit, which allows you to further increase the performance of PeerSync.

Alterations

Revisioning option adds ability to keep virtually unlimited backed-up copies of target files helping to ensure multi-level file recovery.

NT file security descriptions (ACLs) are optionally transferred to target file after successful file copy.

Reset file archive attributes to allow for improved updates for subsequent operations. Allows PeerSync to behave like older backup utilities. (Requires archive attribute option in Exceptions screen.)

Option to delete source file after successful synchronization operation.

Ability to Include/exclude empty source folders when coping to target feature.

Delete Exceptions from target folder feature.

*Bi-directional synchronization feature with Smart-Delete. Files on target that are newer than their corresponding source files will be automatically brought back to the source folders. Any file that has a creation date newer that the last time the filter was run will be added to the source folders even if Delete-Unmatched target file option is selected.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (6 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

Additional Features

*Option to validate file using CRC32 binary comparison after successful file copy operation.

*Option to check all source and target files for binary match during folder scan/compare cycle (using CRC32). This check ensures what is on the target matches the source at a binary level.

*File recovery option to continue a file copy that was interrupted for some reason. If the source and target file name and date match but the target file is smaller, PeerSync will start the copy operation from the last byte that was sent the next time a sync operation is executed on the folder.

*Option to add or delete time from target file during folder comparison. This allows for synchronization of files between dissimilar time zones or to allow for some time difference between source and target in case target machine date is slightly different from source.

**Target File Time Change Option allows you to apply a time delta change to files upon successful synchronization.

Automation

Real-time folder monitoring on the host PC. This option allows for full file fault tolerance, i.e.: files are backed-up when changes occur so if failure of monitored folder occurs, virtually no data loss will be experienced.

Real-time option to restore all target files to original date and time. Use to restore unauthorized file changes or use to reset files in a training environment.

*Enhanced real-time file monitoring and updating option. This option allows the real-time feature in PeerSync to detect individual changes to files and synchronize only the file that changed without scanning the entire folder where the change occurred. Normally synchronization software scans and compares all files in a folder that is being synchronized. Under MS Windows NT4/2000, this feature is extended to the file/folder rename operations as well. If a file or folder is renamed, PeerSync will rename the corresponding target file or folder using rename functions as opposed to copying the newly renamed source folder to the target and then subsequently deleting the outdated target file/folder. This option greatly reduces time to synchronize and network bandwidth requirements.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (7 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

*Daily Timer scheduling features to schedule specific Filters or an entire Profile at specific times of the day for selected days of the week.

Compression

File compression/expansion for improved backup storage space utilization. Password protection available on compressed folders.

Compression option to synchronize by folder or by file.

Compression option for normal compression, maximum compression or maximum speed selection.

Pre/Post Process

Ability to launch applications/scripts or batch files before and after each filter.

Trigger Selections.

Global and Folder trigger support. PeerSync provides the ability to initiate a synchronization process based on a single file update.

Global Settings - Features selectable for the entire Profile (All Filters):

Operation Mode.

Optional administrative password to gain access to PeerSync operations when running on the system tray bar

Ability to create a preliminary (Pre-Sync) report prior to actual synchronization

Operation Mode screen Pre-Sync Report Options.

Retry open files option for real-time operations. If source or target file is lock by another operation or application, PeerSync can be set to retry the synchronization of the file until it is no longer locked, or for a specific number of tries. Interval of retry can also be set.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (8 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

Multiple event-driven options for detection of file/folder changes can now be set. Each method offers different advantages that may enhance operations in specific environments.

Synchronization scheduler function to execute active profile on a repetitive basis. Can also be set to monitor for local keyboard activity and suspend schedule if no one is currently working at the workstation.

Display option to turn on/off Profile Status in the Profiler.

Performance option to select Application Priority. Current Argument Display and Selection.

**Multiple Filter Threads for parallel processing of filters.

**Multiple Copy Threads for parallel processing of copying files.

**Additional PeerSync Status Display Features.

**Additional Tray Icon and Popup Menu Features

StartUp Options.

Profiles can be automatically added to Desktop or Start-Up folder from Profiler application or from the PS Wizard application. Additionally Profiles can be set to run at boot directly from within the Windows registry.

PeerSync can be automatically set up as an NT service directly from our Profiler application.

Current Profile Activity

Progress indicators in Profiler application display activity for current PeerSync operation.

Product Levels:

Pro II:

Includes 2 Remote Connection Licenses.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (9 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

*Pro III:

Includes all features from the Pro II Level.

Includes 2 Remote Connection Licenses.

**Pro IV:

Includes all features from the Pro II Level.

Includes all features from the Pro III Level.

Includes 3 Remote Connection Licenses.

PeerSync Pro II v6.0 Benefits

PeerSync Pro II:

Improved scan time and overall performance/speed in all modes of operation.

Tray Icon now has more features (i.e.: view log files, view status display, open source and target folder, etc.).

File read/write buffer size option gives the ability to tweak load balancing and performance of file transfers.

Deletion options to preserve paths and/or create variable path directories of moved unmatched target files.

Ability to distribute or not distribute the Graphical User Interface (GUI) for administrative purposes

Arguments are now saved/loaded to/from Profile files allowing for the ability to distribute a file without updating logon scripts.

Additional reporting features such as elapsed time, file transfer time, more detailed summary, byte counts for data processed and date-time stamp of changes under certain modes.

The ability to transfer NT security descriptions (ACLs)

The ability to synchronize files and folders containing

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (10 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

Unicode/Macintosh/Chinese characters in their names

The addition of file compression, allowing for compression of directories by file

Quick-Sync option via Windows Explorer for quick and easy synchronization of folders.

New reporting options: Log file backups and maximum size.

Ability to adjust to target machine clock.

Application Priority selection

Date selection option to allow for folder archiving based on past x amount of days.

Run as NT Service

Variable Path Selections

PeerSync Pro III v6.0 Benefits

PeerSync Pro III:

All Pro II benefits

Bi-directional Synchronization Option: Less traffic at start and less comparing of source and target folders to further increase performance during initial scans.

Enhanced Real-time Option: Less CPU usage, true file/folder renames, no scanning of directories in real-time.

FTP synchronization.

Email reporting: Ability to send summary, standard or error only email reports.

Daily timer scheduling with the ability to reload Profiles.

Ability to use time delta during comparison and after file copy.

CRC32 validation options

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (11 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide PeerSync Pro IV v6.0 Benefits

PeerSync Pro IV:

All Pro II benefits

All Pro III benefits

SNMP Reporting

Added Performance Features

Added Display Features

Bandwidth Throttling: The ability to tweak the amount of bandwidth allowed for file synchronization over a network

Parallel Processing: With the options to use Multiple Filter Threads and Multiple Copy Threads, you can synchronize multiple files at the same time to multiple locations

PeerSync Performance

Test Environment:

Situation: Initial bi-directional synchronization of a user directory over a network with real-time monitoring of the remote directory replicating to the local copy of that directory.

Source Folder N: Remote Machine - HP1000 D Drive (Win 2000).

Target Folder D: Local Machine - Image 8.1 (Win NT4).

Initial Scan Tests: Time in seconds to synchronize during the initial sync of folders from the remote N drive to the local D drive for three different scenarios.

Results:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (12 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

Pro II v4.3 Base v6.0 Pro II v6.0 Pro III v6.0 Pro IV v6.0

Test1 357.5 284.0 255.0 213.5 203.0

Test2 317.5 293.0 287.0 255.0 250.0

Test3 115.0 106.0 80.0 54.0 50.0

Real-time Tests: Time in seconds to synchronize real-time detection from the remote N drive to the local D drive for six different scenarios.

Results:

Pro II v4.3 Base v6.0 Pro II v6.0 Pro III v6.0 Pro IV v6.0

Test4 90.0 87.0 70.0 0.1 0.1

Test5 167.0 163.0 133.0 0.1 0.1

Test6 15.0 11.5 10.0 0.1 0.1

Test7 15.0 12.5 10.5 2.6 2.5

Test8 17.0 15.0 11.5 0.1 0.1

Test9 14.0 11.0 8.0 0.1 0.1

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (13 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

Test Overviews and Results:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (14 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

Test1 – Initial Scan Move: Initial move of data from Source Folder N to target Folder D.

Source Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files

Total Data: 5,000 Files, 20 Folders.

Total Size: 4.88 MB.

Target Folder: None.

Total Data: None.

Total Size: N/A.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (15 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

Test2 – Initial Scan Merge: Merge data of Source Folder N and Target Folder D.

Source Folder: 10 Folders containing 250 1KB Files

Total Data: 2,500 Files, 10 Folders.

Total Size: 2.44 MB.

Target Folder: 10 Folders containing 250 1KB Files

Total Data: 2,500 Files, 10 Folders.

Total Size: 2.44 MB.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (16 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

Test3 – Initial Scan Compare: Initial scan (comparison only) from Source Folder N to Target Folder D after data is already synchronized.

Source Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files

Total Data: 5,000 Files, 20 Folders.

Total Size: 4.88 MB.

Target Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files

Total Data: 5,000 Files, 20 Folders.

Total Size: 4.88 MB.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (17 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

Test4 – Real-time Small Folder Rename: Real-time detection of a 5MB Folder Rename.

Source Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing ten 513KB Files

Total Data: 5,010 Files, 21 Folders.

Total Size: 9.88 MB.

Target Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing ten 513KB Files

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (18 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

Total Data: 5,010 Files, 21 Folders.

Total Size: 9.88 MB.

Test5 – Real-time Large Folder Rename: Real-time detection of a 75MB Folder Rename.

Source Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing 150 513KB Files

Total Data: 5,010 Files, 21 Folders.

Total Size: 79.8 MB.

Target Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing 150 513KB Files

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (19 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

Total Data: 5,010 Files, 21 Folders.

Total Size: 79.8 MB.

Test6 – Real-time File Rename: Real-time a 10MB File Rename.

Source Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing 150 513KB Files and root folder containing 1000 zero size files and one 1MB file.

Total Data: 6,151 Files, 21 Folders.

Total Size: 89.8 MB.

Target Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing 150 513KB Files and root folder containing 1000 zero size files

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (20 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

and one 1MB file.

Total Data: 6,151 Files, 21 Folders.

Total Size: 89.8 MB.

Test7 – Real-time File Add-Update: Real-time a 10MB File add or update.

Source Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing 150 513KB Files and root folder containing 1000 zero size files http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (21 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

and one 1MB file.

Total Data: 6,151 Files, 21 Folders.

Total Size: 89.8 MB.

Target Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing 150 513KB Files and root folder containing 1000 zero size files and one 1MB file.

Total Data: 6,151 Files, 21 Folders.

Total Size: 89.8 MB.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (22 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

Test8 – Real-time File Move: Real-time a 10MB File move.

Source Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing 150 513KB Files and root folder containing 1000 zero size files and one 1MB file.

Total Data: 6,151 Files, 21 Folders.

Total Size: 89.8 MB.

Target Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing 150 513KB Files and root folder containing 1000 zero size files and one 1MB file.

Total Data: 6,151 Files, 21 Folders.

Total Size: 89.8 MB.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (23 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

Test9 – Real-time File Delete: Real-time a 10MB File delete.

Source Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing 150 513KB Files and root folder containing 1000 zero size files and one 1MB file.

Total Data: 6,151 Files, 21 Folders.

Total Size: 89.8 MB.

Target Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing 150 513KB Files and root folder containing 1000 zero size files and one 1MB file.

Total Data: 6,151 Files, 21 Folders.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (24 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

Total Size: 89.8 MB.

Requirements

To use the PeerSync family of products most effectively, verify that your system meets the necessary requirements.

System Requirements

Requirement Description

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (25 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Product Level Guide

Operating System Microsoft Windows 9x/Me/NT4/2000/XP Hardware Pentium II or higher 32 MB RAM (64+ MB recommended) Free Space: 5 MB (min.)

Conclusion

All tests demonstrated here are reproducible given the same network availability and hardware mentioned. These tests are the average of several runs were the deviation between runs was minimal.

As demonstrated in the preceding charts and graphs, PeerSync 6.0 has had some major performance improvements since version 4.x. The product has also been improved in usability and flexibility all based on meeting or exceeding customer requests and requirements.

Thank you for using PeerSync. If you would like additional information about any of our products, please visit our website at www.peersoftware.com

PeerSync is a trademark of the Peer Software Corporation. Microsoft Windows is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/psplg.html (26 of 26) [25/04/02 11:15:57] PeerSync Version 6.0

Introduction

The Peer Software PeerSync Product Level Guide demonstrates the different levels of PeerSync software available. The purpose of this guide is to provide information as to which product level suites your environments needs.

PeerSync

It is important to consider the following prerequisites when evaluating file and network management software: Flexibility and scalability Performance and efficiency Integrity and reliability Security Ease of use for developers, runtime administration and end-users Support of an open system

Why PeerSync?

PeerSync is a data management software package designed for flexible and reliable file synchronization, backup and replication.

Synchronization The process of comparing the last write time, as well as the size of files in a selected source folder with files in the selected target folder and taking a specific action. Files on the target are updated to match the files on the source. Backup Typical backup usually involves selecting, compressing and restoring files and moving them to backup media. Peer “backs up” files to “live” media such as hard drives, networked computers and network attached storage devices (NAS). One advantage is that this allows you to recover files on a folder tree that match the original. The files can be selected immediately for restoration as opposed to waiting for the correct tape to be inserted into a tape drive. Replication Similar to synchronization, with the added benefit of removing files from the select target folders that do not have corresponding files in the source. Using replication, source and target folders more accurately reflect each other’s content.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 1

PeerSync Version 6.0

Three versions of PeerSync have been developed to meet your current and future business needs: PeerSync Pro II. PeerSync Pro III. PeerSync Pro IV (Server Edition).

All versions of PeerSync offer an easy-to-use interface, PSProfiler, which may or may not be shipped with the PeerSync engine.

There are varying levels of synchronization and other features based upon the version of the software you have purchased.

PeerSync v6.0 Features

Overall Features: Runs under Win9x/Me/NT4/2000/XP. International date/time format support. Profiler interface application for simple Profile creation and maintenance. PeerSync Wizard application, which allows for quick “canned” backup and replication scenario selections. MS Explorer menu item added for “Quick-Sync Folder” selection directly from MS Windows Explorer. Profiler (GUI) runs independently of PeerSync (engine). Profiler filter listing displays “Last Run On” date for each filter and allows for Quick- Sync of specific filters without having to check/uncheck filters each time. Floating or pop-up windows are available for quick viewing of important filter information. Over 200 source/target filter sets can be created and stored in Profile files that can be run manually or automatically from command line arguments. Each filter can have a unique set of options allowing for very precise folder matching in an automated environment. Allows for multiple configurations and command line operation. Detailed file/folder synchronization activity and problem reporting with option to overwrite reports and control content and maximum size of reports. Reports are backed-up when they exceed max limit selection. File attribute transfer from source to target during synchronization operations. Variable path/folder naming conventions are supported allowing for Profile and command line arguments to be used by multiple users. Some of the supported values are: %USERNAME%, %COMPUTERNAME%, various date and time variables such as %DATE%, %DATETIME%, %MMYY%, etc. Ability to customize the options to show in the “Selection Tree.” One way to do this is by right clicking on the tree when “Show all Profile Options” is not selected and selecting the “Customize” option. Tool bar buttons for commonly used menu items.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 2

PeerSync Version 6.0

Status screen viewable from PeerSync, which allows for you to view, print and save file adds, updates, deletions, exclusions, messages and many other status and reporting features. Update of Active Profile feature, located under the Run Menu and on the right side of Status Bar from the Profiler when changes are made to a Profile that is currently active and connected to the Profiler.

Filter Settings - Features selectable by (source-target folder selection):

Folder Selection UNC file path names supported (Network folder selection dialog). Folder Selection Source and Target folder Popup menu with Network Logon Settings feature.

FTP Selection *FTP site file synchronization option. This option allows any filter to automatically logon to an FTP server and synchronize files either to or from the local folders. Supports proxy servers/firewalls and has option to adjust for GMT time on FTP server side (tested with IIS FTP server supplied with MS Windows NT4/2000). *FTP Selection to Enable Passive Mode.

Exceptions Files/Folders can be updated or added, included or excluded via extensive filtering capabilities.

Reporting Completion status reporting for manual operations initiated from Profiler. Reporting option to Include Transfer time feature. Reporting option to clear the log file from the reporting screen. Reporting option to display the Log file variable path.

Admin Reporting Additional administrative reporting capability for network environments with multiple users reporting to a common PC for administrative purposes. Administrative Reporting option to report on errors only **Administrative SNMP Reporting features.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 3

PeerSync Version 6.0

Email Reporting *Email notification of synchronization activity can be sent upon completion of entire profile or during persistent synchronization operations. *Email Reporting option to report on errors only. *Email Reporting option to attach log files to emails.

File Options Delete unmatched target files option for complete replication capability. Ability to Include/exclude Unicode/Mac/Asian files in your synchronization. Deletion Option to move unmatched target files while preserving paths.

Performance Option to set the read-write buffer size allowing for better optimization of network bandwidth. Busier networks work better with smaller buffers. Less traffic and or faster networks benefit from larger buffers by moving data faster reducing transfer delays. *Network load balancing option will automatically set read/write buffer size based on recommendation from NIC network cards. (Installed NIC must also support this feature.) **Additional Performance Features. **Maximum Copy Threads option to be able to give or take away priorities to certain filters. **Bandwidth throttling option, which allows for the ability to control the amount of CPU used by PeerSync. **File Read/Write Buffer Size Upper Limit, which allows you to further increase the performance of PeerSync.

Alterations Revisioning option adds ability to keep virtually unlimited backed-up copies of target files helping to ensure multi-level file recovery. NT file security descriptions (ACLs) are optionally transferred to target file after successful file copy. Reset file archive attributes to allow for improved updates for subsequent operations. Allows PeerSync to behave like older backup utilities. (Requires archive attribute option in Exceptions screen.) Option to delete source file after successful synchronization operation. Ability to Include/exclude empty source folders when coping to target feature. Delete Exceptions from target folder feature.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 4

PeerSync Version 6.0

*Bi-directional synchronization feature with Smart-Delete. Files on target that are newer than their corresponding source files will be automatically brought back to the source folders. Any file that has a creation date newer that the last time the filter was run will be added to the source folders even if Delete-Unmatched target file option is selected.

Additional Features *Option to validate file using CRC32 binary comparison after successful file copy operation. *Option to check all source and target files for binary match during folder scan/compare cycle (using CRC32). This check ensures what is on the target matches the source at a binary level. *File recovery option to continue a file copy that was interrupted for some reason. If the source and target file name and date match but the target file is smaller, PeerSync will start the copy operation from the last byte that was sent the next time a sync operation is executed on the folder. *Option to add or delete time from target file during folder comparison. This allows for synchronization of files between dissimilar time zones or to allow for some time difference between source and target in case target machine date is slightly different from source. **Target File Time Change Option allows you to apply a time delta change to files upon successful synchronization.

Automation Real-time folder monitoring on the host PC. This option allows for full file fault tolerance, i.e.: files are backed-up when changes occur so if failure of monitored folder occurs, virtually no data loss will be experienced. Real-time option to restore all target files to original date and time. Use to restore unauthorized file changes or use to reset files in a training environment. *Enhanced real-time file monitoring and updating option. This option allows the real- time feature in PeerSync to detect individual changes to files and synchronize only the file that changed without scanning the entire folder where the change occurred. Normally synchronization software scans and compares all files in a folder that is being synchronized. Under MS Windows NT4/2000, this feature is extended to the file/folder rename operations as well. If a file or folder is renamed, PeerSync will rename the corresponding target file or folder using rename functions as opposed to copying the newly renamed source folder to the target and then subsequently deleting the outdated target file/folder. This option greatly reduces time to synchronize and network bandwidth requirements. *Daily Timer scheduling features to schedule specific Filters or an entire Profile at specific times of the day for selected days of the week.

Compression File compression/expansion for improved backup storage space utilization. Password protection available on compressed folders. Compression option to synchronize by folder or by file. Compression option for normal compression, maximum compression or maximum speed selection.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 5

PeerSync Version 6.0

Pre/Post Process Ability to launch applications/scripts or batch files before and after each filter. Trigger Selections. Global and Folder trigger support. PeerSync provides the ability to initiate a synchronization process based on a single file update.

Global Settings - Features selectable for the entire Profile (All Filters):

Operation Mode. Optional administrative password to gain access to PeerSync operations when running on the system tray bar Ability to create a preliminary (Pre-Sync) report prior to actual synchronization Operation Mode screen Pre-Sync Report Options. Retry open files option for real-time operations. If source or target file is lock by another operation or application, PeerSync can be set to retry the synchronization of the file until it is no longer locked, or for a specific number of tries. Interval of retry can also be set. Multiple event-driven options for detection of file/folder changes can now be set. Each method offers different advantages that may enhance operations in specific environments. Synchronization scheduler function to execute active profile on a repetitive basis. Can also be set to monitor for local keyboard activity and suspend schedule if no one is currently working at the workstation. Display option to turn on/off Profile Status in the Profiler. Performance option to select Application Priority. Current Argument Display and Selection. **Multiple Filter Threads for parallel processing of filters. **Multiple Copy Threads for parallel processing of copying files. **Additional PeerSync Status Display Features. **Additional Tray Icon and Popup Menu Features StartUp Options. Profiles can be automatically added to Desktop or Start-Up folder from Profiler application or from the PS Wizard application. Additionally Profiles can be set to run at boot directly from within the Windows registry. PeerSync can be automatically set up as an NT service directly from our Profiler application. Current Profile Activity Progress indicators in Profiler application display activity for current PeerSync operation.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 6

PeerSync Version 6.0

Product Levels: Pro II: Includes 2 Remote Connection Licenses. *Pro III: Includes all features from the Pro II Level. Includes 2 Remote Connection Licenses. **Pro IV: Includes all features from the Pro II Level. Includes all features from the Pro III Level. Includes 3 Remote Connection Licenses.

PeerSync Pro II v6.0 Benefits

PeerSync Pro II: Improved scan time and overall performance/speed in all modes of operation. Tray Icon now has more features (i.e.: view log files, view status display, open source and target folder, etc.). File read/write buffer size option gives the ability to tweak load balancing and performance of file transfers. Deletion options to preserve paths and/or create variable path directories of moved unmatched target files. Ability to distribute or not distribute the Graphical User Interface (GUI) for administrative purposes Arguments are now saved/loaded to/from Profile files allowing for the ability to distribute a file without updating logon scripts. Additional reporting features such as elapsed time, file transfer time, more detailed summary, byte counts for data processed and date-time stamp of changes under certain modes. The ability to transfer NT security descriptions (ACLs) The ability to synchronize files and folders containing Unicode/Macintosh/Chinese characters in their names The addition of file compression, allowing for compression of directories by file Quick-Sync option via Windows Explorer for quick and easy synchronization of folders. New reporting options: Log file backups and maximum size. Ability to adjust to target machine clock. Application Priority selection Date selection option to allow for folder archiving based on past x amount of days. Run as NT Service Variable Path Selections

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 7

PeerSync Version 6.0

PeerSync Pro III v6.0 Benefits

PeerSync Pro III: All Pro II benefits Bi-directional Synchronization Option: Less traffic at start and less comparing of source and target folders to further increase performance during initial scans. Enhanced Real-time Option: Less CPU usage, true file/folder renames, no scanning of directories in real-time. FTP synchronization. Email reporting: Ability to send summary, standard or error only email reports. Daily timer scheduling with the ability to reload Profiles. Ability to use time delta during comparison and after file copy. CRC32 validation options

PeerSync Pro IV v6.0 Benefits

PeerSync Pro IV: All Pro II benefits All Pro III benefits SNMP Reporting Added Performance Features Added Display Features Bandwidth Throttling: The ability to tweak the amount of bandwidth allowed for file synchronization over a network Parallel Processing: With the options to use Multiple Filter Threads and Multiple Copy Threads, you can synchronize multiple files at the same time to multiple locations

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 8

PeerSync Version 6.0

PeerSync Performance

Test Environment: Situation: Initial bi-directional synchronization of a user directory over a network with real-time monitoring of the remote directory replicating to the local copy of that directory. Source Folder N: Remote Machine - HP1000 D Drive (Win 2000). Target Folder D: Local Machine - Image 8.1 (Win NT4).

Initial Scan Tests: Time in seconds to synchronize during the initial sync of folders from the remote N drive to the local D drive for three different scenarios. Results:

Pro II v4.3 Base v6.0 Pro II v6.0 Pro III v6.0 Pro IV v6.0

Test1 357.5 284.0 255.0 213.5 203.0

Test2 317.5 293.0 287.0 255.0 250.0

Test3 115.0 106.0 80.0 54.0 50.0

Real-time Tests: Time in seconds to synchronize real-time detection from the remote N drive to the local D drive for six different scenarios. Results:

Pro II v4.3 Base v6.0 Pro II v6.0 Pro III v6.0 Pro IV v6.0

Test4 90.0 87.0 70.0 0.1 0.1

Test5 167.0 163.0 133.0 0.1 0.1

Test6 15.0 11.5 10.0 0.1 0.1

Test7 15.0 12.5 10.5 2.6 2.5

Test8 17.0 15.0 11.5 0.1 0.1

Test9 14.0 11.0 8.0 0.1 0.1

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 9

PeerSync Version 6.0

Test Overviews and Results:

1: Initial Scan Move 2: Initial Scan Merge 3: Initial Scan Compare 4: Real-time Small Folder Rename 5: Real-time Large Folder Rename 6: Real-time File Rename 7: Real-time File Add-Update 8: Real-time File Move 9: Real-time File Delete

400.0

350.0

300.0

250.0

200.0 Time (Seconds) 150.0

100.0

50.0

0.0 4.3 6.0 Pro II Pro III Pro IV PeerSync Level

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 10

PeerSync Version 6.0

Test1 – Initial Scan Move: Initial move of data from Source Folder N to target Folder D. Source Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files Total Data: 5,000 Files, 20 Folders. Total Size: 4.88 MB. Target Folder: None. Total Data: None. Total Size: N/A.

Initial Scan Move

400.0

350.0

300.0

250.0

Time (Seconds) 200.0

150.0

100.0

50.0

0.0 4.3 6.0 Pro II Pro III Pro IV Initial Scan Move 357.5 284.0 255.0 213.5 203.0 Product Level

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 11

PeerSync Version 6.0

Test2 – Initial Scan Merge: Merge data of Source Folder N and Target Folder D. Source Folder: 10 Folders containing 250 1KB Files Total Data: 2,500 Files, 10 Folders. Total Size: 2.44 MB. Target Folder: 10 Folders containing 250 1KB Files Total Data: 2,500 Files, 10 Folders. Total Size: 2.44 MB.

Initial Scan Merge

350.0

300.0

250.0

200.0 Time (Seconds) 150.0

100.0

50.0

0.0 4.3 6.0 Pro II Pro III Pro IV Initial Scan Merge 317.5 293.0 287.0 255.0 250.0 Product Level

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 12

PeerSync Version 6.0

Test3 – Initial Scan Compare: Initial scan (comparison only) from Source Folder N to Target Folder D after data is already synchronized. Source Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files Total Data: 5,000 Files, 20 Folders. Total Size: 4.88 MB. Target Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files Total Data: 5,000 Files, 20 Folders. Total Size: 4.88 MB.

Initial Scan Compare

120.0

100.0

80.0

Time (Seconds) 60.0

40.0

20.0

0.0 4.3 6.0 Pro II Pro III Pro IV Initial Scan Compare 115.0 106.0 80.0 54.0 50.0 Product Level

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 13

PeerSync Version 6.0

Test4 – Real-time Small Folder Rename: Real-time detection of a 5MB Folder Rename. Source Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing ten 513KB Files Total Data: 5,010 Files, 21 Folders. Total Size: 9.88 MB. Target Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing ten 513KB Files Total Data: 5,010 Files, 21 Folders. Total Size: 9.88 MB.

Real-time Small Folder Rename

90.0

80.0

70.0

60.0

50.0 Time (Seconds) 40.0

30.0

20.0

10.0

0.0 4.3 6.0 Pro II Pro III Pro IV Real-time Small Folder Rename 90.0 87.0 70.0 0.1 0.1 Product Level

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 14

PeerSync Version 6.0

Test5 – Real-time Large Folder Rename: Real-time detection of a 75MB Folder Rename. Source Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing 150 513KB Files Total Data: 5,010 Files, 21 Folders. Total Size: 79.8 MB. Target Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing 150 513KB Files Total Data: 5,010 Files, 21 Folders. Total Size: 79.8 MB.

Real-time Large Folder Rename

180.0

160.0

140.0

120.0

100.0 Time (Seconds) 80.0

60.0

40.0

20.0

0.0 4.3 6.0 Pro II Pro III Pro IV Real-time Large Folder Rename 167.0 163.0 133.0 0.1 0.1 Product Level

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 15

PeerSync Version 6.0

Test6 – Real-time File Rename: Real-time a 10MB File Rename. Source Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing 150 513KB Files and root folder containing 1000 zero size files and one 1MB file. Total Data: 6,151 Files, 21 Folders. Total Size: 89.8 MB. Target Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing 150 513KB Files and root folder containing 1000 zero size files and one 1MB file. Total Data: 6,151 Files, 21 Folders. Total Size: 89.8 MB.

Real-time File Rename

16.0

14.0

12.0

10.0

Time (Seconds) 8.0

6.0

4.0

2.0

0.0 4.3 6.0 Pro II Pro III Pro IV Real-time File Rename 15.0 11.5 10.0 0.1 0.1 Product Level

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 16

PeerSync Version 6.0

Test7 – Real-time File Add-Update: Real-time a 10MB File add or update. Source Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing 150 513KB Files and root folder containing 1000 zero size files and one 1MB file. Total Data: 6,151 Files, 21 Folders. Total Size: 89.8 MB. Target Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing 150 513KB Files and root folder containing 1000 zero size files and one 1MB file. Total Data: 6,151 Files, 21 Folders. Total Size: 89.8 MB.

Real-time File Add-Update

16.0

14.0

12.0

10.0

Time (Seconds) 8.0

6.0

4.0

2.0

0.0 4.3 6.0 Pro II Pro III Pro IV Real-time File Add-Update 15.0 12.5 10.5 2.6 2.5 Product Level

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 17

PeerSync Version 6.0

Test8 – Real-time File Move: Real-time a 10MB File move. Source Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing 150 513KB Files and root folder containing 1000 zero size files and one 1MB file. Total Data: 6,151 Files, 21 Folders. Total Size: 89.8 MB. Target Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing 150 513KB Files and root folder containing 1000 zero size files and one 1MB file. Total Data: 6,151 Files, 21 Folders. Total Size: 89.8 MB.

Real-time File Move

18.0

16.0

14.0

12.0

10.0 Time (Seconds) 8.0

6.0

4.0

2.0

0.0 4.3 6.0 Pro II Pro III Pro IV Real-time File Move 17.0 15.0 11.5 0.1 0.1 Product Level

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 18

PeerSync Version 6.0

Test9 – Real-time File Delete: Real-time a 10MB File delete. Source Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing 150 513KB Files and root folder containing 1000 zero size files and one 1MB file. Total Data: 6,151 Files, 21 Folders. Total Size: 89.8 MB. Target Folder: 20 Folders containing 250 1KB Files and 1 Folder containing 150 513KB Files and root folder containing 1000 zero size files and one 1MB file. Total Data: 6,151 Files, 21 Folders. Total Size: 89.8 MB.

Real-time File Delete

14.0

12.0

10.0

8.0 Time (Seconds) 6.0

4.0

2.0

0.0 4.3 6.0 Pro II Pro III Pro IV Real-time File Delete 14.0 11.0 8.0 0.1 0.1 Product Level

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 19

PeerSync Version 6.0

Requirements

To use the PeerSync family of products most effectively, verify that your system meets the necessary requirements.

System Requirements

Requirement Description Operating System Microsoft Windows 9x/Me/NT4/2000/XP Hardware Pentium II or higher 32 MB RAM (64+ MB recommended) Free Space: 5 MB (min.)

Conclusion

All tests demonstrated here are reproducible given the same network availability and hardware mentioned. These tests are the average of several runs were the deviation between runs was minimal.

As demonstrated in the preceding charts and graphs, PeerSync 6.0 has had some major performance improvements since version 4.x. The product has also been improved in usability and flexibility all based on meeting or exceeding customer requests and requirements.

Thank you for using PeerSync. If you would like additional information about any of our products, please visit our website at www.peersoftware.com

PeerSync is a trademark of the Peer Software Corporation. Microsoft Windows is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 20

Insert Generated Table of Contents here Save-N-Sync Help Manual Last Updated: 04-02-02

Contents (See Next: Registration)

Thank you for using Save-N-Sync. This product has been created in order to help you backup, synchronize, replicate, mirror, organize, restore and manage your data files and folders.

The following help topics are available: (For help using this Help file, Press F1)

Main Menu

Tool Bar

Action Bar

Folder Selection

Folder Display

File Status

Automation Bar

Global Options: Exceptions

Global Options: Reporting

Global Options: Settings

Global Options: Application

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (1 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

Command Line Arguments

Message Dialog

Product Levels

License

Save-N-Sync Installations: Save-N-Sync is shipped (downloaded) in a full installation program. To run, simply double click on the executable file from the explorer (or choose Start Menu Run option and the select the application).

Product Support All support of Save-N-Sync will be handled on our website (www.peersoftware.com) support page for this product or by sending email to our support box at [email protected].

The manufacturer of Save-N-Sync makes no warranties, implied or otherwise, for use of this product. User assumes all responsibility for any data loss or damage.

Menu (See Next: Tool Bar)

The menu allows you to access all necessary functions, actions and options used by the application.

File Gives you the ability to save application settings, select recent source-target folder selections, add Shortcuts to the Desktop and/or Startup Folder and to exit the application. Also, in the Workstation and Corporate levels it will allow for the saving, opening and reopening of recently used SyncList files.

View Allows you to view/hide the different sections of the application interface, view/clear log files and

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (2 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here allow access to the Global Options Dialog and Message Dialog.

Action Allows you to select, run and stop the desired action, as well as, the ability to turn On/Off the options to Use Real-time Monitoring, Run Every x secs and run at Shut Down depending on the level of product.

Help Allows you to access this Help file, Product Level Information, our Website, the About Screen and the Register Software Screen.

Evaluation During Evaluation, this item allows you to select the Level of Evaluation, Product Level Information Dialog, and to turn On/Off the option to display the Evaluation Level Selection Dialog at the start of the application.

Notes:

Some options/settings are not available or are disabled based on the Product Level and/or Windows Platform the software is installed on.

Tool Bar (See Next: Action Bar)

The Tool Bar section allows you to quickly access most o f the commonly used menu items. This section can be viewed/hidden by selecting/unselecting it under the View Main Menu item.

Standard and Desktop

Save Settings Allows you to save the current application settings as the default settings.

Stop

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (3 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

Allows you to stop the currently running Action.

Run Now Allows you to start the currently selected Action.

Options Allows you to view and edit the Global Options.

Help Allows you to access this help file.

Workstation and Corporate

New Allows you to create a new SyncList.

Open Allows you to open or reopen an existing SyncList.

Save Allows you to save the current SyncList.

Stop Allows you to stop the currently running Action.

Run Now Allows you to start the currently selected Action.

Options Allows you to view and edit the Global Options.

Help Allows you to access this help file.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (4 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

Action Bar (See Next: Folder Selection)

The Action Bar allows you to select the action you wish to perform and displays a description of the current selection. This section can be viewed/hidden by selecting/unselecting it under the View Main Menu item.

Action Selection Select the type of action that you wish to perform.

Action Description Description of the current action selected.

Action Selections - Descriptions

Standard synchronization - Synchronize filtered files from source to target folders

Bi-directional synchronization* - Synchronize filtered files from source to target and copy any newer target files back to source folders.

Replicate source to target - Synchronize filtered files from source to target folders and delete any files on target that do not have a matching source file

Replicate with exact match - Make filtered target files exactly match filtered source files including overwriting any newer files on target.

Delete matching target files*- Check filtered target folders for any files that match corresponding source files date, time and size; and delete the file off the target.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (5 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

Delete filtered files* - Delete target files that match filtered criteria.

Delete empty folders* - Delete target folders that contain no files.

Notes:

This section is not available in the Standard Level.

These features can be set via Command Line Arguments.

*These options are not available when the 'Use Real-time Monitoring' option is enabled.

Folder Selection (See Next: Folder Display)

Standard and Desktop The Folder Selection section allows you to select, browse for and view the source and target folders.

Source Folder Select a Source Folder by typing the file path into the field provided, dragging and dropping from MS Windows Explorer into the field provided or by using the Select Source Button.

Select Source Button This button opens a "Browse for Folder" dialog box: once this box has opened, locate your chosen

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (6 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here Source folder, select it using the left mouse button, and click "OK."

Open Source Button When this is selected a traditional MS navigation window is opened displaying the contents of whichever folder is currently shown in the Source Folder Selection.

Target Folder Select a Target Folder by typing the file path into the field provided, dragging and dropping from MS Windows Explorer into the field provided or by using the Select Target Button.

Select Target Button This button opens a "Browse for Folder" dialog box: once this box has opened, locate your chosen Target folder, select it using the left mouse button, and click "OK."

Open Target Button When this is selected a traditional MS navigation window is opened displaying the contents of whichever folder is currently shown in the Target Folder Selection.

Include Sub-folders Option to enable/disable the including of sub-folders during the selected Action.

Swap Source and Target Folders Allows you to quickly swap the source and target folder selections.

Workstation and Corporate The Folder Selection List section allows you to select multiple source and target folder selections. The Workstation product allows for three selections while the Corporate allows for five selections.

Add/Copy Button This button is toggled between Add and Copy depending on the attributes of the selected item. If the selected item does not have a source and target selected then the Add Button will be available. The Add Button will display a Folder Selection dialog where you can select a source folder, target folder, the option to include sub folders and a description for the source-target combination. If the

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (7 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here selected item does have a source and target selected then the Copy Button will be available. The Copy Button will make a duplicate copy of the selected item and add it to the Folder Selection List.

Edit Button The Edit Button will display a Folder Selection dialog where you can edit the source folder, target folder, the option to include sub folders and the description for the source-target combination. This button is enabled when the selected item has a source and target selected.

Delete Button The delete Button will delete the selected item in the Folder Selection List. This button is enabled when the selected item has a source and target selected.

Source Folder Select a Source Folder by typing the file path into the field provided, dragging and dropping from MS Windows Explorer into the field provided or by using the Select Source Button.

Select Source Button This button opens a "Browse for Folder" dialog box: once this box has opened, locate your chosen

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (8 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

Source folder, select it using the left mouse button, and click "OK."

Open Source Button When this is selected a traditional MS navigation window is opened displaying the contents of whichever folder is currently shown in the Source Folder Selection.

Target Folder Select a Target Folder by typing the file path into the field provided, dragging and dropping from MS Windows Explorer into the field provided or by using the Select Target Button.

Select Target Button This button opens a "Browse for Folder" dialog box: once this box has opened, locate your chosen Target folder, select it using the left mouse button, and click "OK."

Open Target Button When this is selected a traditional MS navigation window is opened displaying the contents of whichever folder is currently shown in the Target Folder Selection.

Include Sub-folders Option to enable/disable the including of sub-folders during the selected Action.

Swap Source and Target Folders Allows you to quickly swap the source and target folder selections.

Enable Auto-Description When this is selected the Description will be automatically created based on your source and target folder selections

Description Specifies the Description to use in the Folder Selection List for the selected source-target combination.

Source-target Folder Path Variables*

Variable folder paths can be used to create:

Dynamic archives for yearly, monthly, weekly and/or daily backups.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (9 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here Dynamic synchronization based on date.

Dynamic synchronization based on logged on user or machine name.

Dynamic synchronization based on personal folders or other variables read in from the registry.

The following variables can be used:

Date %Date% Time %Time% Date/Time %DateTime% Minute %Minute% Hour %Hour% Day %Day% Year %Year% Month/Year %MonthYear%

Minute (all formats) %n, nn% Hour (all formats) %h, hh% Day (all formats) %d, dd, ddd, dddd, ddddd, dddddd% Month (all formats) %m, mm, mmm, mmmm, mmmm% Year (all formats) %y, yy, yyyy%

User Name variable %UserName% Computer Name variable %ComputerName%

Windows Directory %WinDir% Windows %Windows% (also %SystemRoot%) System Temp Path %Temp% System Tmp Path %Tmp% System Drive Letter %SystemDrive% System 32 (WIN 9x/NT/00) %System32%

Note: You can also use any variables that are located in the registry under: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Explorer\Shell Folder

Depending upon the argument used, these folders will be dated, named after the currently logged user, named for the PC from which synchronization was launched, or based on a pre- http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (10 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here determined variable stored out and read in from the registry.

Notes:

Some of these features can be set via Command Line Arguments.

Folders can be dragged and dropped from MS Windows Explorer into these fields.

The drop-down lists will be dynamically populated with source-target folders, as they are set.

UNC names can be entered manually, or can be selected from the Network Neighborhood.

UNC names will appear in the form: \\COMPUTER\SHAREDDEVICE\PATH

*Variable Paths are only available in the Corporate Level.

Folder Display (See Next: File Status)

The Folder Display section displays the active file for the current source and target folders being acted upon by the current action.

Source Folder Display of the current source folder that the application is working on or will work on once started.

Target Folder Display of the current target folder that the application is working on or will work on once started.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (11 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here Active File Display of the current file that the application is working on or will work on once started.

Active File Size Display of the size of the current file that the application is working on.

File Progress Indicator Display of the completion status of the current file that the application is working on.

File Status (See Next: Automation Bar)

The File Status section displays statistics for the files acted upon during the current action.

Files Checked Display of the total number of files checked during the last run of the application.

Files Added Display of the total number of files added during the last run of the application.

Files Updated Display of the total number of files updated during the last run of the application.

Files Excluded Display of the total number of files excluded during the last run of the application.

Message Count Display of the total number of messages during the last run of the application. If there are any messages you can click on this label to display the Message Dialog.

Folders Checked Display of the total number of folders checked during the last run of the application.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (12 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here Folders Created Display of the total number of folders created during the last run of the application.

Folders Excluded Display of the total number of folders excluded during the last run of the application.

Checked Display of the total number of bytes checked during the last run of the application.

Updated Display of the total number of bytes updated during the last run of the application.

Deleted Display of the total number of bytes deleted during the last run of the application.

Elapsed Display of the Elapsed Time since the current process has started.

Current Status Displays the current status of the current process.

Automation Bar (See Next: Global Options: Exceptions)

The Status Bar section allows you to turn On/Off the timer and displays the status and elapsed time for the current action. This section can be viewed/hidden by selecting/unselecting it under the View Main Menu item.

Use Real-time Monitoring* This will run the application in real-time monitoring the source folder for changes.

Run Every x secs** This will run the application with the selected action, exceptions and other options every x seconds.

Run at Shut Down This will run the application at Shut Down.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (13 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

Stop Automation Button This will stop the application when running in an automated mode.

Notes:

Some of these features can be set via Command Line Arguments.

*This feature is not available in the Standard and Desktop Levels.

**This feature is not available in the Standard Level.

Global Options: Exceptions (See Next: Global Options: Reporting)

The Exceptions section allows you to Include or exclude specific strings from the current action.

Include File Types (using wildcards) Use this field to determine which file types will be included as part of synchronization. File Type

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (14 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here Inclusions are specified by a star command followed by the file extension (i.e. *.doc;*.wks, etc.). The default setting ( *.* ) includes all files. Multiple Inclusions will be semi/Colon delimited. Inclusions are not case sensitive, i.e. A = a.

Include Edit/Add Button This button will display a 'Exceptions' dialog that will allow you to add inclusions.

To add an extension, click "New", then type the desired extension into the field located at the bottom of the dialog. Repeat this process for each desired file type. Inclusions can be deleted by selecting them from the list and clicking the "Delete" key at the bottom of the dialog box. Once you have finished, click the "OK" button. The dialog will close and all of the Inclusions you have specified will automatically appear in the Include File Types field in the proper format (separated by semi/Colons).

Exclude Files/Folders (using sub-strings) Through this field, files can be selectively excluded from synchronization. Exclusions are set by specifying individual characters (i.e. s), sets of characters (i.e. user), or file extensions (i.e. .doc) which, if found within a file name, will exclude that file from synchronization. Multiple characters and strings will be semi/Colon delimited. These settings are not case sensitive, i.e. A = a

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (15 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

Exclude Edit/Add Button This button will display a 'Exceptions' dialog that will allow you to add exclusions.

To add an Exclusion click "New," then type the desired character or string into the field located at the bottom of the dialog. Repeat this process for each Exclusion. Entries can be deleted by selecting them from the list and clicking the "Delete" key at the bottom of the box. You can also use the browse button to select folders to exclude. Once you have finished, click the "OK" button. The box will close and all of the Exclusions you have specified will automatically appear in the Exclude Files field.

Notes:

Some of these features can be set via Command Line Arguments.

These options can be stored per SyncList file in the Workstation and Corporate Levels.

Inclusions/exclusions can be typed manually, or can be specified using either the Edit/Add Buttons or drop-down lists.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (16 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

You can use the exclude field to exclude specific folders from synchronization by specifying a folder name in file path format, i.e. \TEMP or C:\My Documents (these examples will exclude any folder path that contains these strings including sub-folders)

Files and/or Folders can be dragged and dropped from MS Windows Explorer into these fields and into the 'Exceptions' dialog box.

The drop-down lists will be dynamically populated with inclusions/exclusions, as they are set.

Global Options: Reporting (See Next: Global Options: Settings)

The Reporting section allows you to turn On/Off reporting, select, browse for and view the selected log file.

Reporting Selecting and turning this option On/Off will enable/disable log file reporting. Once checked, select a Log File by typing the file path into the field provided, or by using the Select Log File Button. By default, the log file field will use the path in which the application has been installed: in most cases this will be 'C:\Program Files\Application Name' and will assume a default log file

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (17 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here name such as Save-N-Sync.log.

Select Log File Button This button opens a "Select Directory" dialog box: once this box has opened, locate your chosen Log File directory, select it using the left mouse button, and click "OK."

View Log File Button When this is selected the log file will be displayed in the default text editor.

Clear Log File Button When this is selected the log file will be cleared.

Set the Maximum Log File Size to x Bytes Allows you to specify the maximum size of the log files to be created.

Set Number of Backup Files to x Allows you to specify the amount of backup log files to be created.

If you set the number of backup log files to 0 then at the time your log file reaches its maximum size it will be deleted and recreated on the next log entry. If you set the number of backup log files to a value of 1..n then when your log file reaches its maximum size it will be renamed to a file with the extension .bak plus the number backup the file is. Example: Setting the number of backup log files to 2 will produce the following log files: LogFileName.log (newest information) LogFileName.bak1 . LogFileName.bak2 (oldest information)

Misc - Use Unicode* Option to enable/disable the including of unicode files, folders and reporting during the selected Action.

Notes:

Some of these features can be set via Command Line Arguments.

These options can be stored per SyncList file in the Workstation and Corporate Levels.

The drop-down lists will be dynamically populated with log file names, as they are set.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (18 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

The log file name will be appended with the postfix '_unicode' if the 'Use Unicode' option is selected (only available under Windows NT/2K).

Files can be dragged and dropped from MS Windows Explorer into these fields and into the 'Reporting' field.

*This option is not available in the Standard Level or under Windows 9x/Me.

Global Options: Settings (See Next: Global Options: Application)

The Settings section allows you to set Performance and Message options.

Performance - Application Priority This option give you the ability to set the Application Priority to Background or Foreground. Setting the Application Priority to Background will allow for other applications to have a higher Priority then Save-N-Sync. Setting the Application Priority to Foreground will allow Save-N- Sync to have the same Priority as other applications, this is the default setting.

Display Message During Operation - Enable Message Display

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (19 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here Selecting this option will store messages in a dialog that can be accessed and displayed from the interface, view menu and from the tray icon.

Display Message During Operation - Auto Display Selecting this option will automatically display the Message Dialog when messages are added to it.

Display Message During Operation - Retain Last x Messages Allows you to specify the number of Messages to retain in the Message Dialog.

Notes:

Some of these features can be set via Command Line Arguments.

These options can be stored per SyncList file in the Workstation and Corporate Levels.

Global Options: Application (See Next: Command Line Arguments)

The Settings section allows you to set Auto Save and General Options settings.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (20 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

Auto Save Options - Always Save Defaults on Exit Selecting this option will automatically save application defaults (height, width, position, etc. ) on exit of the application.

Auto Save Options - Always Save Recent Selecting this option will automatically save recent selections or recent Action Lists depending on the level of product you are using.

General Options - Show Tray Icon Selecting this option will display the application as a tray icon in the system tray.

General Options - Show File Progress Indicator Selecting/unselecting this option will turn the file progress Indicator on or off.

General Options - Show Warning Message Before Action Selecting this option will show the Warning Dialog before the start of an action.

General Options - Set Access Password Button Selecting this button will allow you to specify a password for accessing and terminating the software from the tray icon.

General Options - Show Application Hints Selecting/unselecting this option will turn application hints on or off.

General Options - Load Last Selection at Start Selecting this option will load the last selection or the last recent Action List at start depending on the level of product you are using.

General Options - Scan Folders First* Selecting this option will scan the source and target folders before going into an automated state.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (21 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

Notes:

Some of these features can be set via Command Line Arguments.

These options pertain to the overall Application and cannot be stored per SyncList file.

*This feature is not available in the Standard Level.

Command Line Arguments (See Next: Message Dialog)

The applications Command Line Mode offers users the ability to configure a truly "hands-off" installation, where operation and distribution occurs from within an easily manageable, administrative environment. This mode allows Actions to be executed from logon scripts, system batch or command (CMD) files, detailed shortcuts, and shell commands.

Note: For the command line arguments described in this topic, note that attention is paid to punctuation, to the order in which arguments are entered, and that appropriate spaces are used to separate these arguments. Follow the format outlined in the examples provided.

Application Command Line Arguments The following arguments are appended to the end of the command line followed by a space and forward slash ( i.e. /A ). A space and forward slash are also used to separate each additional argument ( i.e. /A /R).

Note: Before creating Application Command Line Arguments what you might find useful are our Shortcuts: To create a shortcut from the interface and access the command line you want you can:

Set up the job you wish to run and run it from the interface.

Then go to the 'File-Shortcuts' menu item.

Select 'Add to Desktop' or 'Add to Startup Folder'.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (22 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

Create the Shortcut by selecting the OK Button.

Right click on the Shortcut and select 'Properties'.

Go to the target field and view/copy the command line string.

------Arguments: ------

/0:file

*SyncList (file = File): This argument is used to load a Save-N-Sync Synchronization List file.

Examples:

/0:"C:\My SNS\MyBackups.sns" Full path to file

/0:MyBackups.sns Will use install directory

MyBackups.sns Will use install directory (Must be first argument)

Note: This argument is not available in the Standard and Desktop Levels ------

/1:fldr Source Folder (fldr = Folder): This argument is used to select a source folder path.

Examples:

/1:"C:\My Documents" Folder with spaces

/1:C:\MyDocs Folder without spaces

------

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (23 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

/2:fldr Target Folder (fldr = Folder): This argument is used to select a target folder path.

Examples:

/2:"C:\My Documents Backup" Folder with spaces

/2:C:\MyDocsBackup Folder without spaces

------

/O:n Operation Mode Action (n = 0-6): This argument is used to select the operation mode action to be used.

0: Standard synchronization - Synchronize filtered files from source to target folders

1: Bi-directional synchronization** - Synchronize filtered files from source to target and copy any newer target files back to source folders.

2: Replicate source to target - Synchronize filtered files from source to target folders and delete any files on target that do not have a matching source file

3: Replicate with exact match - Make filtered target files exactly match filtered source files including overwriting any newer files on target.

4: Delete matching target files** - Check filtered target folders for any files that match corresponding source files date, time and size; and delete the file off the target.

5: Delete filtered files** - Delete target files that match filtered criteria.

6: Delete empty folders** - Delete target folders that contain no files.

Examples:

/O:1 Standard synchronization

/O:3 Replicate with exact match

/O:6 Delete empty folders

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (24 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

Note: This argument is not available in the Standard Level ------

/F+ or /F- Include sub-folders (On/Off): This argument is used to turn On/Off the include sub-folders option.

Examples:

/F Include sub-folders On

/F+ Include sub-folders On

/F- Include sub-folders Off

------

/U+ or /U- Use Unicode (On/Off): This argument is used to turn On/Off the use unicode option.

Examples:

/U Use Unicode On

/U+ Use Unicode On

/U- Use Unicode Off

Note: This argument is not available in the Standard Level or under Windows 9x/Me ------

/L+file or /L-file Use Log File (file = file name): This argument is used to turn on and specify a log file to use.

Examples:

/L+Save-N-Sync.log Reporting On - Use 'Save-N-Sync.log' in the install directory

/L+"D:\My Logs\Save-N-Sync.log" Reporting On - Use 'D:\My Logs\Save-N-Sync.log'

/L-"D:\My Logs\Save-N-Sync.log" Reporting Off - Use 'D:\My Logs\Save-N-Sync.log' as the default

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (25 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

------

/I:f1;f2..fn Include (fn = filters using wild cards): This argument is used to build a list of filters to include.

Examples:

/I:*.doc Include *.doc files

/I:*.exe Include *.exe files

/I:*.doc;*.exe Include *.doc and *.exe files

------

/E:f1;f2..fn Exclude (fn = sub-strings): This argument is used to build up a list of sub-strings to exclude.

Examples:

/E:.tmp Exclude files that contain '.tmp'

/E:\~ Exclude folders that start with '~'

/E:.tmp;\~ Exclude files that contain '.tmp' and folders that start with '~'

------

/P:n Application Priority (n = 1 or 2): This argument is used to set the Application Priority to Background (1) or Foreground (2).

Examples:

/P1 Set the Application Priority to Background

/P2 Set the Application Priority to Foreground (Default)

------

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (26 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here /M+ or /M- Message Dialog: This argument is used to display or not display the Message Dialog during operation.

A+ or A- Auto Display: If this option is turned on, the message dialog will be automatically displayed when a message is added to it.

Message Count Retain Last x messages: This value specifies the amount of messages to be retained in the Message Dialog.

Examples:

/MA25 Use Message Dialog, Auto Display and Retain last 25 messages

/M-A25 Do not use Message Dialog, Auto Display and Retain last 25 messages

/M-A-25 Do not use Message Dialog, do not Auto Display and Retain last 25 messages

------

/G General Options: This argument is used to set the following General Options.

H+ or H- Show Hints: Show Application hints.

L+ or L- Load Last Selection: Load the last selection upon start of the application.

M+ or M- Show Message Warning: Show a warning message before executing an action.

P+ or P- Show Progress: Show progress during application execution.

S+ or S- Scan First: Scan the source and target folders before going into an automated state.

T+ or T-

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (27 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here Show Tray Icon: Show an icon in the system tray to access the application.

Examples:

/GHLMPST All Options On

/GH+L+M+P+S+T+ All Options On

/GH-L-M-P-S-T- All Options Off

Note: The 'Scan First' option of this argument is not available in the Standard Level ------

/A Auto Run: This argument is used to run the selected action automatically.

M Minimized: This argument is used to run the selected action automatically and minimized.

Q Quit When Done: This argument is used to run the selected action automatically and then quit when done.

/H ***Hide Application: This argument is used to run the selected action automatically and hidden and then quit when done.

Examples:

/AM Auto Run - Minimized

/AMQ Auto Run - Minimized - Quit When Done

/AH Auto Run - Hide Application

------/R Use Real-time Monitoring: This argument is used to turn on the Use Real-time Monitoring option.

Examples:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (28 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

/R Use Real-time Monitoring On

/R+ Use Real-time Monitoring On

/R- Use Real-time Monitoring Off

Note: This argument is not available in the Standard and Desktop Levels ------

/S+s or /S-s Run Every x secs (s = seconds): This argument is used to turn on and set the interval of the timer.

Examples:

/S+30 Run Every 30 secs On

/S+60 Run Every 60 secs On

/S-60 Run Every x secs Off - Use 60 as the default

Note: This argument is not available in the Standard Level ------

/CS+ or CS- Run at Shut Down: This argument is used to turn on the Run at Shut Down option.

Examples:

/CS Run at Shut Down On

/CS+ Run at Shut Down On

/CS- Run at Shut Down Off

------

Notes:

Any arguments containing spaces must be enclosed by quotes.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (29 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

*This argument is only available in the Workstation and Corporate products. When using this argument source and target folders, as well as, many other settings/options will be read in from the SyncList file. Also, the preceding '/0:' is not necessary if this is the first argument used.

**These options are not available during real-time.

***This argument is not available during evaluation.

Message Dialog (See Next: Product Levels)

The message dialog displays any messages that have occurred during the current operation. You can specify the Msg Count by selecting this value for the amount of messages to retain. You may also view the date and details for each message by clicking on that message. The options on how and when to display this dialog can also be selected from the Global Options - Settings screen.

File Gives you the ability to close the Message Dialog and to terminate the Application.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (30 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here Options Allows you to turn On/Off the Auto Display option, turn On/Off the Show Tray Icon Option, Clear the Message List, view/clear the Log File, and Show the Application.

Notes:

Some of these features can be set via Command Line Arguments.

Some of these features can be set from the Global Options - Applications screen.

Warning Dialog The Warning is displayed before starting a Run Now scan, Scheduled scan or Real-time monitoring if the 'Show Warning Before Action' option is checked.

The 'Scan Folders First' option is available before starting Scheduled scans and Real-time monitoring mode and if checked will simulate a Run Now scan before entering one of these automated modes.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (31 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here Notes:

Some of these features can be set via Command Line Arguments.

Some of these features can be set from the Global Options - Settings screen.

Shortcuts To create a shortcut from the interface do the following:

Set up the job you wish to run and run it from the interface.

Then go to the 'File-Shortcuts' Main Menu item.

Select 'Add to Desktop' or 'Add to Startup Folder'.

Create the Shortcut by selecting the 'OK' Button.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (32 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

Product Levels and Licensing (See Next: License)

Save-N-Sync comes in different levels, each level contains features from the previous level with additional features.

Product Levels

Standard: - File and folder synchronization - Exceptions: file and folder inclusions - Exceptions: file and folder exclusions - Reporting of synchronization activity - Complete command line operation - Ability to create shortcuts on the desktop - Ability to create shortcuts in the startup folder

Desktop: - All Options from the Standard Level - Bi-directional synchronization option - Replicate with exact match option - Delete matching target files option - Delete filtered files option - Delete empty folders option - Ability to synchronize Unicode files and folders - Interval timer to execute actions on a repetitive basis

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (33 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

Workstation: - All Options from the Standard Level - All Options from the Desktop Level - Ability to configure, save and load SyncList files. - Real-time file change detection and synchronization - Allows up to three source-target folder selections

Corporate: - All Options from the Standard Level - All Options from the Desktop Level - Includes five User Licenses. - Ability to configure, save and load SyncList files. - Real-time file change detection and synchronization - Allows up to five source-target folder selections - Variable source-target folder path name to customize target selection

Product Licensing

All levels of Save-N-Sync can be licensed for single or multiple users and/or single or multiple remote connections.

User Licensing: A single user license, by default, comes with right to install/execute the software on one PC (Server or Workstation) and connect to one remote PC or unlimited local drives. A license must be purchased for each PC where the product will be installed, executed or launched. This also applies to Enterprise installations that run the software off a network file server.

Connection Licensing: Save-N-Sync comes with the ability to connect to one remote PC. If you need to synchronize files from the local PC to multiple remote PCs, you will need to purchase a connection license for each additional remote PC you want to connect to. A remote connection license applies to all drives/folders on a single remote PC you are connecting to.

For more information about Product Levels and Licensing please visit our web site: www.peersoftware.com

To purchase additional Remote Connection licenses, please contact us for additional information.

Note: Peer Software is quite flexible in assembling different combinations of option packages then the ones listed here for enterprise installations with customers' requirements in mind. Please contact us for such requests and for more detail of the Save-N-Sync option packages that are available.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (34 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

Registration (See Next: Main Menu)

If this is an unregistered or Evaluation Copy of Save-N-Sync, you can register it with Peer Software, Inc. as a fully licensed copy by providing credit card information via phone or secure Internet registration, or by sending a check or money order to the address below (see included "readme.txt" file for pricing information).

Register online via secure internet credit card registration at: www.peersoftware.com

Register by phone via credit card by calling: (631) 979-1770 between the hours of 9:00 AM and 4:00 PM EST

Register by mail, send check or money order to: Peer Software, Inc. 1363 Veterans Highway, Suite 26 Hauppauge, NY 11788

Product Support All support of Save-N-Sync will be handled on our website (www.peersoftware.com) support page for tis product or by sending email to our support box at [email protected].

Information Required:

Full name (as it appears on the credit card)

Address (City, State / Province, Country, and Postal Code)

Phone Number

Entire Card Number

Card Expiration Date

Email Address

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (35 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

(Peer Software will send the Authorization Key required to unlock Save-N-Sync’s Evaluation. This key is to be entered during the installation of the software.)

Quantity Discounts - See Web site for more information.

Save-N-Sync may not be commercially distributed or distributed by government agencies including their contractors UNLESS registration fees are paid for by the distributing party.

See License agreement for product redistribution.

Note Regarding Updates: As new updates/changes become available, updated versions of the software will be posted on our Internet Web page "www.peersoftware.com." Check this page periodically to download the latest executables. Your Authorization Key will continue to work with updated versions unless a major release is issued, or Save-N-Sync is installed in a different folder than the previously installed/authorized version.

Entering Your User Information and Password

Evaluation copies do not require user information and passwords.

Registration copies require you to enter a Registration Key into the Register Software Screen.

Register Software Screen

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (36 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

To Access the above screen go to the 'Help - Register Save-N-Sync' Menu item or select the 'Enter Authorization Key' link from the Evaluation About Screen.

Terms And Conditions Read License agreement before using this program.

Suggestions, Comments, or Requests for Support:

Peer Software, Inc. 1363 Veterans Highway, Suite 26, Hauppauge, NY 11788 Fax : 631-979-1870 Email: [email protected]

Copyright 1993-2002, Peer Software, Inc.

Save-N-Sync is a registered trademark of Peer Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Reproduction in whole or in part without permission is strictly prohibited.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (37 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here

License (Go Back to: Contents)

YOU SHOULD READ CAREFULLY THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE USING OR DISTRIBUTING THIS SOFTWARE. USING OR DISTRIBUTING THIS SOFTWARE INDICATES ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS.

COPYRIGHT

This software program (hereafter the "Software") and documentation (hereafter the "Documentation") is copyrighted and remains the property of Peer Software, Inc. (Formerly known as TDM, Inc.) All rights are reserved.

LICENSE

Peer Software, Inc. hereby grants you (hereafter the "Purchaser") a limited, non-exclusive license to use the Software and accompanying Documentation contained in the trial ware distribution package (hereafter called the "Trial ware Package") you received. The Trial ware Package consists of copies of the Software and Documentation received via an electronic transfer mechanism or an electronic storage medium including, but not limited to, diskette, hard disk, removable disk, tape or optical devices such as CD-ROM or WORM.

You may use the Trial ware Package on one or more computers provided there is no chance that it will used simultaneously on more than one computer. If you need to use the Software on more than one computer simultaneously or on a network, please contact Peer Software, Inc. for information about network licenses.

You are not obtaining title to the Software or Documentation or any copyright rights. You may not sub license, lease, rent, sell, convey, translate, modify, decompile, incorporate into another product, convert to another programming language, reverse engineer or disassemble the Software or Documentation for any purpose.

NETWORK LICENSE

Multiple users on a network (e.g. a LAN) requiring access to the Software and Documentation must purchase a Network License. Two forms of Network Licenses are offered, a Site License and a Concurrent User License. With a Site License, any user who accesses the Software or

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (38 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here Documentation requires a user license, regardless of the frequency of use. Once a Site License is purchased, Software and Documentation may be copied to all users who have been licensed.

The Concurrent User License allows the licensed number of users to simultaneously access the Software and Documentation. The Purchaser agrees that he will operate metering software, which restricts the simultaneous number of users to the quantity purchased. The Software and Documentation must be installed on network servers under the control of metering software.

Both Site and Concurrent User Licenses allow installation of the Software and Documentation to any number of servers on any number of geographic sites, limited only by the quantity of licenses purchased.

TERM AND TRIAL PERIOD

You are permitted to use the Software Package for a trial period (hereafter the "Trial Period") of a limited amount of days or uses (whichever comes first) after receipt of the Trial ware Package. After such time, if you continue to use the Trial ware Package, you must register your copy with Peer Software, Inc. Failure to register after the Trial Period constitutes termination of this license. Upon registration, a password (hereafter called the "Password") will be provided to eliminate the registration reminder screen.

This license is effective until terminated. You may terminate it by destroying the Software, Documentation, and all copies thereof. This license will also terminate if you fail to comply with any of the terms or conditions herein. You agree, upon such termination, to destroy all Software, Documentation, and copies thereof.

LIMITED WARRANTY

THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. PEER SOFTWARE, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES RELATING TO THIS SOFTWARE, WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND ALL SUCH WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMED.

EXCLUSIVE REMEDY

YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND PEER SOFTWARE, INC.'S ENTIRE LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTIONS WITH THE SOFTWARE, DOCUMENTATION, AND/OR THIS LICENSE (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION FOR BREACH OF

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (39 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Insert Generated Table of Contents here WARRANTY OR INFRINGEMENT) SHALL BE, AT PEER SOFTWARE, INC.'S OPTION, THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR REFUND OF REGISTRATION FEES.

LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY

IN NO EVENT SHALL PEER SOFTWARE, INC. OR ANYONE ELSE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN THE CREATION, PRODUCTION, OR DELIVERY OF THIS SOFTWARE SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH SOFTWARE EVEN IF PEER SOFTWARE, INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR CLAIMS.

Some states do not allow the exclusion of the limit of liability for consequential or incidental damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you.

BACK-UP

You may make as many copies of the Trial ware Package as you need for back-up purposes only.

DISTRIBUTION

You may distribute the Trial ware Package to others via an electronic transfer mechanism or electronic storage media provided that no files are deleted from the Original Distribution Trial ware Package or are modified in any way. Files may be added to the Trial ware Package expressly for the purpose of identifying the party distributing the Trial ware Package. You may also place the Trial ware Package into any archive or compressed format for ease of distribution.

You may not distribute the Password to others under any circumstances.

GENERAL

This agreement shall be governed by the laws of the state of New York and shall inure to the benefit of Peer Software, Inc. and any successors, administrators, heirs, and assigns. Any action or proceeding brought by either party against the other arising out of or related to this agreement shall be brought only in a STATE or FEDERAL COURT of competent jurisdiction located in Suffolk County, New York. The parties hereby consent to appear in person in jurisdiction of said courts.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/sns20.html (40 of 40) [25/04/02 11:16:35] Save-N-Sync Help Manual

Save-N-Sync Help Manual Last Updated: 04-02-02

Contents

(See Next: Registration)

Thank you for using Save-N-Sync. This product has been created in order to help you backup, synchronize, replicate, mirror, organize, restore and manage your data files and folders.

The following help topics are available: (For help using this Help file, Press F1)

Main Menu Tool Bar Action Bar Folder Selection Folder Display File Status Automation Bar Global Options: Exceptions Global Options: Reporting Global Options: Settings Global Options: Application Command Line Arguments Message Dialog Product Levels License

Save-N-Sync Installations: Save-N-Sync is shipped (downloaded) in a full installation program. To run, simply double click on the executable file from the explorer (or choose Start Menu Run option and the select the application).

Product Support All support of Save-N-Sync will be handled on our website (www.peersoftware.com) support page for this product or by sending email to our support box at [email protected].

The manufacturer of Save-N-Sync makes no warranties, implied or otherwise, for use of this product. User assumes all responsibility for any data loss or damage.

Menu

(See Next: Tool Bar)

The menu allows you to access all necessary functions, actions and options used by the application.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 1 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

File Gives you the ability to save application settings, select recent source-target folder selections, add Shortcuts to the Desktop and/or Startup Folder and to exit the application. Also, in the Workstation and Corporate levels it will allow for the saving, opening and reopening of recently used SyncList files.

View Allows you to view/hide the different sections of the application interface, view/clear log files and allow access to the Global Options Dialog and Message Dialog.

Action Allows you to select, run and stop the desired action, as well as, the ability to turn On/Off the options to Use Real-time Monitoring, Run Every x secs and run at Shut Down depending on the level of product.

Help Allows you to access this Help file, Product Level Information, our Website, the About Screen and the Register Software Screen.

Evaluation During Evaluation, this item allows you to select the Level of Evaluation, Product Level Information Dialog, and to turn On/Off the option to display the Evaluation Level Selection Dialog at the start of the application.

Notes: Some options/settings are not available or are disabled based on the Product Level and/or Windows Platform the software is installed on.

Tool Bar

(See Next: Action Bar)

The Tool Bar section allows you to quickly access most o f the commonly used menu items. This section can be viewed/hidden by selecting/unselecting it under the View Main Menu item.

Standard and Desktop

Save Settings Allows you to save the current application settings as the default settings.

Stop Allows you to stop the currently running Action.

Run Now Allows you to start the currently selected Action.

Options Allows you to view and edit the Global Options.

Help Allows you to access this help file.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 2 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

Workstation and Corporate

New Allows you to create a new SyncList.

Open Allows you to open or reopen an existing SyncList.

Save Allows you to save the current SyncList.

Stop Allows you to stop the currently running Action.

Run Now Allows you to start the currently selected Action.

Options Allows you to view and edit the Global Options.

Help Allows you to access this help file.

Action Bar

(See Next: Folder Selection)

The Action Bar allows you to select the action you wish to perform and displays a description of the current selection. This section can be viewed/hidden by selecting/unselecting it under the View Main Menu item.

Action Selection Select the type of action that you wish to perform.

Action Description Description of the current action selected.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 3 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

Action Selections - Descriptions

Standard synchronization - Synchronize filtered files from source to target folders

Bi-directional synchronization* - Synchronize filtered files from source to target and copy any newer target files back to source folders.

Replicate source to target - Synchronize filtered files from source to target folders and delete any files on target that do not have a matching source file

Replicate with exact match - Make filtered target files exactly match filtered source files including overwriting any newer files on target.

Delete matching target files*- Check filtered target folders for any files that match corresponding source files date, time and size; and delete the file off the target.

Delete filtered files* - Delete target files that match filtered criteria.

Delete empty folders* - Delete target folders that contain no files.

Notes: This section is not available in the Standard Level. These features can be set via Command Line Arguments. *These options are not available when the 'Use Real-time Monitoring' option is enabled.

Folder Selection

(See Next: Folder Display)

Standard and Desktop The Folder Selection section allows you to select, browse for and view the source and target folders.

Source Folder Select a Source Folder by typing the file path into the field provided, dragging and dropping from MS Windows Explorer into the field provided or by using the Select Source Button.

Select Source Button This button opens a "Browse for Folder" dialog box: once this box has opened, locate your chosen Source folder, select it using the left mouse button, and click "OK."

Open Source Button When this is selected a traditional MS navigation window is opened displaying the contents of whichever

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 4 Save-N-Sync Help Manual folder is currently shown in the Source Folder Selection.

Target Folder Select a Target Folder by typing the file path into the field provided, dragging and dropping from MS Windows Explorer into the field provided or by using the Select Target Button.

Select Target Button This button opens a "Browse for Folder" dialog box: once this box has opened, locate your chosen Target folder, select it using the left mouse button, and click "OK."

Open Target Button When this is selected a traditional MS navigation window is opened displaying the contents of whichever folder is currently shown in the Target Folder Selection.

Include Sub-folders Option to enable/disable the including of sub-folders during the selected Action.

Swap Source and Target Folders Allows you to quickly swap the source and target folder selections.

Workstation and Corporate The Folder Selection List section allows you to select multiple source and target folder selections. The Workstation product allows for three selections while the Corporate allows for five selections.

Add/Copy Button This button is toggled between Add and Copy depending on the attributes of the selected item. If the selected item does not have a source and target selected then the Add Button will be available. The Add Button will display a Folder Selection dialog where you can select a source folder, target folder, the option to include sub folders and a description for the source-target combination. If the selected item does have a source and target selected then the Copy Button will be available. The Copy Button will make a duplicate copy of the selected item and add it to the Folder Selection List.

Edit Button The Edit Button will display a Folder Selection dialog where you can edit the source folder, target folder, the option to include sub folders and the description for the source-target combination. This button is enabled when the selected item has a source and target selected.

Delete Button The delete Button will delete the selected item in the Folder Selection List. This button is enabled when the selected item has a source and target selected.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 5 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

Source Folder Select a Source Folder by typing the file path into the field provided, dragging and dropping from MS Windows Explorer into the field provided or by using the Select Source Button.

Select Source Button This button opens a "Browse for Folder" dialog box: once this box has opened, locate your chosen Source folder, select it using the left mouse button, and click "OK."

Open Source Button When this is selected a traditional MS navigation window is opened displaying the contents of whichever folder is currently shown in the Source Folder Selection.

Target Folder Select a Target Folder by typing the file path into the field provided, dragging and dropping from MS Windows Explorer into the field provided or by using the Select Target Button.

Select Target Button This button opens a "Browse for Folder" dialog box: once this box has opened, locate your chosen Target folder, select it using the left mouse button, and click "OK."

Open Target Button When this is selected a traditional MS navigation window is opened displaying the contents of whichever folder is currently shown in the Target Folder Selection.

Include Sub-folders Option to enable/disable the including of sub-folders during the selected Action.

Swap Source and Target Folders Allows you to quickly swap the source and target folder selections.

Enable Auto-Description When this is selected the Description will be automatically created based on your source and target folder

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 6 Save-N-Sync Help Manual selections

Description Specifies the Description to use in the Folder Selection List for the selected source-target combination.

Source-target Folder Path Variables*

Variable folder paths can be used to create:

Dynamic archives for yearly, monthly, weekly and/or daily backups. Dynamic synchronization based on date. Dynamic synchronization based on logged on user or machine name. Dynamic synchronization based on personal folders or other variables read in from the registry.

The following variables can be used:

Date %Date% Time %Time% Date/Time %DateTime% Minute %Minute% Hour %Hour% Day %Day% Year %Year% Month/Year %MonthYear%

Minute (all formats) %n, nn% Hour (all formats) %h, hh% Day (all formats) %d, dd, ddd, dddd, ddddd, dddddd% Month (all formats) %m, mm, mmm, mmmm, mmmm% Year (all formats) %y, yy, yyyy%

User Name variable %UserName% Computer Name variable %ComputerName%

Windows Directory %WinDir% Windows %Windows% (also %SystemRoot%) System Temp Path %Temp% System Tmp Path %Tmp% System Drive Letter %SystemDrive% System 32 (WIN 9x/NT/00) %System32%

Note: You can also use any variables that are located in the registry under: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Explorer\Shell Folder

Depending upon the argument used, these folders will be dated, named after the currently logged user, named for the PC from which synchronization was launched, or based on a pre-determined variable stored out and read in from the registry.

Notes: Some of these features can be set via Command Line Arguments. Folders can be dragged and dropped from MS Windows Explorer into these fields.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 7 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

The drop-down lists will be dynamically populated with source-target folders, as they are set. UNC names can be entered manually, or can be selected from the Network Neighborhood. UNC names will appear in the form: \\COMPUTER\SHAREDDEVICE\PATH *Variable Paths are only available in the Corporate Level.

Folder Display

(See Next: File Status)

The Folder Display section displays the active file for the current source and target folders being acted upon by the current action.

Source Folder Display of the current source folder that the application is working on or will work on once started.

Target Folder Display of the current target folder that the application is working on or will work on once started.

Active File Display of the current file that the application is working on or will work on once started.

Active File Size Display of the size of the current file that the application is working on.

File Progress Indicator Display of the completion status of the current file that the application is working on.

File Status

(See Next: Automation Bar)

The File Status section displays statistics for the files acted upon during the current action.

Files Checked Display of the total number of files checked during the last run of the application.

Files Added Display of the total number of files added during the last run of the application.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 8 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

Files Updated Display of the total number of files updated during the last run of the application.

Files Excluded Display of the total number of files excluded during the last run of the application.

Message Count Display of the total number of messages during the last run of the application. If there are any messages you can click on this label to display the Message Dialog.

Folders Checked Display of the total number of folders checked during the last run of the application.

Folders Created Display of the total number of folders created during the last run of the application.

Folders Excluded Display of the total number of folders excluded during the last run of the application.

Checked Display of the total number of bytes checked during the last run of the application.

Updated Display of the total number of bytes updated during the last run of the application.

Deleted Display of the total number of bytes deleted during the last run of the application.

Elapsed Display of the Elapsed Time since the current process has started.

Current Status Displays the current status of the current process.

Automation Bar

(See Next: Global Options: Exceptions)

The Status Bar section allows you to turn On/Off the timer and displays the status and elapsed time for the current action. This section can be viewed/hidden by selecting/unselecting it under the View Main Menu item.

Use Real-time Monitoring* This will run the application in real-time monitoring the source folder for changes.

Run Every x secs** This will run the application with the selected action, exceptions and other options every x seconds.

Run at Shut Down This will run the application at Shut Down.

Stop Automation Button

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 9 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

This will stop the application when running in an automated mode.

Notes: Some of these features can be set via Command Line Arguments. *This feature is not available in the Standard and Desktop Levels. **This feature is not available in the Standard Level.

Global Options: Exceptions

(See Next: Global Options: Reporting)

The Exceptions section allows you to Include or exclude specific strings from the current action.

Include File Types (using wildcards) Use this field to determine which file types will be included as part of synchronization. File Type Inclusions are specified by a star command followed by the file extension (i.e. *.doc;*.wks, etc.). The default setting ( *.* ) includes all files. Multiple Inclusions will be semi/Colon delimited. Inclusions are not case sensitive, i.e. A = a.

Include Edit/Add Button This button will display a 'Exceptions' dialog that will allow you to add inclusions.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 10 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

To add an extension, click "New", then type the desired extension into the field located at the bottom of the dialog. Repeat this process for each desired file type. Inclusions can be deleted by selecting them from the list and clicking the "Delete" key at the bottom of the dialog box. Once you have finished, click the "OK" button. The dialog will close and all of the Inclusions you have specified will automatically appear in the Include File Types field in the proper format (separated by semi/Colons).

Exclude Files/Folders (using sub-strings) Through this field, files can be selectively excluded from synchronization. Exclusions are set by specifying individual characters (i.e. s), sets of characters (i.e. user), or file extensions (i.e. .doc) which, if found within a file name, will exclude that file from synchronization. Multiple characters and strings will be semi/Colon delimited. These settings are not case sensitive, i.e. A = a

Exclude Edit/Add Button This button will display a 'Exceptions' dialog that will allow you to add exclusions.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 11 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

To add an Exclusion click "New," then type the desired character or string into the field located at the bottom of the dialog. Repeat this process for each Exclusion. Entries can be deleted by selecting them from the list and clicking the "Delete" key at the bottom of the box. You can also use the browse button to select folders to exclude. Once you have finished, click the "OK" button. The box will close and all of the Exclusions you have specified will automatically appear in the Exclude Files field.

Notes: Some of these features can be set via Command Line Arguments. These options can be stored per SyncList file in the Workstation and Corporate Levels. Inclusions/exclusions can be typed manually, or can be specified using either the Edit/Add Buttons or drop-down lists. You can use the exclude field to exclude specific folders from synchronization by specifying a folder name in file path format, i.e. \TEMP or C:\My Documents (these examples will exclude any folder path that contains these strings including sub-folders) Files and/or Folders can be dragged and dropped from MS Windows Explorer into these fields and into the 'Exceptions' dialog box. The drop-down lists will be dynamically populated with inclusions/exclusions, as they are set.

Global Options: Reporting

(See Next: Global Options: Settings)

The Reporting section allows you to turn On/Off reporting, select, browse for and view the selected log file.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 12 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

Reporting Selecting and turning this option On/Off will enable/disable log file reporting. Once checked, select a Log File by typing the file path into the field provided, or by using the Select Log File Button. By default, the log file field will use the path in which the application has been installed: in most cases this will be 'C:\Program Files\Application Name' and will assume a default log file name such as Save-N-Sync.log.

Select Log File Button This button opens a "Select Directory" dialog box: once this box has opened, locate your chosen Log File directory, select it using the left mouse button, and click "OK."

View Log File Button When this is selected the log file will be displayed in the default text editor.

Clear Log File Button When this is selected the log file will be cleared.

Set the Maximum Log File Size to x Bytes Allows you to specify the maximum size of the log files to be created.

Set Number of Backup Files to x Allows you to specify the amount of backup log files to be created.

If you set the number of backup log files to 0 then at the time your log file reaches its maximum size it will be deleted and recreated on the next log entry. If you set the number of backup log files to a value of 1..n then when your log file reaches its maximum size it will be renamed to a file with the extension .bak plus the number backup the file is.

Example: Setting the number of backup log files to 2 will produce the following log files:

LogFileName.log (newest information)

LogFileName.bak1 .

LogFileName.bak2 (oldest information)

Misc - Use Unicode* Option to enable/disable the including of unicode files, folders and reporting during the selected Action.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 13 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

Notes: Some of these features can be set via Command Line Arguments. These options can be stored per SyncList file in the Workstation and Corporate Levels. The drop-down lists will be dynamically populated with log file names, as they are set. The log file name will be appended with the postfix '_unicode' if the 'Use Unicode' option is selected (only available under Windows NT/2K). Files can be dragged and dropped from MS Windows Explorer into these fields and into the 'Reporting' field. *This option is not available in the Standard Level or under Windows 9x/Me.

Global Options: Settings

(See Next: Global Options: Application)

The Settings section allows you to set Performance and Message options.

Performance - Application Priority This option give you the ability to set the Application Priority to Background or Foreground. Setting the Application Priority to Background will allow for other applications to have a higher Priority then Save-N- Sync. Setting the Application Priority to Foreground will allow Save-N-Sync to have the same Priority as other applications, this is the default setting.

Display Message During Operation - Enable Message Display Selecting this option will store messages in a dialog that can be accessed and displayed from the interface, view menu and from the tray icon.

Display Message During Operation - Auto Display Selecting this option will automatically display the Message Dialog when messages are added to it.

Display Message During Operation - Retain Last x Messages Allows you to specify the number of Messages to retain in the Message Dialog.

Notes:

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 14 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

Some of these features can be set via Command Line Arguments. These options can be stored per SyncList file in the Workstation and Corporate Levels.

Global Options: Application

(See Next: Command Line Arguments)

The Settings section allows you to set Auto Save and General Options settings.

Auto Save Options - Always Save Defaults on Exit Selecting this option will automatically save application defaults (height, width, position, etc. ) on exit of the application.

Auto Save Options - Always Save Recent Selecting this option will automatically save recent selections or recent Action Lists depending on the level of product you are using.

General Options - Show Tray Icon Selecting this option will display the application as a tray icon in the system tray.

General Options - Show File Progress Indicator Selecting/unselecting this option will turn the file progress Indicator on or off.

General Options - Show Warning Message Before Action Selecting this option will show the Warning Dialog before the start of an action.

General Options - Set Access Password Button Selecting this button will allow you to specify a password for accessing and terminating the software from the tray icon.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 15 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

General Options - Show Application Hints Selecting/unselecting this option will turn application hints on or off.

General Options - Load Last Selection at Start Selecting this option will load the last selection or the last recent Action List at start depending on the level of product you are using.

General Options - Scan Folders First* Selecting this option will scan the source and target folders before going into an automated state.

Notes: Some of these features can be set via Command Line Arguments. These options pertain to the overall Application and cannot be stored per SyncList file. *This feature is not available in the Standard Level.

Command Line Arguments

(See Next: Message Dialog)

The applications Command Line Mode offers users the ability to configure a truly "hands-off" installation, where operation and distribution occurs from within an easily manageable, administrative environment. This mode allows Actions to be executed from logon scripts, system batch or command (CMD) files, detailed shortcuts, and shell commands.

Note: For the command line arguments described in this topic, note that attention is paid to punctuation, to the order in which arguments are entered, and that appropriate spaces are used to separate these arguments. Follow the format outlined in the examples provided.

Application Command Line Arguments The following arguments are appended to the end of the command line followed by a space and forward slash ( i.e. /A ). A space and forward slash are also used to separate each additional argument ( i.e. /A /R).

Note: Before creating Application Command Line Arguments what you might find useful are our Shortcuts:

To create a shortcut from the interface and access the command line you want you can: Set up the job you wish to run and run it from the interface. Then go to the 'File-Shortcuts' menu item. Select 'Add to Desktop' or 'Add to Startup Folder'. Create the Shortcut by selecting the OK Button. Right click on the Shortcut and select 'Properties'.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 16 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

Go to the target field and view/copy the command line string.

------Arguments: ------

/0:file

*SyncList (file = File): This argument is used to load a Save-N-Sync Synchronization List file.

Examples:

/0:"C:\My SNS\MyBackups.sns" Full path to file

/0:MyBackups.sns Will use install directory

MyBackups.sns Will use install directory (Must be first argument)

Note: This argument is not available in the Standard and Desktop Levels ------

/1:fldr Source Folder (fldr = Folder): This argument is used to select a source folder path.

Examples:

/1:"C:\My Documents" Folder with spaces

/1:C:\MyDocs Folder without spaces

------

/2:fldr Target Folder (fldr = Folder): This argument is used to select a target folder path.

Examples:

/2:"C:\My Documents Backup" Folder with spaces

/2:C:\MyDocsBackup Folder without spaces

------

/O:n Operation Mode Action (n = 0-6): This argument is used to select the operation mode action to be used.

0: Standard synchronization - Synchronize filtered files from source to target folders

1: Bi-directional synchronization** - Synchronize filtered files from source to target and copy any newer target files back to source folders.

2: Replicate source to target - Synchronize filtered files from source to target folders and delete any files on target that do not have a matching source file

3: Replicate with exact match - Make filtered target files exactly match filtered source files including overwriting any newer files on target.

4: Delete matching target files** - Check filtered target folders for any files that match corresponding

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 17 Save-N-Sync Help Manual source files date, time and size; and delete the file off the target.

5: Delete filtered files** - Delete target files that match filtered criteria.

6: Delete empty folders** - Delete target folders that contain no files.

Examples:

/O:1 Standard synchronization

/O:3 Replicate with exact match

/O:6 Delete empty folders

Note: This argument is not available in the Standard Level ------

/F+ or /F- Include sub-folders (On/Off): This argument is used to turn On/Off the include sub-folders option.

Examples:

/F Include sub-folders On

/F+ Include sub-folders On

/F- Include sub-folders Off

------

/U+ or /U- Use Unicode (On/Off): This argument is used to turn On/Off the use unicode option.

Examples:

/U Use Unicode On

/U+ Use Unicode On

/U- Use Unicode Off

Note: This argument is not available in the Standard Level or under Windows 9x/Me ------

/L+file or /L-file Use Log File (file = file name): This argument is used to turn on and specify a log file to use.

Examples:

/L+Save-N-Sync.log Reporting On - Use 'Save-N-Sync.log' in the install directory

/L+"D:\My Logs\Save-N-Sync.log" Reporting On - Use 'D:\My Logs\Save-N-Sync.log'

/L-"D:\My Logs\Save-N-Sync.log" Reporting Off - Use 'D:\My Logs\Save-N-Sync.log' as the default

------

/I:f1;f2..fn Include (fn = filters using wild cards): This argument is used to build a list of filters to include.

Examples:

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 18 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

/I:*.doc Include *.doc files

/I:*.exe Include *.exe files

/I:*.doc;*.exe Include *.doc and *.exe files

------

/E:f1;f2..fn Exclude (fn = sub-strings): This argument is used to build up a list of sub-strings to exclude.

Examples:

/E:.tmp Exclude files that contain '.tmp'

/E:\~ Exclude folders that start with '~'

/E:.tmp;\~ Exclude files that contain '.tmp' and folders that start with '~'

------

/P:n Application Priority (n = 1 or 2): This argument is used to set the Application Priority to Background (1) or Foreground (2).

Examples:

/P1 Set the Application Priority to Background

/P2 Set the Application Priority to Foreground (Default)

------

/M+ or /M- Message Dialog: This argument is used to display or not display the Message Dialog during operation.

A+ or A- Auto Display: If this option is turned on, the message dialog will be automatically displayed when a message is added to it.

Message Count Retain Last x messages: This value specifies the amount of messages to be retained in the Message Dialog.

Examples:

/MA25 Use Message Dialog, Auto Display and Retain last 25 messages

/M-A25 Do not use Message Dialog, Auto Display and Retain last 25 messages

/M-A-25 Do not use Message Dialog, do not Auto Display and Retain last 25 messages

------

/G General Options: This argument is used to set the following General Options.

H+ or H- Show Hints: Show Application hints.

L+ or L-

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 19 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

Load Last Selection: Load the last selection upon start of the application.

M+ or M- Show Message Warning: Show a warning message before executing an action.

P+ or P- Show Progress: Show progress during application execution.

S+ or S- Scan First: Scan the source and target folders before going into an automated state.

T+ or T- Show Tray Icon: Show an icon in the system tray to access the application.

Examples:

/GHLMPST All Options On

/GH+L+M+P+S+T+ All Options On

/GH-L-M-P-S-T- All Options Off

Note: The 'Scan First' option of this argument is not available in the Standard Level ------

/A Auto Run: This argument is used to run the selected action automatically.

M Minimized: This argument is used to run the selected action automatically and minimized.

Q Quit When Done: This argument is used to run the selected action automatically and then quit when done.

/H ***Hide Application: This argument is used to run the selected action automatically and hidden and then quit when done.

Examples:

/AM Auto Run - Minimized

/AMQ Auto Run - Minimized - Quit When Done

/AH Auto Run - Hide Application

------/R Use Real-time Monitoring: This argument is used to turn on the Use Real-time Monitoring option.

Examples:

/R Use Real-time Monitoring On

/R+ Use Real-time Monitoring On

/R- Use Real-time Monitoring Off

Note: This argument is not available in the Standard and Desktop Levels

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 20 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

------

/S+s or /S-s Run Every x secs (s = seconds): This argument is used to turn on and set the interval of the timer.

Examples:

/S+30 Run Every 30 secs On

/S+60 Run Every 60 secs On

/S-60 Run Every x secs Off - Use 60 as the default

Note: This argument is not available in the Standard Level ------

/CS+ or CS- Run at Shut Down: This argument is used to turn on the Run at Shut Down option.

Examples:

/CS Run at Shut Down On

/CS+ Run at Shut Down On

/CS- Run at Shut Down Off

------

Notes: Any arguments containing spaces must be enclosed by quotes. *This argument is only available in the Workstation and Corporate products. When using this argument source and target folders, as well as, many other settings/options will be read in from the SyncList file. Also, the preceding '/0:' is not necessary if this is the first argument used. **These options are not available during real-time. ***This argument is not available during evaluation.

Message Dialog

(See Next: Product Levels)

The message dialog displays any messages that have occurred during the current operation. You can specify the Msg Count by selecting this value for the amount of messages to retain. You may also view the date and details for each message by clicking on that message. The options on how and when to display this dialog can also be selected from the Global Options - Settings screen.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 21 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

File Gives you the ability to close the Message Dialog and to terminate the Application.

Options Allows you to turn On/Off the Auto Display option, turn On/Off the Show Tray Icon Option, Clear the Message List, view/clear the Log File, and Show the Application.

Notes: Some of these features can be set via Command Line Arguments. Some of these features can be set from the Global Options - Applications screen.

Warning Dialog The Warning is displayed before starting a Run Now scan, Scheduled scan or Real-time monitoring if the 'Show Warning Before Action' option is checked.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 22 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

The 'Scan Folders First' option is available before starting Scheduled scans and Real-time monitoring mode and if checked will simulate a Run Now scan before entering one of these automated modes.

Notes: Some of these features can be set via Command Line Arguments. Some of these features can be set from the Global Options - Settings screen.

Shortcuts To create a shortcut from the interface do the following: Set up the job you wish to run and run it from the interface. Then go to the 'File-Shortcuts' Main Menu item. Select 'Add to Desktop' or 'Add to Startup Folder'. Create the Shortcut by selecting the 'OK' Button.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 23 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

Product Levels and Licensing

(See Next: License)

Save-N-Sync comes in different levels, each level contains features from the previous level with additional features.

Product Levels

Standard: - File and folder synchronization - Exceptions: file and folder inclusions - Exceptions: file and folder exclusions - Reporting of synchronization activity - Complete command line operation - Ability to create shortcuts on the desktop - Ability to create shortcuts in the startup folder

Desktop: - All Options from the Standard Level - Bi-directional synchronization option - Replicate with exact match option - Delete matching target files option - Delete filtered files option - Delete empty folders option - Ability to synchronize Unicode files and folders - Interval timer to execute actions on a repetitive basis

Workstation: - All Options from the Standard Level - All Options from the Desktop Level - Ability to configure, save and load SyncList files. - Real-time file change detection and synchronization - Allows up to three source-target folder selections

Corporate: - All Options from the Standard Level - All Options from the Desktop Level - Includes five User Licenses. - Ability to configure, save and load SyncList files. - Real-time file change detection and synchronization - Allows up to five source-target folder selections - Variable source-target folder path name to customize target selection

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 24 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

Product Licensing

All levels of Save-N-Sync can be licensed for single or multiple users and/or single or multiple remote connections.

User Licensing: A single user license, by default, comes with right to install/execute the software on one PC (Server or Workstation) and connect to one remote PC or unlimited local drives. A license must be purchased for each PC where the product will be installed, executed or launched. This also applies to Enterprise installations that run the software off a network file server.

Connection Licensing: Save-N-Sync comes with the ability to connect to one remote PC. If you need to synchronize files from the local PC to multiple remote PCs, you will need to purchase a connection license for each additional remote PC you want to connect to. A remote connection license applies to all drives/folders on a single remote PC you are connecting to.

For more information about Product Levels and Licensing please visit our web site: www.peersoftware.com

To purchase additional Remote Connection licenses, please contact us for additional information.

Note: Peer Software is quite flexible in assembling different combinations of option packages then the ones listed here for enterprise installations with customers' requirements in mind. Please contact us for such requests and for more detail of the Save-N-Sync option packages that are available.

Registration

(See Next: Main Menu)

If this is an unregistered or Evaluation Copy of Save-N-Sync, you can register it with Peer Software, Inc. as a fully licensed copy by providing credit card information via phone or secure Internet registration, or by sending a check or money order to the address below (see included "readme.txt" file for pricing information).

Register online via secure internet credit card registration at: www.peersoftware.com

Register by phone via credit card by calling: (631) 979-1770 between the hours of 9:00 AM and 4:00 PM EST

Register by mail, send check or money order to: Peer Software, Inc. 1363 Veterans Highway, Suite 26 Hauppauge, NY 11788

Product Support All support of Save-N-Sync will be handled on our website (www.peersoftware.com) support page for tis product or by sending email to our support box at [email protected].

Information Required: Full name (as it appears on the credit card) Address (City, State / Province, Country, and Postal Code) Phone Number Entire Card Number Card Expiration Date

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 25 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

Email Address

(Peer Software will send the Authorization Key required to unlock Save-N-Sync’s Evaluation. This key is to be entered during the installation of the software.)

Quantity Discounts - See Web site for more information.

Save-N-Sync may not be commercially distributed or distributed by government agencies including their contractors UNLESS registration fees are paid for by the distributing party.

See License agreement for product redistribution.

Note Regarding Updates: As new updates/changes become available, updated versions of the software will be posted on our Internet Web page "www.peersoftware.com." Check this page periodically to download the latest executables. Your Authorization Key will continue to work with updated versions unless a major release is issued, or Save-N-Sync is installed in a different folder than the previously installed/authorized version.

Entering Your User Information and Password

Evaluation copies do not require user information and passwords.

Registration copies require you to enter a Registration Key into the Register Software Screen.

Register Software Screen

To Access the above screen go to the 'Help - Register Save-N-Sync' Menu item or select the 'Enter Authorization Key' link from the Evaluation About Screen.

Terms And Conditions Read License agreement before using this program.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 26 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

Suggestions, Comments, or Requests for Support:

Peer Software, Inc. 1363 Veterans Highway, Suite 26, Hauppauge, NY 11788 Fax : 631-979-1870 Email: [email protected]

Copyright 1993-2002, Peer Software, Inc.

Save-N-Sync is a registered trademark of Peer Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Reproduction in whole or in part without permission is strictly prohibited.

License

(Go Back to: Contents)

YOU SHOULD READ CAREFULLY THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE USING OR DISTRIBUTING THIS SOFTWARE. USING OR DISTRIBUTING THIS SOFTWARE INDICATES ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS.

COPYRIGHT

This software program (hereafter the "Software") and documentation (hereafter the "Documentation") is copyrighted and remains the property of Peer Software, Inc. (Formerly known as TDM, Inc.) All rights are reserved.

LICENSE

Peer Software, Inc. hereby grants you (hereafter the "Purchaser") a limited, non-exclusive license to use the Software and accompanying Documentation contained in the trial ware distribution package (hereafter called the "Trial ware Package") you received. The Trial ware Package consists of copies of the Software and Documentation received via an electronic transfer mechanism or an electronic storage medium including, but not limited to, diskette, hard disk, removable disk, tape or optical devices such as CD-ROM or WORM.

You may use the Trial ware Package on one or more computers provided there is no chance that it will used simultaneously on more than one computer. If you need to use the Software on more than one computer simultaneously or on a network, please contact Peer Software, Inc. for information about network licenses.

You are not obtaining title to the Software or Documentation or any copyright rights. You may not sub license, lease, rent, sell, convey, translate, modify, decompile, incorporate into another product, convert to another programming language, reverse engineer or disassemble the Software or Documentation for any purpose.

NETWORK LICENSE

Multiple users on a network (e.g. a LAN) requiring access to the Software and Documentation must purchase a Network License. Two forms of Network Licenses are offered, a Site License and a

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 27 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

Concurrent User License. With a Site License, any user who accesses the Software or Documentation requires a user license, regardless of the frequency of use. Once a Site License is purchased, Software and Documentation may be copied to all users who have been licensed.

The Concurrent User License allows the licensed number of users to simultaneously access the Software and Documentation. The Purchaser agrees that he will operate metering software, which restricts the simultaneous number of users to the quantity purchased. The Software and Documentation must be installed on network servers under the control of metering software.

Both Site and Concurrent User Licenses allow installation of the Software and Documentation to any number of servers on any number of geographic sites, limited only by the quantity of licenses purchased.

TERM AND TRIAL PERIOD

You are permitted to use the Software Package for a trial period (hereafter the "Trial Period") of a limited amount of days or uses (whichever comes first) after receipt of the Trial ware Package. After such time, if you continue to use the Trial ware Package, you must register your copy with Peer Software, Inc. Failure to register after the Trial Period constitutes termination of this license. Upon registration, a password (hereafter called the "Password") will be provided to eliminate the registration reminder screen.

This license is effective until terminated. You may terminate it by destroying the Software, Documentation, and all copies thereof. This license will also terminate if you fail to comply with any of the terms or conditions herein. You agree, upon such termination, to destroy all Software, Documentation, and copies thereof.

LIMITED WARRANTY

THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. PEER SOFTWARE, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES RELATING TO THIS SOFTWARE, WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND ALL SUCH WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMED.

EXCLUSIVE REMEDY

YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND PEER SOFTWARE, INC.'S ENTIRE LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTIONS WITH THE SOFTWARE, DOCUMENTATION, AND/OR THIS LICENSE (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR INFRINGEMENT) SHALL BE, AT PEER SOFTWARE, INC.'S OPTION, THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR REFUND OF REGISTRATION FEES.

LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY

IN NO EVENT SHALL PEER SOFTWARE, INC. OR ANYONE ELSE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN THE CREATION, PRODUCTION, OR DELIVERY OF THIS SOFTWARE SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH SOFTWARE EVEN IF PEER SOFTWARE, INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR CLAIMS.

Some states do not allow the exclusion of the limit of liability for consequential or incidental damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you.

BACK-UP

You may make as many copies of the Trial ware Package as you need for back-up purposes only.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 28 Save-N-Sync Help Manual

DISTRIBUTION

You may distribute the Trial ware Package to others via an electronic transfer mechanism or electronic storage media provided that no files are deleted from the Original Distribution Trial ware Package or are modified in any way. Files may be added to the Trial ware Package expressly for the purpose of identifying the party distributing the Trial ware Package. You may also place the Trial ware Package into any archive or compressed format for ease of distribution.

You may not distribute the Password to others under any circumstances.

GENERAL

This agreement shall be governed by the laws of the state of New York and shall inure to the benefit of Peer Software, Inc. and any successors, administrators, heirs, and assigns. Any action or proceeding brought by either party against the other arising out of or related to this agreement shall be brought only in a STATE or FEDERAL COURT of competent jurisdiction located in Suffolk County, New York. The parties hereby consent to appear in person in jurisdiction of said courts.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2002 29 Chapter 1: Introduction Introduction

The Peer Software Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide demonstrates the process of installing, configuring and using Save-N-Sync. The purpose of this guide is to provide you with a basic understanding of the software, and how to get your system up and running quickly. For additional information, consult the Save-N-Sync online help.

Understanding Save-N-Sync

It is important to consider the following prerequisites when evaluating file and network management software:

Flexibility and scalability

Performance and efficiency

Integrity and reliability

Security

Ease of use for developers, runtime administration and end-users

Support of an open system

Why Save-N-Sync?

Save-N-Sync is a data management software package designed for flexible and reliable file synchronization, backup and replication.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (1 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

Synchronization The process of comparing the last write time and file size of files in a select source folder with files in the select target folder and taking a specific action. Files on the target are updated to match the files on the source.

Backup Typical backup usually involves selecting, compressing and restoring files and moving them to backup media. Peer “backs up” files to “live” media such as hard drives, networked computers and network attached storage devices (NAS). One advantage is that this allows you to recover files on a folder tree that match the original. The files can be selected immediately for restoration as opposed to waiting for the correct tape to be inserted into a tape drive. Replication Similar to synchronization, with the added benefit of removing files from the select target folder that do not have corresponding files in the source. Using replication, source and target folders more accurately reflect each other’s content.

Four versions of Save-N-Sync have been developed to meet your current and future business needs:

Save-N-Sync Standard

Save-N-Sync Desktop

Save-N-Sync Workstation

Save-N-Sync Corporate

All versions of Save-N-Sync offer an easy-to-use interface. There is no need to run scheduled operations, as it protects data throughout the day

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (2 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

and allows users to access files continuously.

There are varying levels of synchronization and other features based upon the version of the software you have purchased.

Licensing

Save-N-Sync Standard, Desktop, and Workstation are licensed for one user. Save-N-Sync Corporate is licensed for a 5-user minimum; additional user licenses can be purchased separately.

NOTE: Each Save-N-Sync product connects to additional devices. The device count is dependent upon the product. For example, Save-N-Sync Standard can connect to one laptop, workstation, server, OR one storage device (second hard drive or CD-RW). Save-N-Sync Workstation can connect to three such devices and Save-N-Sync Corporate can connect to five such devices.

Save-N-Sync Standard

Save-N-Sync Standard:

Monitors one source file or folder (including sub-folders) in one request. For example:

Source D:\MyDocuments Target P:\MyDocuments

Each Save-N-Sync product can connect to ONE additional device.

Verifies that the source file date and time are more current than the target file date and time before synchronizing.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (3 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

Transfers file attributes from the source to the target during synchronization process.

Generates log files.

Allows command line operation.

Runs on-demand, at startup and from a desktop shortcut.

Save-N-Sync Desktop

In addition to the capabilities provided by the Standard product, Save-N- Sync Desktop includes:

A scheduler for running jobs in pre-set intervals.

Multiple synchronization and replication actions.

Unicode (Macintosh) files (Windows NT only) and Asian character support.

Save-N-Sync Workstation

In addition to the capabilities provided by the Standard and Desktop products, Save-N-Sync Workstation:

Synchronizes three source folders (including sub-folders) in one request. For example:

Source Target D:\MyDocuments P:\MyDocuments D:\Graphics P:\Graphics D:\Documentaton P:\Documentaton

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (4 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

Offers real-time monitoring of all source folders. Save-N-Sync does not scan continuously, but rather is notified of changes by the operating system and continuously incorporates modifications.

Save-N-Sync Corporate

In addition to the capabilities provided by the Standard, Desktop and Workstation products, Save-N-Sync Corporate:

Synchronizes five source folders (including sub-folders) in one request. For example:

Source Target D:\MyDocuments P:\MyDocuments D:\Documentation P:\Documentation D:\Graphics P:\ Graphics D:\ Estimates P:\ Estimates D:\Invoices P:\Invoices

Permits varying target paths.

Opposed to configuring each workstation to use Save-N-Sync in an identical manner, an administrator can configure Save-N-Sync to run based upon standard system variables. For example, an administrator can set up a target folder to contain the date:

S:\usr\12-10-02\My Docs

Before You Begin

To use the Save-N-Sync family of products most effectively, verify that your system meets the necessary requirements.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (5 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

System Requirements

Requirement Description Operating System Microsoft Windows 9x/Me/NT4/2000/XP Hardware Pentium II or higher 32 MG RAM Available Space: 5 MG

Installing Save-N-Sync

To install Save-N-Sync:

1. Navigate to the folder containing the sns20.exe and double-click. The Welcome screen displays.

2. Click Next to continue. The License Agreement displays.

3. Click Next to accept. The Choose Destination dialog displays:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (6 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

4. Select the Destination Folder and click Next. Save-N-Sync copies files to the appropriate folders and the installation completes:

5. Click a checkbox to open the readme file and/or start Save-N-Sync and click Finish.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (7 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction Starting Save-N-Sync

Now that the installation is complete, you can begin to use Save-N-Sync immediately. Each version of Save-N-Sync uses the same basic GUI, which is modified to include the additional features offered for that version.

To start Save-N-Sync:

1. Select Save-N-Sync via Start…Programs from the Task Bar or from your desktop.

2. The About Save-N-Sync Edition login page displays:

3. Click OK. If you have purchased Save-N-Sync the main GUI displays and you can begin using Save-N-Sync:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (8 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

If you are evaluating Save-N-Sync the Select Evaluation Level dialog displays:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (9 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

The Evaluation dialog allows you to select the version of the product you would like to evaluate.

4. Choose the level you would like to evaluate and click OK. NOTE: All screenshots in this manual are taken using the Microsoft XP operating system. GUI appearance may change dependent upon your operating system.

Synchronizing Basics

Any synchronization operation (basic or otherwise) utilizes source folders/files and target folders/files. The source is defined as the location of the originating data, which can be your workstation or your laptop. The target is defined as the location where you are synchronizing the originating data. The possible target can be a laptop, a desktop, a server or a NAS device.

Follow these steps to perform a simple synchronization operation. For information about menus and tool bars, see the Save-N-Sync Menus and Toolbars section later in this guide.

WARNING: Use expendable data for this test.

To practice synchronizing files using Save-N-Sync Standard Edition:

1. Open Save-N-Sync.

2. Select the Standard radio button and click OK. The following dialog is displayed:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (10 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

3. Specify the Source and Target Folders on which you want to run the synchronization. For example:

Source Target C:\Source Sample C:\Target Sample Folder Folder

The Include Sub-folders checkbox is checked by default. De-select it if you want to synchronize only the top layer.

4. Click Run Now. The following displays:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (11 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

That’s all there is to it. The steps you have taken have synchronized the folders. Let’s move on to the next section for advanced Save-N- Sync features.

Advanced Synchronization

Advanced synchronization provides you with a number of options, dependent upon the version of the software you are evaluating. The options include various synchronization methods, job scheduling and multiple source and target folder synchronization.

Synchronization Run Methods

Run Method Product Version On-Demand All versions. At Startup All versions.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (12 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

From Shortcut All versions.

Scheduled Save-N-Sync Desktop, Workstation and Corporate versions. Real-Time Save-N-Sync Workstation and Corporate versions. At Shut Down All versions.

Accessing Advanced Synchronization Tools

To access advanced synchronization capabilities:

1. Open Save-N-Sync. The main GUI displays.

2. Click the Evaluation menu and the Select Evaluation Level dialog displays:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (13 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

3. Select Desktop and click OK.

The following dialog displays:

Select the Action drop down box to view multiple replication and synchronization options:

Run Every 30 secs indicates you can also run scheduled synchronization jobs.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (14 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

4. Select an action from the Action menu or the Action Bar, if enabled. The Action Items are defined as:

Action Item Description Standard Sync Desktop or laptop synchronization. Bi-directional Synchronizes files between the Sync source and target. Copies new files in the target back to the source. Replicate Source to Synchronizes files between the Target source and target, then deletes any files found in the target that do not have a match in the source. Replicate with Exact Filtered target files are Match synchronized to match filtered source files, regardless of time or date stamp. Delete Matching Target Files in filtered target folder that Files are duplicates of files in the source folder are deleted from the target. Delete Filtered Deletes target files that do not Files match the filtered criteria. Delete Empty Folders Deletes target folders that do not contain any files.

Folder Selection

5. Select the Source folder:

a. Click to browse for a folder.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (15 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

b. Click to display the contents of the selected folder.

One Source (Standard and Desktop) The following illustrates folder selection for one source:

Three Sources (Workstation) The following illustrates folder selection for three sources:

Click the Add button to add a selection, Edit button to modify an existing selection, or the Delete button to remove a selection.

Five Sources (Corporate) The following illustrates folder selection for five sources:

6. Select the Target folder. Follow the same procedure for selecting and setting the Target folders.

a. Click to browse for a folder.

b. Click to display the contents of the selected folder.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (16 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

Options

7. Click the Options icon on the Tool Bar to set your filtering, reporting, performance and application options. The options vary according to the version of Save-N-Sync:

Tab Reporting Option Product Version Exceptions Include and exclude file All versions. types. Reporting Set the name of the log All versions. file to which to generate a report. Also specify log file size and number of backup files. Includes Unicode Desktop, Workstation support. and Corporate versions. Settings Set the priority of the All versions. synchronization operation, either to run in the background or foreground. Dependent upon system needs. Enable or disable All versions. message display. Select Auto Display to All versions. receive pop up messages.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (17 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

Determine how many All versions. messages to retain.

Application Auto Save Options: All versions. Always Save Defaults on Exit: Save the dialog in the exact location when Save-N- Sync was last shut down. Always Save Recent: Save recent source and target selections. General Options: Show Tray Icon: Display the icon in the tray. Set Password: Set a password to allow or disallow access to the icon in the tray.

Show the File Progress Indicator: Displays active file name and active file size while the synchronization is in progress. Show Warning Before Action: Display a warning that a synchronization operation follows, and files may be deleted or overwritten. Show Application Hints: Display mouse

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (18 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

over help. Load Last Selection at Start: Loads the last selection at the start.

File Status The file status section of the GUI displays the status of the current or most recent action, as the following displays:

It reports on files and folders, including those checked, added, updated and excluded.

Save-N-Sync Tool Bars and Menus

Save-N-Sync uses several tool bars and menus allowing you to easily perform actions.

Tool Bar

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (19 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

Menu Description Product Version Item Save the current source Standard and Desktop and target. versions. Add a new folder selection. Workstation and Corporate versions. Open a folder selection. Workstation and Corporate versions. Save the folders you Workstation and selected. Corporate versions. Stop the execution of All versions. current operation. Run Now starts the action All versions. immediately. Show options. All versions. Options vary per version. Save-N-Sync help. All versions.

Menu

Each Save-N-Sync menu item allows you to perform specific activities:

File Menu Description Product Version Item New Create a new action list. Workstation and Corporate versions.

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (20 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

Open Open an existing Workstation and action list. Corporate versions.

Recent Displays most recently All versions. used source/target. Save Saves the current All versions. settings. Save As Allows you to save an Workstation and existing action list. Corporate versions. Shortcuts Click to add a shortcut All versions. to the desktop and/or add a shortcut to the Startup folder. Exit Exit Save-N-Sync. All versions.

View

The View menu allows you to choose which toolbars and options to display. The default displays all items. Click an item to select or de- select. Note that the Action Bar is not available for the Standard version.

Action

Menu Item Description Product Version Full List of See the Accessing Desktop, Workstation Actions Advanced and Corporate versions. Synchronization section for details. Run Now: Starts the action All versions. Standard immediately. Sync

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (21 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

Use real- Check for the action to Workstation time utilize real-time and Corporate versions. monitoring capability.

Run Every Scheduled actions. Desktop, Workstation 30 seconds and Corporate versions. Run at Check to synchronize All versions. Windows before shutdown. Shutdown

Help

Select to access the Save-N-Sync help file, as well as to obtain information about Save-N-Sync and Peer Software, Inc.

Evaluation

Select the version of the product you would like to evaluate. The Evaluation menu option does not appear in the registered product. See the Starting Save-N-Sync section for additional details.

Creating Shortcuts

To create a shortcut:

1. Select the action you want to run.

2. Select File…Shortcuts from the File menu.

3. Select Add to Desktop or Add to Startup Folder. The Add Shortcut to Desktop dialog displays:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (22 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

OR The Add Shortcut to Startup Folder dialog displays:

4. Enter the appropriate information and click OK. A dialog confirming the settings displays.

5. Right-click the Shortcut and select Properties. A window similar to the following displays:

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (23 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Chapter 1: Introduction

6. Edit the target field to include the desired command line string(s) and click OK.

Conclusion

Thank you for using Save-N-Sync. If you would like additional information about any of our products, please visit our website at www.peersoftware.com

http://www.peersoftware.com/docs/html/snsgsg.html (24 of 24) [25/04/02 11:17:09] Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide

Introduction

The Peer Software Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide demonstrates the process of installing, configuring and using Save-N-Sync. The purpose of this guide is to provide you with a basic understanding of the software, and how to get your system up and running quickly. For additional information, consult the Save-N-Sync online help.

Understanding Save-N-Sync

It is important to consider the following prerequisites when evaluating file and network management software: Flexibility and scalability Performance and efficiency Integrity and reliability Security Ease of use for developers, runtime administration and end-users Support of an open system

Why Save-N-Sync?

Save-N-Sync is a data management software package designed for flexible and reliable file synchronization, backup and replication.

Synchronization The process of comparing the last write time and file size of files in a select source folder with files in the select target folder and taking a specific action. Files on the target are updated to match the files on the source. Backup Typical backup usually involves selecting, compressing and restoring files and moving them to backup media. Peer “backs up” files to “live” media such as hard drives, networked computers and network attached storage devices (NAS). One advantage is that this allows you to recover files on a folder tree that match the original. The files can be selected immediately for restoration as opposed to waiting for the correct tape to be inserted into a tape drive. Replication Similar to synchronization, with the added benefit of removing files from the select target folder that do not have corresponding files in the source. Using replication, source and target folders more accurately reflect each other’s content.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2001 1 Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide

Four versions of Save-N-Sync have been developed to meet your current and future business needs: Save-N-Sync Standard Save-N-Sync Desktop Save-N-Sync Workstation Save-N-Sync Corporate

All versions of Save-N-Sync offer an easy-to-use interface. There is no need to run scheduled operations, as it protects data throughout the day and allows users to access files continuously.

There are varying levels of synchronization and other features based upon the version of the software you have purchased.

Licensing

Save-N-Sync Standard, Desktop, and Workstation are licensed for one user. Save-N-Sync Corporate is licensed for a 5-user minimum; additional user licenses can be purchased separately.

NOTE: Each Save-N-Sync product connects to additional devices. The device count is dependent upon the product. For example, Save-N-Sync Standard can connect to one laptop, workstation, server, OR one storage device (second hard drive or CD-RW). Save-N-Sync Workstation can connect to three such devices and Save-N-Sync Corporate can connect to five such devices.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2001 2 Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide

Save-N-Sync Standard

Save-N-Sync Standard: Monitors one source file or folder (including sub-folders) in one request. For example:

Source D:\MyDocuments Target P:\MyDocuments

Each Save-N-Sync product can connect to ONE additional device. Verifies that the source file date and time are more current than the target file date and time before synchronizing. Transfers file attributes from the source to the target during synchronization process. Generates log files. Allows command line operation. Runs on-demand, at startup and from a desktop shortcut.

Save-N-Sync Desktop

In addition to the capabilities provided by the Standard product, Save-N- Sync Desktop includes: A scheduler for running jobs in pre-set intervals. Multiple synchronization and replication actions. Unicode (Macintosh) files (Windows NT only) and Asian character support.

Save-N-Sync Workstation

In addition to the capabilities provided by the Standard and Desktop products, Save-N-Sync Workstation: Synchronizes three source folders (including sub-folders) in one request. For example:

Source Target D:\MyDocuments P:\MyDocuments D:\Graphics P:\Graphics D:\Documentaton P:\Documentaton

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2001 3 Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide

Offers real-time monitoring of all source folders. Save-N-Sync does not scan continuously, but rather is notified of changes by the operating system and continuously incorporates modifications.

Save-N-Sync Corporate

In addition to the capabilities provided by the Standard, Desktop and Workstation products, Save-N-Sync Corporate: Synchronizes five source folders (including sub-folders) in one request. For example:

Source Target D:\MyDocuments P:\MyDocuments D:\Documentation P:\Documentation D:\Graphics P:\ Graphics D:\ Estimates P:\ Estimates D:\Invoices P:\Invoices

Permits varying target paths.

Opposed to configuring each workstation to use Save-N-Sync in an identical manner, an administrator can configure Save-N-Sync to run based upon standard system variables. For example, an administrator can set up a target folder to contain the date:

S:\usr\12-10-02\My Docs

Before You Begin

To use the Save-N-Sync family of products most effectively, verify that your system meets the necessary requirements.

System Requirements

Requirement Description Operating System Microsoft Windows 9x/Me/NT4/2000/XP Hardware Pentium II or higher 32 MG RAM Available Space: 5 MG

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2001 4 Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide

Installing Save-N-Sync

To install Save-N-Sync: 1. Navigate to the folder containing the sns20.exe and double-click. The Welcome screen displays. 2. Click Next to continue. The License Agreement displays. 3. Click Next to accept. The Choose Destination dialog displays:

4. Select the Destination Folder and click Next. Save-N-Sync copies files to the appropriate folders and the installation completes:

5. Click a checkbox to open the readme file and/or start Save-N-Sync and click Finish.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2001 5 Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide

Starting Save-N-Sync

Now that the installation is complete, you can begin to use Save-N-Sync immediately. Each version of Save-N-Sync uses the same basic GUI, which is modified to include the additional features offered for that version.

To start Save-N-Sync: 1. Select Save-N-Sync via Start…Programs from the Task Bar or from your desktop. 2. The About Save-N-Sync Edition login page displays:

3. Click OK. If you have purchased Save-N-Sync the main GUI displays and you can begin using Save-N-Sync:

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2001 6 Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide

If you are evaluating Save-N-Sync the Select Evaluation Level dialog displays:

The Evaluation dialog allows you to select the version of the product you would like to evaluate. 4. Choose the level you would like to evaluate and click OK. NOTE: All screenshots in this manual are taken using the Microsoft XP operating system. GUI appearance may change dependent upon your operating system.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2001 7 Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide

Synchronizing Basics

Any synchronization operation (basic or otherwise) utilizes source folders/files and target folders/files. The source is defined as the location of the originating data, which can be your workstation or your laptop. The target is defined as the location where you are synchronizing the originating data. The possible target can be a laptop, a desktop, a server or a NAS device.

Follow these steps to perform a simple synchronization operation. For information about menus and tool bars, see the Save-N-Sync Menus and Toolbars section later in this guide.

WARNING: Use expendable data for this test.

To practice synchronizing files using Save-N-Sync Standard Edition: 1. Open Save-N-Sync. 2. Select the Standard radio button and click OK. The following dialog is displayed:

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2001 8 Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide

3. Specify the Source and Target Folders on which you want to run the synchronization. For example:

Source Target C:\Source Sample Folder C:\Target Sample Folder

The Include Sub-folders checkbox is checked by default. De-select it if you want to synchronize only the top layer. 4. Click Run Now. The following displays:

That’s all there is to it. The steps you have taken have synchronized the folders. Let’s move on to the next section for advanced Save-N- Sync features.

Advanced Synchronization

Advanced synchronization provides you with a number of options, dependent upon the version of the software you are evaluating. The options include various synchronization methods, job scheduling and multiple source and target folder synchronization.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2001 9 Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide

Synchronization Run Methods

Run Method Product Version On-Demand All versions. At Startup All versions. From Shortcut All versions. Scheduled Save-N-Sync Desktop, Workstation and Corporate versions. Real-Time Save-N-Sync Workstation and Corporate versions. At Shut Down All versions.

Accessing Advanced Synchronization Tools

To access advanced synchronization capabilities: 1. Open Save-N-Sync. The main GUI displays. 2. Click the Evaluation menu and the Select Evaluation Level dialog displays:

3. Select Desktop and click OK.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2001 10 Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide

The following dialog displays:

Select the Action drop down box to view multiple replication and synchronization options:

Run Every 30 secs indicates you can also run scheduled synchronization jobs. 4. Select an action from the Action menu or the Action Bar, if enabled. The Action Items are defined as:

Action Item Description Standard Sync Desktop or laptop synchronization. Bi-directional Sync Synchronizes files between the source and target. Copies new files in the target back to the source.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2001 11 Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide

Action Item Description Replicate Source to Target Synchronizes files between the source and target, then deletes any files found in the target that do not have a match in the source. Replicate with Exact Match Filtered target files are synchronized to match filtered source files, regardless of time or date stamp. Delete Matching Target Files Files in filtered target folder that are duplicates of files in the source folder are deleted from the target. Delete Filtered Files Deletes target files that do not match the filtered criteria. Delete Empty Folders Deletes target folders that do not contain any files.

Folder Selection 5. Select the Source folder:

a. Click to browse for a folder.

b. Click to display the contents of the selected folder.

One Source (Standard and Desktop) The following illustrates folder selection for one source:

Three Sources (Workstation) The following illustrates folder selection for three sources:

Click the Add button to add a selection, Edit button to modify an existing selection, or the Delete button to remove a selection.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2001 12 Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide

Five Sources (Corporate) The following illustrates folder selection for five sources:

6. Select the Target folder. Follow the same procedure for selecting and setting the Target folders.

a. Click to browse for a folder.

b. Click to display the contents of the selected folder.

Options 7. Click the Options icon on the Tool Bar to set your filtering, reporting, performance and application options. The options vary according to the version of Save-N-Sync:

Tab Reporting Option Product Version Exceptions Include and exclude file All versions. types. Reporting Set the name of the log file All versions. to which to generate a report. Also specify log file size and number of backup files. Includes Unicode support. Desktop, Workstation and Corporate versions. Settings Set the priority of the All versions. synchronization operation, either to run in the background or foreground. Dependent upon system needs. Enable or disable message All versions. display.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2001 13 Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide

Tab Reporting Option Product Version Select Auto Display to All versions. receive pop up messages. Determine how many All versions. messages to retain. Application Auto Save Options: All versions. Always Save Defaults on Exit: Save the dialog in the exact location when Save-N-Sync was last shut down. Always Save Recent: Save recent source and target selections. General Options: Show Tray Icon: Display the icon in the tray. Set Password: Set a password to allow or disallow access to the icon in the tray.

Show the File Progress Indicator: Displays active file name and active file size while the synchronization is in progress. Show Warning Before Action: Display a warning that a synchronization operation follows, and files may be deleted or overwritten. Show Application Hints: Display mouse over help. Load Last Selection at Start: Loads the last selection at the start.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2001 14 Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide

File Status The file status section of the GUI displays the status of the current or most recent action, as the following displays:

It reports on files and folders, including those checked, added, updated and excluded.

Save-N-Sync Tool Bars and Menus

Save-N-Sync uses several tool bars and menus allowing you to easily perform actions.

Tool Bar

Menu Item Description Product Version

Save the current source Standard and Desktop and target. versions.

Add a new folder selection. Workstation and Corporate versions.

Open a folder selection. Workstation and Corporate versions.

Save the folders you selected. Workstation and Corporate versions.

Stop the execution of All versions. current operation. Run Now starts the action All versions. immediately.

Show options. All versions. Options vary per version.

Save-N-Sync help. All versions.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2001 15 Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide

Menu

Each Save-N-Sync menu item allows you to perform specific activities:

File Menu Item Description Product Version New Create a new action list. Workstation and Corporate versions. Open Open an existing Workstation and action list. Corporate versions. Recent Displays most recently All versions. used source/target. Save Saves the current settings. All versions. Save As Allows you to save an Workstation and existing action list. Corporate versions. Shortcuts Click to add a shortcut to All versions. the desktop and/or add a shortcut to the Startup folder. Exit Exit Save-N-Sync. All versions.

View

The View menu allows you to choose which toolbars and options to display. The default displays all items. Click an item to select or de- select. Note that the Action Bar is not available for the Standard version.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2001 16 Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide

Action

Menu Item Description Product Version Full List of See the Accessing Desktop, Workstation and Actions Advanced Synchronization Corporate versions. section for details. Run Now: Starts the action All versions. Standard immediately. Sync Use real-time Check for the action to Workstation monitoring utilize real-time capability. and Corporate versions. Run Every 30 Scheduled actions. Desktop, Workstation seconds and Corporate versions. Run at Check to synchronize All versions. Windows before shutdown. Shutdown

Help

Select to access the Save-N-Sync help file, as well as to obtain information about Save-N-Sync and Peer Software, Inc.

Evaluation

Select the version of the product you would like to evaluate. The Evaluation menu option does not appear in the registered product. See the Starting Save-N-Sync section for additional details.

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2001 17 Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide

Creating Shortcuts

To create a shortcut: 1. Select the action you want to run. 2. Select File…Shortcuts from the File menu. 3. Select Add to Desktop or Add to Startup Folder. The Add Shortcut to Desktop dialog displays:

OR The Add Shortcut to Startup Folder dialog displays:

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2001 18 Save-N-Sync Getting Started Guide

4. Enter the appropriate information and click OK. A dialog confirming the settings displays. 5. Right-click the Shortcut and select Properties. A window similar to the following displays:

6. Edit the target field to include the desired command line string(s) and click OK.

Conclusion

Thank you for using Save-N-Sync. If you would like additional information about any of our products, please visit our website at www.peersoftware.com

Peer Software, Inc. Copyright 2001 19 File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

Save-N-Sync v2.0

Note: Our product line has changed: ● File-N-Sync is now Save-N-Sync Standard

● File-N-Sync Plus is now Save-N-Sync Desktop

● Save-N-Sync is now Save-N-Sync Workstation

● New - now offering Save-N-Sync Corporate

This product was designed for fast, flexible and easy backup, synchronization, replication, mirroring and restoration of important document files on all storage media across any size network.

Save-N-Sync Version 2.0 Feature Listing

● Easy to use Interface for simple creation and Save-N-Sync maintenance of tasks. Standard ● Files/Folders can be included or excluded via extensive filtering capabilities. ● File dates and times are checked and only synchronized if target files are actually older than the matching source file, reducing file transfer requirements. ● UNC file path names supported (Network folder selection dialog). ● Allows for multiple configurations and command line operation. ● Detailed file/folder synchronization activity and problem reporting with option to overwrite reports and control maximum size of reports.

● File attribute transfer from source to target during synchronization operations. ● International date format support. ● MS Windows 9x/Me/NT4/2000/XP.

Save-N-Sync Desktop

● Includes all features from Save-N-Sync Standard. ● Action selection - Bi-directional Sync ● Action selection - Replicate Source to Target ● Action selection - Replicate with Exact Match ● Action selection - Delete Matching Target Files ● Action selection - Delete Filtered Files http://www.peersoftware.com/file-n-sync.html (1 of 3) [25/04/02 11:17:34] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

● Action selection - Delete Empty Folders ● Synchronization scheduler to execute actions on a repetitive basis. ● Ability to check for Unicode files and folders.

Save-N-Sync Workstation ● Includes all features from Save-N-Sync Standard. ● Includes all features from Save-N-Sync Desktop. ● Includes 3 Remote Connection Licenses.

● Includes multiple source-target folder selection list. ● Includes source-target folder description selection. ● Allows up to 3 source-target folder selections. ● Real-time file change detection and synchronization. ● Allows for different configurations to be saved and loaded.

Save-N-Sync ● Includes all features from Save-N-Sync Standard. ● Includes all features from Save-N-Sync Desktop. Corporate ● Includes 5 User Licenses. ● Includes 5 Remote Connection Licenses.

● Includes multiple source-target folder selection list. ● Includes source-target folder description selection. ● Allows up to 5 source-target folder selections. ● Real-time file change detection and synchronization. ● Allows for different configurations to be saved and loaded. ● Variable source-target path name to customize target selection such as using the logged in users name as part of the target path: S:\Users\%USERNAME%\My Documents converts to: S:\Users\Steve\My Documents where "Steve" represents the currently logged in user.

Save-N-Sync User Interface

http://www.peersoftware.com/file-n-sync.html (2 of 3) [25/04/02 11:17:34] File Synchronization, Backup, Mirroring and Replication Solutions from Peer Software, Inc

GUI designed for maximum ease of use!

Note: Save-N-Sync products are not designed to operate on Windows Servers. Please see our PeerSync software for server synchronization.

Note: For Save-N-Sync product support questions, first refer to the on-line help supplied with the software. Peer Software only offers email technical support for this product.

Home | Product Line–Up | Buy Now | Support Resellers | Downloads | Company Info | Contact

File-N-Sync, PeerSyncTM and PeerLinkTM are registered trademarks of Peer Software, Inc. Copyright © 2001 Peer Software Inc. - All Rights Reserved.

http://www.peersoftware.com/file-n-sync.html (3 of 3) [25/04/02 11:17:34]